The URL can be used to link to this page

R-91-1693 - 1/23/19921 11o93l_ 1 SET NUMBER ' CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF ,1 1 THE 1991 WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 FOR THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS 1 1 DECEMBER, 1991 1 1 Z HOR Engineering, Inc. 1 (617)773-6464 TO City of Round Rock OAtE Feb. 10, 1992 JOBNO 9202 ATTENTIO Mr. Steven D. Miller, P.E. ablic Works Department RE 1991 West WWI? Improvements 221 East Main Street Round Rock, Texas 78664 WE ARE SENDING YOU: © ATTACHED PSENCIK CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. P.O. Box 3207 Temple, Texas '76505 u �n op Drawings ❑ Copy of Letter COPIES 1 DATE NO Field order No. 1 Executed documents THESE ARE TRANSMITTED as checked below: ❑ For Approval ❑ Approved as submitted ❑ Resubmit copies for approval ❑ For your use ❑ Approved as noted ❑ As requested ❑ Returned for corrections For review and comments REMARKS: Please date bond and contracts on the same day. SIGNED: Bruce A. Matous COPY TO Tints LJ Plans LETTER �U Ir TRANSMITTAL ❑ Change Order ❑ Specifications January 30, 1992 Mr. Don R. Schuch Psencik Construction Co., Inc. P.O. Box 3207 Temple, Texas 76505 Reference: City of Round Rock, Texas 1991 West Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements Field Order No. 1 Dear Mr. Schuch: The following revisions constitute Field Order No. 1 as we discussed on the telephone previously. These changes will not affect the Contract Price. SECTION 00500 AGREEMENT Page 00500 -1, line 33: The contract time has been changed from thirty (30) days to one - hundred twenty (120) days to agree with page 00301 -2, line 19 of the Proposal. The attached Contract Documents and Specifications have been altered to reflect this change from the "As-Advertised documents. SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK Page 02200 -2, lines 28 -38: Delete and replace with the following: "2.01 EMBANKMENT MATERIAL A. Underneath and within two feet of structures use one of the following: 1. Select cohesive material with a minimum liquid limit of 28, and a plasticity index between 10 and 20. 2. Crushed limestone meeting TDOT Item No. 248, Type A, Grade 2 or 3. 3. Clayey gravel with the clay portion having a maximum liquid limit of 40 and a plasticity index between 10 and 20, with no stones larger than 3 IN in greatest dimension. B. More than two feet away from structures use existing near - surface soil excavated during the course of construction." Page 02200 -4, lines 20 -23: Delete and replace with the following: "3. Excavate as required to provide one foot of compacted embankment material underneath and within two feet of all structures." HDR Engineering, Inc. NINETEEN SEVENTEEN fal NINETEEN NINETY TWO 75th (Anniversary Suite 400 Telephone 3000 South IH 35 512 442 -8501 Austin, Texas 78704 -6536 Page 2 Mr. Don R. Schuch January 30, 1992 SECTION 14301- HOISTS, TROLLEYS, AND MONORAILS For clarification, a new hoist is not to be provided at the existing chlorine storage structure; only a new motorized trolley is required. Attach the existing hook - mounted hoist to the new trolley, and wire the trolley into the existing power supply for the hoist. Provide new, separate controls for the trolley. SECTION 15183- PIPE INSULATION PLANS- SHEET E3 Sincerely, For clarification, the following items are to be insulated: All plant water supply piping 3 IN and larger, the hydropneumatic tank level control valve, and the piping connected to the level control valve less than 3 IN diameter. The one -line diagram shows two receptacles for "heat tracing" which are not shown on the electrical site plan. These receptacles are to be installed at the hydro -tank slab with one adjacent to the pump piping and one adjacent to the tank's water level control valve. Please acknowledge your agreement to these modifications in the space provided below and return five copies of this letter with your executed Contract Documents. Thank you for your attention to this matter. E. Duwain Whitis, Jr. P.E. ACKNOWLEDGED: piAli I. Psencik Construction Co., Inc. xc: Steven Miller 44,/ to, Hi 2- Date I ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS City of Round Rock, Texas December, 1991 HDR Engineering, Inc. 3000 South IH -35, Suite 400 Austin, Texas Faz This Addendum modifies and amends the Contract Documents for the "1991 West Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements" project of the City of Round Rock, Texas as follows: SECTION 02513: Revise page 02513 -2, line 19 as follows: Replace "8 IN compacted layer" with "10 IN compacted layer". SECTION 13442: ADDENDUM NUMBER 1 January 3, 1992 Revise page 13442 -4, line 45 through page 13442 -5, line 16 to read as follows: "A. Ultrasonic Level Sensor and Flow Computer /Recorder: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Onolog b. Or approved equal. 2. Design and Fabrication: a. Furnish level sensor, flow computer /recorder, and connecting cable. b. Ultrasonic level transducer: 1) Materials: CPVC housing with stainless steel connection and stainless steel mounting bracket. 2) Operating Temperature: - 30 DegC to +80 DegC. 3) Sensor level span: Adjustable from 0 to 3 IN to 0 to 20 FT. 4) Accuracy: + /- 0.5 percent of span. 5) Repeatability: + /- 0.25 percent of span. 6) Transducer and connecting cable shall be submersible for extended periods. c. Flow Computer /Recorder: 1) Microprocessor -based flow computer to measure, totalize, retain data in memory, and record, and transmit flowrates, complete with built -in keypad for programming. 2) Enclosure: NEMA 4X with clear polycarbonate window and stainless steel rain hood. CITY OF ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS Page 2 Addendum No. 1 January 3, 1991 SECTION 15060: Revise page 15060 -2, line 23 through 30 as follows: Add "(Service) Raw sewage, (System) 1 ". _ Revise page 15060 -12, line 30 to read as follows: "1) Plant effluent and raw sewage." SECTION 16900: Revise page 16900 -3, lines 17 and 18 to read as follows: "have a nameplate engraved 'TP -2" in one position and "TP -3" in the other position." PLANS, SHEET Cl: 3) Display: 4 -digit LED, with the following keypad - programmable functions: a) Display instantaneous flowrate. b) Display daily totalized flow (28 day record). c) Display daily average flowrate (28 day record). d) Display time and value of maximum and minimum flowrates (28 day record). 4) Totalizer: 8- digit, non - resettable. 5) Recorder: 10 IN circular chart, 7 day, single pen, indicating instantaneous flowrate. 6) Transmitter output signals: a) 4 -20 mA isolated output into 650 ohms, linearly proportional to flow. b) RS485. 7) Field programmable for flow equation, engineering units, display scaling, output scaling, and totalizer factor. 8) Power supply: 117 V AC, 60 Hz. 3. Furnish the following spare parts: a. 100 recorder charts. b. 24 replacement pens." Revise the Site Plan (upper left corner) to reroute the proposed 1 IN water line serving the chlorinator enclosure and emergency eyewash /shower as shown on CITY OF ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS FLUENT "),•\, / / 2 ASPH. CONC. PVMT. 6" ! • , / W/ 10" COMPACTED \ / \ S<,,‹ FLEX. BASE ' s , ; sTi: , LAP 'ss , A, \so INSTALL le k) f YI ‘‘, N - g - O CURB a/ / / _ i I / _:.----e GUTTER / • „5( ,--- 150 e AROUND VAULT/ a PIPING ' " •-,.- (SEEIDET. ; --'-'-'-' - T.HISISHT.)L, . '-1;?:- 0 8 PRECAST CONC. WHEEL STOPS - INSTALL WI 2 'W5 REBAR X 2' LONG AT EACH TIE TO EX.I5" PVC a REMOVE DOWNSTREAM 'SEGMENT OF EX. PIPE 90' 0" TIE TO EX. 30" RCP 81 REMOVE UPSTREAM SEGMENT OF EX. PIPE 4' GATE PROP PARSHALL FLUME (SEE SHT. C4 FIELD LOCATE SO2 STORAGE SHELTER a FEEDER ENCLOSURE (SEE SHT. C3 ) // CHLOR Or: c 'i';oi os',Rfs' • HR NOTES 1) MAINTAIN 3'0" CLEARANCE FRC OBSTRUCTION INSIDE ISLAND. 2) ALL DIMENSIONS OF PAVED AR OR TO FACE OF CURB FOR CU 3) STRIPE ALL PARKING SPACES4 SPECIFICATIONS). 4) GRADE ALL AREAS TO PROVIDE MAX_EAELTELS.LCIPEIS 3 (H:V', 6) MANHOLE FRAMES, COVERS, 1 RAISED TO GRADE P REMOVE EX. FENCE 0, NEW 6" CHAIN LINI' 3 STRAND BARB V CONNECT TO EMS" TIE_TOE-X: a REMOVE DOWNSTREAM .EGM OF EX. PIPE REMOVE EX. HYDRW:PNUEMATIC TANK (SEE SHT. ' ChiLCW STCRAnE SHELTER HDR Engineering, Inc. FIGURE A1-1 Page 3 Addendum No. 1 January 3, 1991 Attachment Al -1. END OF ADDENDUM CITY OF ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00020 NOTICE TO BIDDERS 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00301 PROPOSAL 00500 AGREEMENT PER PERFORMANCE BOND PAY PAYMENT BOND CER CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE GEN GENERAL CONDITIONS 00805 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01060 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01150 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE FOR CONNECTIONS 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SAMPLES, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS, EQUIPMENT RECORD SHEETS 01600 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 01601 JOB CONDITIONS 01640 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 02072 DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING 02200 EARTHWORK 02260 TOPSOILING AND FINISHED GRADING 02444 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES 02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING 02528 CONCRETE CURB 02529 CONCRETE SIDEWALK AND STEPS 02930 HYDRAULIC SEEDING DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03002 CONCRETE DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05313 METAL DECK 05505 METAL FABRICATIONS 05522 ALUMINUM RAILINGS TABLE OF CONTENTS ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS TOC -1 TOC -2 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09905 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11005 EQUIPMENT: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11060 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11061 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL 11092 MECHANICALLY CLEANED BAR SCREENS: RADIAL RAKE -ARM TYPE 11345 CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT 11346 SULFONATION EQUIPMENT DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13219 HYDROPNEUMATIC TANK 13442 PRIMARY ELEMENTS AND TRANSMITTERS DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14301 HOISTS, TROLLEYS, AND MONORAILS DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100 VALVES: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15101 GATE VALVES 15104 BALL VALVES 15106 CHECK VALVES 15114 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES 15183 PIPE INSULATION 15200 HOSES AND NOZZLES 15450 EMERGENCY EYE -WASH & SHOWER DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL INFORMATION 16015 SUPPORTS 16111 CONDUIT SYSTEMS 16120 WIRE AND CABLE 16130 BOXES AND FITTINGS 16140 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES 16150 COMBINATION STARTERS 16170 CIRCUIT BREAKERS ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16180 SAFETY SWITCHES 16402 ELECTRICAL SERVICE 16450 GROUNDING 16461 SELF CONTAINED UNIT POWER CENTERS 16530 SITE LIGHTING 16900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 16950 CALIBRATION AND TESTING ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS TOC -3 DIVISION 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 1 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 ' 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 ' 45 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 1 1 1 U 90H20 Sealed bids for the construction of 1991 West Wastewater Plant Improvements will be received by the City of Round Rock, Texas. Bids will be received at City Hall, 221 E. Main Street, Round Rock, Texas until 11:00 a.m. Tuesday, January 14, 1992 and shortly thereafter the bids will be opened publicly and read aloud in the City Council Chambers. Bids shall be submitted on the prescribed form (Proposal) contained in the Contract Documents and shall be addressed to the City Secretary of the City of Round Rock, Texas and shall be labeled "Sealed Bid for 1991 West Wastewater Plant Improvements." The project includes construction of dechlorination and effluent metering facilities, replacement of chlorination equipment, construction of a new headworks with mechanically cleaned bar screen(s), construction of a new in -plant water supply system with pumps and hydropneumatic tank, paving improvements, and incidental piping, site work, and electrical work. Bids shall be on a firm lump sum basis for each of the Bid Items identified in the Proposal. The Contract Documents may be examined at the following locations: City of Round Rock, Texas 210 E. Main Street Round Rock, Texas 78664 (512) 255 -3612 Copies of the Contract Documents at the address shown above. Joanne Land City Secretary City of Round Rock, Texas SECTION 00020 NOTICE TO BIDDERS HDR Engineering, Inc. 3000 South IH -35, Suite 400 Austin, Texas 78704 (512) 442 -8501 00020 -1 may be purchased from HDR Engineering, Inc. The cost of Contract Documents is $30.00 (non- refundable). Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid bond, or a certified or cashier's check payable to the order of the Owner in an amount not less than five (5) percent of the amount of the bid as a guaranty that the bidder will execute the contract if it be awarded in conformity with the bid form. The successful bidder will be required to furnish Performance and Payment Bonds. In case of ambiguity, duplication, or obscurity in the bids, the City of Round Rock reserves the right to construe the meaning thereof. The City of Round Rock further reserves the right to reject any or all bids and waive any informalities and irregularities in the bids received. END OF SECTION ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 00020 -2 01 01 02 Publish dates: 02 03 03 04 Austin American Statesman: 04 05 12/15/91 05 06 12/22/91 06 07 12/29/91 07 08 08 09 Round Rock Leader: 09 10 12/16/91 10 11 12/23/91 11 12 12 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 00100 -1 01 91C21 SECTION 00100 01 02 02 03 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Detailed information and instructions to bidders regarding the 11 12 preparation and submission of Proposals by bidders, and the 12 13 administration of bidding by the Owner. 13 14 2. Requirements which are supplemental to the general bidding 14 15 requirements contained in the General Conditions. 15 16 16 17 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 17 18 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of 18 19 the Contract. 19 20 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 20 21 21 22 1.02 PREBID CONFERENCE 22 23 23 24 A. A prebid conference is scheduled for January 6, 1992 at 10:00 a.m. 24 25 o'clock local time at the offices of the Engineer, 3000 South IH -35, 25 26 Suite 400, Austin, Texas 78704. The representatives of the Owner and 26 27 Engineer will be present to answer questions for all interested bidders, 27 28 document holders, or other interested parties. At that time any 28 29 questions that can be answered by direct reference to the Contract 29 30 Documents will be answered. Items that can not be answered by direct 30 31 reference will be addressed by subsequent addendum or addenda. All other 31 32 discussions will be for informational purposes only unless incorporated • 32 33 by addendum or addenda. 33 34 34 35 1.03 INSPECTION OF SITE 35 36 36 37 A. Bidders are required to inspect the site of the work to satisfy 37 38 themselves by personal examination or by such other means as they may 38 39 prefer, of the location of the proposed work, and of the actual 39 40 conditions of and at the site of work. Bidders may inspect the site of 40 41 the work by arrangement with the Owner. Contact Kerry Matt, (512) 41 42 255 -7055. 42 43 43 44 44 45 B. Entrance by bidders to the site of the work for purposes of making 45 46 exploratory excavations shall be by special arrangement with the Owner 46 47 and under conditions established by the Owner. Owner will provide each 47 48 Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests as each 48 49 Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all 49 50 holes, and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon 50 51 completion of such explorations. 51 52 52 53 1.04 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT 53 00100 -2 01 01 02 A. If, during the course of examinations, visits, and reviews of the site, 02 03 adjacent conditions, federal, state and local laws and regulations, the 03 04 Contract Documents, geotechnical reports and any other factors affecting 04 05 cost, progress or performance of the Work, a Bidder discovers facts or 05 06 conditions which appear to conflict with the terms or intent of the 06 07 Contract Documents, or with any other data or information made available 07 08 to the Bidder relating to the work, the Bidder shall promptly notify the 08 09 Owner in writing and request clarification before submitting a Bid. 09 10 10 11 B. Interpretations of the Contract Documents may be requested prior to bid 11 12 opening. Requests shall be directed in writing to HDR Engineering, Inc., 12 13 3000 South IH -35, Suite 400, Austin, Texas 78704 Attn: Duwain Whitis, P.E.,13 14 telephone 512/442 -8501. 14 15 15 16 Requests to clarify the source of materials, equipment, suppliers, or any 16 17 other such matter which does not modify, change, increase, or decrease 17 18 the scope of work requires no action by the Owner other than a response 18 19 to the bidder requesting the clarification. 19 20 20 21 Requests to clarify possible ambiguous, conflicting or incomplete 21 22 statements or designs, or any other such clarification which modifies, 22 23 changes, increases or decreases the scope of work, requires issuance of 23 24 an addendum by the Owner for the interpretation to become effective. 24 25 25 26 Questions received less than five (5) days prior to the date of opening 26 27 of Bids will not be answered. 27 28 28 29 1.05 BASIS OF AWARD 29 30 30 31 A. The successful Contractor shall be determined on the basis of the lowest 31 32 responsible, responsive total bid. . • 32 33 33 34 B. All bids will be received and evaluated by the Owner in good faith that 34 35 each and every Bidder has thoroughly examined all Contract Documents, 35 36 reports, data and information made available or identified as being 36 37 available and has included all costs associated with completing the 37 38 entire Work in the Bidder's Proposal. No claim for additional 38 39 compensation by the successful Bidder based upon or related to the 39 40 failure of the Bidder to carefully and thoroughly examine and understand 40 41 the Contract Documents, the site and its environs, applicable laws and 41 42 regulations, reports, data and other available information will be 42 43 compensated. 43 44 44 45 C. Discrepancies in the Proposal between words and figures will be resolved 45 46 in favor of words. Discrepancies between the indicated sum or product of 46 47 figures and the correct sum or product thereof will be resolved in favor 47 48 of the correct sum or product. 48 49 49 50 1.06 OPENING OF BIDS 50 51 51 52 A. Postponement: 52 53 1. The Owner reserves the right to postpone the date and time for 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 I I I 1 01 receiving and /or opening of bids at any time prior to the date and 01 02 time established in the NOTICE TO BIDDERS. Postponement notices 02 03 shall be mailed to bidders in the form of addenda. 03 04 04 05 B. All Bids shall remain open and subject to acceptance for thirty (30) days 05 06 following the date bids are opened. The Owner may, in its sole 06 07 discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to that 07 08 date. 08 09 09 10 1.07 BID GUARANTY 10 11 11 12 A. The bid form shall be accompanied by a bid guaranty bond provided by a 12 13 guaranty company authorized to carry on business in the State of Texas 13 14 for payment to the Owner in the sum of at least five (5) percent of the 14 15 total amount of the bid price, or, alternatively, by a certified or 15 16 cashier's check, payable to the Owner in the sum of at least five (5) 16 17 percent of the total amount of the bid price. The amount payable to the 17 18 Owner under the bid guaranty bond, or the certified or cashier's check 18 19 and the amount thereof, as the case may be, shall be forfeited to the 19 20 Owner as liquidated damages in case of a failure or neglect of the bidder 20 21 to furnish, execute, and deliver to the Owner the required performance 21 22 and payment bonds; evidences of insurance; and to enter into, execute, 22 23 and deliver to the Owner the contract on the form provided in the 23 24 Contract Documents, within ten (10) calendar days after receiving written 24 25 notice from the Owner that the award has been made and the agreement is 25 26 ready for execution. Upon execution of the Contract and furnishing of 26 27 required bonds and insurances, the bid guaranty bond will be returned. 27 28 28 29 1.08 SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 29 30 30 31 A. Request for consideration of alternate materials or equipment may be made 31 32 after award of Contract. All such requests shall be submitted by the 32 33 successful General Contractor. 33 34 34 35 B. If Contractor wishes to furnish or use a substitute item of material or 35 36 equipment, Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for 36 37 acceptance certifying that the proposed substitute will perform 37 38 adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the 38 39 general design, be similar and of equal substance to that specified and 39 40 be suited to the same use as that specified. 40 41 41 42 All variations of the proposed substitute from that specified shall be 42 43 identified. The application shall also contain an itemized estimate of 43 44 all costs that will result directly or indirectly from acceptance of such 44 45 substitute, including costs of redesign and claims of other Contractors 45 46 affected by the resulting change, all of which shall be considered by 46 47 Engineer in evaluating the proposed substitute. The Engineer may require 47 48 Contractor to furnish, at Contractor's expense, additional data about 48 49 proposed substitute. 49 50 - 50 51 C. The Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate 51 52 each proposed substitute. The Engineer will be the sole judge of 52 53 acceptability, and no substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 00100 -3 00100 -4 01 without Engineer's prior written acceptance which will be evidenced by 01 02 either a Change Order or an approved Shop Drawing. The Owner may require 02 03 the Contractor to furnish, at Contractor's expense, a special performance 03 04 guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. 04 05 05 06 1.09 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS 06 07 07 08 A. Each bidder shall list on his Proposal in the space provided the name, 08 09 address, and description of the work, of each subcontractor to whom the 09 10 bidder proposes to sublet portions of the work in excess of 20 percent of 10 11 the total amount of his bid. Failure to list subcontractors may render a 11 12 bid nonresponsive and may be grounds for rejection of the bid. 12 13 13 14 B. If a Bidder fails to specify a subcontractor for any portion of the Work 14 15 to be performed under this Contract in excess of 20 percent of the total 15 16 Bid he agrees to perform that portion himself. No subcontractor doing 16 17 work in excess of 20 percent of the total Bid and who is not listed will 17 18 be used without the written approval of the Owner. 18 19 19 20 C. Owner may consider the qualifications of subcontractors listed in the 20 21 determination of responsible bidders. 21 22 22 23 1.10 ADDENDA 23 24 24 25 A. Each Proposal shall include specific acknowledgment, in the space 25 26 provided, of receipt of all addenda issued and mailed by the Owner during 26 27 the bidding period. Failure to so acknowledge may result in the bid 27 28 being rejected as not responsive. 28 29 29 30 1 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 30 31 31 32 A. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Notice to 32 33 Bidders and shall be included in an opaque sealed envelope addressed to 33 34 the City of Round Rock, Texas and identified on the outside with the 34 35 Bidder's name, and address with the words "Bid for 1991 West Wastewater 35 36 Plant Improvements." 36 37 37 38 B. Each Bid shall be accompanied by the Bid Security and other required 38 39 documents. 39 40 40 41 C. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a 41 42 separate mailing envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face 42 43 thereof. 43 44 44 45 D. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and 45 46 date for receipt of Bids indicated in the Notice to Bidders or the 46 47 modified time and date indicated by Addendum. Bids received after the 47 48 time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. Bidder 48 49 shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location 49 50 designated for receipt of Bids. 50 51 51 52 1.12 AWARD OF CONTRACT 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I 1 I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 01 A. Within 60 calendar days after the date of opening bids, the Owner will 01 02 act either to accept a bid or to reject all bids. Acceptance of a bid 02 03 will be evidenced by a notice of award of contract in writing, delivered 03 04 in person, or by certified mail, to the bidder whose bid is accepted. No 04 05 other act of the Owner shall constitute acceptance of a bid. The award of 05 06 contract shall obligate the bidder, whose bid is accepted, to furnish 06 07 performance and payment bonds and evidences of insurance, and to execute 07 08 the agreement set forth in the Contract Documents. 08 09 09 10 1.13 NOTICE TO PROCEED AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK 10 11 11 12 A. Written Notice to Proceed will be rendered by the Owner within 30 12 13 calendar days of Award. 13 14 14 15 B. Commencement of Work under the Contract shall begin within 30 calendar 15 16 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed. 16 17 17 18 1.14 SOIL INFORMATION 18 19 19 20 A. No soils and /or geotechnical borings, investigations and report have been 20 21 made for this Project. 21 22 22 23 B. Before submitting a Bid, each - Bidder will, at Bidder's own expense, make 23 24 or obtain examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies 24 25 and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the 25 26 physical conditions, surface or subsurface, at or contiguous to the site 26 27 or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing 27 28 of the Work and which Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid for 28 29 performing and furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and 29 30 other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 30 31 31 32 1.15 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT 32 33 33 34 A. Payments: Payments to the Contractor shall be made on the basis of 34 35 monthly estimates in amounts equal to ninety (90) percent of the value of 35 36 the work completed and approved by the Engineer including materials and 36 37 equipment delivered to the job until the Project is fifty (50) percent 37 38 complete. When work is fifty (50) percent complete, including materials 38 39 and equipment delivered to the job, the retainage MAY be reduced to five 39 40 (5) percent of all the work satisfactorily completed to date PROVIDED 40 41 that the Contractor is making satisfactory progress and there is no 41 42 specific cause for greater withholding. 42 43 43 44 Where partial payments are made, the amount retained will be paid upon 44 45 acceptance of the work by the Owner. 45 46 46 47 Except as otherwise provided by law in the state in which the Project is 47 48 located, payments to the Contractor must conform to 40 CFR, 33.1005 (a). 48 49 49 50 When the work has been determined by Owner and Engineer to have been 50 51 satisfactorily completed with startup and demonstration period, the 51 52 withheld amount may be further reduced below five (5) percent to only 52 53 that amount necessary to ensure completion. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 00100 -5 00100 -6 01 01 02 B. Stored Materials and Equipment: The value of stored materials and 02 03 equipment shall be determined on the basis of supplier or manufacturer 03 04 invoiced value of materials and equipment delivered and properly stored 04 05 on site and not exceeding ninety (90) percent of the installed value of 05 06 the item in the approved schedule of values. 06 07 07 08 END OF SECTION 08 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 I 01 90H30 SECTION 00301 02 PROPOSAL 03 ' 04 To: City of Round Rock, Texas 05 221 E. Main Street 06 Round Rock, Texas 78664 ' 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 ' 14 15 16 ' 17 18 19 20 II 21 22 1. BASE BID FOR CONSTRUCTIO OF TE PROJECT: 23 ' 24 25 26 27 ' 28 29 30 ' 31 32 33 The Undersigned having carefully examined the Drawings, Specifications, and Contract Documents, and having carefully examined the site, and having become familiar with local conditions affecting cost of the work, and all other factors and conditions affecting or which may be affected by specified work, does hereby propose to furnish labor, superintendence, tools, equipment, materials and utilities and transportation services, among other things necessary to perform and complete in a workmanlike manner the work described in the Drawings, Specifications, and Contract Documents in connection with construction of 1991 West Wastewater Plant Improvements said Drawings, Specifications, and Contract Documents prepared by HDR Engineering, Inc., including Addenda Nos. 1 , , , and , which references are made a part of this Proposal, and for the Bid Price or Prices herein set forth as follows: cleaned bar price of and SUM OF ITEMS 1 - 3: Lump Sum Price of ), i and Aid (wor�s) Cen ' (S 2. ADDITIVE BID FOR TRENCH S ETY PROTECTION: Unit price of /rte./ (words) Dollars and (words) Cents. (S (Figures)) per linear foot of pi4line or conduit trench in excess of five feet deep. Total Estimated price for 170 LF: $ 4 Q/6 (Figures). ' 34 35 3. ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1: 36 37 ' 38 39 40 ' 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 ' 48 49 50 t 51 52 53 *This total must agree with the sum of items 1 -3 above. To delete the manually cleaned bar screen and install a second mechanically r en ompleAg with con (words) Cents. STATEMENT OF MATERIALS AND OTHER CHARGES: MATERIALS INCORPORATIONED INTO THE PROJECT: ALL OTHER CHARGES: *TOTAL ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS Words) Dollars '> (Figures)). is and accessories, add the lump sum 49' (words) Dollars (Figures)) AD $ $ 5:9,494o0, op $ ,S0 AD $ 3 Ps a� 00301 -1 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 00301 -2 01 01 02 For purposes of complying with the Texas Tax Code, the Bidder agrees that 02 03 the charges for any material incorporated into the project in excess of the 03 04 quantity provided for herein will be no less than the invoice price for such 04 05 material to the Contractor. 05 06 06 07 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS 07 08 08 09 The Undersigned also agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish bonds as 09 10 required by the Specifications and Contract Documents for the faithful 10 11 performance of the work and guarantee the workmanship and material under the 11 12 Contract for the period set forth. The Undersigned agrees to furnish the 12 13 required bond(s), to sign Contract and to furnish other required contract 13 14 forms within ten (10) days from the date of acceptance of this Proposal. 14 15 15 16 TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 16 17 17 18 As time is an essential element of the Contract,tall works shall be completed 18 19 within a period of 1'20.` consecutive calendar days after the date of Notice to 19 20 Proceed. For each'calendar day that any work shall remain uncompleted„a ter 20 21 the end of the said period, the amount of five hundred dollars] ($5jgO OO) per 21 22 calendar day will be assessed, not as a penalty, but as predetermined and 22 23 agreed liquidated damages to be used, in part, to pay any additional 23 24 engineering expenses or fines incurred by the City of Round Rock after the 24 25 end of the said period. P5 26 26 27 BID SECURITY P7 28 28 29 Accompanying the Proposal shall be a certified check, cashier's check, or 29 30 draft for not less than five (5) percent of the amount of the Bid. Such 30 31 check shall be certified or issued by a State or National Bank and made 31 32 payable to the City of Round Rock. In lieu thereof, a Bid Bond shall 32 33 'accompany the Proposal for not less than five (5) percent of the amount of 33 34 the Bid, issued by a surety authorized to do business in the State of Texas, 34 35 and made payable to the City of Round Rock. 35 36 36 37 In accordance with the above, accompanying this Proposal is a•eerti - Fred 37 38 check, eas.h4er's cheek, draft or Bid Bond for a sum of Fwe 9 Ge1-LT Erno1it aro38 39 ($ 5 DMr.Br9 ) dollars, which shall become the property of the City of 39 40 Round Rock in case this Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Round Rock, 40 41 and the Undersigned fails to execute a Contract with said City of Round Rock 41 42 and to furnish bond or bonds to validate said Contract within ten (10) days 42 43 of written notice by the City of Round Rock to the Undersigned to do so. 43 44 44 45 Respectfully submitted, 45 46 46 47 i e.a1.1STCL•l1GTl0..1 Zo kie-- 47 48 48 ' 49 r : By 1�nM- c6- �. 1V�t,1a.�s Fr-E IQ61.1 49 50 (SEAL) (Name) (Title) 50 52 Attest 12,,,,„, , i Sec il S. 52 53 (Name) (Title) 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 „I 1I 1 1 1 I v ' I 00301 -3 01 01 02 Address � ,fl OlC 3Z0� 03 03 -ffrnrLe ,� Qs 11,5 o5 04 05 02 04 05 � 06 If awarded the Contract, our surety will be �I Ptr1 -i'r` ANP p ?o',rr 06 k 07 08 of I,/IAZl.DniV 09 09 10 We anticipate that the following subcontractors will be employed for portions of 10 11 the work exceeding twenty (20) percent of the total bid price. This list is 11 12 subject to revision if we are awarded a contract, but only upon our written 13 13 notification to the City of Round Rock. 14 IIII Est. Value of Completed Work 15 15 Subcontractor Names 16 16 3 16 I 17 Norla 18 18 19 5 19 20 20 5 21 21 22 22 3 23 23 I 24 25 25 END OF SECTION 24 I I I ql I 1 1 1 I ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS I 1 1 I 1 1 I 01 SECTION 00500 01 02 AGREEMENT 02 03 03 04 04 05 THE STATE OF TEXAS 05 06 06 07 COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON r 07 08 09 THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this a 7 day of P58. A.D. 199 , by 09 10 and between the CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS acting through its Mayor, Party. of 10 11 the First Part, hereinafter termed the OWNER, and Psencik Const. Co.Inc of the 11 12 City of Temple , County of Bell , State of - 12 13` Texas , Party of the Second Part, hereinafter termed Contractor. 13 14 14 15 WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements 15 16 hereinafter mentioned, to be'made,and- performed by said First Party (Owner), the 16 17 said Second Party (Contractor); hereby agrees with the first Party to commence 17 18 and complete the construction of certain improvements at the prices set forth 18 19 the Contractor's Proposal dt'bd opened January 14, 1992 for certain 19 20 improvements described as follows: 20 21 .-.. 21 22 1991 WEST WASTEWATER PLANT IMPROVEMENTS 22 23 ALL BIG ITE • EKLEPT ITEM AO. 3(At 41:}:ve AI {evns4e NIS f I Ape Iµu.upec, 1,4 •The wort[ 23 24 The Contractor shall perform all work shown on the Plans and described in the 24 25 Contract and shall meet all requirements of this Agreement, the General and 25 26 Special Conditions of the Contract; and such Orders and Agreements for Extra : 26 27 Work as may subsequently be entered by the above named parties to this" " " 27 28 Agreement. 28 P9 one - hundred twenty (120) 29 30 The Contractor hereby agrees o commence work under this contract within 10 30 31 consecutive calendar days of er that date of this Notice to Proceed and shall 31 32 cause work to progress in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. Such work shall 32 33 be completed in full with X MX-XJy%)M calendar days after the date of the 33 34 written Notice to Proceed. Time is of the essence to this contract. 34 35 35 36 The Owner agrees to pay the Contractor in current funds, and to make payments on 36 37 account, for the performance of the work in accordance with the Contract, at the 37 38 prices set forth in the Contractor's Proposal, subject to additions and 38 39 deductions, all as provided in the General Conditions and Supplemental General 39 40 Conditions of the Agreement. 40 41 41 42 The following documents together with this Agreement, comprise the Contract, and 42 43 they are fully a part thereof as if herein repeated in full: 43 44 44 45 The Notice to Bidders 45 46 The Instruction to Bidders 46 47 The Proposal 47 48 The Performance & Payment Bond 48 49 The General Conditions of Agreement 49 50 The Supplementary General Conditions of Agreement 50 51 The Technical Specifications (Divisions 1 through 16) 51 52 Addenda 52 53 Change Orders and Field Orders 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 00500 -1 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 00500 -2 The Certificate of Insurance The Plans IN WITNESS WHEREOF multiple originals By : M2i ti r� P, cal �15Xi�1 ci Secretary, if Contractor is a Corporation or otherwise registered with the Secretary of the State. the Parties to these presents have executed in the year and day first above written. By: Party of the First Part (Owner) Mayor - City of Round Rock ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01 02 03 this Agreement in 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 "''24 ByIV1' Party of the Second Part (Contractor) Psencik Construction Co., Inc. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I .1 1 I FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY Companies HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE, MD. 21203 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160A OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 71ST LEGISLATURE, 1989 (Penalty of this bond must be 100% of Contract amount) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: PSENCIK CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. P.O. Box 3207, Temple, TX 76505 (IIere insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY (Here insert the name of the Surety) a 'corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Maryland, with its principal office in the City of Baltimore, (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto _C ITY_ DE- St41U3D _B.QCIL,_1IQSI1112.ROCK,_TEEAS (Here insert the name of the Obligee) That, The (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of - -Three hundred forty thousand eight hundred fifty dollard and (Here insert an amount equal to the total contract price) _ no/ 100 Dollars ($ -340,850.00 ) for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHERE / AS ' , 1 y t �e Principal has entered into a certain rit �n��c^o^nn�ttr�aa�ctt with the Obligee, dated the (] ^ A day of _� U 19 7d ! to construct 1991 West Wastewater Plant Improvements. which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160A of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provi- sions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at. length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Pri ip 1 and Surety have signed and sealed this instrtiment this cZ l-�' bh i day of - �a 19 9g-+ WITNESS: (IF INDIVIDUAL OR FIRM) ATTEST: (IF CORPORATION) Cfet'1L1' 5 ,44 (SEAL) (SEAL) By X COLO AL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND ❑ FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY ❑ FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY (SEAL) \a (SEAL) . PrfncipaA SURETY COMPANY OF MARYLAND I51 n -Fact. Fidelity and Deposit Company OF MARYLAND Fidelity and Deposit Company HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE PERFORMANCE BOND S. 0 z PLEASE READ YOUR BOND The FAD Companies How: OtFIcI•b BAIL IwMOlth. MD 212110 POWER OF AT'T'ORNEY IX' Noe, AI I. My.\ Ba 'l'IIFSE PRESENTS That the FIDLLITY Ahu DF.Pnsrr COMP %NYOP M %IRYLAND, and the FIDELITY AND DF Pllsrr Ca INI P t\1, corporations of the State of Maryland, by C. M. PECOT, JR. , Vice- President, and C. W. ROBBINS . Assistant Secretary. in pursuance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 2 of the respectiv By-Laws of said Companies. which are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof. do hereby nominate. constitute and appoint Glenn Richards, David Nix and Emily A. Mikeska, all of Temple, Texas, EACH th e true and lawful agent and Attorney -in -Fact of each. to make, exr te. seal and er, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds and undo . ngs, in a penalty not to exceed the sum of FIVE MILLION DOLLARS ($5 ,`x,000), ce. J And the evecutton of such bonds or undertakings in purses 'C pre i hall be as binding upon said Companies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they n duly e and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the respective Companies at their offices in i .fib i ore, Md.t eir own proper persons. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice- Preside ,f mod' Assistan aries have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said FIDELITY AND ` IT COMM F MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY this - - - - -- 13th ...... _....... - ---day ` -- _EleSSlnbe -- = A.D 19,94- 168 -4035 ATTEST STATE OF MARYLAND SS: CITY OF BALTIMORE first abate written. FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY IDELI c ()1 < - - - - -- .assistant () : Assistant Secretary D DEPOSIT COMPANY OPI MARY LA.ND FIDELITY AND DEP By esident T CO. If ANY Vice- 'resident On this 13th day of December , A.D. 1990 , before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland. in and for the City of Baltimore. dub commissioned and qualified, came the above -named Vice - Presidents and Assistant Secretaries of the FIDELI- TY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described herein and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Companies aforesaid. and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and rib their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Sea t rho Sty of altimore the day and year N eq' ubhc CAROL J. FADER . flS 1 My commission expiresg11 SG_ - J..,_.19S.z__ __ ....- .... CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY do hereby certdy that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing is a full. true and correct copy. is in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice - Presidents who executed the said Power of Attorney were Vice- Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI. Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARY LAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY. This certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of resolutions of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the Rah day of July. 1969 and of the Board of Directors .d the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 2nd day of November. 1978. RESOLVED: "'that the facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Assistant Secretary of the Company. whether made heretofore or hereafter, whenever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Cempa_ny. shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF. I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixe d� he rporate seals of the s id Companies, this day of — 19 - -_92 ' rtec..r_py� Assistant Secretary 2 EXTRACT FROM BY -LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice - President, or any of the Senior Vice - Presidents or Vice - Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Commmittee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice - Presidents, Assistant Vice - Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,...and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." EXTRACT FROM BY -LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice- President, or any of the Senior Vice - Presidents or Vice - Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice - Presidents, Assistant Vice - Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertakings, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,...and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." L1419bITX1 —Cd. 5- ik COMPLAINT NOTICE: Should any dispute arise about your premium or about a claim that you have filed, contact the agent or write to the company that issued the bond or policy. If the problem is not resolved, you may also write the State Board of Insurance, Department C, 1110 San Jacinto, Austin, Texas 78786. This notice of complaint procedure is for information only and does not become a part or condition of this bond or policy. In the event the insurer is unable to fulfill ` its contractual obligation under this policy or contract or application or certificate or evidence of coverage, the policyholder or certificateholder is not protected by an insurance guaranty fund or 'other solvency protection,.arrangement. ' "This bond shall be construed to incorporate the provisions of Senate Bill 1321 enacted by the . 71st Legislature of the *State Texas, Texas Regular Session, 1989. ". 1 'I 1 I 1 1 1 OWNER (Name and Address): THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AIA Document A312 Performance Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. ' CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Principal Place of•Business): CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Amount: Description (Name and Location): Lake Weatherford Collection System and Interceptors BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount: Modifications to this Bond: ❑ None CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: Signature: Name and Title: ' (Any additional signatures appear on page 3) Signature - Name and Title: (FOR ATI INFORMON ONLY —Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT INFORMATION B ATI R: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other party): Au DOCUMENT A312 • PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • DECEMBER 198.1 ED. • AIA THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N.W.. WASHINGTON. O.C. 20004 1111110 PRINTING - MARCH 1957 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is sublect to legal prosecution. ❑ See Page 3 (Corporate Seal) A312 -1984 1 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Subparagraph 3.1. 3 If there is no Owner Default, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Paragraph 10 below that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construc- tion Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reason- able time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and 3.2 The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor's right to complete the contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be de- clared earlier than twenty days after the Contractor and the Surety have received notice as provided in Sub- paragraph 3.1; and 3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accor- dance with the terms of the contract with the Owner. 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Para- graph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's ex- pense take one of the following actions: 4.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; or - 4.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construc- tion Contract itself, through its agents or through inde- pendent contractors; or 4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Con- struction Contract, arrange for a contract to be pre- pared for execution by the Owner and the contractor selected with the Owner's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 6 in ex- cess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's default; or 4.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: .1 After investigation, determine the amount for AIA DOCUMENT A312 • PCRrORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • OECEMRER 191W ED. • AIA R THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE Or ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N.w.. WASHINGTON. 0 C. 2004 THIRD PRINTING • MARCII 19R7 which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is deter- mined, tender payment therefor to the Owner; or , J • .2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reasons therefor. 5 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surely demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Subparagraph 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. 6 After the Owner has terminated the Contractor's right to complete the Construction Contract. and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract, the Sure- ty is obligated without duplication for: 6.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correc- tion of defective work and completion of the Construc- tion Contract; 6.2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default, and re- sulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 4; and 6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual dam- ages caused by delayed performance or non- perfor- mance of the Contractor. 7 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Con- struction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators or successors. 8 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, includ- ing changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obliga- tions. 9 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after Contractor Default or within two years after the Conti ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever oc- curs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation avail- A312-1984 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 able to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 10 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the sig- nature page. 11 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions con- forming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 12 DEFINITIONS 12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Con- MOOIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: Signature: Name and Title: . Address: tractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, re- duced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Con- tract. 12.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the sig- nature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 12.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to per- form or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract. 12.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Con- tractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) (Corporate Seal) Signature Name and Title: Address: AIA DOCUMENT A312 • PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • DECEMBER 1981 ED. • AIA?' THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N W.. WASHINGTON. D C. 20006 TIIIRD PRINTING • MARC11 1907 .. . _,....... ....... 119 mrwrinhl Iaws and is snhiecl 10Irn01 pm :or:Winn A312 -1984 3 FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE, MD. 21203 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160A OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 71ST LEGISLATURE, 1989 (Penalty of this bond must be 100% of Contract amount) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That, The and COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY (Here insert the name of the Surety) a corporation organized and existing under the lawn of the State of Maryland, with its principal office in the City of Baltimore, (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CTTY_OE ROUND ROCK,_RDUNn ROCK, TEXAS (Ilere insert the name of the Obligee( (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of -- -Three hundred fo v thous.BIy51_eig$.[itundred. fi f v do11 ars (Here insert an amount equal to the total contract price) _anti no./ 100 Dollars ($ - - -3A 0 R SO 00 ), for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain A writk n contract with the Obligee, dated the A 1 1t/ day of . 7".Qil. U 19 9 to construct 1991 West Wastewater Plant Improvements. which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160A of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, and all liabilities on this bond to all such claimants shall be determined in accor- dance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WINE SS WHEREOF, the said Pru ip and Surety have signed and, this instrument this L71Lt'rin`�, day of 19`a WITNESS: Companies PSENCIK CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. P.O. Box 3207, Temple, TX 76505 (IF INDIVIDUAL OR FIRM) ATTEST: • Q \ XNNCr GSlc (IF CORPORATION( (Here insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) • (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, (SEAL) (SEAL) .NCIK CON RUCT e CO. NC. (SEAL) (SEAL) Principal/ Principal: X COLONI AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURE.tY COMPANY ❑ FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND ❑ FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY 1� By _tS�nsi Glenn Richards, Attorney -in -Fact ' Fidelity and Deposit Company OF MARYLAND Fidelity and Deposit Company HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE 69 0 z PLEASE READ YOUR BOND PAYMENT BOND 0 The Companies POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW AL L MFN BY THESE PRESENTS That the FIDI I.ITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL A MERICAN CASUAITY \ND SL REIN COMPANY. corporations of the State of Maryland, by C. M. PECOT, JR. , Vice - President. and C. W. ROBBINS , Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By - Laws of sad Companies. which are set forth on the side he f and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof. do hereby nominate. constitute an 01 Gle am .`• chards, David Nix and Emily A. Mikeska, all of Temple, Texas, the true and lawful agent and Attorney - In - Fact of each, as its act and deed: any and all bonds and the sum of FIVE MILLION DOLLARS ($ Independent Executors, Community And thc execution of such bonds or undertakings in and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if the the respective Companies at their offices in B revokes that issued on beh IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vi the Corporate Seals of the said FIDELI SURETY COMPANY this ATTEST: 1 SEALI9 e STATE OF MARYLAND 1 CITY OF BALTIMORE y SS, 168 -4035 FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY HOME OFFICES BALTIMORE, MD. 21203 B �iG�LM v ce- President Assistant Secretary COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND $IR2ETY 1 0 MPANY -_I L_. - -5�'!� By Assistant Secretary day of 19 to ;T %y xecute, s deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and ach in a penalty not to exceed EPT bonds on behalf of Community Guardians ents, shall be as binding upon said Companies, as fully uted and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of own proper persons. This power of attorney chards, etal, dated December 13, 1990. Al6 Secretaries have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed OMPANY OF MARYLAND and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALI Y AND day of January A.D 1992 LITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY On this I s t day of January , A.D. 1992, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, in and for the City of Baltimore, duly commissioned and qualified, came the above -named Vice - Presidents and Assistant Secretaries of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers descnbed herein and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they arc the said officers of the Companies aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I hale hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official �f B ype ust above written tary Public CAROL J. FADER A u&us t...I. My commission expires CERTIFICATE 1, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of thc FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY do hereby certify that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing is a full, Inc and correct copy, is in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice- Presidents who executed the said Power of Attorney were Vice Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -m -Fact as provided in Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY. This certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of resolutions of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 16th day of July, 1969 and of the Board of Directors of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of December, 1991. RESOLVED' "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter. whenever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Com- pany with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." - IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this w. v Assistant Secretary EXTRACT FROM BY -LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice- President, or any of the Senior Vice - Presidents or Vice - Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Commmittee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice - Presidents, Assistant Vice- Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,...and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." EXTRACT FROM BY -LAWS OF COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice - President, or any of the Senior Vice.. Presidents or Vice - Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice - Presidents, Assistant Vice - Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertakings, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,...and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." L1419c(TX )—Cif OWNER (Name and Address): CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Amount: Description (Name and Location): AMA Document A312 Payment Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): Lake Weatherford Collection System and Interceptors BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount: Modifications to this Bond: ❑ None ❑ See Page 6 SURETY (Corporate Seal) Company: Signature: Signature- Name and Title: Name and Title: (Any additional signatures appear on page 6) (FOR INFORMATION ONLY — Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or'8ROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other party): AM DOCUMENT A312 • PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT 80N0 • DECEMBER 1984 ED. • AIA THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N W., WASHINGTON. O.C. 20006 111100 PRINTING • MARCH 1•07 ...... . . . n r ic anur:1 to tonal prosccutIon (Corporate Seal) A312 -1984 4 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the perfor- mance of the Construction Contract, which is incorpo- rated herein by reference. 2 With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor: 2.1 Promptly makes payment. directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and 2.2 Defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity whose claim, demand, lien or suit is for the payment for labor, materials or equipment fur- nished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, provided the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) of any claims. demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety, and provided there is no Owner Default. 3 With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor promptly makes pay- ment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due. 4 The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until: 4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have given notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner. stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim. 4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor: .1 Have furnished written notice to the Con- tractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed; and .2 Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the Contractor, or not received within 30 days of furnishing the above no- tice any communication from the Contractor by which the Contractor has indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and .3 Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the Contractor. 5 If a notice required by Paragraph 4 is given by the Owner to the Contractor or to the Surety, that is suffi- cient compliance AIA DOCUMENT A312 • PERFORMANCE BONO AND PAYMENT BOND - DECEMBER 1985 W.. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS- 1735 NEW YORK AVE . N W , WASHINGTON OC 20006 TIIIRO PRINTING • MARCH 1987 6 When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions - 6.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within 45 days after receipt of the claim. stating the amounts that are undisputed anC the ba >Is for challenging any amounts that are'd}sput4d. 6.2 Pay or arrange for payment of ahy undisputed amounts. 7 The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety 8 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the perfor- mance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Construction Performance Bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and the Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner's prior- ity to use the funds for the completion of the work. 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner. Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelat- ed to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claim- ant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obli- gations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 11 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent juris- diction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Subparagraph 4.1 or Clause 42.3, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last mate- rials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Con- struction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 12 Notice to the Surety. the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety. the Owner or the Contractor, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page. 13 When this Bond has been furnished to complvwith a statutory or other legal requirement in the 16catioh where the construction was to be performed, arty provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions con- forming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this A312 -1984 5 Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 14 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. 15 DEFINITIONS 15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equip- ment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to Include without limita- tion in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: Signature: Name and Title: Address: Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractors subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's hen may be asserted in the lurisdiclion where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished. 15.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor Identified on the sig- nature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 15.3 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Con- tractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or cornply with the other terms thereof. (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: Signature: Name and Title: Address: AIA DOCUMENT 4312. PERFORMANCE 6050 AND PAYMENT BOND - DECEMBER 1951 ED. - AIA .11 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1715 NEW YORK AVE.. N W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 21001, THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1957 ....... ......... ........, rnnv,,nnl lnwr.. and is nubiecl In legal prosecution. (Corporate Seal) A312 -1984 G AIDIIIU ISSUE L CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE es 00468 ISE DATE ........ M /ODN Y� ,.. n 02/05/92 UCER RICHARDS INS. AGENCY P:" 0. BOX 3633 TEMPLE TX 76505 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPANY A WESTERN ALLIANCE LETTER COMPANY B NORTHBROOK INDEMNITY CO LETTER INSURED PSENCIK CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC. P.O. SOX 3207 TEMPLE, TX 76505 °MPANT c PROVIDENCE LLOYDS LETTER cOMPANT D NORTHBROOK NATL INS CO LEIIEH COMPANY E HIGHLANDS INSURANCE CO LETTER CO YERAGES THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POUCY PERIOD INDICATED NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS EXCLUSIONS MAY OF SUCH POLIOIE9 LIMITS INSURANCE AFFORD HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CL4IMS BY IS PAID TO ALL THE TERMS, a TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE (MM/DDNY) POUCY EXPIRATION DATE (MWDD/YY) LIMITS 2 GENERALUABIUTY X MMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY WMS MADE FM OCCUR OWNERS & CONTRACTOR'S PROT. TCX314818 08/01/91 08/01/92 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 PRODUCTS— COMP/OPAGG S 2,000, OOC PERSONAL &ADV. INJURY $ 1,000,00C EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,00C $ 50, OOC FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) MED.EXP. (Any one person) S 5.000 S 1,000,000 J AUTOMOBILEUABIUTY X X X X X ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON —OWNED AUTOS GARAGE LIABILITY CA0149006 08/01/91 08/01/92 COMBINED SINGLE UMIT BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) S PROPERTY DAMAGE S A 19(CESSLIABILITY Hq!IMBREIBLA OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM CU486899 08/01/91 08/01/92 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1.000.000 AGGREGATE $ 1,900,000 F ' WORKER'S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' UaB1UTY TWC211919 07/14/91 07/14/92 I STATUTORY LIMITS $ 500,000 EACH CH ACCIDENT DISEASE —POLICY UMIT $ 500,000 DISEASE —EACH EMPLOYEE S 500.000 B oTMECONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT ALL —RISK POLICY 0148965 08/01/91 08/01/92 PER POLICY LEASE OR RENT SUBJ TO PER ITEM $185,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERADONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLE$ /SPECIAL ITEMS RE: 1991 WEST WWTP IMPORVEMENTS, AMOUNT — $340,850. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO CITY OF ROUND ROCK MAIL__3JDAYS WRUTEN NOTICETO THE CERTIF!CATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR 210 EAST MAIN STREET LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATNES. ROUND ROCK, TX 78664 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ,,/ AC0RD25,S(7190) BtACO RP RATi0N199O A. WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION: • Premises Operations • Subcontractor Operations • Personal Injury • Completed Operations • Contractual Liability (Per Spec) • Other CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE (Workmen's Compensation & Liability) Project Location Owner Address Contractor(Insured) Address She undersigned hereby certifies that the following policies, subject to their terms, conditions and exclusions have ! been issued by the named companies to the above Insured and are presently In full force and effect: • Policy No Expiration Date Insurance Co Address • COVERAGE: Statutory Workmen's Compensation. Employers Liability Limit $ Each Accident. Locations covered B. COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY & PROPERTY DAMAGE: Policy No. Expiration Date Insurance Co. Address LIMITS: Bodily injury, Including Personal injury. $ Each Person Property Damage $ Each Occurrence $ Each Occurrence $ Aggregate $ Aggregate Other COVERAGE PROVIDED (Check Applicable Squares): Yes 11 II II 11 No II II II II I. I II Properly Damage Liability includes: Damage due to blasting (explosion) Damage due to collapse Damage to underground facilities Broad Form Property Damage: Operations of Contractor Contractual Yes 11 I 1] Li n fl A. COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY: '` x Bodily Injury: (Inca. Personal Injury) $ . Property Damage: $ each occurrence!$ aggregate. B COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY: No II fl lI (J C. COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY & PROPERTY DAMAGE: Policy No Expiration Dale Insurance Co. Address LIMITS: Bodily Injury $ Each Person Property Damage $ Each Occurrence $ Each Occurrence Other COVERAGE PROVIDED - for operation of all owned, non -owned and hired vehicles. D. UMBRELLA EXCESS LIABILITY: Policy No._ Expiration Date Insurance Co. Address LIMITS: Single Limit Bodily Injury and Properly Damage $ Each Occurrence. COVERAGE PROVIDED - Applies in excess of the coverages listed above for Employer's Liability, Comprehensive General, Automobile and Property Damage Coverage. The undersigned further certifies that In the event of cancellation or any material change In any of the above policies, len (10) days prior written notice of such cancellation or change shall be delivered by registered mall to the above Owner. NAME OF AGENCY Address Date By Specified minimums Authorized Insurance Representative (Signature required) each person/$ each occurrence. Bodily Injury: $ each person/5 each occurrence. Property Damage: $ each occurrence. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Paragraph CopvngH 1788 HEN En9ineonn7 Inc Title 1 CONTENTS 1 2 DEFINITIONS 2 3 CONTRACTORS UNDERSTANDING 3 4 PROPOSALS 3 5 IRREGULAR PROPOSALS 3 6 WITHDRAWAL OR REVISION OF PROPOSALS 3 7 CORPORATE BIDDERS 3 8 INTERPRETATIONS 3 9 PRE QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS. 4 MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT 10 EOUI PM ENT STIPULATION 4 11 SUBSTITUTIONS. "OR APPROVED EQUAL" 4 CLAUSE 12 RETURN OF BID SECURITY 4 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 4 14 AWARD 4 15 CONTRACT SECURITY 4 16 CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS 4 INSURANCE 17 DATE OF CONTRACT 6 18 FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT 6 19 ASSIGNMENTS 6 20 SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION AND 6 COMPLETION 21 ORDER OF CONSTRUCTION 6 22 COST INFORMATION 6 23 SUBMITTAL OF REQUIRED DOCUMENTS 6 24 PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW DEEMED 6 INSERTED 25 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 7 26 CORRELATION OF DOCUMENTS 7 27 REFERENCE TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 7 28 REFERENCE POINTS 7 29 RIGHT -OF -WAY 7 30 NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF 7 31 TAXES 7 32 SUB CONTRACTING 7 33 SEPARATE CONTRACTS 8 34 LAWS. PERMITS. LICENSES. REGULATIONS 8 35 OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS 8 36 RIGHT -OF -ENTRY 8 37 ACCESS AND DRAINAGE 8 38 SANITARY CONVENIENCES 8 39 DEBRIS AND CLEAN -UP PRACTICES 8 40 SHOP DRAWINGS. SAMPLES. OPERATOR'S 8 INSTRUCTIONS. SERVICE AND PARTS MANUALS 41 DRAWINGS SHOWING CHANGES DURING 9 CONSTRUCTION 42 MATERIALS. EQUIPMENT. SUPPLIES. 9 SERVICES AND FACILITIES 43 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIALS AND 9 EQUIPMENT 44 QUALITY OF MATERIALS 9 45 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY. IN PART. . 9 UNDER THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Paragraph Title Page 46 UNFAVORABLE WEATHER 10 47 SUNDAYS. HOLIDAYS AND OVERTIME 10 48 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS 10 49 ACCIDENTPREVENTION - EMERGENCY 10 AUTHORITY TO ACT 50 PROTECTION OF WORK 10 51 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY 10 52 PROTECTION OF PERSONS 10 53 USE OF EXPLOSIVES. DRIVING OR REMOVAL 11 OF PILES. WRECKING. EXCAVATION WORK OR OTHER SIMILAR AND POTENTIALLY DANGEROUS WORK 54 PATENTS, COPYRIGHTS AND ROYALTIES 11 55 CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES 11 56 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES - TIME AN ESSENTIAL 11 ELEMENT 57 RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS 11 58 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF THE WORK 12 59 USE OR OCCUPANCY OF COMPLETED 12 PORTIONS 60 AUTHORITY OF ENGINEER 12 61 DECISIONS OF ENGINEER 12 62 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF ENGINEER 12 63 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF ENGINEER'S 12 FIELD REPRESENTATIVES 64 CHANGED OR EXTRA WORK • 12 65 CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST 14 66 EXTENSION OF CONTRACT PERIOD 14 67 CERTIFICATES. WARRANTIES AND 14 GUARANTEES 68 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW AND TESTING OF 14 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 69 "GOOD REPAIR" PERIOD 15 70 REMEDY OF DEFECTS. DETERIORATION OR 15 DEPARTURE FROM STANDARDS 71 VARIATION FROM ESTIMATED QUANTITIES 15 72 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 15 73 PAYMENT WITHHELD 16 74 FINAL MEASUREMENTS 16 75 PAYMENT. USE OR OCCUPANCY OF WORK 16 NOT EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE 76 ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT 16 77 ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT 16 CONSTITUTES RELEASE 78 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CORRECT DEFICIENCIES 16 79 SUSPENSION OF WORK BY OWNER 16 80 RIGHT OF OWNER TO TERMINATE CONTRACT 17 81 CONTRACTS IN DEFAULT 17 82 PROCEDURE FOR DECLARING CONTRACT IN 17 DEFAULT 83 COMPLETION OF CONTRACTS IN DEFAULT 17 84 OWNER'S REMEDIES CUMULATIVE AND NON 17 WAIVER Issue 11/88 2. DEFINmONS. The following terms when used in the Contract Documents shall mean the following: A. ADDENDA. Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the bidding documents or the Contract Documents. B. BID. The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work and services to be performed. C. CHANGE ORDER. Written order to the Contractor. signed by the Engineer. the Owner and Contractor to show the approval of the Engineer. the authorization of the Owner and the acknowledgement of receipt by the Contractor to make a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time D. CHANGE PROPOSAL REQUEST (CPR). A request to the Contractor. by the Owner. through the Engineer that the Contractor perform "Changed or Extra Work" E. CONTRACT. The written agreement between Owner and Contractor covering the Work and services to be performed as provided for by the Contract Documents. F. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents consist of the Proposal; the Contract. the Performance. Payment and Maintenance Bond: the Conditions of the Contract (General. Special. Supplementary and other coqditions as they may be titled); Information or Instruction to'Bidders: all Specifications. Drawings and Plans: Addenda: Change Orders when and as approved by the Engineer and the Owner: Notice inviting Contractors to bid as published and all proceedings of the governing body of the Owner relating to the Work or improvements. G. CONTRACTOR. Party contracting directly with the Owner to furnish and perform all Work and services in accordance with the Contract Documents A. DAY. Unless otherwise defined shall mean "calendar" day I. DRAWINGS. The drawings which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by the Engineer and are referred to in the Contract Documents J. ENGINEER, ARCHITECT, ENGINEER - ARCHITECT OR ARCHITECT- ENGINEER. (1) Each of these terms shall mean HDR Engineering, Inc. or an affiliate as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. or duly authorized representatives. such representatives acting severally within the scope of the particular duties entrusted to them, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. (2) Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between the Engineer and any Contractor or any Subcontractor K. FIELD ORDER. A written order issued by Engineer which orders minor changes in the Work consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time. L FURNISH or INSTALL or PROVIDE or SUPPLY. Unless specifically limited in the context. the word . "Furnish" or the word "Install" or the word "Provide" or the word "Supply", 2 or any combination or similar directive or usage thereof, shall mean FURNISHING AND INCORPORATING IN THE WORK including all necessary labor. materials. equipment. and everything necessary to perform the Work indicated. M. GENDER AND NUMBER. References are made as if masculine in gender and singular m number unless neuter gender is appropriate in the context; however. the use of any gender shall be applicable to all genders and the use of singular number shall include the plural and conversely. N. GOOD REPAIR. Good. repair shall be construed to mean that any defect. functional or structural deterioration (except that from ordinary and reasonable use) which appreciably reduces the effective- ness or efficiency of the Work or improvement for the purpose intended. or any serious departure from the standards of original construction described m the Contract Documents. shall be remedied by the Contractor Such remedy will be made without further cost to the Owner. Including in part. all damages caused by such defect. deficiency, deterioration or departure. and by Its repair. replacement or correction The requirements of Good Repair shall include in part and not by limitation: Site and Drainage Work. Trench Conditions, Landscaping. Filling. Retaining Walls. Rip -Rap. Revetments. Grading and other site work activities. 0. MAY. • Permissive. P. OWNER. The public body or authority. corporation. association, firm or person with whom the Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be provided O. PROJECT. Total construction of which the Work covered by the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part thereof R. PROPOSAL. Prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work and services to be performed. S. REFERENCE TO TRADE CONTRACTORS. When only one principal contract exists for all Work covered by the Contract Documents. reference to trades or to trade contractors in the Contract Documents shall mean the various construction crafts and such reference shall not create any contractual relationship between the Owner and any trade contractor with whom the principal contractor may subcontract. T. SAMPLES. Samples are physical examples furnished or constructed by the Contractor to illustrate materials. equipment. workmanship or finishes. and to establish standards by which the Work will be judged. U "SHALL" IMPLIED. In the interest of conciseness, some sentences. statements. and clauses used in the specifications exclude any form of the verb "shall" normally expressed in a verb phrase with verbs such as "furnish." "install;' "provide." "perform." "construct. "'erect. "comply. "apply." "submit." or similar "verb ". but any such sentences, statements. and clauses shall be interpreted to include the applicable form of the phrase "The Contractor shall" and the i requirements described therein shall be interpreted as mandatory elements of the Contract. V. SHALL Mandatory. W. SHOP DRAWINGS. Shop drawings are drawings. diagrams. illustrations. certifi- cates, test reports. schedules, performance charts, brochures, shop layouts. fabrication layouts, assembly layouts. foundation layouts, wiring and piping layouts. specifications and descriptive Issue 11/88 literature required by the Contract Documents. which are prepared by the Contractor or any Subcontractor. manufacturer, supplier or distributor. and which illustrate some portion of the Work. X. SPECIFICATIONS. Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials. equipment. construction systems. standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto Y. SUBCONTRACTOR. Party supplying labor and material or only labor for work at the site of the project for. and under separate contract or agreement with the Contractor. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between the Owner and any Subcontractor. Z SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. When the Work is sufficiently complete so t may be safely. conveniently and beneficially utilized by the Owner for all of the purposes for which it was intended. AA. WILL Mandatory BB. WORK. All materials. supplies and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated into the construction and all labor. operations and services necessary to produce the construction. including in part all testing. obligations. duties and responsibilities necessary to the successful completion of the construction start up. and demonstration as required by the Contract Documents. 3. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. A It is understood and mutually agreed that by submitting a Proposal the Contractor acknowledges that he has carefully examined all documents pertaining to the Work the location. accessibility and general character of the site of the Work and all existing buildings and structures within and adjacent to the site. and has satisfied himself as to the nature of the Work. the condition of existing buildings and structures. the conformation of the ground. the character, quality and quantity of the material to be encountered. the character of the equipment. machinery. plant. and any other facilities needed preliminary to and during prosecution of the Work. the general and local conditions. the construction hazards. and all other matters, including but not limited to the labor situation which can in any way affect the Work under the Contract. It is further mutually agreed that by submitting a Proposal the Contractor acknowledges that he has satisfied himself as to the feasibility of the Contract Documents for the construction of the Work and that he accepts all the terms. conditions and stipulations contained therein. and that he is prepared to work in peace and harmony with other contractors performing work on the site. B No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer. agent or employee of the Owner or of the Engineer, or with the Owner himself. either before or after the execution of the Contract. shall affect or modify any of the terms, conditions. or other obligations set forth in the Contract Documents. 4. PROPOSALS. A Proposals must be submitted on forms furnished by the Owner or the Engineer and endorsed as provided in the Contract Documents B Proposals must be submitted filled out with ink or typewriter, and without erasure. interlineation or changes. and if not made in accordance with the Contract Documents. will be subject to rejection as irregular. The Owner reserves the right to waive any irregularities or informalities C Proposals shall be made in the name of the principal and if a copartnership. the names of all partners shall be given Exact post office address shall be given in all cases If Proposals are submitted by an agent. satisfactory evidence of agency authority must accompany the Proposal. 5. IRREGULAR PROPOSALS. A. Proposals shall be considered irregular and may be rejected for the following reasons unless otherwise provided by law (1) If the Proposal form furnished to the bidder by the Owner or the Engineer is not used or is altered (2) If there are unauthorized additions or conditional bids, or irregularities of any kind which may tend to make the Proposal incomplete. indefinite. or ambiguous as to its meaning. (3) If the bidder adds any provisions reserving the right to accept or reject any award. or to enter Into a contract pursuant to an award. (4) If the unit or lump sum prices contained in the bid schedule are obviously unbalanced either in excess or below the reasonable cost analysis values. (5) If the bidder fads to insert a unit price for every pay Item indicated except in the case of authorized alternate pay items. (6) If the bidder tails to complete the Proposal in any other particulars where information is requested so bidder's Proposal may be properly evaluated B. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive irregularities or informalities as may be deemed best and in the Owners interest. 6. WITHDRAWAL OR REVISION OF PROPOSALS. A A bidder may without prejudice to himself. withdraw a proposal after it has been deposited with the Owner. provided the request for such withdrawal is received by the Owner. in writing or by telegram. before the time set for opening proposals. Telephonic communications shall not be accepted. After opening of bids. no proposal may be withdrawn by the bidder for a period of 30 days or as otherwise specified in the Contract Documents or provided by law. 8 Any bidder may modify his bid by telegraphic communication at any time prior to the scheduled time for opening proposals. provided such telegraphic communication is received by the Owner prior to the opening of proposals. and. provided further. the Owner is satisfied that a written confirmation of the telegraphic modification over the signature of the bidder was mailed prior to the opening of proposals. The telegraphic communication should not reveal the bid price but should provide the addition or subtraction or other modification so that the final prices or terms shall not be known by the Owner until the sealed bid is opened. If written confirmation is not received within two days after the scheduled time for opening proposals. no consideration will be given to the telegraphic modification. 7. CORPORATE BIDDERS. Corporate bidders to be eligible to enter into the Contract with the Owner shall be qualified to do business in the State where the Work will be performed. Bidders shall comply with all applicable licensing requirements Foreign corporations which have not domesticated or otherwise become licensed In the State where Work will be performed shall obtain a permit to do business in such State pursuant to that State's requirements. 8. INTERPRETATIONS. If a bidder intends to submit a bid for Work and is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the proposed Contract Documents. he may submit to the Engineer a written request for an interpretation thereof. The bidder submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt and actual delivery Any interpretation of such documents will be made by addendum duly issued. and 3 Issue 11/88 a copy of such addendum will be mailed or delivered to each bidder receiving a set of such documents, Neither the Engineer. nor the Owner will be responsible for any other explanations or interpretations of such documents which anyone presumes to make on behalf of the Owner 9. PRE -QU UJFICATION OF BIDDERS, MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT. A. The Owner reserves the right to request a financial statement. together with a statement of past experience, personnel. machinery and equipment available to perform the proposed Work from any bidder considered for award of a Contract Failure or refusal to furnish such a statement or statements. or failure to provide a satisfactory statement of financial responsibility shall constitute a basis for disqualifying any bidder B. The Owner also reserves the right to require evidence of satisfactory operation of any equipment offered and to be incorporated into the Work. 10. EQUIPMENT STIPULATION. A. COST OF CHANGES. In all Contracts where equipment is furnished, due to the lack of standardization of equipment as produced by the various manufacturers. it may become necessary to make minor modifications in the structures, buildings. piping. mechanical work. electrical work. accessories, controls. or other work. to accommodate the particular equipment offered. The Contrac- tor's bud price for any equipment offered shall Include the cost of making any necessary changes as well as the cost of preparing detailed drawings shaving such changes subject to the approval of the Engineer. B. MAJOR EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall list major equipment on the Proposal form as specified. Cost of major equipment Items listed shall be included in total project base bid C. ALTERNATE MAJOR EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall list and bid major equipment as specified - In the total project base bid. He may offer alternate equipment by manufacturers not listed in the specifications as qualified suppliers. provided' (1) A procedure for major equipment prequalificatuon is not included in the specifications (2) The alternate equipment will perform the same function. is of comparable quality. substance. design and efficiency. and will fa within the space limitations of the structure The Engineer shall evaluate the offered alternate equipment and on the basis of his opinion, shall recommend equipment m the best interest of the Owner. (3) The Contractor shall list any alternate equipment offered and show the difference in cost. either as an addition or a deduction to the base bid for that particular equipment alternate. Equipment offered as alternate equipment shall be considered and. if accepted. shall be substituted for the base bid equipment price for determining both the successful bidder and the Contract price. Any alternate equipment offered shall be accompanied by the detailed drawings and specifications. showing all changes in the structures. buildings, piping, mechanical work. electrical work, accessories. controls, or other work. necessary to accommodate the equipment as well as drawings. specifications. operating data. and complete criteria of the equipment which is offered as an alternate D. OTHER EQUIPMENT. See Or Approved Equal" Clause 11. SUBSTITUTIONS, OR APPROVED EQUAL" CLAUSE. A Whenever the Contract Documents call for an or an item of material or equipment which is not listed as Major Equipment and which is defined by describing a proprietary product. or by using the name of a manufacturer, vendor. trade name. catalogue number. or other reference, the term or approved equal ". if not inserted. shall be implied The specific articles. materials. or equipment mentioned shall be understood as indicating the type. function. minimum standard of design, efficiency, and quality desired. and shall not be construed in such a mariner as to exclude products of comparable substance, quality. design, function. and efficiency. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents relative to approval of material and equipment before incorporation into the Work. B. The Contractor may request approval of substitute articles. materials or equipment. The Engineer shall evaluate the articles. materials and equipment offered and. on the basis of his opinion, shall make recommendations pertaining thereto in the best interest of the Owner. In the event of approval a written Addendum or Change Order. as appropriate. will be issued. 12. RETURN OF BID SECURITY. Bid security of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained until the Contract is executed or rejection made by the Owner Other bid security will be returned only after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed 13. RElEC110N OF BIDS. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bidder 0 investigation of such bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations and to complete the Work contemplated by Contract Documents. Any or all bids will be rejected if there is reason to believe that collusion exists among the bidders. 14. AWARD. The Owner will proceed without unnecessary delay to consider the Proposals and reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals. to pass upon the regularity or waive any irregularity or informality of the bidders and the acceptability of the Surety offered. Date of award is date of formal Owner decision to award the Contract to the selected bidder. 15. CONTRACT SECURITY. A. Coincident with the execution of the Contract. the Contractor shall furnish a surety bond (form attached) in an amount at least equal to 100% of the Contract Price as security for the following: (1) The faithful performance of the Contract and the terms. conditions and stipulations contained therein. (2) To indemnify and hold the Owner and Engineer harmless; (3) Payment of all laborers and mechanics for labor performed; (4) Payment for all materials and equipment furnished and for all materials and equipment used or rented in the performance of the Contract. and (5) Maintenance of said Work or improvements in Good Repair for minimum period of one (1) year. unless a longer period is otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. or required by law. from the date of final acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B The Surety on such bond shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall be a duly authorized surety company listed on the Treasury Department's most current lust (Circular 570 as amended) licensed to do business in the State where the Work will be performed. 15. CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE. A. The Contractor shall not commence Work under the Contract until he has obtained at his expense all Insurance required by the Contract Documents. and such insurance has been approved by the Owner; nor shall the Contractor allow any Subcontractor to commence Work on any Subcontract until the same insurance requirements have been complied with by 4 Issue 11/88 each Subcontractor. Such insurance shall remain in full force and effect on all phases of the Work. whether or not the Work is occupied or utilized by the Owner. until all Work under the Contract is completed and has been accepted by the Owner Any insurance endorsements necessary to permit prior occupancy or use of any completed or partially completed portions of the Work by the Owner shall be secured by the Contractor 8. Nothing contained in the insurance requirements shall be construed as limiting the extent of the Contractor's responsi- bility for payment of damages resulting from his operations under the Contract Contractor agrees that he alone shall be completely responsible for procuring and maintaining full insurance coverage as provided herein or as may be otherwise required by the Contract Documents Any approval by the Owner or Engineer shall not operate to the contrary. C Any insurance bearing on adequacy of performance shall be maintained after completion of the Project for the full maintenance period. D. The Contractor shall procure and shall maintain for the period of the Contract the following types of insurance in the form, minimum limits and amounts herein specified or as may be otherwise required by the Contract Documents. Any deduct- ibles associated with such insurance shall be solely for the account of and the responsibility of the Contractor. (1) WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION INCLUDING OCCUPA- TIONAL DISEASE. AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSU- RANCE. The Contractor shall maintain during the life of his Contract Statutory Workmen's Compensation Insurance and Occupational Disease Disability Insurance in strict accordance with requirements of the most current and applicable State Workmen's Compensation Insurance Laws for all of his employees to be engaged in Work under his Contract. and in case any Work is sublet. the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor similarly to provide Workmen's Compensation and Occupational Disease Disability Insurance for the latter 's employees engaged in such Work unless such employees are covered by the protection afforded by the Contractor's Insurance In case any class of employees engaged in hazardous Work under his Contract is not protected under the Workmen's Compensation Statute. the Contractor shall provide. and shall cause each Subcontractor to provide. adequate Employers Liability Insurance for the protection of his employees not otherwise protected. (2) PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE. (Note "Indemnity' clause hereinafter). The Contractor shall procure and shall maintain during the life of his Contract full Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage. This coverage shall provide protection from claims for damages for personal injury and bodily injury. including in part sickness. disease. or death and from claims for damages to property. which may arise directly or indirectly out of, or in connection with. the performance of Work under the Contract by the Contractor. or by any of his Subcontractors. or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. or under the control of either of them. and the minimum amount of such insurance shall be as follows unless higher minimum amounts are otherwise required by the Contract Documents: a "Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance in an amount not less than One Million 01.000000) Dollars per occurrence for damages arising out of personal injury. property damage. and bodily injury, including in part' sickness, disease. or death and subject to an annual aggregate limit of Two Million ($2,OOQ000) Dollars The aggregate limit is to apply on a per job basis. b The Property Damage portion of this coverage shall not exclude coverage for explosion. collapse. and underground exposures. In addition. where Completed Operation Insurance coverage is applicable. such coverage shall be maintained after completion and acceptance of the Project for the full maintenance period (3) AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSU- RANCE The Contractor shall procure and shall maintain during the life of his Contract. Comprehensive Automobile Liability and Property Damage Insurance coverage on all self - propelled vehicles used in connection with the Contract. whether owned. non - owned. or hired. The liability limits shall be not less than One Million (51.000000) Dollars for injury or death of one person and in an amount not less than One Million (S1.000.000) Dollars in any one occurrence: and Property Damage limits of not less than One Million (51,00Q000) Dollars in any one occurrence. or One Million (51.000000) Dollars combined single limit. (4) OWNER'S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY POLICY The Contractor shall. at his expense. provide the Owner with an Owner's Protective Liability Policy naming the Owner as the named insured. with the Engineer. and each of their officers. agents and employees as additional insureds under that policy, said policy to protect said parties from claims which may arise from operations under the Contract. This coverage shall be in the same company which provides the Contractor's liability insurance coverage. and in the same minimum amounts. (5) CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY COVERAGE Each and every policy for liability insurance carried by each Contractor and Subcontractor will include coverage for liability assumed under contract sufficiently broad to insure the provision titled "Indemnity" hereinafter set forth (8) INDEMNITY To the extent permissible by law. the Contractor shall protect. defend. indemnify and save harmless the Owner, the Engineer. and their officers, agents, and employees. from and against suits, actions. claims. losses. liability or damage of any character. and from and against costs and expenses. including in part attorney fees, incidental to the defense of such suits, actions, claims, losses. damages or liability on account of injury. disease. sickness. including death. to any person. or damage to property, including in part the loss of use resulting therefrom. based upon or allegedly based upon any act. omission or occurrence of the Contractor or his employees. agents. subcontractors or suppliers, or anyone else under the Contractor's direction and control, (regardless if caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder), and arising out of. occurring in connection with. resulting from. or caused by the performance or failure of performance of any Work or services called for by the Contract. or from conditions created by the performance or non - performance of said Work or services. This indemnity shall not extend to liability arising out of the preparation by the Engineer of the design or specifications for the Owner or the giving of written directions or instructions by the Engineer as may be required by the Contract Documents. provided the giving of such written instructions or directions is the sole proximate cause of the injury or damage should it occur. (7) BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE. In addition to such Property Insurance coverage which the Contractor elects to carry for his own protection, he shall procure and shall maintain for the life of the Contract. Builder's Risk Insurance and Installation Floater Insurance coverage Such coverage should be on a Special Perils (All Risk) basis including theft of building materials upon the full insurable value of all portions of the Work which is the subject of the Contract and subject to a loss for which these policies give protection. and shall include completed Work and Work in progress. This coverage shall be with an insurance company or companies acceptable to the Owner Such 5 Issue 11/88 coverage may have a deductible ilause but amount of deductible shall not exceed Ten Thousand Dollars (01000000) providing. the Contractor shall assume and pay such deductible. An original and a certified copy of the policy of insurance required herein shall be furnished to the Engineer as provided under "Evidence of Insurance Coverage" hereinafter. (8) BOILER AND /OR MACHINERY INSURANCE. Boller and/ or Machinery Insurance. where appropriate and necessary, shall be procured and maintained by the Contractor until the Work has been completed and accepted by the Owner. E EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE COVERAGE. Before commencement of any Work. the Contractor shall submit written evidence that the minimum Insurance required by the Contract Documents has been obtained. Such written evidence shall be in the form of a Certificate of Insurance (see attached form) executed by the Contractor's Insurance carrier showing such policies in force for the specified period or by furnishing a copy of the actual policy or policies. Each certificate shall contain an endorsement or statement waiving right of cancellation or reduction in coverage unless 60 days prior written notice Is given to the Owner by registered or certified mail (1) The Contractor shall furnish an original and a certified copy of Builder's Risk Completed Value Insurance coverage to the Engineer. one copy of which shall be for the Owner and one copy for the Engineer. (2) An original and a certified copy of the Owner's Protective Liability Policy shall be furnished to the Engineer. one copy of which shall be for the Owner and one copy for the Engineer a b Such insurance shall Include as Additional Named Insured: the Owner: the Engineer. and each of their officers. agents. and employees: Subcontractors and Subsubcontractors of the Contractor. and any other party with an insurable interest designated by the Owner as an Additional Named Insured. all as thew interests may appear F WAIVER OF RIGHTS. The Contractor and Owner mutually agree to waive all rights against each other and against the Engineer for damages caused by fire and other perils to the extent covered by Builders' Risk Insurance as required herein. The Contractor shall require similar waiver by each of his Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors G. Contractor shall automatically renew any policy which expires during the performance of his Contract and notify the Owner and Engineer by appropriate certificate of such renewal prior to expiration date 17. DATE OF CONTRACT. A formal written Contract will be entered into by the parties and be binding upon the Owner when approved and executed by the Owner. 18. FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT. Should the successful bidder fail to execute the Contract and furnish bond or bonds satisfactory to the Owner to validate the same within 10 days after award of Contract, his bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages 1 19. ASSIGNMENTS. The Contractor shall not assign the whole or any part of the Contract or any monies due or to become due thereunder without the written consent of the Owner and of the Surety on the Contractors bond. A copy of such consent of Surety, together with a copy of the assignment. shall be filed with the Owner and the Engineer In case the Contractor assigns all or any part of any monies due or to become due under the Contract, the instrument of assignment shall contain a clause substantially to the effect that it is agreed that the right of the assignee in and to any monies due or to become due to the Contractor shall be subject to prior claims and liens of all persons. firms and corporations for services rendered. for the payment of all laborers and mechanics for labor performed: for the payment of all materials and equipment furnished and for payment of all materials and equipment used or rented in the performance of the Work called for In the Contract and for the payment of any liens. claims. or amounts due the Federal. State or local governments or any of their funds 20 SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION AND COMPLETION. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer within 10 days after award of Contract. or as may be otherwise requested by the Engineer. a schedule showing the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the Work and at a rate sufficient to successfully complete all of the Work set forth In the Contract Documents within the Contract Period. Such schedule shall show the dates at which the Contractor will start and complete the several parts of the Work. the order of construction and delivery dates of critical materials and equipment and the dates for startup and demonstration of the systems. This schedule shall be binding on the Contractor and shall be complied with by the Contractor unless, for good cause shown. a modification thereof is approved by the Owner and the Engineer. Any request for modification of the schedule shall be made In writing to the Owner through the Engineer for approval 21. ORDER OF CONSTRUCTION. A. The order of construction as determined by the Contractor wilt be followed except where the Engineer determines that such order would not be in the best interest of the Owner or the general public: however such right to determine the best Interest of the Owner shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Engineer to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other party. Neither Owner nor Engineer shall be liable for any additional cost Incurred by the Contractor as a result of such determination; provided. such determination was not arbitrary or capricious. B. Where the Owner's operations require specific sequencing of the Work. such sequencing requirements as provided for by the Contract Documents shall be followed. 22. COST INFORMATION. Where a Contract is awarded on a lump sum basis. the Contractor shall file with the Engineer a balanced price segregation of his lump sum bid into items similar to the various subdivisions of the general and detailed specifications, the sum of which shall equal the lump sum bid. The cost of various materials shall be furnished upon request of the Engineer, and such data will then be used as a basis for making monthly estimates When a Contract Is awarded on an estimated quantity - unit price basis. the unit price for the Work shall include costs for all labor, mechanics. superintendence, tools. materials. equipment and all utilities, transportation and services necessary to perform and complete said Work. and work incidental thereto in a workmanlike manner, as described in the drawings. specifications and other Contract Documents. Work described in the Contract Documents but not identified in the listing of unit price items shall be considered incidental to unit price work listed and included as a part thereof. together with all Contractor overhead and profit to accomplish the unlisted items. 23. SUBMITTAL OF REQUIRED DOCUMENTS. Contractor shall submit copies of all required documents No Work shall be commenced until insurance forms. bonds, and related documents. have been executed and approved No requests for payment shall be made until Schedule of Construction and Completion, Cost Information and Materials and Equipment Lists have been submitted and approved 24. PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW DEEMED INSERTED. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein. If. for any reason, any such provision is not inserted in the Contract. or is not correctly inserted, then upon application 6 Issue 11 /88 of either party. the Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction 25. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. A. The Engineer will provide the Contractor with up to four sets of Drawings and Specifications after the execution of the Contract 11 additional Drawings and Specifications are required. the Contractor shall compensate the Engineer for same. B When in the opinion of the Engineer, revised partial Drawings and Specifications are required to clarify or reflect authorized changes or additional work. the Engineer will provide two copies of such revisions to Contractor. Additional copies required must be paid for by Contractor. Contractor shall immediately post such revisions to his record set of Contract Documents. C. The Drawings and Specifications are the property of the Engineer. and are furnished to the Owner and Contractor for the construction of Work under the Contract only. D The data given in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings is believed to be accurate but the accuracy is not guaranteed The Contractor must take all levels. locations. measurements. and verify all dimensions on the job site prior to construction and adapt his Work into the exact construction Scale measurements taken from Drawings are not considered for more than reference. E. Drawings showing the details of the Work specified are designated "Drawings' or "Plans" and together with the Specifications form an integral part of the Contract Documents. 26. CORRELATION OF DOCUMENTS. A. Drawings. and specifications are cooperative and complemen- tary Portions of the Work which can best be illustrated by the Drawings may not be included in the Specifications and portions best described by the specifications may not be depicted on the Drawings. All items necessary or incidental to completely construct or erect the Work shall be furnished, whether called for in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings. Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or anything shown or mentioned on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both 6. Information or Instructions for Bidders and Special or Supplementary General Conditions shall take priority over General Conditions. large scale Drawings shall take precedence over small scale Drawings. In case of disagreement between the Drawings and Specifications, or within either document itself, the better quality or greater quantity of Work resulting in a greater cost shall be estimated and included in the Bid and Contract Price and the matter drawn to the Engineer's attention for decision 27. REFERENCE TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. Any reference to standard specifications m any of the Contract Documents shall always imply the latest edition of such standard specification or specifications available at time Notice inviting Contractors to bid is published unless otherwise indicated. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification. manual or code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of Owner. or Engineer. or any of their consultants. agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to Engineer, or any of Engineer's consultants. agents or employees. any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 45. 28. REFERENCE POINTS. The Engineer shall provide a baseline and a datum bench mark reference point. If the Contractor, through willfulness or carelessness. removes. causes or allows such points to be removed before the prosecution of Work requires it. the replacing of such line and elevation points shall be done at the expense of the - Contractor A For building and plant type work the Contractor shall, at his own expense, employ a registered engineer or licensed land surveyor acceptable to the Owner to give to the Contractor lines and elevations for the Contractor's use in constructing the Work. The registered engineer or licensed land surveyor shall furnish to the Engineer. through the Contractor. a signed plat certifying to the location and elevations of the Work indicating ties and closure to the Engineer's baseline and datum bench mark. B. For construction other than building and plant type work. the Contractor shall be responsible to set all additional line and grade references for the Work. 29. RIGHT -OF -WAY. The Owner shall furnish all land and right -of -way for the performance of the Work required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall confine his operations to the right -of -way furnished. 3Q NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF. Where the manner of giving notice is not otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents. any notice to the Contractor from the Owner relative to any part of the Contract shall be in writing and considered delivered and the service thereof completed. when said notice is posted. by certified or registered mail. to the Contractor at the address given in the Contractors proposal, or at the last business address known to him who gives the notice. or delivered in person to the Contractor or his authorized representative on the site. It is mutually agreed that such notice shall be sufficient and adequate. 31. TAXES. A. The Contractor shall. without additional expense to the Owner, pay all applicable Federal. State and Local taxes of every kind and character. except taxes and assessments on the real property comprising the site of the Project. and such taxes shall be considered incidental and included in the total bid B. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with statements certifying payment of any sales. use or excise tax and such other documents as may be necessary for the Owner to make request for tax refund as provided by applicable law Five copies of such statements and documents shall be furnished to the Owner before final payment on the Contract is made to the Contractor. or at earlier times if so directed by the Owner. 32. SUBCONTRACTING. A. The Contractor may utilize the services of specialty Subcon- tractors only on those parts of the Work which, under normal contracting practices. are performed by such specialty Subcontractors. B. The Owner reserves the right to approve Subcontractors for any Work. The Contractor, d requested by the Owner. shall submit to the Owner the proposed award and such information as the Owner may require. C. The Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his Subcontractors. and of persons either directly or Indirectly employed by them. or under their control. as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him D The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all Subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors: and to give the Contractor the same power as regards terminating any Subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor under any provision of the Contract Documents E. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationships between any Subcontractor and the Owner or Engineer 7 Issue 11 /88 33. SEPARATE CONTRACTS. A The Owner reserves the right to award other contracts in connection with the Owners Project The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials, machinery. equipment. supplies. and the execution of their work, and shall properly connect and coordinate his Work with the work of others. B. If any part of the Contractor's Work depends upon the work of any other contractor for proper execution or results. the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report in writing to the Engineer any lack of progress or defects in the other contractors's work that renders it unsuitable for proper execution or results. Failure on the part of the Contractor to so inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other contractors work as fit and proper for the reception of the Contractors Work. C To insure the proper execution of his subsequent Work. the Contractor shall measure existing work and shall at once report in writing to the Engineer any incapatibility between the existing work and the Work anticipated by the Contract Documents 34. LAWS. PERMITS, LICENSES, REGULATIONS. A. The Contractor in the execution of the Work shall conform to all applicable Federal and State laws. municipal ordinances and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction aver construction of the Work, including in part all construction codes and safety codes which may apply to (1) performance of the Work; (2) protection of adjoining and adjacent property; (3) maintenance of passageways. guard fences or other protective facilities; and shall obtain and pay for all permits. licenses and approvals necessary for the construction of the Work and give all required notices. B. Contractor shall arrange for all inspections required by Federal, State, Municipal or other authorities having lawful jurisdiction and pay all fees and costs incurred at no additional expense to the Owner. 35. OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS. A All operations of the Contractor (including storage of materials. supplies and equipment) shall be confined to areas authorized by the Owner, The Contractor shall be liable for any and all damages caused by him to such premises. 8 The Contractor shall hold and save the Owner, free and harmless from liability of any nature or kind arising from any use, trespass or damage occasioned by his operations on premises of third persons C The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the care and storage of materials. supplies or equipment delivered on the Work site or purchased for use thereon. Stored materials. supplies or equipment shall be carefully and continuously protected from damage or deterioration in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and so located so as to facilitate inspection by the Owner or the Engineer. or both. The responsibility for the care and storage of materials. supplies or equipment shall be with the Contractor whether such materials. supplies or equipment are furnished by the Contractor or by the Owner. Storage of materials. supplies or equipment shall not unduly interfere with the progress of the Contractor's Work or the work of any other contractor 36. RIGHT-OF-ENTRY. Contractor shall provide the Owner. Engineer, or representatives of governmental agencies proper facilities for access to the Work wherever it is m preparation or progress. 37. ACCESS AND DRAINAGE. The Contractor shall keep a sufficient clear area around fire hydrants to permit their full and effective use He shall keep natural drainage and water courses unobstructed or provide other equal courses effectively placed 38. SANITARY CONVENIENCES. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary sanitary conveniences. properly secluded, for the use of workers during construction. and these conveniences shall be maintained in a manner that will be inoffensive and in compliance with Federal. State and local health and sanitation requirements 39. DEBRIS AND CLEANUP PRACTICES. A The Contractor shall maintain general cleanup practices to keep all streets. alleys. sidewalks. or other premises as free from materials and debris as the character of the Work will permit, and upon completion of any part of the Work, shall, within reasonable time, remove all surplus material and debris, and leave right -of -way and premises in a condition equal to or better than preconstruction condition acceptable to the Owner, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents Under no circumstances shall the Contractor allow any condition to exist which creates a nuisance. fire hazard. dust or an environment injurious to health or safety, or an attraction for children. animals, birds. rodents, during or after construction. 6. Failure to comply with this provision. after due and proper notice has been given by the Owner or his agent. will be sufficient grounds for the Owner to proceed to clean up such material and debris. make repairs. and charge same to the Contractor. who hereby agrees to the provisions as set forth herein 40 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, OPERATOR'S INSTRUCTIONS, SERVICE AND PARTS MANUALS. A The Contractor shall furnish all Shop Drawings and Samples as defined under Paragraph 2. entitled "DEFINITIONS" which are required by the Contract Documents. Shop Drawings of equipment and devices offered by the Contractor for review of the Engineer shall be in sufficient detail to adequately show construction and operation. Shop Drawings submitted as herein provided by the Contractor and reviewed by the Engineer for conformance with the design concept shall be executed in conformity with the Contract Documents unless otherwise required by the Owner. B. Unless otherwise specified the Contractor shall provide a minimum of one reproduceable and one print of all submittal information, C. Work performed in connection with the fabrication, manufac- ture. shipment or purchase of material or equipment prior to review as specified shall be at the Contractors sole risk and responsibility. D Shop Drawings and Samples shall be accompanied by letter of transmittal which shall give a list of the numbers and dates of the submittal. and shall be in the form required by the Engineer. Contractor shall duplicate this form. Shop Drawings shall be complete in every respect and bound in sets. E. The Contractor shall submit all Shop Drawings and Samples sufficiently rn advance of construction requirements to allow ample time for checking. correcting, resubmitting and rechecking and to avoid any delay in progress of the Work F. Shop Drawings or Samples submitted shall be marked with the name of the Project. numbered and bear the stamp of approval of the Contractor as evidence that the Shop Drawings and Samples have been reviewed and approved by the Contractor. Any Shop Drawings or Samples submitted without this stamp of approval will not be considered and will be returned to the Contractor for resubmission. if the Shop Drawings or Samples show variation from the requirements of the Contract. the Contractor shall call such variation to the Engineer's attention in his letter of transmittal in order that. if acceptable and Engineer gives written approval to the variation, suitable action may be taken for proper adjustment. otherwise the Contractor will not be relieved of the respon- sibility of executing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. even though such Shop Drawings or Samples have been otherwise reviewed 8 Issue 11/88 G By approving and submitting Shop Drawings and Samples. the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all field dimensions and measurements, field construction criteria. materials. catalog numbers and similar data. and that he has reviewed. approved and coordinated such submittals with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents H If a Shop Drawing or Sample, as submitted. indicates a variation from the Contract requirements as set forth in Subparagraph F above, and the Engineer finds same to be in the Interest of the Owner and to be so minor as not to Involve a change in the Contract Price or time for performance. he may approve the Shop Drawings or Samples. provided however, such departure is slight In nature and does not affect the design concept of the Work I. All items of standard equipment shall be the latest model at time of delivery J When Shop Drawings are submitted for the purpose of showing the Installation in greater detail, their review shall not excuse the Contractor from requirements shown on the drawings and specifications K Shop Drawings and Sample submittals not conforming completely with the above requirements will be returned to the Contractor, without action, for resubmittal and the resulting delay shall be entirely the responsibility of the Contractor. L. The Engineer's check and review of Shop Drawings and Samples. specifications and descriptive literature submitted by the Contractor will be only for general conformance with design concept. except as otherwise provided. and shall not be construed as: (1) Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements: (2) Relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for any error in details. dimensions or otherwise that may exist in such submittals: (3) Constituting a blanket approval of dimensions. quantities. or details of the material or equipment shown: or (4) Approving departures from additional details or instruc- tions previously furnished by the Engineer Such check or review shall not relieve the Contractor of the full responsibility of meeting all of the requirements of the Contract Documents. M. Bound operator's instructions shall be furnished by the Contractor for equipment furnished under the Contract that is specifically listed or that is considered to be of a special or complex nature Operator's instructions shall Include, in part. detailed lubrication drawings showing type and frequency of lubrication. Detailed parts drawings shall show location, name and catalog numbers of parts. N. Bound service and parts manuals shall be furnished by the Contractor for all items of standard manufacture. O Unless otherwise specified. 4 sets of operator's instructions. service and parts manuals shall be provided P All operator Instructions. service and parts manuals shall be bound in permanent binders satisfactory to the Engineer and shall be furnished to the Owner before final acceptance of the Installation by the Owner 41. DRAWINGS SHOWING CHANGES DURING CONSTRUCTION. Contractor shall post and keep current a complete set of Contract Documents. including all Addenda. Change Orders and pertinent data on the Project site at all times. Throughout the progress of construction. the Contractor shall maintain a careful up -to -date record of all changes on the Plans and Orawingeduring actual construction Upon completion of the Work. and prior to acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall file with the Engineer one set of complete Drawings with all changes and Contractor's field construction notes neatly and legibly recorded thereon Such Drawings shall indicate in part the exact routing. if changed from Drawing location, of sewer. water, gas. chemical piping, fuel oil tanks and piping, fire protection piping and any other major buried utility piping. and routing of buried electrical feeder cables and changes to routing of conduit runs which are buried or concealed m concrete slabs. Such information may be used to prepare record Drawings for the Owner. 42. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT. SUPPLIES, SERVICES AND FACILITIES. A. It is understood that. except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials. labor. tools. equipment. supplies. machinery. equipment rental. water. heat. light. fuel. power, transportation. superintendence. temporary construction of every nature and all other services and facilities of every nature whatsoever necessary to execute, complete and deliver the Work In a workmanlike manner within the specified time B No materials, equipment. or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest Is retained by the seller. 43. WORKMANSHIP,MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. A. All Work done and all material and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be new and unused and strictly conform to the Contract Documents. Competent labor. mechanics and tradesmen shall be used on the Work. Experienced manufac- turer's representatives shall be used to supervise the installation of equipment as may be required by the Engineer. Any special tools or equipment which may be required for the Work shall be provided by the Contractor. 8. The acceptance at any time of materials or equipment by or in behalf of the Owner shall not be a bar to future rejection If they are subsequently found to be defective. Inferior in quality. or uniformity. to the material or equipment specified. or are not as represented to the Engineer or Owner. 44. QUALITY OF MATERIALS. In the absence of detailed Specifications. all materials shall conform to the latest standard of the American Society for Testing Materials available at the time Notice inviting Contractors to bid is published unless otherwise indicated. 45. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY, IN PART, UNDER THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contractor agrees that the following are the Contractor's responsibility, in part. under the Contract Documents. A. The Contractor shall have charge of and be responsible for the entire Work under the Contract until its completion in a good and workmanlike manner and final acceptance by the Owner. Any imperfect. damaged. destroyed or unfaithful Work included in the Contract Documents shall be corrected before or upon request of the Owner or the Engineer B The Contractor shall comply with all Federal. State. County. District and Municipal Laws. Ordinances. Rules. Regulations. Construction Codes and Safety Codes relating to or applicable to the Work, and shall furnish certification of compliance at completion of the Work on request of the Engineer or the Owner. C The Contractor shall perform all Work and furnish all supplies. materials. machinery. equipment. mechanics. tools. plant, works. labor. transportation. superintendence. testing, facilities. services. means, methods. techniques, insurance and utilities, except as otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. necessary or proper to perform and complete all Work required by and in accordance with the Contract Documents Contractor shall pay all taxes incidental to performing said Work and furnishing such items. Issue 11/88 D. The Contractor alone shall be completely responsible for. (1) All construction means. methods. techniques. sequences and coordination of all Work and services under the Contract Documents. except where specific requirements are set forth m the Contract Documents. (2) All conditions at the Project sae. including in part safety of all persons and property; (3) The supervision, direction and control of all Work and services under the Contract Documents: and (4) All safety procedures and precautions necessary in connection with the Work and services. E These responsibilities of the Contractor shall apply continu- ously and shall not be limited to normal working hours. Review of construction by the Owner or the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of such responsibilities. F. The Contractor shall furnish, erect. maintain. and remove all construction plant and all temporary works and facilities as may be required to perform the Contract G. The Contractor alone shall be fully responsible for the safety, efficiency. and adequacy of his plant. works. machinery. equipment, facilities and appliances, and for any damage which may result from their failure or their improper construction. maintenance or operation 46. UNFAVORABLE WEATHER. During unfavorable weather or cold weather or weather unsuitable for proper execution of the Work in a first -class manner. all Work affected by such condition must be stopped and properly protected from possible damage. Contractor shall be responsible for the extent and cost of protection of the Work in progress and of completed Work and shall be responsible for the cost of any damage to the Work, its repair or replacement. 47. SUNDAYS. HOLIDAYS AND OVERTIME. Any Work necessary to be performed after regular working hours. on Sdndays. or Legal Holidays, shall be performed without additional expense to the Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents I 48. MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS. If. through acts or neglect on the part of the Contractor, any other contractor or subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage to his work. the Contractor agrees to settle with such other contractor or subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other contractor or subcontractor will so settle. If such other contractor or subcontractor asserts any claim against the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against such claims and for any costs in connection with such claims 49. ACCIDENT PREVENTION - EMERGENCY - AUTHORITY TO ACT. Precaution shall be exercised by the Contractor at all times for the protection of all persons, Work and property at the Project site or adjacent thereto. and hazardous conditions shall be guarded against or eliminated. In an emergency affecting the safety of life or property, the Contractor shall in a diligent manner and without special instruction or authorization from the Engineer or Owner. act to prevent such threatened loss. damage or injury. Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the Owner immediately thereafter Any compensation, claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work affecting the safety of life or property. other than the Contractor's Work or property, shall be determined as provided under the "Claims for Extra Cost" provisions of the Contract subject to the approval of the Owner and Engineer 5Q PROTECTION OF WORK. The Contractor, at no additional expense to Owner. shall at all times safely guard and protect the Work and all material. equipfnent. etc , to be incorporated into the Work: provide, erect and maintain suitable barriers around all excavations or obstructions to prevent accidents: and provide, place and maintain during the night, sufficient lights. signals and signs for this purpose on or near the Work The Contractor shall at all times. until its completion and final acceptance, protect his Work. apparatus. equipment and material from accidental or any other damage including in part. damage by weather. and make good any damages thus occurring at no additional cost to the Owner 51. PROTECTION OF PROPERTY. A. The Contractor. at no additional expense to the Owner. shall at all times (1) safely guard the Owners property and abutting or adjacent property from injury. loss or damage in connection with the Work. (2) protect by false work. braces. shoring or other effective means. all buildings. foundations, walls. fences and other property along his line of Work, or affected directly by his Work. including, but not limited to the Owner's property. against damage. (3) cover or otherwise protect stockpiles of materials to avoid damage to any property from such materials, (4) repair, replace or make good any such damage. loss or injury, unless such is caused directly by the Owner or his duly authorized representatives. B. The Contractor shall exercise care to protect from injury all water and sewer pipe lines. gas mains. telephone cables. electric cables. service pipes, and other utilities or fixtures which may be encountered during the progress of the Work All utilities and other service facilities or fixtures if damaged. shall be repaired by the Contractor without additional compensation. C. The Contractor shall personally check and verify utility information on the Drawings. Where existing utilities or structures are shown on the Drawings, they are believed to be accurate but are not guaranteed to be such or that these are the only utilities or structures in the construction area. Protection is the sole responsibility of the Contractor and he must satisfy himself as to the existence and location of all utilities and structures. D The Contractor shall give written notice at least 48 hours before breaking ground. to all persons. superintendents, inspectors. or those otherwise in charge of property. streets. water. gas. or sewer pipes, telephone or electrical cables, railroads or otherwise, who may be affected by the Contractor's operation. in order that they may remove any obstruction for which they are responsible and have a representative on the Project site to see that their property is properly protected 52. PROTECTION OF PERSONS. A The Contractor shall. (1) At all times protect the lives and health of his employees under the Contract, (2) Take all necessary precautions to prevent accidents or injury and to insure the safety of all persons on. about. adjacent to or in the vicinity of the Project site. (3) Comply with all applicable provisions of Federal. State and Municipal safety and health laws. building codes, and safety and health recommendations of Trade Associations. (4) Erect and properly maintain at all times. as required by the conditions and progress of the Work. all necessary safeguards for the protection of persons and shall post danger signs warning against the hazards created in part by features of construction such as protruding nails. rod hoists, well holes, elevator hatchways, scaffolding, window openings, stairways and falling materials (5) Designate a responsible member of his organization on the Work site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. • (6) Provide scaffolding. ladders, or other safeguards for the protection of those having Right -of -Entry during field review and observation of the Work 10 Issue 11 /88 • B Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the 'Williams- Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 ". including any amendments thereto and rules and regulations issued pursuant thereto applicable to the Work and performance of the Contract. Where a State in which Work is performed has passed legislation bearing on Occupational Safety and Health. such legislation and amendments thereta together with rules and regulations issued pursuant thereto shall be complied with by the Contractor, 53. USE OF EXPLOSIVES, DRIVING OR REMOVAL OF PILES, WRECKING, EXCAVATION WORK OR OTHER SIMILAR AND POTENTIALLY DANGEROUS WORK. A. When the use of explosives. driving or removal of piles, wrecking. excavation work or other similarly potentially dangerous work is necessary for the prosecution of the Work. the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care so as not to endanger life or property. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any and all damages, claims and for the defense of any actions against the Owner resulting from the prosecution of such work 8. The Contractor shall notify each public utility company or other owner of property having structures or Improvements in proximity to the site of the Work. of his intent to perform potentially dangerous work. Such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies or other owners of property to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury Such notice shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damages. claims or the defense of any actions against the Owner resulting from the performance of such work. C. All explosives shall be stored in a secure manner and all storage places shall be marked clearly "EXPLOSIVES -KEEP OFF". and shall be in the care of competent watchmen at all times 54. PATENTS, COPYRIGHTS AND ROYALTIES. A. The Contractor shall protect. defend. Indemnify and save harmless the Owner: the Engineer: and each of their officers. agents. and employees. from liability of any nature or kind. including cost and expenses for. or on account of. any patented or unpatented invention. process. article. or appliance manufactured or used in the performance of the Contract. including its use by the Owner. or the Owner's officers, agents. or employees. unless otherwise specifically stipulated in the Contract Documents. B If the Contractor uses any design, device or materials covered by letters patent or copyright, he shall provide for such use by suitable agreement with the Owner of such patented or copyrighted design. device or material It is mutually agreed and understood. that. without exception. the Contract Prices shall include all royalties or costs arising from the use of such design, device or materials. in any way involved in the Work The Contractor and his Surety shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner of the Work from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the use of such patented or copyrighted design, device or materials or any trademark or copyright in connection with the Work. and shall indemnify the Owner for any cost. expense or damage which it may be obliged to pay by reason of such infringement at any time during the prosecution of the Work or after completion of the Work. C The Contractor shall pay all royalty and license fees 55. CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES. A The Contractor shall provide and maintain. continually on the Protect site of the Work during its progress. adequate and competent superintendence of all operations for and in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall provide a capable superintendent acceptable to the Owner Such superintendent shall be able to read. write and speak English fluently and shall be authorized to receive instructions from the Engineer Said superintendent shall Gave authority to see that the Work is carried out in accordance with the Contract Documents and in a first class. thorough and workmanlike manner in every respect 11 B. Incompetent, disorderly, intemperate or incorrigible employees shall be dismissed by the Contractor or his representative when requested by the Engineer or the Owner. and such persons shall not again be permitted to return to the Work without the written consent of the Owner C The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and all loss or damages arising out of jurisdictional labor disputes or other labor troubles of any kind that may occur during the construction and performance of the Contract. D. The Contractor shall provide at the request of the Owner such reasonable information about his employees as may be necessary, including in part. name. address and social security number. 56. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES - TIME AN ESSENTIAL ELEMENT. A. It is mutually understood and agreed by and between the parties to the Contract that in the execution of the same. time is an essential element of the Contract. and it is important that the Work be pressed vigorously to completion B. The Contractor agrees that said Work shall be prosecuted regularly. diligently. and u ninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will Insure full completion thereof within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed. by and between the Contractor and the Owner. that the time for the completion of the Work set forth in the Contract Documents is a reasonable time for delivery of equipment and materials and completion of the Work as specified. C. The time of commencement and completion of the Work fixed by the Owner and set forth in the Contract Documents will determine and be known as the "Contract Period" D If Contractor shall neglect. fail or refuse to complete the Work within the Contract Period, then for each calendar day that any Work shall remain uncompleted after the end of the Contract Period. the amount per calendar day specified in the Proposal form will be assessed by the Owner, not as a penalty. but as a predetermined and agreed liquidated damage E. The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would sustain in the event the Work is not completed within the Contract Period F. Extensions of time granted by the Owner in accordance with the provisions of - Extension of Contract Period" shall not waive liquidated damages unless such extensions granted by the Owner specifically provide for the waiving of liquidated damages during and over such period of time extension. Due account however will be taken of any adjustment in the Contract Period when the Owner determines that the cause for such adjustment is unforeseeable. beyond the control of, and without the fault or neglect of the Contractor. G The Owner shall have the right to deduct said liquidated damages from any money in the Owner's hands. otherwise due. or to become due. to said Contractor, and to sue for and recover any additional compensation for damages for non- performance of the Contract at the time stipulated and provided for in the Contract Documents H. The assessment of liquidated damages for failure to complete the Work within the Contract Period shall not constitute a waiver of the Owner's right to collect any additional damages which the Owner may sustain by failure of the Contractor to carry out the terms of his Contract 57. RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS. Whenever Work is done by the Owner's employees or by other contractors which is contmguous to Work included in the Contract Documents. the respective rights of the various interests involved Issue 11 /88 shall be established by the Engineer to secure the completion of the various portions of the Work in general harmony. 58. TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OFTHE WORK. The Engineer shall have authority to recommend that the Owner suspend the Work. wholly or in part. for such period or periods of time as the Engineer may deem necessary due to unsuitable weather or such other conditions considered unfavorable for the suitable prosecution of the Work. including in part failure of the Contractor to supply labor. materials or equipment meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents: or failure to carry out instructions or to perform provisions of the Contract Documents considered favorable for the orderly or suitable prosecution of the Work. The right to recommend suspension of the Work however. shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Engineer to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other party During periods of suspension, the Contractor shall properly protect the Work from possible injury. 59. USE OR OCCUPANCY OF COMPLETED PORTIONS. A. The Owner shall have the right to take possession of. use or occupy any completed or partially completed portions of the Work. notwithstanding the time for completing the entire Work or any portions may. or may not, have expired Such taking possession, use or occupancy shall not be deemed an acceptance of any Work until all Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use or occupancy occurs during the Contract Period and increases the cost of, or delays the Work, the Contractor will be granted such extra compensation or extension of time. or both. as the Engineer may recommend. subject to the approval of the Owner. B. Consent of Surety and endorsement from the insurance carrier or carriers permitting prior occupancy or use of any completed or partially completed portions of the Work by the Owner shall be secured by the Contractor. Contractor and his Surety hereby agree that such consent shall not be unduly withheld 60. AUTHORITY OF ENGINEER. A The Engineer. through its duly authorized representatives. shall furnish engineering or architectural services during construc- - tion of the Work as an agent of the Owner to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. He shall observe and review the Work In the process of construction or erection. Compliance with the Contract Documents shall be the Contractor's responsibility notwithstanding such observation or review The Engineer has authority to recommend suspension of the Work by the Owner when 0 appears such suspension may be necessary to accomplish the proper implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents. The authority to observe. review or recommend suspension of the Work. or exercise such other authority as may be granted by the Contract Documents. shall not be construed or interpreted to mean supervision of construction, which is the Contractors responsibility. nor make the Engineer responsible for providing a safe place for the performance of Work by the Contractor or by the Contractor's employees. or those of suppliers or Subcontractors. or for access. visits, use. work, travel. or occupancy by any other person. The Engineer shall also have the authority to reject any Work, materials, or equipment which do not conform to the Contract Documents and to decide technical questions which arise in the execution of the Work B The Engineer shall determine the amount. quality. acceptability. and fitness of the several kinds of Work. materials. equipment and supplies which are to be paid for under the Contract and shall decide questions which may arise in relation to said Work and its compliance with the Contract Documents The Engineer's estimates and decisions shall be final and conclusive. except as otherwise expressly provided In case any question shall arise between the parties to the Contract relative to the Contract Documents. the determination or decision of the Engineer shall be a condition precedent to the right of the Contractor to receive any money or payment for Work under the Contract affected in any manner or to any extent by such question C. The Engineer shall decide the meaning and intent of any portion of the Contract Documents where the same may be found obscure or be in dispute 61. DECISIONS OF ENGINEER. The Engineer, through its duly authorized representatives. shall within a reasonable time after presentation. make decisions in writing on claims between the Contractor and Owner. 62. PERSONAL UABILIIY OF ENGINEER. In carrying out any of the provisions of the Contract or in exercising any power or authority granted thereby, there shall be no liability upon the Engineer or its duly authorized representatives. either personally or as an official of the Owner, n being understood that in such matters they act as agents and representatives of the Owner. 63. AUTHORITY AND DUES OF ENGINEER'S FIELD REPRESENTATIVES. A Field representatives of the Engineer may be stationed on the Project site to report to the Engineer as to the progress of the Work. the manner in which it is being performed, and also to report whenever it appears that material furnished and Work performed by the Contractor fail to fulfill the requirements of the Contract Documents. The representative may direct the attention of the Contractor to such failure or infringement but such construction review shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to furnish acceptable materials or to provide completed construction in a safe and satisfactory manner in every particular 6. In case any dispute arises between the Engineer's field representative and the Contractor, as to materials furnished or the satisfactory performance of the Work the representative shall have the authority to reject materials or recommend suspension of the Work by the Owner until the question and issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer. Such authority, however. shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Engineer's field representative to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other party Field representatives are not authorized to revoke. alter. enlarge. relax or release any requirements of the Contract Documents nor to issue instructions contrary to the Contract Documents. Field representatives shall in no case act as foremen, superintend- ents. or perform other duties for the Contractor or Interfere with the management of the Work by the Contractor. C. All condemned Work shall be promptly taken out and replaced by satisfactory Work, and all condemned materials shall be promptly removed from the vicinity of the Work Should the Contractor fail or refuse to comply with instructions in this respect the Owner may withhold payment, proceed to declare the Contract in default. or both D Re- examination of questioned Work may be ordered by the Engineer with prior written consent of the Owner, and if so ordered. the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work was performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the cost of re- examination and replacement. If such Work was not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such cost, unless he shall prove that defect in the Work was caused by others than the Contractor or his Subcontractors or anyone else under the Contractor's direction and control, and in the event the Owner is at fault, the Owner shall pay such cost. E Any defective materials or workmanship may be rejected by the Engineer at any time before the final acceptance of the Work. even though the same may have been previously overlooked and estimated for payment. 64. CHANGED OR EXTRA WORK. - A. The Owner. through a Change Order prepared by the Engineer. reserves the right at any time during the progress of the Work to make necessary alterations of, deviations from. additions to, or deletions from the Contract. or may require the performance of extra Work not covered by the Contract Documents. but 12 Issue 11/88 forming a part of the Work contracted for, provided however, the Contractor shall not proceed with any such Changed or Extra Work without a Change Order. The nature and extent of the proposed Changed or Extra Work shall be defined in writing with a Change Proposal Request (CPR) by the Engineer and submitted with a written request to the Contractor to indicate any change in construction contract cost or time for the proposed Changed or Extra Work The Contractor shall return the Change Proposal Request (CPR) to the Engineer with a detailed cost breakdown The Engineer may then submit the Change Proposal Request (CPR) to the Owner with a recommendation regarding acceptance. If the Owner accepts the Change Proposal Request (CPR), the Engineer will notify the Contractor and prepare a written Change Order. If the Owner does not accept the Change Proposal Request (CPR). the Engineer will notify the Contractor and the proposed Changed or Extra Work shall not be done. The Change Proposal Request (CPR) is not a CHANGE ORDER and work is not authorized until a formal CHANGE ORDER has been executed by the Owner Changed or Extra Work shall in no way invalidate the Contract or the Contractor's bond. but the difference in cost shall be added to or deducted from the amount of the Contract. as the case may be. Adjustments. if any. in the amounts to be paid to the Contractor by reason of any such Changed or Extra Work shall be determined by one of the following methods in the order as listed (1) MethodA Unit prices contained in the Contractors Proposal for the same type or class of Work. (2) Method 8 By an acceptable unit price proposal from the Contractor (3) Method C By an acceptable lump sum price proposal from the Contractor (4) Method 0 If neither Method B nor C can be agreed upon before the Changed or Extra Work is started. then the Contractor shall be paid the "actual field cost' of the Work plus 15 percent B. Whenever any Changed or Extra Work is to be done, for which unit prices for the same type or class of Work are contained in the Contract Documents. such Work shall be done and will be measured and paid for pursuant to "Method A" hereinabove set forth and the applicable portion of the Contract Documents C. Methods B and C shall include an itemized cost breakdown for the material and labor involved. and a maximum of 15 percent for overhead and profit shall be allocated to the Contractor or Subcontractor which actually performs the Work. In determining the amount payable to the Contractor an additional 5 percent may be added to the amount payable to a Subcontractor d the Subcontractor actually performed the Work. but no "pyramiding" or additional percentage will be authorized for any Work done by a Sub - subcontractor D Resort will not be had. in any case. to Method 0 until negotiation has been entered into by the parties hereto under Methods B, or C as hereinabove set forth E When any change or extra Work is performed under Method D. the term "actual field cost" of such change or extra Work is hereby defined to be and shall include (1) The actual payroll cost of all workers such as foremen. equipment operators. mechanics. and laborers. for the time spent actually performing the change or extra.Work (2) All materials and supplies incorporated in the Changed or Extra Work. (3) All machinery and equipment for the time actually employed or used in the performance of the Changed or Extra Work based on the appropriate State Department of Highway's Equipment Schedule in force at the date of the Change Order. (4) Any transportation charges necessarily incurred in connection with any equipment authorized by the Engineer for use on said Changed or Extra Work but which is not already on the site (5) All power. fuel. lubricants. water. and similar operating expenses as well as other expendable materials. (6) All incidental expenses incurred as a direct result of such Changed or Extra Work, including payroll taxes and a prorate portion of premium on the Performance. Payment and Maintenance Bond. and. where the premiums therefore are based on payroll costs, on Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance. Workmen's Compensation Insurance, and Occupational Disease Disability Insurance. Builder's Risk. and other insurance required by the Contract. (7) No repairs. replacements or other forms of overhead expense shall be included in "actual field costs" F. The Engineer may direct the form in which the accounts of the actual field costs shall be kept and may also specify in writing. before the Work commences. the method of doing the Work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment. if required. which shall be used in the performance of any Changed or Extra Work under Method D. In the event that machinery and heavy construction equipment are required for such Changed or Extra Work. the authorization and basis of payment for the use thereof shall be stipulated in the Change Order. G The 15 percent of the "actual field cost" to be paid to the Contractor or Subcontractor. as applicable. shall cover and be full compensation for the profits. overhead. general superin- tendence. and field office expense. and all other elements of cost not embraced within the "actual field cost' as herein defined. In determining the amount payable to the Contractor an additional 5 percent may be added to the amount payable to a Subcontractor if the Subcontractor actually performed the Work. but no "pyramiding" or additional percentage will be authorized for any Work done by Sub - subcontractors. H Daily reconciliation of materials and labor shall be made and signed by the Engineer and the Contractor's Superintendent I No claim for any Changed or Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless the Work is ordered and approved by a Change Order. J. No anticipated profits will be allowed for Work deleted. K The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills. payrolls and vouchers covering all items of cost and when requested by the Owner, give the Owner access to accounts relating thereto L Any Changed or Extra Work may be ordered by the Owner through the Engineer by means of a Change Order without invalidating the Contract and shall be considered a part of the Contract. subject to all of its terms. conditions, stipulations. review, guarantees. and tests. and may be performed without notice to the Surety on the Contractor's bond The Contractor and Surety hereby agree to these provisions. M The Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time. which are consistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents These may be accomplished by a Field Order and shall be binding on Owner. and also on Contractor who shall perform the change promptly If Contractor believes that a Field 13 Issue 11/88 Order justifies an increase in the Contract Price or Contract Time. Contractor shall make a claim under "Claims for Extra Cost' before doing the Work. 65. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST. A In case any instructions, either oral or written. appear to the Contractor to involve a Changed or Extra Work for which. In his opinion. he should receive extra compensation, he shall make a written request to the Engineer for a Change Order authorizing such change or extra Work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute a change or extra Work, or concerning the payment thereof. and the Engineer requires its performance under the Contract Documents. the Contractor shall proceed with the Work after presenting written notice of claim for extra cost to the Owner through the Engineer and shall keep an accurate account of the "actual field cost" thereof as provided for in Method D under Changed or Extra Work. The Contractor will thereby not waive any right he might have to compensation for the claimed extra cost in connection with a change or extra Work. The matter will be submitted to the Owner for final determination as to whether or not a change or extra Work was involved. and d sa the amount due to the Contractor. B. Any claims for extra cost pursuant to this section. together with supporting documents and receipts. must be filed with the Engineer within 15 consecutive calendar days after performing the Work for which extra cost is claimed The Owner shall have the right to reject any claim for extra cost if the foregoing procedure is not followed. C In giving verbal instructions. the Engineer shall have authority to make minor changes that do not involve extra cost or time 67. of performance and are not i nconsistent with the design concept and purposes of the contracted Work; but otherwise. except in an emergency endangering life or property, no change or extra Work shall be performed without a Change Order a approved by the Engineer and the Owner. and no claim for extra cost shall be valid unless so approved. except as otherwise 68. provided herein. 66. EXTENSION OF CONTRACT PERIOD A. The Contractor expressly covenants and agrees that in undertaking to complete the Work within the Contract Period fixed in the Contract Documents. he has taken into consid- eration and made allowances for all delays and hindrances incidental to such Work. whether growing out of delays in securing materials or workers. or otherwise B B. Should the Contractor be delayed in the prosecution and completion of the Work by any cause beyond his control. he shall have no claim or right of action for damages from the Owner for any such cause or delay, unless the cause or delay is the result of fraud or active interference by the Owner. The Contractor will in such case be granted an extension of the time specified for completion of the Work as the Owner may award in writing on account of such delay. provided. however. that claim for such extension of time is made by the Contractor to the Owner, through the Engineer, m writing, within 10 consecutive calendar days from the time when the alleged cause for delay arises. The Owner reserves the right to withhold granting of any time extension until the stipulated Contract Period is about to expire C The Owner. at the Owner's sole discretion. may waive the above requirements and grant extensions of time for any reason or reasons the Owner deems valid. D Time extensions, however. will not be granted for rain, wind. flood or other natural phenomena of normal intensity for the locality where Work is performed. For purpose of determining extent of delay attributable to unusual weather phenomena. a determination shall be made by comparing the weather for at least any continuous one- fourth of the Contract Period involved with the average of the preceding 5 year climatic range during the same time interval based on U.S. Woollier Bureau statistics for the locality where the Work is performed E. An extension of the Contract Period may be granted by the Owner for any of the following reasons. (1) Additional Work resulting from a modification of the Contract Documents for the Project (2) Any preference. priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government. (3) Unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor. including. but not restricted to acts of God which are unusual weather phenomena. or acts of the public enemy, acts of the Owner. acts of another contractor in the performance of a contract with the Owner. fires, epidemics, quarantine restrictions. industry -wide strikes. freight embargoes. and severe weather as provided above. (4) Delays of a Contractor's Subcontractors or suppliers occasioned by any of the causes specified in (2) and (3) hereof. F. Provided. however. the Contractor shall notify the Owner through the Engineer of the alleged cause of such delay as herembefore required. The Owner shall ascertain the facts and the extent of the delay with the assistance of the Engineer. G. No extension of the Contract Period will be allowed for variation between Contract quantities and actual quantities which cannot be predetermined and which amount is more or less than 25% of the Contract quantities CERTIFICATES, WARRANTIES, AND GUARANTEES. Contractor shall provide a minimum of 6 copies of any warranty. guaranty or certificate as may be required by the Contract Documents to the Owner through the Engineer prior to the cceptance of the Work by the Owner. CONSTRUCTION REVIEW AND TESTING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. A. During the progress of the Work. it shall be subject to the review and observation of the Engineer. The Contractor shall afford every reasonable facility and assistance to the Engineer to make such review. If any Work is covered up without approval or consent of the Engineer It must, if required by the Engineer, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense. . The fact that the Engineer is on the Project site shall not be taken as an acceptance of the Contractor's Work or relieve the Contractor from performing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents Contractor shall notify the Engineer upon completion of his Contract, and the Work shall be given final construction review by the Engineer, and any tests and re -tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. If all parts of the Work are acceptable and substantially comply with the Contract Documents. a recommendation of final acceptance will be made by the Engineer to the Owner. If parts of the Work are not acceptable and require additional Work by the Contractor to complete the project, necessitating additional review, calculations, or redesign by the Engineer. the cost of such additional reviews. calculations, or redesign including time, travel and lodging, shall be paid for by the Contractor to the Owner who will reimburse the Engineer. The Owner may offset said monies by deducting that amount from the payments due the Contractor C. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer. at least 7 days in advance of construction and without charge, samples or specifications of materials he proposes to use and shall not use these materials until he has received approval from the Engineer. D Contractor shall furnish tests and reports on tests of all materials and equipment called for in the Contract Documents The testing laboratory must be approved by the Owner and the Contractor shall pay the cost of the tests. and necessary retests. 14 Issue 11/88 including all transportation charges and other direct costs unless otherwise provided by the Contract Documents. E All tests and retests, unless otherwise provided, shall be in accordance with the pertinent sections of the latest edition of the Standards applicable to the material or devices to be tested. A partial list of the principal societies referred to and their abbreviations follow. A.AS H TO A.0 I AISC A.N S.I. AS H.RA.E. A S.TM. A.WWA C.S. ISA FS NEC N E M A. U.L American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials American Concrete Institute American Institute of Steel Construction American National Standards Institute American Society of Heating. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers American Society for Testing Materials American Water Works Association Commerical Standards Instrument Society of America Federal Specifications National Electric Code National Electrical Manufacturers Association Underwriters Laboratories Inc F. All parts of the Work and improvements shall conform to the standards of construction as given in detail under the various items of the Contract Documents. and if they do not conform. shall be made to do so by rebuilding or replacing or otherwise as instructed by the Engineer or Owner. without further cost to the Owner, before acceptance shall be made G. If after the commencement of the Work the Engineer determines that any Work requires special inspection. testing. or approval not otherwise provided for. the Engineer will. upon written authorization from the Owner. instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection, testing. or approval. and the Contractor shall give timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Engineer may observe such inspecting, testing, or approval If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents or with respect to the performance of the Work. with laws. ordinances. rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction. the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof. including the Engineer's additional services made necessary by such failure H. Required certificates of inspection. testing or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered by him to the Engineer 69. "GOOD REPAIR" PERIOD. A The Contractor hereby agrees to keep all Work constructed under the Contract in Good Repair for a minimum period of one (1) year, unless a longer period is otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. from the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. No provision of the Contract Documents shall be valid which limits the "Good Repair" period to less than one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner B It is intended that this provision shall apply whether or not bond is required. as a personal obligation of the Contractor C The obligations of the Contractor as herein provided shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any obligations Imposed upon him by special guarantees required by the Contract Documents or otherwise prescribed by law, 70. REMEDY OF DEFECTS, DETERIORATION OR DEPARTURE FROM STANDARDS. A I1. in the opinion of the Owner, a defect exists. or functional or structural deterioration takes place. or serious departure from the standards of original construction exists in the Work or improvements as stated in the definition of "Good Repair ", the Owner or the Owner's representative shall so fortify the Contractor by registered or certified letter mailed to the address given in the Contractor's proposal. or to the Contractor's last business address known to him who gives the notice. and a copy of such notice will be sent to the Surety It is mutually agreed that such notice shall be sufficient and adequate, If the Contractor shall not proceed to remedy such defects. deficiencies. deterioration or departures as are called to his attention in the notice within 10 consecutive calendar days after mailing of notice. the Owner shall cause the repairs to be made as the Owner deems best. and the entire cost thereof shall be paid by the Contractor or his Surety or deducted from any amounts as are due to the Contractor from the Owner. The Owner may remedy defects or cause repairs to be made in any part of the Work in accordance with this procedure without declaring the Contract in default as stipulated in Paragraphs 81. 82 and 83 or terminating the Contract as provided under Paragraph 80 8. In lieu of remedying defects, deterioration or departure from standards. Owner may choose to accept the defective portion of the Work The Owners acceptance of such defective portion of the Work is expressly conditional on the Contractor providing an adequate reduction in the Contract Price: or if after final acceptance. Contractor providing an adequate cash payment to Owner. 71. VARIATION FROM ESTIMATED QUANT DES. The Contractor may reasonably expect a variation in estimated quantities such that the total payment for the completed Work may range from 75 to 125 percent of the total amount of the Contract based on the estimated quantities. The Contractor will not be allowed any claims for anticipated profits. for loss of profits. or for any damages because of a difference between the estimate of any item and the amount of the Item actually required or for the elimination of any part of the Work. Funds for construction of the Work herein contemplated are limited. The Owner reserves the right to eliminate or reduce the items of the Proposal or any of the Work as may be required to bring the cost of the Work within the limits of available funds. 72. PROGRESS PAYMENTS. A. Where progress or monthly payments are permissible by law and provided for by the Contract Documents, such payments in the amount indicated in the Contract Documents will be paid unless otherwise provided by law. 8. When monthly progress payments are authorized. the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer an itemized application for payment on forms approved by the Engineer. supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or the Engineer may require. C If payments are to be authorized on account of materials. supplies and equipment not incorporated in the Work. but delivered and suitably stored at the Project site and necessary for the orderly prosecution of the Work. the Contractor shall furnish with his application for payment bills of sale. bills of lading, invoices. or such other evidence as may be appropriate and satisfactory to the Engineer and the Owner that establishes (1) Actual cost. including transportation to the Project site. of such materials. supplies and equipment: (2) Title thereof in Owner upon payment: (3) Appropriate insurance coverage to protect the Owners interest therein upon payment D The Contractor warrants that title to all materials. supplies and equipment covered by an application for payment. whether incorporated in the Work or not. will pass to the Owner. upon receipt of payment by the Contractor. free and clear of all liens. claims, security interests or encumbrances. and that such materials. supplies or equipment furnished or installed comply with the applicable requirements of the Contract Documents 15 Issue 11/88 E The passing of title to the Owner as herein provided shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of the sole and complete responsibility for (1) The care and protection of the materials, supplies. equipment and Work for which payment has been made (2) The restoration of any damaged or destroyed Work. materials, supplies or equipment Such responsibility shall continue until all Work under the Contract has been completed by the Contractor and accepted by the Owner F Under no circumstances shall payment constitute a waiver of the Owner's right to require the Contractor to fulfill all of the terms and conditions of his Contract. 73. PAYMENT WITHHELD. A. The Engineer may recommend withholding payment or. on account of subsequently discovered evidence. may nullify the whole or part of any application for payment to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of any one or more of the following (1) Defective Work not remedied (2) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims by other parties against the Contractor (3) Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor. materials, equipment or for equipment rental. (4) A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance then unpaid. (5) Damage to another Contractor. (6) Failure or refusal by the Contractor to comply with an instruction of the Engineer within a reasonable time. (7) Unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work. (8) Liquidated damages payable by the Contractor (9) Any other violation of or failure to comply with the provisions of the Contract Documents B. When the above grounds are removed. payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. The right to withhold payment however. shall not preclude the Owner from his right to declare the Contractor in default of his Contract for any of the reasons stipulated under "Contracts in Default" 74. FINAL MEASUREMENTS. Final measurements. on unit price contracts, will be made by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall at his own expense provide help and other assistance as may be required for making same. 76. PAYMENT, USE OR OCCUPANCY OF WORK NOT EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE. No progress or final payment. nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the Work or improvement. nor acceptance thereof. by the Owner shall be evidence of the performance of the Contract or construed to be acceptance of defective Work or improper materials. either wholly or in part. The Contractors obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. 76. ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT. A. As soon as the Work has been substantially and satisfactorily completed. the Engineer will make a final estimate and prepare a certificate stating that the Work provided for under the Contract has been completed in substantial compliance with the Contract Documents and is recommended for acceptance by him under the terms and conditions thereof. with stated qualification. if any. and the balance found to be due the Contractor according to the terms of payment shall be paid B. by the Owner within 30 days after the date of the final estimate. provided. however. if any applicable Municipal Ordinance. State. County, District. or Federal law designates the manner of final payment, 0 shall be followed in lieu of the manner of final payment outlined above. Prior to receiving final payment. the Contractor. if and as requested by the Owner or by the Engineer, shall file with the Owner. (1) a receipt showing payment in full, or (2) a waiver of claim and lien. from each Subcontractor. materialman. supplier. manufacturer and dealer for all labor. equipment and material used or furnished by each on the Work and (3) a complete release of all claims and hens which may have arisen under the Contract. In lieu thereof. the Owner may request and the Contractor shall file statements showing the balance due on all accounts The manner in which settlement is made by the Owner with the Contractor shall not release the Contractor or his Surety under the payment provisions of his bond 77. ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT CONST TUTES RELEASE. A The acceptance of final payment by the Contractor shall operate as a release to the Owner and to the Engineer of all claims and hens by the Contractor for all Work and services furnished in connection with the Contract and for every act and neglect of the Owner or of the Engineer. and others relating to or arising out of the Work under the Contract. except for claims previously made in writing and still unsettled 8. No payment, final or otherwise, shall operate to release the Contractor or his Surety from any obligations under the Contract or under the Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bond. including. but not limited to any one or more of the following: (1) Obligations arising from or relating to latent defects. (2) Faulty Work or material appearing after any payment (3) Failure of the construction, materials. equipment or fixtures to perform efficiently in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. (4) Unsettled claims (5) Claims for non - payment of laborers, mechanics, material - men or suppliers. or for equipment used or rented (6) Claims under the maintenance requirements provided for by the bond or "Good Repair" requirements of the Contract Documents or any special guarantees provided for under the Contract Documents (7) Claims for any other obligations otherwise prescribed by law. 78. OWNER'S RIGHTTO CORRECT DEFICIENCIES. 9 the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the Work properly in accordance with the Contract Documents. the Owner, after 10 consecutive calendar days following written notice to the Contractor and his Surety, may, without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have, and without declaring the Contract in default or terminating the Contract, correct such deficiencies in Work intended to become a permanent part of the Project, and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor or the entire cost thereof shall be paid by the Contractor or his Surety 79. SUSPENSION OF WORK BY OWNER. The Owner reserves the right to suspend and reinstate execution of the whole or any part of the Work contracted for without invalidating the provisions of the Contract in any way Orders for suspension or reinstatement of the Workwill be issued by the Owner to the Contractor in writing 16 Issue 11/88 80. RIGHT OF OWNER TO TERMINATE CONTRACT. Should it appear at any time that the Work is not being prosecuted with sufficient competence or rapidity to insure the proper completion of the Work within the stipulated time. and. if after 10 consecutive calendar days following written notice to the Contractor and the Surety. he fails to increase the quality or the quantity of his Work. or both. the Owner reserves the right to annul and cancel the Contract and relet the Work or any part thereof. or at the Owner's option to complete it by day labor. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for damages on account of such annulment. and hewn be held liable for costs and expenses incurred in reletting or otherwise completing the Work under the Contract. All money due the Contractor will be retained until the Work is completed and all expenses and costs have been deducted and any money due the Owner. after such deductions have been made, shall be paid by the Contractor or his Surety who hereby agree to these provisions. 81. CONTRACTS IN DEFAULT. The Owner may declare the Contract in default for any one or more of the following reasons as determined by the Owner in his sole discretion. A. Failure to complete the Work within the Contract Period or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner. B. Failure or refusal to comply with an instruction of the Engineer within a reasonable time C Failure or refusal to remove rejected materials. equipment or supplies. O. Failure or refusal to remedy anew any detective or unaccep table Work E. Bankruptcy or insolvency, or the making of an assignment for the benefit of creditors F. Failure to provide a qualified superintendent. or sufficient and competent workers or Subcontractors to carry on the Work in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner, or failure to prosecute the Work in accordance with the agreed schedule of completion. G Failure to provide proper materials. equipment or supplies. H Disregard or violation of any important provisions of the Contract Documents as determined by the Engineer. I. Disregard of laws. ordinances, rules. regulations or orders of any public body having jurisdiction, or the violation of any construction or safety codes 82. PROCEDURE FOR DECLARING CONTRACT IN DEFAULT. The Owner may declare the Contract in default by giving written notice to the Contractor and his Surety to that effect Said notice shall contain the reason or reasons for default and shall fix a day certain, not less than 10 consecutive calendar days after the date of said notice. when the Contract shall be declared in default, unless the Contractor or his Surety remedies the default to Owner's satisfaction or makes satisfactory arrangement with the Owner for its remedy prior to the day certain fixed in said notice of declaring the Contract in default The Owner may. at its sole option. extend the day certain for declaring the Contract in default without prejudice to the Owners right to thereafter declare the Contract in default If the Contractor or his Surety fail to remedy the default or to make satisfactory arrangements for its remedy prior to the date set for declaring the Contract in default. or any extension thereof. the Contract shall be declared in default 83. COMPLETION OF CONTRACTS IN DEFAULT. A. If for any reason a Contract is declared in default. the Surety shall have the right to take over and perform the Contract: provided. however, if the Surety does not commence performance thereof within 10 consecutive calendar days after date of notice to the Contractor and his Surety that the Contract has been declared in default, the Owner. without process or action at law. may take over all or any portion of the Work and complete 1 at Owners option. either by reletting or by day labor. for the account and at the expense of the Contractor B Whether the Surety takes over and completes the Contract, or the Owner takes over and completes it by reletting or by day labor. the Contractor and his Surety shall be liable to the Owner for any cost in excess of the original Contract price expended in completing the Work. including in part. any direct and indirect costs and professional services, and any liquidated damages stipulated in the Proposal form, together with such other damages which the Owner may suffer on account of the Contractor's nonperformance of his Contract. The Owner may waive such portion of the liquidated damages as may accrue after the Work is in condition for the safe. convenient and beneficial use or occupancy by the Owner for all of the purposes for which it was intended. C. In the event the Owner takes over the Work and prosecutes the same to completion. either by reletting or by day labor, the Contractor shall peaceably relinquish possession of said Work or the parts thereof specified in the above notice of declared default to the Contractor and his Surety D The Owner may, at Owner's option and at a rental which is considered reasonable, take possession of and utilize in completing the Work such materials. appliances. equipment. tools. plant, and machinery on the site of the Work and suitable therefore until the Work is complete. E. All money due the Contractor will be retained until the Work is completed and all expenses and costs have been deducted and any money due the Owner after such deductions or adjustments have been made as herein provided shall be paid by the Contractor or his Surety who hereby agree to all provisions herein. F Neither the Owner. Engineer. nor any of their officers, agents or employees shall be in any way liable or accountable to the Contractor or his Surety for the method bywhich the completion of the said Work or any portion thereof. may be accomplished or for the price paid therefore Should the cost of Contract completion. including all proper charges, be less than the original Contract Price. the amount so saved shall be paid to the Contractor G. The Owner. notwithstanding the method used in completing the Contract, shall not forfeit the right to recover damages from the Contractor or his Surety for the Contractors failure to timely complete his entire Contract The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for damages on account of the method used by the Owner in completing the Contract. H Maintenance of the Work shall continue to be the Contractor's and his Surety's responsibilities as provided for in the bond or "Good Repair requirements of the Contract Documents or any special guarantees provided for under the Contract Documents or any other obligations otherwise prescribed by law. 84. OWNER'S REMEDIES CUMULATIVE AND NONWAIVER. No right or remedy conferred upon or reserved to the Owner by the'Contract shall be considered exclusive of any other remedy or contractual right. but the same shall be distinct. separate and cumulative. and shall be in addition to every other remedy existing at law or in equity or by statue: and every remedy given by the Contract to the Owner may be exercised from time to time as often as the occasion may arise, or as may be deemed expedient. No delay or omission on the part of the Owner to exercise any right or remedy arising from any default on the part of the Contractor shall impair any such right or remedy or shall be construed to be a waiver of any such default or an acquiescence thereto or otherwise affect the right of the Owner to enforce the same in the event of any subsequent breach or default by the Contractor 17 Issue 11/88 1 00805 -1 1 01 90I28 SECTION 00805 01 02 02 ' 03 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 II 07 07 08 1.01 ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, AND REVISIONS 08 09 09 I 10 11 A. General Conditions, Paragraph "2. DEFINITIONS," add the following: 10 11 12 12 13 "J. Engineer, Architect, Engineer- Architect, or Architect Engineer. 13 II 14 (1) Each of these terms shall mean the Owner's designated 14 15 Construction Contract Administrator or HDR Engineering, Inc. 15 16 acting severally within the scope of the particular duties 16 I 17 entrusted to them, unless otherwise provided in the Contract 17 18 Documents. 18 19 (2) HDR Engineering, Inc. has responsibilities to the Owner which 19 ' 20 21 are limited to shop drawing review, performance of a final 20 inspection, and other services which may be agreed upon by the 21 22 Owner of HDR Engineering, Inc. 22 23 (3) Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any 23 II 24 contractual relationship between HDR Engineering, Inc. and any 24 25 Contractor or Subcontractor. 25 26 26 ' 27 28 "P. Owner: Whenever the word "Owner" is used in the Contract Documents, 27 it shall be understood to be the City of Round Rock and duly 28 29 authorized representatives thereof. 29 30 30 I 31 CC. Contract period shall be defined as the time period commencing on the 31 32 date of issuance of Notice to Proceed and concluding after expiration 32 33 of the number of days defined in the Agreement for the satisfactory 33 ' 34 completion of the work." 34 35 35 36 B. General Condition Paragraph "10. EQUIPMENT STIPULATION," delete 36 II 37 Paragraphs B and C. Major equipment is not identified on this project. 37 38 38 39 C. General Conditions, Paragraph "11. OR APPROVED EQUAL CLAUSE," add the 39 40 following: 40 ' 41 "1. Comply with Section 01640 of the Specifications for specific methods 41 42 of requesting approval." 42 43 43 ' 44 45 D. Conditions, Paragraph "15. CONTRACT SECURITY," modify as follows: 44 45 46 1. Delete "Coincident with the execution ... security for the 46 II 48 following:." - Add "Coincident with the execution of the Contract, 47 48 the Contractor shall furnish Performance and Payment Bonds executed 48 49 on original copies of American Institute of Architects forms A312 as 49 50 security for the following:." 50 II 51 2. Delete Section 15.A(5), The requirement for a maintenance bond. 51 52 52 53 E. General Conditions, Paragraph "25. DRAWINGS AND PLANS AND 53 ' ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 00805 -2 01 SPECIFICATIONS," delete paragraph A. and add the following: 01 ' 02 02 03 "A. Drawings and Contract Documents for Contractor Use: See Section 03 ' 04 01060 - General Construction Requirements." 04 05 05 06 F. General Conditions, Paragraph "40. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, OPERATOR'S 06 07 INSTRUCTIONS, SERVICE AND PARTS MANUALS," add the following: 07 ' 08 08 09 "Q. Comply with Section 01340 of the Specifications for additional 09 10 requirements." 10 ' 11 11 12 G. General Conditions, Paragraph "41, DRAWINGS SHOWING CHANGES DURING 12 13 CONSTRUCTION," amend as follows: 13 14 14 ' 15 "41. Contractor shall post and keep current a complete set of Contract 15 16 Documents, including all addenda, change orders and pertinent data 16 17 on site at all times. Throughout the progress of construction, the 17 II Contractor shall maintain a careful up -to -date record of all 18 19 changes on the plans and drawings during actual construction. Upon 19 20 completion of work and prior to acceptance by the Owner, the 20 ' 21 Contractor shall file with the Engineer one set of complete 21 22 reproducible drawings with all changes and Contractor's field 22 23 construction notes neatly and legibly recorded thereon. Such 23 24 drawings shall indicate in part the exact routing, if changed from 24 ' 25 drawing location, of sewer, water, gas, chemical piping, fuel oil 25 26 tanks and piping, fire protection piping and any other major buried 26 27 utility piping, and routing of buried electrical feeder and changes 27 , 28 to routing of conduit runs which are buried or concealed in 28 29 concrete slabs. These Drawings shall be transmitted to the Owner 29 30 as Record Drawings." 30 31 31 ' 32 H. General Conditions, add the following: 32 33 33 34 "85. ARBITRATION. 34 II 35 36 A. All questions subject to arbitration under the Contract may be 36 37 submitted to arbitration at the choice of either party to the 37 II 38 dispute. 38 39 39 40 B. The Contractor shall not cause a delay of the work during any 40 41 arbitration proceedings, except by agreement with the Owner. 41 ' 42 42 43 C. Demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the 43 44 Engineer, in the case of an appeal from his decision, within 10 44 ' 45 days of its receipt. In any other case, appeal shall be filed 45 46 within a reasonable time after cause therefore and in no case 46 47 later than the time of final payment, except as otherwise 47 48 expressly stipulated in the Contract. If the Engineer fails to 48 ' 49 make a decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to 49 50 arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered 50 51 against the party appealing. 51 ' 52 52 53 D. No one shall be nominated or act as an arbitrator who is in 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 anyway financially interested in the Contract or in the business 01 affairs of either the Owner, Contractor or Engineer. 02 03 E. Unless otherwise provided by controlling statutes, the parties 04 may agree upon one arbitrator; otherwise, there shall be three, 05 one named in writing by each party to the Contract, satisfactory 06 to the other party and to the Engineer, and the third chosen by 07 these two arbitrators; or if they fail to select a third within 08 15 days, then he shall be chosen by the presiding officer of the 09 Bar Association nearest to the location of the Work. Should the 10 party demanding arbitration fail to name an arbitrator within 10 11 days of his demand, his right to arbitration shall lapse. Should 12 the other party fail to choose an arbitrator within said 10 days, 13 then such presiding officer shall appoint such arbitrator. 14 Should either party refuse or neglect to supply the arbitrators 15 with any papers or information demanded in writing, the 16 arbitrators are empowered by both parties to proceed exparte. 17 18 F. If there be one arbitrator, his decision shall be binding. Such 19 decision shall be a condition precedent to any right of legal 20 action; and, wherever permitted by law, it may be filed in Court 21 to carry it into effect. 22 23 G. The arbitrator or arbitrators, if he or they deem that the case 24 demands it, are authorized to award to the party whose contention 25 is sustained such sums as he or they shall deem proper for the 26 time, expense and trouble incident to the appeal and, if the 27 appeal was taken without reasonable cause, damages for delay. 28 The arbitrators shall fix their own compensation unless otherwise 29 provided by agreement, and shall assess the cost and charges of 30 the arbitration upon either or both parties. 31 32 H. The award of the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be in writing, 33 and it shall not be open to objection on account of the form of 34 the proceeding or the award, unless otherwise provided by the 35 controlling statutes. 36 37 I. In the event of such statutes providing on any matter covered by 38 this article otherwise than as hereinbefore specified, the method 39 of procedure throughout and the legal effect of the award shall 40 be wholly in accordance with said statutes, it being intended 41 hereby to lay down a principle of action to be followed, leaving 42 its local application to be adapted to the legal requirements of 43 the jurisdiction having authority over the arbitration. 44 45 J. Arbitration proceedings, the subject matter of which may involve 46 insurance coverage, shall not proceed until arbitration action 47 consultation is had with the insurer to effect complete 48 understanding with the insurer as to procedure to be followed." 49 50 I. General Conditions, add the following: 51 52 "86. Sales Taxes 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 00805 -3 00805 -4 01 01 02 In order for the contractor performing this contract to purchase 02 03 consumable materials by issuing a resale certificate in lieu of 03 04 payment of sales tax: 04 05 05 06 The contract will transfer title of consumable, but not incorporated, 06 07 materials to the Owner at the time and point of receipt by the 07 08 contracter, and no use may be made of the materials prior to passage 08 09 of title. 09 10 10 11' The contractor will be paid for these materials by the Owner as soon 11 12 as practicable. Payment will not be made directly but considered 12 13 subsidiary to the pertinent bid item. The contractor's monthly 13 14 estimate will state that the estimate includes consumables that were 14 15 received during the month covered by the estimate. 15 16 16 17 A representative of the Owner must be notified as soon as possible of 17 18 the receipt of these materials so that an inspection may be made by 18 19 the representative. Where practical, the materials will be labeled 19 20 as the property of the City of Round Rock." 20 21 21 22 END OF SECTION 22 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01060 -1 01 89G17 SECTION 01060 01 02 02 03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 03 04 - 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 08 09 09 10 A. A preconstruction conference shall be held after award of Contract. 10 11 Owner will notify the Contractor as to the date, time, and location of 11 12 the conference 2 weeks in advance of the proposed date. Contractor's 12 13 Project Manager and Project Superintendent and Contractor's Subcontractor 13 14 Representatives shall attend. 14 15 15 16 1.02 SITE MAINTENANCE AND TEMPORARY PAINTING 16 17 17 18 A. Paint and maintain in good repair temporary structures, fences, 18 19 barricades and related items. 19 20 20 21 B. Keep site clean of debris, rubble and paper. Store and stockpile 21 22 materials in an orderly manner and protect against damage. 22 23 23 24 C. Maintain conditions of access road to site such that access is not 24 25 hindered as the result of construction related deterioration. 25 26 26 27 1.03 DRAWINGS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONTRACTOR USE 27 28 28 29 A. Owner will provide four sets of plans and contact documents for the 29 30 Contractor's use at no charge. . - 30 31 31 32 B. Additional documents after "no- charge" documents will be furnished to 32 33 Contractor at cost. 33 34 34 35 C. Contractor shall pick up all "no- charge" documents within 10 days from 35 36 date of Notice to Proceed. 36 37 37 38 1.04 TESTING 38 39 39 40 A. Except as set out in other sections of Contract Documents, payment for 40 41 soil, concrete and other testing is as follows: 41 42 1. Soils and concrete testing: The Owner will pay for "Passing" soils 42 43 and "Passing" concrete tests on the Project. Costs of corrective 43 44 action, costs of "Failing" soils and concrete tests, and cost of 44 45 testing associated with establishment of mix design are the sole 45 46 responsibility of the Contractor. 46 47 2. Other testing: Unless specifically stated otherwise in individual 47 48 sections of specifications or drawings, required testing, testing 48 49 procedures, reports, certificates, and costs associated with all 49 50 phases of securing required satisfactory test information which may 50 51 be required by individual sections of specifications or drawings are 51 52 the full responsibility of the Contractor. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01060 -2 01 1.05 ORDER OF CONSTRUCTION 01 1 02 02 03 A. Construction operations will be scheduled to allow the Owner 03 04 uninterrupted operation of existing facilities. Coordinate connections 04 05 with existing work to ensure timely completion of interfaced items. 05 06 06 07 B. At no time shall Contractor or his employees modify operation of the 07 , 08 existing facilities or start construction modifications without approval 08 09 of the Owner except in emergency to prevent or minimize damage. 09 10 10 , 11 C. Coordinate all construction activities to minimize disruption of existing 11 12 plant operations. Do not commence any work which affects the operation 12 13 of existing facilities without contacting the Owner at least two working 13 , 14 days prior to the time such activities are anticipated to begin. Provide 14 15 all temporary pumps, connections, and other facilities necessary to allow 15 16 continuous operation of existing facilities while making connections. 16 17 17 ' 18 1.06 PROJECT MEETINGS 18 19 19 20 A. Conduct construction meetings involving: 20 ' 21 1. Contractor's Project Manager. 21 22 2. Contractor's Project Superintendent. 22 23 3. Owner's designated Representative(s). 23 24 4. Contractor's subcontractors as appropriate to the work in progress. 24 ' 25 25 26 B. Conduct meetings monthly. 26 27 27 ' 28 C. Take meeting minutes and submit copies of meeting minutes to participants 28 29 and designated recipients identified at the Preconstruction Conference. 29 30 Corrections, additions or deletions to the minutes shall be noted and 30 , 31 addressed at the following meeting. 31 32 32 33 D. Schedule meetings for most convenient time frame. 33 34 34 ' 35 E. The Contractor shall have available at each meeting up -to -date record 35 36 drawings. 36 37 37 ' 38 1.07 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 38 39 39 40 A. Furnish all utilities required for execution of the work, except water, 40 41 which the Owner will provide at no charge. 41 , 42 42 43 B. Furnish and maintain sanitary facilities for the use of the Contractor's 43 44 personnel. 44 II 45 46 END OF SECTION 46 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 SECTION 01150 01 02 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE FOR CONNECTIONS 02 03 03 04 04 05 PART 1 - GENERAL 05 06 06 07 1.01 SUMMARY - 07 08 08 09 A. Section includes: 09 10 1. Construction sequencing requirements relating to connections to 10 11 existing facilities. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 17 17 18 1.02 GENERAL 18 19 19 20 A. Construction operations will be scheduled to allow the Owner 20 21 uninterrupted operation of existing adjacent facilities except as noted 21 22 herein. Coordinate connections with existing work to ensure timely 22 23 completion of interfaced items. 23 24 24 25 B. At no time shall Contractor or his employees modify operation of the 25 26 existing facilities or start construction modifications without seven (7) 26 27 days written request for approval of the Owner except in emergency to 27 28 prevent or minimize damage. 28 29 29 30 C. The Owner's authorization to begin modifications or connections will be 30 31 dependent on weather conditions and plant inflows from the time of the 31 32 request to the time work is scheduled to begin. 32 33 33 34 D. The Owner reserves the right to withdraw approval up to the time work 34 35 actually begins on a connection or modification. 35 36 36 37 E. If final completion of the project is delayed beyond the Contract 37 38 completion date and the principal cause is the Owner's delay of approval 38 39 of commencing one or more connections, then the completion date will be 39 40 extended by a time period equal to the time period that the Owner's 40 41 approval is delayed. 41 42 42 43 1.03 PROCEDURES 43 44" 44 45 A. Lay all pipe and conduit and construct all facilities as close to the 45 46 point of connection as possible prior to beginning work requiring 46 47 interruption of plant operations. 47 48 48 49 B. Coordinate work schedule and activities with the plant superintendent on 49 50 a daily basis after approval to make a connection is requested, and until 50 51 that connection is completed. 51 52 52 53 C. Unless stated otherwise, perform all connection work requiring 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01150 -1 01150 -2 01 interruptions of plant operations between 1:00 a.m. and 4:00 a.m. with the 01 02 total duration of interruptions not to exceed 2 hours. 02 03 03 04 D. Provide temporary plugs, bulkheads, etc. to allow use of facilities with 04 05 partially completed connections. 05 06 06 07 1.04 HEADWORKS CONNECTIONS 07 08 08 09 A. Construct the headworks and make connections in the following general 09 10 sequence: 10 11 1. Construct headworks structure. 11 12 2. Connect piping to the existing 20 IN and 4 IN force mains, and to the 12 13 16 IN influent pipe to Treatment Plant No. 2. 13 14 a. Install the 20 IN force main below existing pipelines shown on 14 15 the plans; furnish additional fittings as required which may not 15 16 be shown on the plans. 16 17 3. Connect piping to the existing 14 IN force main and to the 16 IN 17 18 influent pipe to Treatment Plant No. 3. 18 19 4. Connect piping to the existing 16 IN force main. 19 20 20 21 B. This work is expected to require shut -downs of the affected lift 21 22 stations. 22 23 23 24 1.05 PARSHALL FLUME CONNECTIONS 24 25 25 26 A. Construct the Parshall flume and make connections in the following 26 27 general sequence: 27 28 1. Construct Parshall Flume structure. 28 29 2. Connect 30 IN piping to Treatment Plant No. 3 and to the outfall pipe 29 30 downstream of the flume. 30 31 a. This work will require shut -down of Treatment Plant No. 3. 31 32 b. Perform connection work between 10:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m.; total 32 33 duration of shut -down may not exceed 8 hours. 33 34 3. Connect to the existing 15 IN PVC. 34 35 a. This work will require shut -down of Treatment Plant No. 2. 35 36 36 37 1.06 CHLORINATOR CONNECTIONS 37 38 38 39 A. Install the new chlorinators and make connections in the following general 39 40 sequence: 40 41 1. Install all chlorinators, valves, piping, and accessories in the new 41 42 chlorinator enclosure off -site. 42 43 2. Remove the existing chlorinator enclosure, install the new enclosure, 43 44 and make all piping connections. 44 45 a. Perform installation during the time period specified in 1.03, 45 46 above. 46 47 b. This work will require manual chlorination of effluent. 47 48 48 49 1 07 ELECTRICAL SERVICE CONNECTIONS 49 50 50 51 A. Install the new service conductors and ties to the main bus bar in 51 52 conjunction with connecting the Parshall Flume piping to Treatment Plant 52 53 No. 3 (See Paragraph 1.05). 53 END OF SECTION ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 91C06 SECTION 01340 01 02 02 03 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SAMPLES, OPERATION AND 03 04 MAINTENANCE MANUALS, EQUIPMENT RECORD SHEETS 04 05 05 06 06 07 PART 1 - GENERAL 07 08 08 09 1.01 SUMMARY O9 10 10 11 A. General: 11 12 1. Section Addresses: 12 13 a. Mechanics of Shop Drawing Process. 13 14 14 15 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 15 16 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 16 17 the Contract. 17 18 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 18 19 3. Sections in Divisions 2 through 16 identifying submittal 19 20 requirements. 20 21 21 22 1.02 SUBMITTALS: GENERAL ' 22 23 23 24 A. Transmit all submittals to: 24 25 25 26 HDR Engineering, Inc. 26 27 3000 South IH -35, Suite 400 27 28 Austin, Texas 78704 28 29 Attn: Duwain Whitis, P.E. 29 30 30 31 B. Utilize two copies of attached Exhibit "A" to transmit all shop drawings 31 32 and samples. 32 33 33 34 C. Utilize two copies of attached Exhibit "B" to transmit all Operation and 34 35 Maintenance Manuals and Equipment Record Sheets (Exhibits "Cl" and "C2 "). 35 36 36 37 D. All transmittals must be from Contractor and bear his approval stamp. 37 38 Transmittals will not be received from or returned to subcontractors. 38 39 1. Shop drawing transmittal stamp shall read "(Contractor's Name) 39 40 represents that we have determined and verified all field dimensions 40 41 and measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog 41 42 numbers, and similar data, and that we have checked with the 42 43 requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents as stipulated in 43 44 General Conditions Paragraph 40G." Transmittals will not be received 44 45 from or returned to subcontractors. 45 46 2. Operation and Maintenance Manual transmittal stamp may be 46 47 Contractor's standard approval stamp. 47 48 48 49 E. Provide submittal information defining specific equipment or materials 49 50 utilized on the project. Generalized product information not clearly 50 51 defining specific equipment or materials to be provided will be rejected. 51 52 52 53 F. Calculations required in individual specification sections will be 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01340 -1 01340 -2 01 received for information purposes only and will be returned stamped "E. 01 02 Engineer's Review Not Required" to acknowledge receipt. 02 03 03 04 G. Submittal Schedule: 04 05 1. Schedule of shop drawings: 05 06 a. Submitted and approved within 10 days of receipt of Notice to 06 07 Proceed. 07 08 2. Shop drawings: 08 09 a. Submittal and approval prior to 50 percent completion. 09 10 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Data Record Sheets: 10 11 a. Initial submittal within 15 days after date shop drawings are 11 12 approved. 12 13 b. Full payment will not be made on any equipment or materials 13 14 until an approved Operation and Maintenance Manual is received. 14 15 15 16 H. Retainage will not be reduced below 10 percent until all shop drawings 16 17 are approved. 17 18 18 19 I. Final payment on the project shall not be made until final approved 19 20 copies of all Operation and Maintenance Manuals including Equipment 20 21 Record Sheets (with equipment serial numbers) have been received. 21 22 22 23 1.03 SUBMITTALS: SHOP DRAWINGS 23 24 24 25 A. Transmittal Mechanics: 25 26 1. Number transmittals consecutively beginning with 1. 26 27 2. Assure resubmitted items retain the original number but with an added 27 28 suffix letter starting with "A." 28 29 3. Restrict each letter of transmittal to only one Specification Section 29 30 or portion thereof. 30 31 4. Provide breakout of each transmittal component on transmittal form 31 32 "A." Each component thus defined will receive specific action by the 32 33 Engineer. Define manufacturer, item, tag number, and Drawing/ 33 34 Specification reference. 34 35 5. Do not change the scope of any resubmittal from the original 35 36 transmittal scope. If some components of the original transmittal 36 37 received "A" or "B" Action and others did not, resubmit the "A" or 37 38 "B" Action components in subsequent resubmittal packages. Provide a 38 39 summary sheet containing all components of the original transmittal 39 40 at the front of each resubmittal. Indicate each component as either 40 41 A or B, "outstanding," or "submitted for action." Reference items 41 42 previously receiving "A" or "B" Action to the transmittal in which 42 43 "A" or "B" Action was received. "Outstanding" items are defined as 43 44 items previously not receiving "A" or "B" Action and not yet 44 45 resubmitted for re- review. Use this term "Submitted for action" to 45 46 indicate items which are included for review in the transmittal. 46 47 6. For 8 -1/2 x 11 IN size sheets, provide four copies of each page for 47 48 Engineer plus the number required by the Contractor. The number of 48 49 copies required by the Contractor will be defined at the 49 50 Preconstruction Conference, but shall not exceed (10). 50 51 7. For items not covered in paragraph 7, submit one reproducible 51 52 transparency and one print of each drawing until approval is 52 53 obtained. Utilize mailing tube; do not fold. The Engineer will mark 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 and return the reproducible to the Contractor for his reproduction 01 02 and distribution. 02 03 8. Provide clear space (3 IN SQ) for Engineer stamping of each component 03 04 defined in A.5. 04 05 9. Contractor shall not use red color for marks on transmittals. 05 06 Duplicate all marks on all copies transmitted, and ensure marks are 06 07 photocopy reproducible. Outline Contractor marks on reproducible 07 08 transparencies with a rectangular box. 08 09 09 10 B. Transmittal Contents: 10 11 1. Coordinate and identify shop drawing contents so that all items can 11 12 be easily verified by the Engineer. 12 13 2. Identify equipment or material use, tag number, drawing detail 13 14 reference, weight, and other project specific information. 14 15 3. Provide sufficient information together with technical cuts and 15 16 technical data to allow an evaluation to be made to determine that 16 17 the item submitted is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 17 18 4. Submit items like equipment brochures, cutsof fixtures, product data 18 19 sheets or catalog sheets on 8 -1/2 x 11 IN pages. Indicate exact item 19 20 or model and all proposed options. 20 21 5. Include legible scale details, sizes, dimensions, performance 21 22 characteristics, capacities, test data, anchoring details, 22 23 installation instructions, storage and handling instructions, color 23 24 charts, layout drawings, parts catalogs, rough -in diagrams, wiring 24 25 diagrams, controls, weights and other pertinent data. Arrange data 25 26 and performance information in format similar to that provided in 26 27 Contract Documents. Provide, at minimum, the detail provided in the 27 28 Contract Documents. 28 29 6. If proposed equipment or materials deviate from the Specifications or 29 30 Drawings in any way, clearly note the deviation and justify the said 30 31 deviation in detail in a separate letter immediately following 31 32 transmittal sheet. If explanation is not given, shop drawings will 32 33 be returned without action. 33 34 34 35 1.04 SUBMITTALS: SAMPLES 35 36 36 37 A. Identify sample as to: manufacturer, item, use, type, project 37 38 designation, tag number, specification section or drawing detail 38 39 reference, color, range, t 1 xture, finish and other pertinent data. 39 40 40 41 B. Include application specific brochures, and installation instructions. 41 42 42 43 C. Provide Contractor's stamp of approval on samples as indication of his 43 44 checking and verification of dimensions and coordination with 44 45 interrelated work. 45 46 46 47 D. Resubmit samples of rejected items. 47 48 48 49 E. Approved samples submitted or constructed, constitute criteria for 49 50 judging completed work. Finished work or items not equal to samples will 50 51 be rejected. 51 52 52 53 F. Samples may be retained for comparison purposes. Remove samples when 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01340 -3 01340 -4 01 directed. Include in bid all costs of furnishing and removing samples. 01 1 02 02 03 1.05 SUBMITTALS: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND EQUIPMENT 03 , 04 RECORD SHEETS 04 05 05 06 A. Transmittal Mechanics: 06 07 1. See Paragraph 1.02 C. 07 , 08 2. Provide transmittal form for Operation and Maintenance Manual with 08 09 original number of the approved item plus a suffix "O -M." 09 10 3. Submit one copy until approval is received. 10 ' 11 4. Acceptable submittals will be retained with the transmittal form 11 12 returned with a request for five additional copies. 12 13 5. Deficient submittals will be returned along with the transmittal form 13 , 14 which will be marked to indicate deficient areas. 14 15 6. Identify resubmittals with the original number plus a suffix letter 15 16 starting with "A." 16 II 17 7. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals printed on 8 -1/2 x 11 IN 17 18 size heavy first quality paper with standard three -hole punching and 18 19 bound in stiff metal hinged binder constructed as a 19 20 three - {post }{ring} style. Provide binders with titles on front and 20 II on spine of binder. Tab each section of manuals for easy reference 21 22 with plastic- coated dividers. Provide index for each manual. 22 23 Provide plastic sheet lifters prior to first page and following last 23 , 24 page. 24 25 8. Reduce drawings or diagrams bound in manuals to an 8 -1/2 x 11 IN or 25 26 11 x 17 IN size. However, where reduction is not practical to ensure 26 27 readability, fold larger drawings separately and place in vinyl 27 ' 28 envelopes which are bound into the binder. Identify vinyl envelopes 28 29 with drawing numbers. 29 30 30 II B. Transmittal Content: 31 32 1. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manuals is applicable but not 32 33 necessarily limited to: 33 II 34 a. Major equipment. 34 35 b. Equipment used with electrical motor loads of 1/6 HP nameplate or 35 36 greater. 36 37 c. Specialized equipment including valves and instrumentation and 37 ' 38 control system components for HVAC and process systems such as 38 39 meters, recorders, and transmitters. 39 40 d. Valves greater than 12 IN DIA. ' 40 , 41 e. Water control gates. 41 42 2. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals which include, but are not 42 43 necessarily limited to, the following detailed information, as 43 II 44 applicable: 44 45 a. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, limiting 45 46 operations. 46 47 b. Assembly, disassembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and 47 II 48 checking instructions. 48 49 c. Operating instructions for start -up, routine and normal 49 50 operation, regulation and control, shutdown, and emergency 50 II 51 conditions. 51 52 d. Lubrication and maintenance instructions. 52 53 e. Guide to "troubleshooting." 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 f. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 01 02 g. Outline, cross - section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; 02 03 and electrical diagrams, including elementary diagrams, wiring 03 04 diagrams, connection diagrams, word description of wiring 04 05 diagrams and interconnection diagrams. 05 06 h. Test data and performance curves. 06 07 i. A list of recommended spare parts with a price list and a list of 07 08 spare parts provided under these specifications. 08 09 j. Copies of installation instructions, parts lists or other 09 10 documents packed with equipment when delivered. 10 11 k. Instrumentation or tag numbers relating the equipment back to the 11 12 Contract Documents. 12 13 1 Include a filled -out copy of the Equipment Record Sheet as the 13 14 first page(s) of each Operation and Maintenance Manual. Complete 14 15 maintenance requirements in detail. Simple reference to the 15 16 Manual is not acceptable. - 16 17 m. For equipment items involving components or subunits, an 17 18 Equipment Record Sheet for each operating component or subunit is 18 19 required. 19 20 20 21 1.06 SUBMITTALS: SHOP DRAWINGS: ENGINEER'S REVIEW ACTION 21 22 22 23 A. Items within transmittals will be reviewed for overall design intent and 23 24 will receive one of the following actions: 24 25 25 26 A - FURNISH AS SUBMITTED 26 27 B - FURNISH AS NOTED (BY ENGINEER) 27 28 C - REVISE AND RESUBMIT 28 29 D - REJECTED 29 30 E - ENGINEER'S REVIEW NOT REQUIRED 30 31 31 32 B. Transmittals received will be initially reviewed to ascertain inclusion 32 33 of Contractor's approval stamp. Drawings not stamped by the Contractor 33 34 or stamped with a stamp containing language other than that specified in 34 35 Paragraph 1.02 D will not be reviewed for technical content and will be 35 36 returned without any action. 36 37 37 38 C. Transmittals returned with Action "A" or "B" are considered ready for 38 39 fabrication and installation. If for any reason a transmittal that has 39 40 an "A" or "B" Action is resubmitted, it must be accompanied by a letter 40 41 defining the changes that have been made and the reason for the 41 42 resubmittal. Destroy or conspicuously mark "SUPERSEDED" all documents 42 43 having previously received "A" or "B" Action that are superseded by a 43 44 resubmittal. 44 45 45 46 D. Transmittals with Action "A" or "B" combined with Action "C" (Revise and 46 47 Resubmit) or "D" (Rejected) will be individually analyzed giving 47 48 consideration as follows: 48 49 1. The portion of the transmittal given "C" or "D" will not be 49 50 distributed (unless previously agreed to otherwise at the 50 51 Preconstruction Conference). One copy or the one transparency of the 51 52 "C" or "D" drawings will be marked up and returned to the Contractor. 52 53 Correct and resubmit items so marked. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01340 -5 01340 -6 01 2. Items marked "A" or "B" will be fully distributed. 01 02 3. If a portion of the items or system proposed are acceptable, however, 02 03 the major part of the individual drawings or documents are incomplete 03 04 or require revision, the entire submittal may be given "C" or "D" 04 05 Action. This is at the sole discretion of the Engineer. In this 05 06 case, some drawings may contain relatively few or no comments or the 06 07 statement, "Resubmit to maintain a complete package." Distribution to 07 08 the Owner and field will not be made (unless previously agreed to 08 09 otherwise). 09 10 10 11 E. Failure to include any specific information specified under the submittal 11 12 paragraphs of the specifications will result in the transmittal being 12 13 returned to the Contractor with "C" or "D" Action. 13 14 14 15 F. In addition to calculations stamped and returned "E. Engineer's Review 15 16 Not Required," other transmittals such as submittals which the Engineer 16 17 considers as "Not Required," submittal information which is supplemental 17 18 to but not essential to prior submitted information, or items of 18 19 information in a transmittal which have been reviewed and approved in a 19 20 prior transmittal, will be returned with Action "E. Engineer's Review 20 21 Not Required." 21 22 22 23 END OF SECTION 2 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS Project Name: I Project Owner: I Contractor: Address: Atrn.: Date Transmitted: No. Description Cop ies I I I I I I I I — I Remarks: Exhibit A Date Received: Checked By: HDR Engineering, Inc. g I Log Page: Address: HDR No.: 'Spec. Section: 1st. Sub. U Atm.: Previous Transmittal Date: *The Action Designated Above is in Accordance with the Following Legend: A - Furnish as Submitted D - Rejected Comments: B - Furnish as Noted C - Revise and Submitt 1. Not enough information for review. 2. No reproducibles submitted. 3. Copies illegible. 4. Not enough copies submitted. 5. Wrong sequence number. 6. Wrong resubmittal suffix. 7. Wrong spec. section. 8. Wrong form used. 9. See comments. Distribution: Contractor U File U vm 1.0 June 1990 Shop Drawing Transmittal No. Manufacturer Dwg. or Data No. E - Engineer's review not required 1. Submittal not Required. 2. Supplemental Information. Submittal retained for informational purposed only. 3. Information reviewed and approved on prior submittal. 4. See comments. ReSub. U Action Taken' By Date Field U Owner U Other U Project Name: 1 Project Owner: Contractor: Address: I I I I I I Remarks: �z Date Transmitted: Previous Transmittal Date: No. I Description of Item Copies To: Owner: Address: The Action Designated Above is in Accordance with the Following Legend: A - Acceptable, Provide five additional Copies B - Furnish as Noted Distribution: Contractor U File U Vet 1.0 tune 1990 Exhibit B C- Revise and Resubmit. This Operation and Maintenance Manual Submittal is deficient in the following areas: 1. Equipment record sheets. 2. Functional description. 3. Assembly, disassembly, installation, alignment, adjustment & checkout instructions. 4. Operating instructions Comments: 0 & M Manual Transmittal No. From: Date: By Field U Manufacturer MDR Engineering, Inc. D - Rejected Date Received: Checked By: 'Log Page: 'MDR No.: 'Spec. Section: 1st. Sub. U Owner U ReSub. U Dwg. or Data I Action Taken' No. 5. Lubrication & maintenance instructions. 6. Troubleshooting guide. 7. Parts list and ordering instructions. 8. Organization (index and tabbing). 9. Wiring diagrams & schematics specific to installation. 10. Outline, cross section & assembly diagrams. 11. Test data & performance curves. 12. Tag or equipment identification numbers. 13. Other - see comments. Date Other 11 Project Name Page of Date Started Estimated /Ile Equip. Descnption IDate Installed Equip. Location ICOSt Protect Equip. Tag No. I Shop Dwg Trans. No Spec. Sec. Equip. Manuf. Menu!. Address Phone Local Vendor Vendor Address r Phone BREAK - IN MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS (INITIAL OIL CHANGES, ETC.) D W M o S A Hours PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS D W M O S A Hours I RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS ELECTRICAL NAMEPLATE DATA Part No. Part Name Quantity Equip. Make Serial No. 110 No. Model No. 'Frame No. HP IV. 'Amp. IHZ PH I RPM ISF 'DULY Code Ilns. Cl. Des. ITYpe Nema IC Amb. (Temp. Rise Rating Misc. MECHANICAL NAMEPLATE DATA Equip. Make Serial No. 110 No. r -- Model No. I Frame No. HP IRPM ICap. ISize TDH IImp.Sz. I Des ICFM PSI IASSY. No. I Case No. Misc. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ver 1.0 June 1990 Exhibit Cl Equipment Maintenance Data Summary ubricant Information on following page Equipment Record Equipmont Description 'Project Equip. Tap No. 'Pape of Lubricant Point Lubricant Type Manufacturer Product 1 AGMA it SAE 0 ISO 2 ' 4 5 I Lubricant Point edlll lueor qni Manufacturer Product A� SAE 0 ISO 1 I 2 I I 4 ' Lubricant Point Manufacturer Product 1 AGMA 0 SAE 0 ISO Lubricant Point Manufacturer Product AGMA 0 SAE If ISO � E IT 1 � I bricant Lu Point Manufacturer Product AGMA 0 SAE 0 ISO 2 B 3 4 5 Lubricant Point Manufacturer Product AGMA 0 SAE 0 ISO a l r i IT � I Lubricant Point Manufacturer Product AGMA 0 SAE 0 ISO E IT IlTI I I r—. I II 1-Da Exhibit C2 Lubrication Summary Ver 1.0 June 1990 Equipment Record 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 88J13 SECTION 01600 01 02 02 03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Scheduling of product delivery. 11 12 2. Packaging of products for delivery. 12 13 3. Protection of products against damage from: 13 14 a. Handling. • 14 15 b. Exposure to elements or harsh environments. 15 16 16 17 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 17 18 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 18 19 the Contract. 19 20 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 20 21 21 22 C. Payment: 22 23 1. No payment will, be made to Contractor for equipment 2 not properly 23 24 stored and insured. 24 25 a. Previous payments for items will be deducted from subsequent 25 26 progress estimate(s) if proper storage procedures are not 26 27 observed. 27 28 28 29 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 29 30 30 31 A. Qualifications: 31 32 1. Follow manufacturer's written directions for storage and handling. 32 33 33 34 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 34 35 35 36 A. Scheduling: 36 37 1. Schedule delivery of products or equipment as required to allow 37 38 timely installation and to avoid prolonged storage. 38 39 39 40 B. Packaging: 40 41 1. Deliver products or equipment in manufacturer's original unbroken 41 42 cartons or other containers, clearly and fully marked and identified 42 43 as to manufacturer, item, and installation location. Provide 43 44 manufacturer's instructions for storage. 44 45 45 46 C. Protection: 46 47 1. Protect all products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer's 47 48 written directions. 48 49 a. Store products or equipment in location to avoid physical damage 49 50 to items while in storage. 50 51 b. Handle products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer's 51 52 recommendations and instructions. 52 53 2. Protect equipment from exposure to elements and keep thoroughly dry. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01600 -1 01600 -2 01 3. When space heaters are provided in equipment, connect and operate 01 02 heaters during storage until equipment is placed in service. 02 03 03 04 04 05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION) 05 06 06 07 07 08 PART 3 - EXECUTION 08 09 09 10 3.01 STORAGE FACILITIES 10 11 11 12 A. Provide a weatherproof temporary storage building or trailer specifically 12 13 for the purpose of providing for protection of products and equipment. 13 14 Size building to accommodate anticipated storage items. Provide methods 14 15 of storage of products and equipment off the ground. Equip building with 15 16 lockable doors and lighting, and provide electrical service for equipment 16 17 space heaters and heating or ventilation as necessary to provide storage 17 18 environments acceptable to specified manufacturers. Locate building 18 19 on -site in a location approved by Engineer. Remove building from site 19 20 prior to startup and demonstration period. 20 21 21 22 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 22 23 — 23 24 A. Inspect all products or equipment delivered to the site prior to 24 25 unloading. Reject all products or equipment that are damaged, used, or 25 26 in any other way unsatisfactory for use on Project. 26 27 27 28 B. Monitor storage area to ensure suitable temperature and moisture 28 29 conditions are maintained. 29 30 30 31 END OF SECTION 31 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01 89B06 SECTION 01601 01 02 02 03 JOB CONDITIONS 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Job conditions. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 17 17 18 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS 18 19 19 20 A. Prior to installation of material, equipment and other work, verify with 20 21 Subcontractors, material or equipment manufacturers, and installers that 21 22 the substrate or surface to which those materials attach is acceptable 22 23 for installation of those materials or equipment. (Substrate is defined 23 24 as building surfaces to which materials or equipment is attached to i.e., 24 25 floors, walls, ceilings, etc.). 25 26 26 27 B. Correct unacceptable, substrate until acceptable for installation of 27 28 equipment or materials. 28 29 29 30 END OF SECTION 30 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01601 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 90E10 SECTION 01640 01 02 02 03 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. The procedure for requesting substitution approval for a product 11 12 which is defined in the Contract Documents by reference to one or 12 13 more of the following: 13 14 a. Name of manufacturer. 14 15 b. Name of vendor. 15 16 c. Trade name. 16 17 d. Catalog number. 17 18 2. This Section does not address substitutions for major equipment. See 18 19 "Information for Bidders." 19 20 20 21 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 21 22 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 22 23 The Contract. 23 24 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 24 25 25 26 C. Requests for Substitution - General: 26 27 1. Base all bids on materials, equipment, and procedures specified. 27 28 2. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in 28 29 specifications by means of references to names of manufacturers and 29 30 vendors, trade names, or catalog numbers. When this method of 30 31 specifying is used, it is not intended to exclude from consideration 31 32 other products bearing other manufacturer's or vendor's names, trade 32 33 names, or catalog numbers, provided said products are capable of 33 34 accomplishing the same tasks as the products specifically indicated. 34 35 3. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable. 35 36 36 37 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 37 38 38 39 A. In making request for substitution or in using an approved product, 39 40 Contractor represents: 40 41 1. He has investigated proposed product, and has determined that it is 41 42 equal or superior in all respects to that specified, and that it will 42 43 perform function for which it is intended. 43 44 2. He will provide same guarantee for substitute item as for product 44 45 specified. 45 46 3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, 46 47 to include building modifications if necessary, making such changes 47 48 as may be required for work to be complete in all respects. 48 49 4. He waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution 49 50 which subsequently arise. 50 51 51 52 1.03 DEFINITIONS 52 53 .. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01640 -1 1 01640 -2 01 A. Product: Manufactured material or equipment. 01 ' 02 02 03 1.04 PROCEDURE FOR REQUESTING SUBSTITUTION 03 ' 04 04 05 A. Considered after award of Contract. 05 06 06 ' 07 B. Written requests through Contractor only. 07 08 08 09 C. Transmittal Mechanics: 09 10 1. Follow the transmittal mechanics prescribed for shop drawings in 10 ' 11 Section 01340. Product substitution will be treated in a manner 11 12 similar to "deviations," as described in paragraph 1.03 B.6 of 12 13 Section 01340. List the letter describing the deviation and 13 ' 14 justifications on the transmittal form in the space provided under 14 15 the column with the heading "DESCRIPTION." Include in the transmittal 15 16 letter, either directly or as a clearly marked attachment, the items 16 ' 17 listed in paragraph D below. 17 18 18 19 D. Transmittal Contents: 19 20 1. Product identification: 2 ' 21 a. Manufactures name. 21 22 b. Telephone number and representative contact name. 22 23 c. Specification section or drawing reference of originally 23 , 24 specified product, including discrete name or tag number assigned 24 25 to original product in the Contract Documents. 25 26 2. Manufacturer's literature clearly marked to show compliance of 26 , 27 proposed product with Contract Documents. 27 28 3. Itemized comparison of original and proposed product addressing 28 29 product characteristics including but not necessarily limited to: 29 30 a. Size. 30 31 b. Composition or materials of construction. 31 II 32 c. Weight. 32 33 d. Electrical or mechanical requirements. 33 34 4. Product experience: 34 35 a. Location of past projects utilizing product. 35 36 b. Name and telephone number of persons associated with referenced 36 ' 37 projects knowledgeable concerning proposed product. 37 38 c. Available field data and reports associated with proposed 38 39 product. 39 40 5. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 40 , 41 6. Data relating to changes in cost. 41 42 7. Samples: 42 43 a. At request of Engineer. 43 ' 44 b. Full size if requested by Engineer. 44 45 c. Held until substantial completion. 45 46 d. Engineer not responsible for loss or damage to samples. 46 47 47 , 48 1.05 APPROVAL OR REJECTION 48 49 49 50 A. Written approval or rejection of substitution given by the Engineer. 50 , 51 52 B. Engineer reserves the right to require proposed product to comply with 52 53 color and pattern of specified product if necessary to secure design 53 ' ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 01 intent. 01 02 02 03 C. In event substitution results in a change of Contract price or time, 03 04 provisions in General Conditions will be applied for adjustment. 04 05 05 06 D. Substitutions will be rejected if: 06 07 1. Submittal is not through the Contractor with his stamp of approval. 07 08 2. Requests are not made in accordance with this Section. 08 09 3. In the Engineer's opinion, acceptance will require substantial 09 10 revision of the original design. 10 11 4. In the Engineer's opinion, substitution is not equal to original 11 12 product specified or will not perform adequately the function for 12 13 which it was intended. 13 14 14 15 END OF SECTION 15 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01640 -3 DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 89E23 SECTION 02072 01 02 02 03 DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING 03 04 04 05 PART 1 - GENERAL 05 06 06 07 1.01 SUMMARY 07 08 08 09 A. Section Includes: 09 10 1. Demolition, cutting and patching. 10 11 11 12 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 12 13 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 13 14 the Contract. 14 15 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 15 16 3. Section 03002 - Concrete. 16 17 4. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 17 18 18 19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 20 20 21 A. Qualifications: 21 22 1. Use only firms or individual trades qualified to perform work 22 23 required under this Section. 23 24 24 25 1.03 SUBMITTALS 25 26 26 27 A. Shop Drawings: 27 28 1. See Section 01340. 28 29 2. Indicating manufacturer and type of proposed nonshrink grout and 29 30 epoxy bonding adhesive. 30 31 3. Indicating proposed materials and methods to be used for matching and 31 32 repairing existing construction. 32 33 33 34 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 34 35 35 36 A. General: 36 37 1. Salvage items, designated for Owner's salvage, as a unit. Clean, 37 38 list, tag for storage. Protect from damage and deliver to location 38 39 designated. Salvage each item with auxiliary or associated equipment 39 40 required for operation. 40 41 41 42 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS 42 43 43 44 A. Perform preliminary investigations as required to ascertain extent of 44 45 work. Conditions which would be apparent by such investigation will not 45 46 be allowed as cause for claims for extra costs. 46 47 47 48 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 48 49 49 50 A. Coordinate and reschedule work as required to preclude interference with 50 51 other operations. 51 52 52 53 1.07 PERMITS 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 02072 -1 02072 -2 1 01 01 ' 02 A. Obtain and pay for all permits required by all authorities having 02 03 jurisdiction and notify all involved utility companies. 03 ' 04 04 05 B. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction for any work which 05 06 affects access to or exit from such areas. Obtain approval of 06 07 authorities for any temporary construction which affects such areas. 07 ' 08 08 09 09 10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 10 11 11 12 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 12 13 13 14 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 14 , 15 Manufacturers are acceptable: 15 16 1. Nonshrink grout: 16 17 a. Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill. 17 ' 18 b. Masterflow 713 by Master Builders. 18 19 2. Epoxy bonding adhesive: 1 20 a. Euco No.452 MV by Euclid Chemical Co. 20 II 21 b. Sikadur 32, Hi -Mod by Sika Corporation. 21 22 22 23 2.02 MATERIALS - 23 24 24 ' 25 A. Temporary Partitions: 25 26 1. Plywood: 1/2 IN minimum for interior or exterior use. 26 27 2. Paneling: 1/4 IN minimum for interior use. 27 t 28 28 29 B. Nonshrink Grout: 29 30 1. Nonmetallic, noncorrosive and nonstaining. 30 , 31 2. Premixed with only water to be added in accordance with 31 32 manufacturer's instructions at jobsite. 32 33 3. Grout to produce a positive but controlled expansion. Mass expansion 33 34 not to be created by gas liberation or by other means. 34 ' 35 4. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days to be 6500 psi. 35 36 5. Coat exposed edges of grout with a cure /seal compound recommended by 36 37 grout manufacturer. 37 38 38 II 39 C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: 39 40 1. Two component, moisture insensitive adhesive manufactured for the 40 41 purpose of bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete. 41 ' 42 42 43 43 44 PART 3 - EXECUTION 44 ' 45 45 46 3.01 PREPARATION 46 47 47 48 A. Provide temporary partitions as required in public areas. 48 II 49 1. Construct partitions of braced plywood in exterior areas. 49 50 2. Adequately braced paneling may be used in interior areas. 50 51 51 ' 52 B. Provide covered passageways where necessary to ensure safe passage of 52 53 persons in or near areas of work. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 01 02 C. Provide substantial barricades and safety lights as required. 02 03 03 04 D. Provide temporary dustproof partitions where indicated or necessary. 04 05 1. Prevent infiltration of dust into occupied areas. 05 06 06 07 E. Provide temporary weather protection as necessary. 07 08 08 09 3.02 INSTALLATION 09 10 10 11 A. Cutting and Removal: 11 12 1. Remove existing work indicated to be removed, or as necessary for 12 13 installation of new work. 13 14 2. Neatly cut and remove materials, and prepare all openings to receive. 14 15 new work. 15 16 3. Remove masonry or concrete in small sections. 16 17 17 18 B. Modification of Existing Concrete: 18 19 1. Where indicated, remove existing concrete and finish remaining 19 20 surfaces as specified in Section 03002. 20 21 a. Protect remaining concrete from damage. 21 22 b. Make openings by sawing through the existing concrete. 22 23 c. Concrete may be broken out after initial saw cuts in the event 23 24 concrete thickness prevents cutting through. 24 25 d. Where sawing is not possible, make openings by drilling holes 25 26 around perimeter of opening and then chipping out the concrete. 26 27 1) Holes shall be sufficient in number to prevent damage to 27 28 remaining concrete. 28 29 2. Oversize required openings in existing concrete 1 IN on all sides and 29 30 build back to required opening size by means of nonshrink grout epoxy 30 31 bonded to the existing concrete. 31 32 3. Where oversized openings cannot be made, remove the concrete to the 32 33 required opening size and cut back exposed reinforcing 1 IN from face 33 34 of concrete and fill resulting holes with nonshrink grout. 34 35 35 36 C. Matching and Patching: 36 37 1. Walls, ceilings, floors or partitions: 37 38 a. Repair abutting walls, ceilings, floors or partitions disturbed 38 39 by removal. 39 40 b. Match and patch existing construction disturbed during 40 41 installation of new work. 41 42 2. Methods and materials: 42 43 a. Similar in appearance, and equal in quality to adjacent areas for 43 44 areas or surfaces being repaired. 44 45 b. Subject to review of Engineer. 45 46 46 47 D. Salvaged Items: 47 48 1. Thoroughly dry and clean all metal surfaces. 48 49 2. Prime all bare metal in accordance with Section 09905. 49 50 3. Clean and lubricate motors and other moving parts. 50 51 4. Brace motors attached to flexible mountings until reinstallation. 51 52 5. Dispose of items or materials not designated for Owner's salvage or 52 53 reuse. Promptly remove from site. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 02072 -3 02072 -4 01 6. Do not store or sell Contractor salvaged items or materials on site. 01 02 02 03 E. Clean Up: 03 04 1. Transport debris and legally dispose of off site. 04 05 05 06 END OF SECTION 06 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 90G17 SECTION 02200 01 02 02 03 EARTHWORK 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. All excavation and trenching. 11 12 2. Constructing fills, backfills, and embankments. 12 13 3. Disposal of waste excavation. 13 14 14 15 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 15 16 1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and General Terms and 16 17 Conditions of the Contract. 17 18 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 18 19 3. Section 02110 - Site Clearing. 19 20 20 21 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 21 22 22 23 A. Referenced Standards: 23 24 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 24 25 a. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 25 26 b. D698, Tests for the Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil 26 27 Aggregate Mixtures Using a 5.5 LB Rammer and a 12 IN Drop. 27 28 c. D1557, Tests for Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil 28 29 Aggregate Mixtures Using a 10 LB Rammer and a 18 IN Drop. 29 30 d. D1682, Test Methods for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile 30 31 Fabrics. 31 32 e. D2487, Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. 32 33 f. D3786, Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Knitted 33 34 Goods and Nonwoven Fabrics: Diaphragm Bursting Strength Testing 34 35 Method. 35 36 g. D4253, Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a 36 37 Vibratory Table. 37 38 h. D4254, Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and 38 39 Calculation of Relative Density. 39 40 40 41 B. Texas Department of Transportation (TDOT, formerly State Department of 41 42 Highways and Public Transportation) 42 43 1. 1982 Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, 43 44 and Bridges. 44 45 45 46 1.03 SUBMITTALS 46 47 47 48 A. Test Reports: 48 49 1. Submit test reports for proposed embankment material which are 49 50 prepared by an independent laboratory and which demonstrate 50 51 compliance with this specification. 51 52 , 2. Previously prepared test reports may be submitted providing that the 52 53 material stockpile sampled is the same stockpile proposed as the 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 02200 -1 02200 -2 1 01 source for mate al to be used on this project. 01 ' 02 02 03 B. Trench Excavation rotection Plan: 03 ' 04 1. Submit a pla © for trench excavation protection 04 05 conforming to the provisions of Current Occupational 05 06 Safety and Health Administration regluations relating 06 07 to excavations, trenching, and shoring. 07 ' 08 2. The plan must be prepared and sealed by a Professional 08 09 Engineer, registered in the State of Texas, and 09 10 qualified by experience to design trench protection 10 ' 11 systems. 11 12 3. Plan review by the Engineer will be for the sole 12 13 purpose of ensuring that the trench protection plan 13 14 was designed by a Registered Professional Engineer. 14 ' 15 No review of plan adequacy will be made. 15 16 16 17 1.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 17 ' 18 18 19 A. Trench Safety Protection will be measured by the linear 19 20 foot of pipeline trenches exceeding five feet in depth. 20 ' 21 Payment will be made at the unit price indicated on the 21 22 Proposal form. No separate measurement or payment will be 22 23 made for the remainder of the work of this section. 23 24 24 , 25 25 26 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 26 27 27 ' 28 2.01 EMBANKMENT MATERIAL 28 29 29 30 A. Underneath and within five feet of structures use Type A, Grade 2 crushed 30 ' 31 limestone flexible base conforming to TDOT Item No. 248. 31 • 32 32 33 B. More than five feet away from structures use existing near - surface soil 33 34 excavated in the course of construction. 34 II 35 36 2.02 GRANULAR BEDDING 36 37 37 ' 38 A. Clean sand conforming to ASTM C33 requirements for Fine Aggregate. 38 39 39 40 PART 3 - EXECUTION 40 41 41 ' 42 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 42 43 43 44 A. Protection 44 II 1. Protect existing surface and subsurface features on site and 45 46 adjacent to site as follows: 46 47 a. Provide barricades, coverings, or other types of protection 47 ' 48 necessary to prevent damage to existing items indicated to remain 48 49 in place. 49 50 b. Protect and maintain bench marks, monuments or other established 50 51 reference points and property corners. If disturbed or 51 52 destroyed, replace at own expense to full satisfaction of Owner 52 53 and controlling agency. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 c. Verify location of utilities. Omission or inclusion of utility 01 02 items does not constitute non - existence or definite location. 02 03 Secure and examine local utility records for location data. 03 04 1) Take necessary precautions to protect existing utilities from 04 05 damage due to any construction activity. 05 06 2) Repair damages to utility items at own expense. 06 07 _3) In case of damage, notify Engineer at once so required 07 08 protection measures may be taken. 08 09 d. Maintain free of damage, existing sidewalks, structures, and 09 10 pavement, not indicated to be removed. Any item known or unknown 10 11 or not properly located that is inadvertently damaged shall be 11 12 repaired to original condition. All repairs to be made and paid 12 13 for by Contractor. 13 14 e. Provide full access to public and private premises, fire 14 15 hydrants, street crossings, sidewalks and other points as 15 16 designated by Owner to prevent serious interruption of travel. 16 17 f. Maintain stockpiles and excavations in such a manner to prevent 17 18 inconvenience or damage to structures on site or on adjoining 18 19 property. 19 20 g. Avoid surcharge or excavation procedures which can result in 20 21 heaving, caving, or slides. 21 22 22 23 B. Site Conditions: 23 24 1. Water: 24 25 a. Do not proceed when soil moisture conditions will prevent proper 25 26 compaction of fills and embankments or will lead to rutting or 26 27 disturbance of previously placed, compacted, or graded material. 27 28 b. Conduct operations in a manner such that positive drainage is 28 29 provided at all times in areas where work is incomplete. Operate 29 30 pumps to dewater excavations where positive drainage is not 30 31 possible. Discharge water at locations which will not damage or 31 32 erode previously completed work or interfere with construction 32 33 operations. 33 34 c. Where groundwater is or is expected to be encountered during 34 35 excavation, install a dewatering system to prevent softening and 35 36 disturbance of subgrade below foundations and fill material, to 36 37 allow foundations and fill material to be placed in the dry, and 37 38 to maintain a stable excavation side slope. Groundwater shall be 38 39 maintained at least 3 FT below the bottom of any excavation. 39 40 Review soils investigation before beginning excavation and 40 41 determine where groundwater is likely to be encountered during 41 42 excavation. Employ dewatering specialist for selecting and 42 43 operating dewatering system. Keep dewatering system in operation 43 44 until dead load of structure exceeds possible buoyant uplift 44 45 force on structure. Dispose of groundwater to an area which will 45 46 - not interfere with construction operations or damage existing 46 47 construction. Install groundwater monitoring wells as necessary. 47 48 t Shut off dewatering system at such a rate to prevent a quick 48 49 upsurge of water that might weaken the subgrade. 49 50 2. Temperature: 50 51 a. Do not proceed on frozen ground or when the temperature is below 51 52 freezing. 52 53 b. Scarify and recompact embankment surfaces exposed to freezing 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 02200 -3 1 02200 -4 01 temperatures which are to receive subsequent fill. 01 02 02 03 C. Blasting 03 ' 04 1. Blasting with any type of explosive is prohibited. 04 05 05 06 3.02 EXCAVATION 06 ' 07 07 08 A. Site Excavation: 08 09 1. Excavate to the depths shown on the plans. Allow for placement of 09 10 subsequent materials, including roadway courses, liner materials, 10 ' 11 etc. 11 12 2. Excavate all materials encountered. No additional compensation will 12 13 be paid for varying subsurface conditions. 13 , 14 14 15 B. Structural Excavation: 15 16 1. Excavate underneath and within five feet of proposed structures prior 16 II 17 to placement of embankments. 17 18 2. Excavate all materials encountered. No additional compensation will 18 19 be paid for varying subsurface conditions. 19 20 3. Excavate as required to remove all existing gravel surfacing and 20 ' 21 native brown and dark brown near - surface soils down to pale yellow 21 22 and light yellowish -brown weathered limestone. Stockpile for 22 23 subsequent use and /or haul excess material from the site. 23 II 24 4. Remove loose material and debris in the bottom of the excavation 24 25 prior to steel placement. 25 P6 26 27 C. Trenching for Utilities 27 ' 28 1. Do not commence trenching until embankments and fills are completed 28 29 to an elevation at least 2.0 FT above the top of the pipe or conduit 29 30 2. Excavate all materials encountered. No additional compensation will 30 ' 31 be paid for varying subsurface conditions. 31 32 3. Excavation for Appurtenances: 32 33 a. 12 IN (minimum) clear distance between outer surface and 33 34 embankment. 34 ' 35 4. Trench Excavation: 35 36 a. Excavate trenches by open cut method to depth shown on Drawings 36 37 and necessary to accommodate work. 37 ' 38 b. Any trench or portion of trench, which is opened and remains idle 38 39 for seven calendar days, or longer, as determined by the Owner, 39 40 may be directed to be immediately refilled, without completion of 40 ' 41 work, at no additional cost to Owner. Said trench may not be 41 42 reopened until Owner is satisfied that work associated with 42 43 trench will be prosecuted with dispatch. 43 44 c. Observe following trenching criteria: 44 45 1) Excavate width to accommodate free working space. 45 46 2) Maximum trench width at top of pipe or conduit may not exceed 46 47 outside diameter of utility service by more than the 47 II following dimensions, unless shown otherwise on the plans. 48 49 49 50 OVERALL DIAMETER 50 ' 51 OF UTILITY SERVICE EXCESS DIMENSION 51 52 52 53 33 IN and less 18 IN 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 more than 33 IN 24 IN 01 02 02 03 3) Cut trench walls vertically from bottom of trench to 1 FT 03 04 above top of pipe, conduit, or utility service. 04 05 4) Provide the following minimum covers unless shown otherwise 05 06 on the plans or specific grades /elevations are indicated: 06 07 i) electrical conduits: 30 IN 07 08 ii) wastewater lines: 42 IN (includes force mains) 08 09 iii) water lines: 30 IN 09 10 iv) storm sewer & culverts: 12 IN 10 11 d. Notwithstanding any other provision, maintain stable trench walls 11 12 and protect personnel at all times from trench collapse. 12 13 13 14 3.03 DISPOSAL OF WASTE EXCAVATION 14 15 15 16 A. Dispose of excess and unsuitable excavated material off -site in a lawful 16 17 manner. 17 18 18 19 3.04 CONSTRUCTING FILLS AND EMBANKMENTS 19 20 20 21 A. Subgrade Preparation: 21 22 1. Proof roll subgrade to detect soft areas with at least a 15 -ton 22 23 roller. Remove and replace soft areas with compacted embankment 23 24 material. 24 25 25 26 B. Fill Placement: 26 27 1. Place fill material in layers not more than 6 IN maximum compacted 27 28 thickness. 28 29 2. Sprinkle or aerate to provide moisture content within 2% of optimum. 29 30 3. Compact each layer to 95% of maximum Modified Proctor density 30 31 (ASTM D-1557). 31 32 4. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures to 32 33 avoid uneven loads on structures. 33 34 5. Place fill to the elevations shown on the plans. Allow for placement 34 35 of subsequent materials, including roadway courses, liner materials, 35 36 etc. 36 37 37 38 3.05 BACKFILLING TRENCHES 38 39 39 40 A. Preparing Trenches: 40 41 1. Remove all loose material from the trench down to firm, stable 41 42 subgrade. 42 43 2. Remove unstable trench bottom caused by failure to dewater, rainfall, 43 44 or Contractor operations. Replace with granular bedding with no 44 45 additional compensation. 45 46 46 47 B. Setting pipe, conduit, and appurtenances: 47 48 1. Place in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 48 49 2. Excavate for pipe bells so pipe is fully supported. 49 50 50 51 ' C. Granular bedding: 51 52 1. Place as shown on the plans in lifts not exceeding 7 to 9 IN loose 52 53 depth. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 02200 -5 02200 -6 01 2. Tamp or compact thoroughly prior to placing subsequent lifts. 01 1 02 3. Water jetting is prohibited. 02 03 03 II 04 D. Backfilling: 04 05 1. Place in lifts not exceeding 6 to 8 IN loose depth. 05 06 2. Sprinkle or aerate as required to provide moisture content within 06 07 2% of optimum. 07 , 08 3. Compact each layer to 95% of maximum Modified Proctor density 08 09 (ASTM D- 1557). 09 10 4. Grade trench surfaces smooth, free of stones or other objects larger 10 , 11 than 2 IN in any dimension. 11 12 12 13 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 13 14 14 ' 15 A. Moisture - density relations will be established by the Engineer for all 15 16 materials to be compacted. Allow seven working days after sampling for 16 17 development of moisture - density relation prior to requesting compaction 17 ' 18 tests. 18 19 19 20 B. Extent of compaction testing will be as necessary to assure compliance 20 II 21 with specifications. 21 22 22 23 C. Give minimum of 24 HR advance notice to Engineer when ready for 23 24 compaction or subgrade testing and inspection. 24 ' 25 25 26 D. Should any compaction density test or subgrade inspection fail to meet 26 27 Specification requirements, perform corrective work as necessary. 27 II 28 28 29 E. Pay for all costs associated with corrective work and retesting resulting 29 30 from failing compaction density tests. 30 ' 31 31 32 3.07 MAINTENANCE 32 33 33 34 A. Protection of newly graded areas: 34 ' 35 1. Protect newly graded areas from erosion, and keep free from trash 35 36 and weeds. 36 37 2. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to 37 II 38 the specified dimensions and tolerances. 38 39 39 40 B. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction 40 41 operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape, and compact 41 ' 42 to the required density prior to further construction. 42 43 43 44 END OF SECTION 44 ' ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 89I20 SECTION 02260 01 02 02 03 TOPSOILING AND FINISHED GRADING 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Topsoiling and finished grading. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 17 3. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 17 18 4. Section 02930 - Seeding, Sodding and Landscaping. 18 19 19 20 C. Location of Work: All areas within limits of grading and all areas 20 21 outside limits of grading which are disturbed in the course of the work. 21 22 22 23 1.02 SUBMITTALS 23 24 24 25 A. Shop Drawings: 25 26 1. See Section 01340. 26 27 27 28 B. Project Data: 28 29 1. Test reports for furnished topsoil. 29 30 30 31 1.03 SITE CONDITIONS 31 32 32 33 A. Verify amount of topsoil stockpiled and determine amount of additional 33 34 topsoil, if necessary to complete work. 34 35 35 36 36 37 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 37 38 38 39 2.01 MATERIALS 39 40 40 41 A. Topsoil: 41 42 1. Original surface soil typical of the area. 42 43 2. Existing topsoil stockpiled under Section 02200. 43 44 3. Capable of supporting native plant growth. 44 45 45 46 2.02 TOLERANCES 46 47 47 48 A. Finish Grading Tolerance: 0.1 FT plus /minus from required elevations. 48 49 49 50 50 51 PART 3 - EXECUTION • 51 52 52 53 3.01 PREPARATION 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 02260 -1 02260 -2 1 01 01 1 02 A. Correct, adjust and /or repair rough graded areas. 02 03 1. Cut off mounds and ridges. 03 04 2. Fill gullies and depressions. 04 05 3. Perform other necessary repairs. 05 06 4. Bring all sub - grades to specified contours, even and properly 06 II 07 compacted. 07 08 08 09 B. Loosen surface to depth of 2 IN, minimum. 09 10 10 , 11 C. Remove all stones and debris over 2 IN in any dimension. 11 12 12 13 3.02 PLACING TOPSOIL 13 , 14 14 15 A. Do not place when subgrade is wet or frozen enough to cause clodding. 15 16 16 17 B. Spread to compacted depth of 4 IN for all disturbed earth areas. 17 , 18 18 19 C. If topsoil stockpiled is less than amount required for work, furnish 19 20 additional topsoil at no cost to Owner. . 20 II 21 22 D. Provide finished surface free of stones, sticks, or other material 1 IN 22 23 or more in any dimension. 23 ' 24 24 25 E. Provide finished surface smooth and true to required grades. 25 26 26 27 F. Restore by stockpile area to condition of rest of finished work. 27 , 28 28 29 3.03 ACCEPTANCE 29 30 30 , 31 A. Upon completion of topsoiling, obtain Engineer's acceptance of grade and 31 32 surface. 32 33, 33 II 34 B. Make test holes where directed to verify proper placement and thickness 34 35 of topsoil. 35 36 36 37 END OF SECTION 37 , ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 91E30 SECTION 02444 01 02 02 03 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Chain link fencing and gates. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 17 3. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 17 18 4. Section 03002 - Concrete. 18 19 19 20 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 20 21 21 22 A. Referenced Standards: 22 23 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 23 24 a." A153, Standard Specifications for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron 24 25 and Steel Hardware. 25 26 b. A392, Standard Specifications for Zinc- Coated Steel Chain -Link 26 27 Fence Fabric. 27 28 c. A428, Test Method for Weight of Coating on Aluminum Coated Iron 28 29 or Steel Articles. 29 30 d. A824, Metallic- Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire. 30 31 e. F552, Definitions of Terms Relating to Chain -Link Fencing. 31 32 f. F567, Standard Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence. 32 33 g. F626, Standard Specification for Fence Fittings. 33 34 h. F669, Standard Specification for Strength Requirements of Metal 34 35 Posts and Rails for Industrial Chain Link Fence. 35 36 i. F900, Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates. 36 37 j. F1083, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot - Dipped 37 38 Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures. 38 39 2. Chain Link Manufacturer's Institute for "Galvanized Steel Chain Link 39 40 Fence Fabric and Accessories." 40 41 - 41 42 B. Qualifications: 42 43 1. Installer bonded and licensed in the Project state. 43 44 2. Installer shall have a minimum 2 years experience installing similar 44 45 fencing. 45 46 46 47 1.03 DEFINITIONS 47 48 48 49 A. ASTM F552. 49 50 50 51 B. NPS: Nominal pipe size, in inches. 51 52 52 53 1.04 SUBMITTALS 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 02444 -1 02444 -2 01 01 1 02 A. Shop Drawings: 02 03 1. Product technical data including: 03 ' 04 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 04 05 standards referenced. 05 06 b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 06 II 07 2. Scaled plan layout showing spacing of components, accessories, 07 08 fittings, and post anchorage. 08 09 3. Mill certificates. 09 10 4. Source quality control test results. 10 ' 11 11 12 12 13 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 13 II 14 14 15 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 15 16 16 II 17 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 17 18 Manufacturers are acceptable: 18 19 1. Fence systems: 19 20 a. Cyclone. 20 21 b. Page - Wilson Corporation (Page Fence Division). 21 1 22 c. Anchor Fence, Inc. 22 23 d. Or approved equal. 23 ' 24 24 25 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 25 26 01640. 26 27 27 II 2.02 COMPONENTS 28 E9 29 30 A. Chain Link Fabric: 30 II 1. Fabric type: 31 32 a. ASTM A392 zinc - coated steel: 32 33 1) Coated before weaving, 2.0 OZ /SF. 33 II 34 2. Wire gage: 9. 34 35 3. Mesh size: 2 IN. 35 36 4. Selvage treatment: 36 37 a. Top: Knuckled. 37 ' 38 b. Bottom: Twisted and barbed. 38 39 39 40 B. Concrete: See Section 03002. 40 ' 41 41 42 C. Line Post: 42 43 1. ASTM F1083 pipe: 43 II 44 a. Schedule 40, NPS 2. 44 45 45 46 D. Corner or Terminal Posts: 46 47 48 1. ASTM F1083 pipe: 47 II a. Schedule 40, NPS 2 -1/2. 48 49 49 50 E. Brace and Rails: 50 II 1. ASTM F1083 pipe: 51 52 a. Schedule 40, NPS 1 -1/4. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 F. Tension Wire: 01 02 1. Bottom of fabric: 02 03 a. ASTM A824, galvanized steel, Class 3. 03 04 04 05 G. Fence Fittings (Post and Line Caps, Rail and Brace Ends, Sleeves -Top 05 06 Rail, Tie Wires and Clips, Tension and Brace Bands, Tension Bars, Truss 06 07 Rods): 07 08 1. ASTM F626. 08 09 09 10 H. Swing Gate: 10 11 1. ASTM F900. 11 12 2. Materials as specified for fence framework and fabric. 12 13 3. Hardware: 13 14 a. Galvanized per ASTM A153. 14 15 b. Hinges to permit 90- degree in and out gate opening. 15 16 16 17 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 17 18 18 19 A. Test related fence construction materials to meet the following 19 20 standards: 20 21 1. Posts and rails: 21 22 a. ASTM F669, Heavy Industrial. 22 23 23 24 24 25 PART 3 - EXECUTION 25 26 26 27 3.01 INSTALLATION 27 28 28 29 A. Install in accordance with: 29 30 1. Manufacturer's instructions. 30 31 2. Lines and grades shown on Drawings. 31 32 3. In accordance with ASTM P567. 32 33 33 34 B. Do not start fence installation before final grading is complete and 34 35 finish elevations are established. 35 36 36 37 C. Drill holes in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. 37 38 38 39 D. Set all posts in concrete footings with crowned, steel troweled tops of 39 40 following minimum dimensions: 40 41 1. Line posts: 10 IN DIA, 36 IN embedment. 41 42 2. All other posts up to 6 IN DIA: 12 IN DIA, 36 IN embedment. 42 43 43 44 E. Place fence with bottom edge of fabric 1 IN above grade. Correct minor 44 45 irregularities in earth to maintain maximum 2 IN clearance. 45 46 46 47 F. Space line posts at equal intervals not exceeding 10 FT OC. 47 48 48 49 G. Provide post braces for each gate corner pull and terminal post and first 49‘, 50 adjacent line post. 50 51 51 52 H. Install tension bars full height of fabric. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 02444 -3 01 I. Rails: Fit rails with expansion couplings of outside sleeve type. 01 02 1. Rails continuous for outside sleeve type for full length of fence. 02 03 03 04 J. Provide expansion couplings in top rails at not more than 20 FT 04 05 intervals. 05 06 06 07 K. Anchor top rails to main posts with appropriate wrought or malleable 07 08 fittings. 08 09 09 10 L. Install bracing assemblies at all end and gate posts, as well as side, 10 11 corner, and pull posts. 11 12 1. Locate compression members at mid - height of fabric. 12 13 2. Extend diagonal tension members from compression members to bases of 13 14 posts. 14 15 3. Install so that posts are plumb when under correct tension. 15 16 16 17 M. Pull fabric taut and secure to posts and rails. 17 18 1. Secure so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is 18 19 released. 19 20 2. Secure to posts at not over 15 IN OC, and to rails at not over 24 IN 20 21 OC, and to tension wire at not over 24 IN OC. 21 22 3. Use U- shaped wire conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached, 22 23 clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least two full 23 24 turns. 24 25 4. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazards to persons or clothing. 25 26 26 27 N. Install post top at each post. 27 28 28 29 0. Gates: 29 30 1. Construct with fittings or by welding. 30 31 2. Provide rigid, weatherproof joints. 31 32 3. Assure right, non - 'sagging, non - twisting gate. 32 33 4. Coat welds with rust preventive paint, color to match pipe. 33 34 34 35 END OF SECTION - 35 02444 -4 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 02513 -1 1 01 89G14 SECTION 02513 01 02 02 ' 03 04 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING 03 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 ' 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 ' 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Asphaltic concrete vehicular paving. 11 12 12 I 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 II 17 17 18 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 18 19 19 ' 20 A. Referenced Standards: 20 21 1. Federal Specifications (FS): 21 22 a. TT- P -115E. 22 23 2. Construction standards: State of Texas, Department of Transportation 23 II 24 (TDOT), "Standard Specifications for the Construction of Highways, 24 25 Streets, and Bridges, 1982 ", as amended to date. 25 26 a. Item 340, Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement. 26 I 27 b. Item 249, Flexible Base (Delivered). 27 28 c. Item 310, Prime Coat (Asphaltic Material Only). 28 29 29 I 30 B. Miscellaneous: 30 31 1. Should conflicts arise between standard specifications of government 31 32 agencies mentioned herein and Contract Documents, Contract Documents 32 33 shall govern. 33 I 34 34 35 1.03 SUBMITTALS 35 36 36 ' 37 38 A. Shop Drawings: 37 1. Product technical data including: 38 39 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 39 40 standards referenced. 40 I 41 b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 41 42 2. Asphalt design mix. 42 43 43 ' 44 44 45 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 45 46 46 I 47 2.01 MATERIALS 47 48 48 49 A. Asphaltic Concrete: Per TDOT 340 as it relates to materials and methods 49 50 only. 50 I 51 1. Type D surface course with AC 20 asphaltic cement. 51 52 52 53 B. Line Paint: 53 II ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 02513 -2 01 1. Nonreflective. 01 02 2. White. 02 03 3. Fed Spec TT- P -115E. 03 04 04 05 C. Flexible Base: Per TDOT 249 as it relates to materials and methods only. 05 06 1. Type A, Grade 1. 06 07 07 08 D. Prime Coat: Per TDOT 310 as it relates to materials and methods only. 08 09 1. Type MC -30. 09 10 10 11 11 12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 12 13 13 14 3.01 INSTALLATION 14 15 15 16 A. Construct to line, grade and section as shown on Drawings and in 16 17 accordance with referenced State Specifications. 17 18 18 19 B. Install an 8 IN compacted layer of base course. Compact to 95% of 19 20 maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM 01557 (modified 20 21 proctor). 21 22 22 23 C. Spread a prime coat uniformly on compacted base course at rate of 0.05 to 23 24 0.10 GAL per square yard. 24 25 25 26 D. Install a 2 IN compacted asphaltic concrete surface course. 26 27 27 28 E. Tolerance of Finished Grade: ±0.05 FT from required elevations. 28 P9 29 30 F. Line Painting: 30 31 1. Thoroughly clean surfaces which are to receive paint. 31 32 2. Make completely dry before paint is applied. 32 33 3. Do not paint until minimum of 5 days has elapsed from time surface is 33 34 completed. A longer period may be required if directed by Engineer. 34 35 4. Do not apply paint over wet surfaces, during wet or damp weather, or 35 36 when temperature is below 40 DegF. 36 37 5. Lay out markings and striping in accordance with Drawings. Width of 37 38 painted lines: 4 IN. 38 39 39 40 END OF SECTION 40 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 89G18 SECTION 02528 01 02 02 03 CONCRETE CURB 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Concrete curb. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 17 3. Section 03002 - Concrete. 17 18 18 19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 20 20 21 A. Referenced Standards: 21 22 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 22 23 (AASHTO): 23 24 a. M153, Specifications for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for 24 25 Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 25 26 b. M213, Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and 26 27 Structure Construction. 27 28 c. T99, Moisture - Density Relations of Soils Using a 5.5 LB (2.5 kg) 28 29 Rommer and a 12 IN Drop 4. 29 30 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 30 31 a. D2049, Relative Density for Cohesionless Soils. 31 32 32 33 1.03 SUBMITTALS 33 34 34 35 A. Shop Drawings: 35 36 1. Product technical data including: 36 37 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 37 38 standards referenced. 38 39 b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 39 40 2. Concrete mix design: 40 41 a. In accordance with Sections 03002. 41 42 b. Submit at least 10 days before concrete placement begins. 42 43 43 44 B. Samples: 44 45 1. Samples of fabricated jointing materials and devices. 45 46 46 47 47 48 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 48 49 49 50 2.01 MATERIALS 50 51 51 52 A. Concrete: Refer to Section 03002. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 02528 -1 02528 -2 01 B. Expansion Joint Material: 01 ' 02 1. Preformed. 02 03 2. Non - extruding cork, self - expanding cork, sponge rubber or 03 ' 04 cork - rubber, AASHTO M153 or M213. 04 05 05 06 C. Joint Sealing Material: 06 07 1. Hot - poured type. 07 , 08 2. Fed Spec SS -S -164 or cold - applied mastic type Fed Spec SS -S -159. 08 09 09 10 D. Forms: 10 ' 11 1. Steel or wood. 11 12 2. Of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and 12 13 to retain horizontal and vertical alignment. 13 , 14 3. Free of distortion and defects. 14 15 4. Full depth of concrete. 15 16 5. Radius bends: Flexible spring steel forms, or laminated boards. 16 17 17 ' 18 18 19 PART 3 - EXECUTION 19 20 20 ' 21 3.01 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE 21 22 22 23 A. After necessary grading, scarify and recompact top 5 IN of subgrade. 23 II 24 24 25 B. If cohesive soil, compact to 95 percent standard proctor, AASHTO T99. 25 26 26 27 C. If non - cohesive soil, compact to 70 percent relative density, ASTM D2049. 27 II 28 29 D. Control moisture content as necessary. 2 30 30 ' 31 E. Following compaction, strike off and roll to exact cross section. Check 31 32 with accurate template or other method approved by Engineer. 32 33 33 34 3.02 INSTALLATION 34 ' 35 35 36 A. Forms: 36 37 1. Form support: 37 ' 38 a. Compact soil foundation and cut to grade to support forms and 38 39 superimposed machine loads. 39 40 b. Use bearing stakes driven flush with bottom of form to supplement 40 ' 41 support as necessary. 41 42 c. Do not use'earth pedestals. 42 43 2. Staking forms: 43 44 a. Joint forms neatly and tightly. 44 , 45 b. Stake and pin securely with at least three pins for each 10 FT 45 46 section. 46 47 3. Clean and oil forms prior to placement of concrete. 47 II 4. Set forms sufficiently in advance of work (2 HRS) to permit proper 48 49 inspection by Engineer. 49 50 5. Previously finished pavement or sidewalk contiguous with new work may, 50 ' 51 serve as side form when specifically approved by the Engineer. 51 52 52 53 B. Joints: 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 I 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 1. Hold locations and alignment to within plus 1/4 IN. 01 2. Finish concrete surface adjacent to previous section to within plus 02 1/8 IN, with tooled radius of 1/4 IN. 03 3. Expansion joints: 04 a. Locate at 48 FT intervals and at all intersection curb returns. 05 b. Stake in place load transfer device consisting of at least two 06 dowels, supporting and spacing means and 1 IN premolded joint 07 filler. 08 4. Contraction joints: 09 a. Locate at 6 FT intervals. 10 b. Use steel template at least 3/16 IN thick, conforming to cross 11 section of curb and gutter. 12 c. Remove template where concrete has set sufficiently to prevent 13 spalling or adhesion of concrete. 14 d. If machine placed, use tooled joint formed in freshly placed 15 concrete. Groove dimensions shall be 3/8 IN at surface and 1/4 16 IN at root. 17 5. Construction joints: 18 a. Install with dowels at end of day's work or wherever concreting 19 must be interrupted for 30 minutes or more. 20 b. Provide bulkhead full depth of slab, securely staked. 21 6. Fill all joints with joint sealing material. 22 7. Clean all joint surfaces to be sealed. Dry thoroughly. 23 8. Seal all joints with either hot - poured or cold - applied joint filler 24 per specifications. The upper surface of the filled joint shall be 25 flush to 1/8 INibelow adjacent surface. Remove material in excess. 26 27 C. Placing - General: 28 1. Avoid segregation of concrete. - 29 2. Do not move concrete by use of vibrators. 30 3. Maintain rate of deposition so that concrete is at all times plastic. 31 4. Use no concrete that has partially hardened, been contaminated by 32 foreign materials, or retempered. 33 5. Once started, carry on as a continuous operation until placing of 34 panel or section is completed. 35 6. Consolidate all concrete by vibration, spading, rodding or forking. 36 7. Eliminate air or stone pockets. 37 8. Blend new concrete into that previously placed. 38 9. At pre - placed joints, hand place concrete against both faces 39 simultaneously. 40 10. Avoid disturbing load- transfer devices. 41 11. Manipulate screeds to minimize lateral pressures. 42 12. Alternate techniques of placing will be considered should the 43 Contractor desire to slip -form the paving. 44 13. Conform to Section 03002, except as noted herein. 45 46 D. Finishing: 47 1. Bring curb to proper surface by running straightedge over steel 48 templates with sawing motion. 49 2. Immediately after using the straightedge, float surface with a wood 50 float to draw cement to surface. 51 3. Edge with appropriate tool. 52 4. Just before the concrete takes its initial set, brush the surface 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 02528 -3 02528 -4 01 with a soft bristle brush to leave a uniform appearance. 01 02 5. Upon removal of forms, fill honeycombed or unevenly filled sections 02 03 immediately with cement mortar and backfill in not more than 6 IN 03 04 layers immediately after application of cement mortar. 04 05 6. Make certain that expansion joints are cleared of concrete, both at 05 06 bottom of gutter and back of curb. 06 07 07 08 E. Protection of Concrete: 08 09 1. Protect new curb and gutter and its appurtenances from traffic 09 10 damage. 10 11 2. Repair or replace any part of curb and gutter damaged prior to final 11 12 acceptance at Contractor's expense. 12 13 13 14 F. Opening to Traffic: 14 15 1. Engineer will decide when work may be opened to traffic; his decision 15 16 will be governed by compressive strength of concrete and other 16 17 factors. 17 18 2. Work will not be opened to traffic until job cured cylinders have 18 19 attained a compressive strength of 2000 psi when tested in accordance 19 20 with ASTM methods. 20 21 3. Prior to opening to traffic, clean pavement and fill joints as 21 22 required with prescribed filler material. 22 23 4. Construct driveway openings of the design shown on the Plans or as 23 24 directed by the Engineer. 24 25 25 26 G. Clean Up: Complete clean up work within 2 weeks after work has been 26 27 opened to traffic. No new work will begin until delayed clean up work 27 28 has been completed. 28 29 29 30 END OF SECTION 30 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 02529 -1 1 01 89G14 SECTION 02529 01 02 02 ' 03 CONCRETE SIDEWALK AND STEPS 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 ' 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 I 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Concrete sidewalk. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. - 16 I 17 3. Section 03002 - Concrete. 17 18 18 19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 ' 20 20 21 A. Referenced Standards: 21 22 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 22 I 23 (AASHTO): 23 24 a. M153, Specifications for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for 24 25 Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 25 26 b. M213, Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and 26 I 27 Structure Construction. 27 c. 28 T99, Moisture - Density Relations of Soils Using a 5.5 LB (2.5 kg) 28 29 Roamer and a 12 IN Drop 4. 29 I 30 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 30 31 a. D2049, Relative Density for Cohesionless Soils. 31 32 32 33 1.03 SUBMITTALS 33 I 34 34 35 A. Shop Drawings: 35 36 1. Product technical data including: 36 ' 37 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 37 38 standards referenced. 38 39 b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 39 I 40 2. Concrete mix design: 40 41 a. In accordance with Sections 03002. 41 42 b. Submit at least 10 days before concrete placement begins. 42 43 43 I 44 44 45 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 45 46 46 I 47 2.01 MATERIALS 47 48 48 49 A. Concrete: Refer to Section 03002. 49 50 50 II 51 B. Expansion Joint Material: 51 52 1. Preformed. 52 53 2. Nonextruding cork, self - expanding cork, sponge rubber or cork rubber, 53 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 02529 -2 1 01 AASHTO M153 or M213. 01 ' 02 02 03 C. Sidewalk Joint Sealant: 03 , 04 1. Two compound,.polyurethane sealant. 04 05 2. Class A, Type 1. 05 06 3. Self- leveling. 06 07 4. Nontracking. 07 t 08 5. Fed Spec TT -S 00227 E(3). 08 09 09 10 D. Forms: 10 , 11 1. Steel or wood. 11 12 2. Of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and 12 13 to retain horizontal and vertical alignment. 13 ' 14 3. Free of distortion and defects. 14 15 4. Full depth of concrete. 15 16 5. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius 16 17 bends. 17 ' 18 18 19 19 20 PART 3 - EXECUTION 20 , 21 21 22 3.01 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE 22 23 23 ' 24 A. After necessary grading, scarify and recompact top 5 IN of subgrade. 24 25 25 26 B. If cohesive soil, resultant compaction shall be 100 percent standard 26 27 proctor, AASHTO T99. 27 ' 28 28 29 C. If noncohesive soil, resultant compaction shall be 75 percent relative 29 30 density, ASTM D2049. 30 III 31 31 32 D. Control moisture content as necessary. 32 33 33 , 34 E. following compaction, strike off and roll to exact cross section. Check 34 35 with accurate template or other method approved by Engineer. 35 36 36 37 3.02 INSTALLATION 37 , 38 38 39 A. Forms: 39 40 1. Form support: 40 , 41 a. Compact soil foundation and cut to grade to support forms. 41 42 b. Use bearing stakes driven flush with bottom of form to supplement 42 43 support as necessary. 43 44 c. Do not use earth pedestals. 44 ' 45 2. Staking forms: 45 46 a. Joint forms neatly and tightly. 46 47 b. Stake and pin securely. 47 II 3. Clean and oil forms prior to placement of concrete. 48 49 4. Set forms sufficiently in advance of work (2 HRS) to permit proper 49 50 inspection by Engineer. 50 ' 51 5. Previously finished pavement or curb and gutter contiguous with new 51 52 work may serve as side form when specifically approved by the 52 53 Engineer. 53 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 01 01 02 B. Joints: 02 I 04 03 1. Hold locations and alignment to within plus 1/4 IN. 03 2. Finish concrete surface adjacent to previous section to within plus 04 05 1/8 IN, with tooled radius of 1/4 IN. 05 06 3. Metal keyway joints: 06 I 07 a. Form by installing metal parting strip, left in place. 07 08 b. Stake and support like side form. 08 09 c. Provide dowels or tie bars where indicated on Drawing details. 09 I 10 4. Weakened plane joints: 10 11 a. Tool groove in freshly placed concrete. 11 12 b. Groove dimensions: 3/8 IN at surface and 1/4 IN at root. 12 I 13 5. Construction joints: 13 14 a. Install at end of day's work or wherever concreting must be 14 15 - interrupted for 30 minutes. 15 16 b. Place timber bulkhead full depth of slab, securely staked. 16 I 17 6. Expansion joints: 17 18 a. Place 3/4 IN preformed expansion joints at intervals as indicated 18 19 on Drawings and at all junctions with previously placed 19 I 20 sidewalks, curb or other structures. 20 21 b. Seal sidewalk joints with polyurethane sealant. 21 22 22 I 23 C. Placing - General: 23 24 1. Avoid segregation of concrete. 24 25 2. Do not move concrete by use of vibrators. 25 26 3. Maintain rate of deposition so that concrete is at all times plastic. 26 1 27 4. Use no concrete that has partially hardened, been contaminated by 27 28 foreign materials, or retempered. 28 29 5. Once started, carry on as a continuous operation until placing of 29 I 30 panel or section is completed. 30 31 6. Consolidate all concrete by vibration, spading, rodding or forking. 31 32 7. Eliminate air or stone pockets. 32 33 8. Blend new concrete into that previously placed. 33 1 34 9. At preplaced joints, hand place concrete against both faces 34 35 simultaneously. 35 36 10. Avoid disturbing load- transfer devices. 36 I 37 11. Manipulate screeds to minimize lateral pressures. 37 38 12. Conform to Section 03002 except as noted herein. 38 39 39 I 40 D. Finishing: 40 41 1. As soon as placed, strike off and screed to crown and cross section, 41 42 slightly above grade so that consolidation and finishing will bring 42 43 final plan elevations. 43 1 44 2. First pass of first screed should maintain uniform ridge full width. 44 45 3. Consolidate by vibrating screeds, internal units, or a combination. 45 46 4. Test with 6 FT straightedges, equipped with long handles and operated 46 ' 47 from sidewalk. Draw excess water and laitance off from surface. 5. 47 48 Float finish so as to leave no disfiguring marks, but to produce a 48 49 uniform granular or sandy texture. 49 I 50 6. Tool pavement edges with suitable edger. 50 51 51 52 E. Protection of Concrete: 52 53 1. Protect new sidewalk and its appurtenances from traffic damage. 53 1 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 02529 -3 02529 -4 01 2. Repair or replace any part of sidewalk damaged prior to final 01 02 acceptance at Contractor's expense. 02 03 03 04 F. Opening to Traffic: 04 05 1. Engineer will decide when sidewalk may be opened to traffic; the 05 06 decision will be governed by compressive strength of concrete and 06 07 other factors. 07 08 2. Sidewalk will not be opened to traffic until job cured cylinders have 08 09 attained a compressive strength of 2000 psi when tested in accord 09 10 with ASTM methods. 10 11 3. Clean sidewalk prior to opening to traffic. 11 12 12 13 G. Clean Up: 13 14 1. Complete clean up work within two weeks after sidewalk has been 14 15 opened to traffic. No new work will begin until delayed clean up 15 16 work has been completed. 16 17 17 18 END OF SECTION 18 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 90G19 SECTION 02930 01 02 02 03 HYDRAULIC SEEDING 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Hydraulic Seeding of all disturbed areas except Improved Pasture. 11 12 12 13 B. Related °Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and General Terms and 14 15 Conditions of the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 17 3. Section 02260 - Topsoiling and Finished Grading. 17 18 18 19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 20 20 21 A. Referenced Standards: 21 22 1. Standard Methods of the Association of Official Agricultural 22 23 Chemists. 23 24 2. United States Department of Agriculture, (USDA): 24 25 a. Federal Seed Act. 25 26 26 27 1.03 SUBMITTALS 27 28 28 29 A. Shop Drawings: 29 30 1. See Section 01340. 30 31 2. Certification: 31 32 a. Certify each container of seed delivered will be labeled in 32 33 accordance with Federal and State Seed Laws and equals or exceeds 33 34 Specification requirements. 34 35 3. Other documents: 35 36 a. Copies of invoices for fertilizer, seed, and cellulose fiber 36 37 mulch used on Project showing grade furnished, along with 37 38 certification of quality and warranty. Ensure each lot of 38 39 fertilizer is subject to-sampling and testing, at discretion of 39 40 Engineer, in accordance with current methods of Association of 40 41 Official Agricultural Chemists. Furnish identification tags from 41 42 all bags of seed used on the project. Upon completion of 42 43 Project, a final check of total quantities of fertilizer, seed, 43 44 and cellulose fiber mulch used will be made against total area 44 45 seeded, and if minimum rates of application have not been met, 45 46 Engineer may require distribution of additional quantities to 46 47 make up minimum application specified. 47 48 48 49 49 50 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 50 51 51 52 2.01 GENERAL 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS , 02930 -1 02930 -2 01 A. Topsoil: See Section 02260. 01 1 02 02 03 B. Fertilizer: Complete, soluble fertilizer, uniform in composition, dry 03 ' 04 and free - flowing, part of the elements of which are derived from organic 04 05 sources. It shall contain the following percentages by weight: 05 06 06 ' 07 Nitrogen (N) 10 Phosphorus (P) 20 Potash (K) 10 07 08 08 09 Deliver fertilizers mixed as specified, in standard size, unopened 09 10 containers, showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Store in 10 II a weatherproof storage place and in such a manner that the fertilizer 11 12 will be kept dry and its effectiveness not impaired. If and when bulk 12 13 delivery and spreading of fertilizer is authorized, provide with a 13 ' 14 notarized, written affidavit certifying weight and analysis of the 14 15 fertilizer. 15 16 16 ' 17 C. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, new crop seed mixed in the proportions 17 18 indicated below: 18 19 19 20 LBS Pure Live 20 , 21 Common Name Latin Name Seed per 1000 SF 21 22 22 23 Bermudagrass (hulled) Cynodon Dactylon 0.18 23 II 24 24 25 D. Mulch: Cellulose Fiber Mulch produced from grinding clean, whole wood 25 26 chips with a labeled ash content not to exceed 7 %, designed for use in 26 27 conventional hydraulic mulching of grass seed with fertilizers and other 27 , 28 additives and shall be such that when applied, will form a strong, 28 29 moisture- retaining mat without the need of an asphalt binder. 29 30 30 ' 31 E. Water: Provide water for the execution of this work and maintenance 31 32 until Project Acceptance, capable of initiating and supporting plant 32 33 growth, and free of harmful or deleterious substances. 33 ' 34 34 35 35 36 PART 3 - EXECUTION 36 37 37 II 3.01 GENERAL 38 39 39 40 A. Seed all areas disturbed by construction activities (areas which are 40 ' 41 filled, excavated, receiving topsoil, or have lost vegetative cover due 41 42 to construction activities). 42 43 43 1 44 B. Plant seed within 30 days of completion of earthwork, grading, and 44 45 topsoiling to minimize erosion. 45 46 46 47 48 C. Do not commence work until topsoil is applied and fine grading is 47 II complete in the area to be seeded. 48 49 49 50 3.02 PREPARATION 50 II 51 52 A. Mow all "volunteer" grasses. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 ' 02930 -3 1 01 B. Cultivate all areas to be seeded to a depth of 4 IN. 01 02 02 03 C. Lightly roll or compact cultivated areas. 03 04 04 05 3.03 CELLULOSE FIBER MULCH SEEDING (HYDROMULCHING) 05 06 06 I 07 A. Seeding may be done whenever the weather and soil conditions are 07 08 favorable, or as otherwise authorized by the Engineer. 08 09 09 I 10 B. Application Rates: 10 11 1. Seed: See paragraph 2.01. Application rates are specified in 11 12 pounds of pure live seed per 1000 SF. Adjust actual application rates 12 I 13 as necessary depending on PLS of seed delivered to the project to 13 14 achieve the application rates specified. 14 15 2. Fertilizer: 13 LBS /1000 SF (Dry weight). 15 16 3. Cellulose Fiber Mulch: 70 LBS /1000 SF (Dry weight). 16 17 17 18 C. Uniformly distribute the seed or seed mixture over all areas to receive 18 19 hydromulch. All varieties of seed, fertilizer, and cellulose fiber may 19 I 20 21 be distributed at the same time at the specified rate after being mixed 20 and agitated in the hydromulching machine for at least ten (10) minutes, 21 22 in order to provide a homogeneous mixture. Apply this mixture as a water 22 23 slurry and achieve an even, solid cover. 23 I 24 24 25 D. Protect all areas not to receive the hydromulch mixture from direct or 25 26 over - spray. Remove and clean all hydromulch from buildings, irrigation 26 1 27 equipment, trees, shrubs, curbs, pavement, fire hydrants, light and 27 28 utility poles and other site improvements. 28 29 29 ' 30 3.04 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION 30 31 31 32 A. Maintain turf areas until Project Acceptance by watering, fertilizing, 32 33 and re- seeding as necessary to establish a vigorous, healthy stand of 33 ' 34 grass. 34 35 35 36 B. Any turfed areas not showing sufficient growth within the twelve month 36 I 37 warranty period shall be prepared and re- hydromulched as specified. 37 38 "Sufficient growth" is defined as 85% cover with no bare areas exceeding 38 39 25 SF in area. 39 ' 40 40 41 C. Protect all turf areas from erosion, rutting, or other damage. Correct 41 42 all damage which occurs by applying fresh topsoil and re- seeding. 42 43 43 I 44 END OF SECTION 44 45 45 46 46 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS DMSION 3 CONCRETE 03002 -1 1 01 90H15 SECTION 03002 01 02 02 ' 03 CONCRETE 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 ' 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Cast -in -place concrete and grout. 11 12 2. Concrete mixes, proportioning, and source quality control for precast 12 ' 13 concrete. 14 14 15 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 15 16 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 16 ' 17 the Contract. 17 18 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 18 19 19 I 20 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 20 21 21 22 A. Referenced Standards: 22 23 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 23 ' 24 a. A82, Standard Specifications for Cold Drawn Steel Wire for 24 25 Concrete Reinforcement. 25 26 b. A185, Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for 26 I 27 Concrete Reinforcement. 27 28 c. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet Steel 28 29 Bars for Concrete Reinforcement Including Supplementary 29 30 Requirements Si. 30 I 31 d. A775, Standard Specification for Epoxy - Coated Reinforcing Steel 31 32 Bars. 32 33 e. C31, Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens 33 I 34 in the Field. 34 35 f. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 35 36 g. C39, Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of 36 I 37 Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 37 38 h. C94, Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete. 38 39 i. C138, Standard Method of Test for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air 39 40 Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. 40 I 41 j. C143, Standard Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement 41 42 Concrete. 42 43 k. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 43 ' 44 45 1. C157, Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic Cement 44 Mortar and Concrete. 45 46 m. C171, Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing 46 1 47 Concrete. 47 48 n. C172, Standard Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete. 48 49 o. C173, Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed 49 50 Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 50 I 51 52 p. C192, Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test 51 Specimens in the Laboratory. 52 53 q. C231, Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed 53 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 03002 -2 01 Concrete by the Pressure Method. 01 02 r. C260, Standard Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for 02 03 Concrete. 03 04 s. C289, Test Method for Potential Reactivity of Aggregates 04 05 (Chemical Method). 05 06 t. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming 06 07 Compounds for Curing Concrete. 07 08 u. C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for 08 09 Concrete. 09 10 v. C496, Standard Method of Test for Splitting Tensile Strength of 10 11 Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 11 12 w. C595, Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 12 13 x. C618, Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined 13 14 Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland 14 15 Cement Concrete. 15 16 y. D1056, Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials Sponge or 16 17 Expanded Rubber. 17 18 z. E329, Standard Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing 18 19 Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in 19 20 Construction. 20 21 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 21 22 a. SP -19, Cement and Concrete Terminology. 22 23 b. 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and 23 24 Heavyweight Concrete. 24 25 c. 212.1R, Admixtures for Concrete. 25 26 d. 212.2R, Guide for Use of Admixtures in Concrete. 26 27 e. 214, Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Compression Test 27 28 Results of Field Concrete. 28 29 f. 304, Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, 29 30 and Placing Concrete. 30 31 g. 304.2R, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. 31 32 h. 305R, Hot Weather Concreting. 32 33 i. 306R, Cold Weather Concreting. 33 34 j. 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 34 35 k. 347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. 35 36 3. Federal Specification (FS): 36 37 a. TT- S -227b, Sealer Compound; Rubber Base, Two Component. 37 38 b. LLL-B-810B, Building Board, (Hardboard) Hard Pressed, Vegetable 38 39 Fiber. • 39 40 4. Corps of Engineers: Specification CRD -0572 Polyvinyl Waterstops. 40 41 41 42 B. Quality Control: 42 43 1. Concrete testing agency. 43 44 a. Contractor to employ and pay for services of a testing laboratory 44 45 to: 45 46 1) Perform materials evaluation. 46 47 2) Design concrete mixes. 47 48 b. Concrete testing agency to meet requirements of ASTM E329. 48 49 c. The requirement of hiring a concrete testing agency may be 49 50 waived if the Contractor furnishes a mix design previously 50 51 prepared by a concrete testing agency employed by the concrete 51 52 supplier or others, but provided that: 52 53 1) the mix design data conforms to paragraph 1.04A; and 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 2) material sources for the concrete proposed are the same as 01 02 used in the mix design. 02 03 2. Do not begin concrete production until proposed concrete mix design 03 04 has been approved by Engineer. 04 05 a. Approval of concrete mix design by Engineer does not relieve 05 06 Contractor of his responsibility to provide concrete that meets 06 07 the requirements of this Specification. 07 08 3. Adjust concrete mix designs when material characteristics, job 08 09 conditions, weather, strength test results or other circumstances 09 10 warrant. 10 11 a. Do not use revised concrete mixes until submitted to and approved 11 12 by Engineer. 12 13 13 14 C. Qualifications: Ready mixed concrete batch plant certified by National 14 15 Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NMCA). 15 16 16 17 1.03 DEFINITIONS 17 18 18 19 A. Per ACI SP -19 except as modified herein: 19 20 1. Concrete fill: Non - structural concrete. 20 21 2. Concrete Testing Agency: Testing agency employed to perform 21 22 materials evaluation, design of concrete mixes or testing of concrete 22 23 placed during construction. 23 24 3. Exposed concrete: Exposed to view after construction is complete. 24 25 4. Indicated: Indicated by Contract Documents. 25 26 5. Lean concrete: Concrete with low cement content. 26 27 6. Nonexposed concrete: Not exposed to view after construction is 27 28 complete. 28 29 7. Required: Required by Contract Documents. 29 30 8. Specified strength: Specified compressive strength at 28 days. 30 31 9. Submitted: Submitted to Engineer. 31 32 32 33 1.04 SUBMITTALS 33 34 34 35 A. Shop Drawings: 35 36 1. See Section 01340. 36 37 2. Concrete mix designs proposed for use. Concrete mix design submittal 37 38 to include the following information: 38 39 a. Sieve analysis and source of fine and coarse aggregates. 39 40 b. Test for aggregate organic impurities. 40 41 c. Test for deleterious aggregate per ASTM C289. 41 42 d. Proportioning of all materials. 42 43 e. Type of cement with mill certificate for cement. 43 44 f. Type of fly ash with certificate of conformance to specification 44 45 requirements. 45 46 g. Slump. 46 47 h. Air content. 47 48 i. Brand, type, ASTM designation, and quantity of each admixture 48 49 proposed for use. 49 50 j. 28 -day cylinder compressive test results of trial mixes per ACI 50 51 318 and as indicated herein. 51 52 k. Shrinkage test results. 52 53 1. Standard deviation value for concrete production facility. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 03002 -3 03002 -4 1 01 3. Manufacturer and type of joint filler, joint sealant, curing agent 01 ' 02 and chemical floor hardener. 02 03 4. Manufacturer and type of bonding and patching mortar and bonding 03 ' 04 adhesive used at construction joints. 04 05 5. Manufacturer and type of nonshrink grout and the cure /seal compound 05 06 required for the nonshrink grout. 06 07 6. Reinforcing steel: Show grade, sizes, number, configuration, 07 t 08 spacing, location and all fabrication and placement details. 08 09 a. In sufficient detail to permit installation of reinforcing 09 10 without having to make reference to Contract Drawings. 10 ' 11 b. Obtain approval of shop drawings by Engineer before fabrication. 11 12 c. Mill certificates. 12 13 7. Strength test results of in place concrete including slump, air 13 14 content and concrete temperature. 14 ' 15 15 16 1 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 16 17 17 ' 18 A. Storage of Material: 18 19 1. Cement and fly ash: 19 20 a. Store in moistureproof, weathertight enclosures. 20 ' 21 b. Do not use if caked or lumpy. 21 22 2. Aggregate: 22 23 a. Store to prevent segregation and contamination with other sizes , 23 24 or foreign materials. 24 ' 25 b. Obtain samples for testing from aggregates at point of batching. 25 26 c. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates. 26 27 d. Do not use bottom 6 IN of stockpiles in contact with ground. 27 ' 28 e. Allow sand to drain until moisture content is uniform prior to 28 29 use. 29 30 3. Admixtures: 30 31 a. Protect from contamination, evaporation, freezing, or damage. 31 ' 32 b. Maintain within temperature range recommended by manufacturer. 32 33 c. Completely mix solutions and suspensions prior to use. 33 34 4. Reinforcing steel: 34 II a. Support and store all rebars above ground. 35 36 36 37 B. Delivery: 37 II 38 1. Concrete: 38 39 a. Prepare a delivery ticket for each load for ready -mixed concrete. 39 40 b. Truck operator shall hand ticket to Engineer at the time of 40 41 delivery. 41 ' 42 c. Ticket to show: 42 43 1) Mix identification mark. 43 44 2) Quantity delivered. 44 ' 45 3) Amount of each material in batch. 45 46 4) Outdoor temp in the shade. 46 47 5) Time at which cement was added. 47 48 6) Numerical sequence of the delivery. 48 ' 49 7) Amount of water added. 49 50 2. Reinforcing steel: Ship to jobsite with attached plastic or metal 50 51 tags with permanent mark numbers. 51 ' 52 a. Mark numbers to match shop drawing mark number. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 ' 03002 -5 ' 01 01 02 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 02 I 03 03 04 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 04 05 05 06 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 06 II 07 Manufacturers are acceptable: 07 08 1. Grout: 08 09 a. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout: 09 ' 10 1) Sika "SikaGrout 212." 10 11 2) Gifford Hill "Supreme Grout." 11 12 3) Master Builders "Masterflow 713." 12 13 '4) Or equal. 13 II 14 b. Epoxy grout: 14 15 1) Master Builders "Brutem MPG." 15 16 2) Euclid Chemical Company, "High Strength Grout." 16 ' 17 3) Or equal. 17 18 c. Expansion joint fillers: 18 19 1) Permaglaze Co. 19 I 20 2) Rubatex Corp. 20 21 3) Williams Products, Inc. 21 22 4) Or equal. 22 23 d. Waterstops, PVC: 23 II 24 1) Greenstreak Plastic Products, Inc. 24 25 2) W.R.Meadows, Inc. 25 26 3) Burke Company. 26 I 27 4) Or equal. 27 28 e. Form coating: 28 29 1) Richmond "Rich Cote." 29 30 2) Industrial Lubricants "Nox -Crete Form Coating." 30 31 3) Protex "Pro- Cote." 31 32 4) Or equal. 32 33 f. Prefabricated forms: 33 II 34 1) Simplex "Industrial Steel Frame Forms." 34 35 2) Symons "Steel Ply." 35 36 3) Universal "Uniform." 36 II 37 4) Or equal. 37 38 38 39 2.02 MATERIALS 39 40 40 ' 41 A. Portland Cement: Conform to ASTM C150, Type I. 41 42 42 43 B. Fly Ash: 43 ' 44 1. ASTM C618, Class F. 44 45 2. Nonstaining. 45 46 a. Hardened concrete containing fly ash to be uniform light gray 46 47 color. 47 I 48 3. Maximum loss on ignition: 6 percent. 48 49 4. Compatible with other concrete ingredients. 49 50 5. Obtain proposed fly ash from a source approved by the State Highway 50 ' 51 Department in the state where the Project is located for use in 51 52 concrete for bridges. 52 53 6. Do not use for precast concrete. 53 ' ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 03002 -6 1 01 01 , 02 C. Admixtures: 02 03 1. Air entraining admixtures: ASTM C260. 03 , 04 2. Water reducing, retarding, and accelerating admixtures: 04 05 a. ASTM C494 Type A through E. 05 06 b. Conform to provisions of ACI 212.1R and ACI 212.2R. 06 07 c. Do not use retarding or accelerating admixtures unless 07 , 08 specifically approved in writing by Engineer and at no cost to 08 09 Owner. 09 10 d. Follow manufacturer's instructions. 10 II e. Use chloride free admixtures only. 11 12 3. Maximum total water soluble chloride ion content contributed from all 12 13 ingredients of concrete including water, aggregates, cementitious 13 II 14 materials and admixtures by weight percent of cement: 14 15 a. 0.06 prestressed concrete. 15 16 b. 0.10 all other concrete. 16 17 4. Do not use calcium chloride. 17 ' 18 5. Pozzolanic admixtures: ASTM C618. 18 19 6. Provide admixtures of same type, manufacturer and quantity as used in 19 20 establishing required concrete proportions in the mix design. 20 II 21 21 22 D. Water: Potable, clean, free of oils, acids and organic matter. 22 23 23 24 E. Aggregates: 24 , 25 1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C33, except as modified below. 25 26 2. Fine aggregate: Clean natural sand. 26 27 a. No manufactured or artificial sand. 27 II 28 3. Coarse aggregate: Crushed rock, natural gravel, or other inert 28 29 granular material. 29 30 a. Maximum amount of clay or shale particles: 1 percent. 30 II 31 4. Gradation of coarse aggregate: 31 32 a. Lean concrete and concrete topping: Size #7. 32 33 b. All other concrete: Size #57 or #67. 33 34 5. Coarse aggregate for lightweight concrete: ASTM C330. 34 II a. Maximum size: 3/4 IN. 35 36 36 37 F. Concrete Grout: 37 II 38 1. Nonshrink nonmetallic grout: 38 39 a. Nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining, premixed with only water 39 40 to be added. 40 41 b. Grout to produce a positive but controlled expansion. 41 II 42 c. Mass expansion not to be created by gas liberation. 42 43 d. Minimum compressive strength of nonshrink grout at 28 days: 6500 43 44 psi. 44 II 2. Epoxy grout: 45 46 a. 3- component epoxy resin system. 46 47 1) Two liquid epoxy components. 47 48 2) One inert aggregate filler component. 48 49 b. Each component packaged separately for mixing at job site. 49 50 50 51 G. Reinforcing Steel: 51 II 1. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS , 1 ' 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 II 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 ' 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 2. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185. 01 a. Minimum yield strength: 60,000 psi. 02 3. Column spirals: ASTM A82. 03 04 H. Forms: 05 1. Prefabricated or job built. 06 2. Plywood: PS1, waterproof, resin- bonded, exterior type Douglas Fir. 07 a. Face adjacent to concrete Grade B or better. 08 3. Fiberboard: Fed Spec LLL -B -810, Type IX, tempered, waterproof, 09 screen back, concrete form hardboard. 10 4. Lumber: Straight; uniform width and thickness; and free from knot, 11 offsets, holes, dents, and other surface defects. 12 5. Chamfer strips: Clear white pine, surface against concrete planed. 13 6. Form ties: Removable end, permanently embedded body type with cones 14 on outer ends not requiring auxiliary spreaders. 15 a. Cone diameter: 3/4 IN minimum to 1 IN maximum. 16 b. Embedded portion 1 IN minimum back from concrete face. 17 c. If not provided with threaded ends, constructed for breaking off 18 ends without damage to concrete. 19 7. Form release: Nonstaining and shall not prevent bonding of future 20 finishes to concrete surface: 21 22 I. Waterstops: 23 1. Plastic: Corp of Engineers Specification CRD -0572. 24 2. Serrated with center bulb. 25 3. Thickness: 3/8 IN. 26 4. Length (general use): 6 IN unless indicated otherwise. 27 5. Expansion joints: 28 a. Length: 9 IN. 29 b. Center bulb: 1 IN OD x 1/2 IN ID. 30 31 J. Chairs, Runners, Bolsters, Spacers, and Hangers: 32 1. Stainless steel, epoxy coated, or plastic coated metal. 33 a. Plastic coated: Rebar support tips in contact with the forms 34 only. 35 36 K. Vapor Barrier: Clear 6 -mil thick polyethylene conforming to ASTM C171. - 37 38 L. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I - 39 1. Resin based, dissipates upon exposure to UV light. 40 2. Curing compound shall not prevent bonding of any future coverings, 41 coatings or finishes. 42 3. Curing compounds used in water treatment plant construction to be 43 nontoxic and taste and odor free. 44 45 M. Expansion Joint Filler: 46 1. In contact with sewage: Closed cell neoprene: 47 a. ASTM D1056, Class SC (oil resistant and medium swell) of 2 to 5 . 48 psi compression deflection (Grade SCE41). 49 2. Other use: Asphalt impregnated fiber type. 50 51 52 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 03002 -7 03002 -8 1 01 2.03 CONCRETE MIXES 01 1 02 02 03 A. General: 03 II 1. All concrete to be ready mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C94. 04 05 2. Provide concrete of specified quality capable of being placed without 05 06 segregation and, when cured, of developing all properties required. 06 07 07 1 08 B. Strength: 08 09 1. Provide specified strength and type of concrete for each use in 09 10 structure(s) as follows: 10 II 11 12 SPECIFIED 12 13 TYPE WEIGHT STRENGTH* 13 ' 14 14 15 Lean Concrete Normal weight 3000 psi 15 16 All other Concrete Normal weight 4000 psi 16 17 17 , 18 *Minimum 28 -day compressive strength. 18 19 19 20 C. Air Entrainment: Provide air entrainment in all concrete resulting in a 20 II total air content percent by volume as follows: 21 22 22 23 MAX AGGREGATE SIZE TOTAL AIR CONTENT PERCENT 23 II 24 24 25 1 IN or 3/4 IN 5 to 7 25 26 1/2 IN 6 to 8 26 27 27 II 1. Air content to be measured in accordance with ASTM C231, ASTM C173, 28 29 or ASTM C138. 29 30 30 ' 31 D. Slump: 4 IN maximum, 1 IN minimum. 31 32 1. Measured at point of discharge of the concrete into the concrete 32 33 construction member. 33 34 2. Concrete of lower than maximum slump may be used provided it can be 34 II properly placed and consolidated. 35 36 3. Pumped concrete: 36 37 a. Provide additional water at batch plant to allow for slump loss 37 II 38 due to pumping. 38 39 b. Provide only enough additional water so that slump of concrete at 39 40 discharge end of pump hose does not exceed maximum slump 40 II 41 specified above. 41 42 4. Determine slump per ASTM C143. 42 43 43 44 E. Concrete Proportions: 44 II 1. General - Proportion ingredients to: 45 46 a. Produce proper workability, durability, strength, and other 46 47 required properties. 47 48 b. Prevent segregation and collection of excessive free water on 48 II 49 surface. 49 50 2. Minimum cement contents and maximum water cement ratios for concrete 50 51 to be as follows: 51 ' 52 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 ' 03002 -9 ' 01 MINIMUM CEMENT, LB /CY 01 02 MAXIMUM WATER 02 I 03 SPECIFIED MAXIMUM AGGREGATE SIZE, IN CEMENT RATIO 03 04 STRENGTH 1/2 3/4 1 BY WEIGHT 04 05 05 06 3000 - -- 517 517 0.45 06 II 07 4000 611 611 611 0.45 07 08 08 09 3. Substitution of fly ash: 09 ' 10 11 a. Maximum of 15 percent by weight of cement at rate of 1 LB fly ash 10 for 1 LB of cement. 11 12 b. Adjust mix to obtain satisfactory finishing. 12 13 4. Normal weight concrete: Proportion mixture to provide desired 13 II 14 characteristics using one of methods described below: 14 15 a. Method 1 (Trial Mix): Per ACI 318, Chapter 4, except as modified 15 16 herein. 16 ' 17 1) Air content within range specified above. 17 18 2) Record and report temperature of trial mixes. 18 19 3) Proportion trial mixes per ACI 211.1. 19 II 20 b. Method 2 (Field Experience): Per ACI 318, Chapter 4, except as 20 21 modified herein: 21 22 1) Field test records must be acceptable to Engineer to use this 22 23 method. 23 ' 24 2) Test records shall represent materials, proportions and 24 25 conditions similar to those specified. 25 26 5. Required average strength to exceed the specified 28 day compressive 26 ' 27 strength by the amount determined or calculated in accordance with 27 28 the requirements of paragraph 4.3 of ACI 318-83 using the standard 28 29 deviation of the proposed concrete production facility as described 29 30 in paragraph 4.3.1 of ACI 318 -83. 30 II 31 31 32 F. Allowable Shrinkage: 0.048 percent per ASTM C157. 32 33 33 ' 34 2.04 SAND CEMENT GROUT 34 35 35 36 A. Mix as follows: 36 II 37 1. Three parts sand. 37 38 2. One part portland cement. 38 39 3. Entrained air: Six percent plus or minus one percent. 39 40 4. Sufficient water for required workability. 40 II 41 5. Minimum 28 -day compressive strength: 3,000 psi. 41 42 42 43 43 ' 44 PART 3 - EXECUTION 44 45 45 46 3.01 FORMING AND PLACING CONCRETE 46 47 47 48 A. General: 48 49 1. Contractor is responsible for design and erection of formwork. 49 50 2. Construct formwork so that concrete members and structures are of 50 ' 51 correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. 51 52 a. Allowable tolerances: As recommended in ACI 347. 52 53 3. Provide slabs and beams of minimum indicated depth when sloping 53 ' ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 03002 -10 ' 01 foundation base slabs or elevated floor slabs to drains. 01 , 02 a. For slabs on grade, slope top of subgrade to provide floor slabs 02 03 of minimum uniform indicated depth. 03 II 04 b. Do not place floor drains through beams. 04 05 05 06 B. Openings: Provide openings in formwork to accommodate work of other 06 07 trades. 07 II 08 1. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. 08 09 09 10 C. Chamfer Strips: Place 3/4 IN chamfer strips in forms to produce 3/4 IN 10 II wide beveled edges on permanently exposed corners of members. 11 12 12 13 D. Reinforcement: 13 II 14 1. Position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. 14 15 2. Locate and support with chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and 15 16 hangers, as required. 16 17 3. Set wire ties so ends do,not touch forms and are directed into 17 II concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 18 19 4. Lap splice lengths: ACI 318 Class C top bar tension splices unless 19 20 indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 20 II 21 5. Extend reinforcement to within 2 IN of concrete perimeter edges. 21 22 a. If perimeter edge is earth formed, extend reinforcement to within 22 23 3 IN of the edge. 23 24 6. Unless otherwise indicated, provide minimum concrete cover as 24 , 25 follows: 25 26 a. Concrete deposited against earth: 3 IN. 26 27 b. Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with earth: 2 27 II IN for reinforcing bars #6 or larger; 1 -1/2 IN for reinforcing 28 29 - bars less than #6. 29 30 c. Formed surfaces exposed to or located above any liquid: 2 IN. 30 31 d. Interior surfaces: 1 -1/2 IN for beams, girders and columns; 3/4 31 II 32 IN or bar diameter, whichever is greater, for slabs, walls and 32 33 joists. 33 34 7. Do not weld reinforcing bars. 34 35 8. Welded wire fabric: 35 II 36 a. Install welded wire fabric in maximum practical sizes. 36 37 b. Splice sides and ends with a splice lap length measured between 37 II 38 outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet not less than: 38 39 1) One spacing of cross wires plus 2 IN. 39 40 2) 1.5 x development length. 40 41 3) 6 IN. 41 II c. Development length: ACI 318 basic development length for the 42 43 specified fabric yield strength. 43 44 44 , 45 E. Construction, Expansion, and Contraction Joints: 45 46 1. Provide at locations indicated. 46 47 2. Locate wall vertical construction joints at 30 FT maximum centers and 47 48 wall horizontal construction joints at 10 FT maximum centers. 48 49 3. Locate construction joints in floor slabs and foundation base slabs 49 50 so that concrete placements are approximately square and do not 50 51 exceed 2500 SF. 51 II 4. Locate construction joints in columns and walls: 52 53 a. At the underside of beams, girders, haunches, drop panels, column 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS , 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 capitals, and at floor panels. 01 02 b. Haunches, drop panels, and column capitals are considered part of 02 03 the supported floor or roof and shall be placed monolithically 03 04 therewith. , 'i 04 05 c. Column based need not be placed monolithically with the floor 05 06 below. 06 07 5. Locate construction joints in beams and girders: 07 08 a. At the middle of the span, unless a beam intersects a girder at 08 09 that point. 09 10 b. If the middle of the span is at an intersection of a beam and 10 11 girder, offset the joint in the girder a distance equal to twice 11 12 the beam width. 12 13 c. Provide satisfactory means for transferring shear and other 13 14 forces through the construction joint. 14 15 6. Locate construction joints in suspends slabs: 15 16 a. At or near the center of span in flat slab or T -beam 16 17 construction. 17 18 b. Do not locate a joint between a slab and a concrete beam or 18 19 girder unless so indicated on Drawings. 19 20 7. In pan- formed joists: 20 21 a. At or near span center when perpendicular to the joists. 21 22 b. Centered in the slab, midway between joists, when parallel to the 22 23 joists. 23 24 8. Install construction joints in beams, slabs, and girders ` 24 25 perpendicular to the planes of their surfaces. 25 26 9. At least 48 HRS shall elapse between placing of adjoining concrete 26 27 construction. - 27 28 10. Thoroughly clean and remove all laitance and loose and foreign 28 29 particles from construction joints. 29 30 11. Before new concrete is placed, coat all construction joints with an 30 31 approved bonding adhesive used and applied in accordance with 31 32 manufacturer's instructions. 32 33 33 34 F. Embedments: 34 35 1. Set and build in anchorage devices and other embedded items required 35 36 for other work that is attached to, or supported by concrete. 36 37 2. Use setting diagrams, templates and instructions for locating and 37 38 setting. ' 38 39 39 40 G. Preparation: 40 41 1. Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement. 41 42 2. Tighten forms to prevent mortar leakage. 42 43 3. Coat form surfaces with form release agents prior to placing 43 44 reinforcing bars in forms. 44 45 45 46 H. Placing Concrete: 46 47 1. Place concrete in compliance with ACI 304 and 304.2R. 47 48 2. Place in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections. 48 49 3. Begin placement when work of other trades affecting concrete is 49 50 completed. 50 51 4. Place concrete by methods which prevent aggregate segregation. 51 52 5. Do not allow concrete to free fall more than 4 FT. 52 53 6. Where free fall of concrete will exceed 4 FT, place concrete by means 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 03002 -11 II 03002 -12 01 of tremie pipe or chute. 01 , 02 02 03 I. Consolidation: 03 II 1. Consolidate all concrete using mechanical vibrators supplemented with 04 05 hand rodding and tamping, so that concrete is worked around 05 06 reinforcement and embedded items into all parts of forms. 06 II 07 07 08 J. Protection: 08 09 1. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to 09 10 weather extremes. 10 II 2. In cold weather comply with ACI 306R except as modified herein. 11 12 a. Do not place concrete on frozen ground or in contact with forms 12 13 or reinforcing bars coated with frost, ice or snow. 13 II b. Minimum concrete temperature at the time of mixing: 14 15 15 16 OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE CONCRETE TEMPERATURE 16 II 17 AT PLACEMENT (IN SHADE) AT MIXING 17 18 18 19 Below 30 DegF 70 DegF 19 20 Between 30 -45 DegF 60 DegF 20 II Above 45 DegF 50 DegF 21 22 22 23 c. Do not place heated concrete that is warmer than 80 DegF. 23 II 24 d. If freezing temperatures are expected during curing, maintain the 24 25 concrete temperature at or above 50 DegF for 7 days or 70 DegF 25 26 for 3 days. 26 27 e. Do not allow concrete to cool suddenly. 27 II 3. In hot weather comply with ACI 305R except as modified herein. 28 29 a. At air temperature of 90 DegF and above, keep concrete as cool as 29 30 possible during placement and curing. 30 II b. Do not allow concrete temperature to exceed 70 DegF at placement. 31 32 c. Prevent plastic shrinkage cracking due to rapid evaporation of 32 33 moisture. 33 II 34 d. Do not place concrete when the actual or anticipated evaporation 34 35 rate equals or exceeds 0.2 LBS /SF /HR as determined from ACI 305, 35 36 Figure 2.1.4. 36 37 37 II K. Curing: 38 39 1. Begin curing concrete as soon as free water has disappeared from 39 40 exposed surfaces. 40 II 41 2. Cure concrete by use of moisture retaining cover, burlap kept 41 42 continuously wet or by membrane curing compound. 42 43 3. Provide protection as required to prevent damage to concrete and to 43 44 prevent moisture loss from concrete during curing period. 44 II 4. Provide curing for minimum of 7 days. 45 46 5. Form materials left in place may be considered as curing materials 46 47 for surfaces in contact with the form materials except in periods of 47 ' 48 hot weather. 48 49 6. In hot weather follow curing procedures outlined in ACI 305R. 49 50 7. In cold weather follow curing procedures outlined in ACI 306R. 50 II 51 8. If forms are removed before 7 days has elapsed, finish curing of 51 52 formed surfaces by one of above methods for the remainder of the 52 53 curing period. 53 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 9. Curing vertical surfaces with a curing compound: Cover vertical 01 02 surfaces with a minimum of two coats of the curing compound. 02 03 a. Allow the preceding coat to completely dry prior to applying the 03 04 next coat. 04 05 b. Apply the first coat of curing compound immediately after form 05 06 removal. 06 07 c. Vertical surface at the time of receiving the first coat shall be 07 08 damp with no free water on the surface. 08 09 d. A vertical surface is defined as any surface steeper than 1 09 10 vertical to 4 horizontal. 10 11 11 12 3.02 CONCRETE FINISHES 12 13 13 14 A. Tolerances: 14 15 1. Class A: 1/8 IN in 10 FT. 15 16 2. Class B: 1/4 IN in 10 FT. 16 17 17 18 B. Surfaces Exposed to View: 18 19 1. Provide a smooth finish for exposed concrete surfaces and surfaces 19 20 that are: 20 21 a. To be covered with a coating or covering material applied 21 22 directly to concrete. 22 23 b. Scheduled for grout cleaned finish. 23 24 2. Remove fins and projections, and patch voids, air pockets, and 24 25 honeycomb areas with cement grout. 25 26 3. Fill tie holes with nonshrink nonmetallic grout. 26 27 27 28 C. Surfaces Not Exposed to View: 28 29 1. Patch voids, air pockets and honeycomb areas with cement grout. 29 30 2. Fill tie holes with nonshrink nonmetallic grout. 30 31 31 32 D. Grout Cleaned Finish: 32 33 1. Mix a part portland cement and 1 -1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient 33 34 bonding agent /water mixture to produce a grout with the consistency 34 35 of thick paint. 35 36 a. White portland cement shall be substituted for gray portland 36 37 cement to produce a color that matches color of surrounding 37 38 concrete as determined by trial patch for areas not to be 38 39 painted. 39 40 2. Wet surface of concrete to prevent absorption of water by grout and 40 41 uniformly apply grout with brushes or spray gun. 41 42 3. Immediately scrub the surface with a cork float or stone to coat and 42 43 fill air bubbles and holes. 43 44 4. While grout is still plastic, remove all excess grout by working 44 45 surface with rubber float, sack or other approved means. 45 46 5. After the surface whitens from drying, rub vigorously with clean 46 47 burlap. 47 48 6. Keep final finish damp for a minimum of 36 HRS after final rubbing. 48 49 49 50 E. Slab Float Finish: 50 51 1. After concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and 51 52 leveled, do no further work until ready for floating. 52 53 2. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 03002 -13 03002 -14 II 01 stiffened sufficiently to permit operation. 01 , 02 3. During or after first floating, check planeness of entire surface 02 03 with a 10 FT straightedge applied at not less than two different 03 II angles. 04 05 4. Cut down all high spots and fill all low spots during this procedure 05 06 to produce a surface within Class B tolerance throughout. 06 II 07 • 5. Refloat slab immediately to a uniform sandy texture. 07 08 08 09 F. Troweled Finish: 09 10 1. Float finish surface. 10 ' 11 2. Next power trowel, and finally hand trowel. 11 12 3. Produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of defects with 12 13 first hand troweling. 13 II 14 4. Perform additional trowelings by hand after surface has hardened 14 15 sufficiently. 15 16 5. Final trowel when a ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over 16 II 17 surface. 17 18 6. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling. 18 19 7. Leave finished surface essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in 19 20 texture and appearance and plane to a Class A tolerance. 20 II 8. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings remove any defects of 21 22 sufficient magnitude that would show through floor covering by 22 23 grinding. 23 II 24 24 25 G. Broom Finish: Immediately after concrete has received a float finish as 25 26 specified, give it a transverse scored texture by drawing a broom across 26 27 surface. 27 ' 28 28 29 3.03 GROUT 29 30 30 II A. Preparation: 31 32 1. Nonshrinking nonmetallic grout: 32 33 a. Clean concrete surface to receive grout. 33 34 b. Saturate concrete with water for 24 HRS prior to grouting. 34 , 35 2. Epoxy grout: Apply only to clean, dry, sound surface. 35 36 B. Application: 36 37 1. Nonshrinking nonmetallic grout: 37 II a. Mix in a mechanical mixer. 38 39 b. Use no more water than necessary to produce flowable grout. 39 40 c. Place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 40 II 41 d. Completely fill all spaces and cavities below the bottom of 41 42 baseplates. 42 43 e. Provide forms where baseplates and bedplates do not confine 43 44 grout. 44 , 45 f. Where exposed to view, finish grout edges smooth. 45 46 g. Except where a slope is indicated on Drawings, finish edges flush 46 47 at the baseplate, bedplate, member, or piece of equipment. 47 ' 48 h. Protect against rapid moisture loss by covering with wet rags or 48 49 polyethylene sheets. 49 50 i. Wet cure grout for 7 days, minimum. 50 51 2. Epoxy grout: 51 II 52 a. Mix and place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 52 53 b. Completely fill all cavities and spaces around dowels and anchors 53 II ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 without voids. 01 02 c. Obtain manufacturer's field technical assistance as required to 02 03 ensure proper placement. 03 04 04 05 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 05 06 06 07 A. Owner will employ and pay for services of a concrete testing laboratory 07 08 to perform testing of concrete placed during construction.' 08 09 1. Contractor to cooperate with Owner in obtaining and testing samples. 09 10 10 11 B. Tests During Construction: 11 12 1. Strength test - procedure: 12 13 a. Three cylinders, 6 IN DIA x 12 IN high, will be taken from each 13 14 sample per ASTM C172 and C31. 14 15 ' b. Cylinders will be tested per ASTM C39: • 15 16 1) One at 7 days. 16 17 2) Two at 28 days. 17 18 2. Strength test - frequency: 18 19 a. Not less than one test each day concrete placed. 19 20 b. Not less than one test for each 50 CY or major fraction thereof 20 21 placed in one day. 21 22 c. Not less than one test for each type of concrete poured. 22 23 d. Not less than one test for each concrete structure exceeding 2 CY 23 24 volume. 24 25 3. Slump test: Per ASTM C143. 25 26 a. Determined for each strength test sample. 26 27 b. Additional slump tests may be taken. 27 28 4. Air content: Per ASTM C231, C173, and C138. 28 29 a. Determined for each strength test sample. 29 30 5. Temperature: Determined for each strength test sample. 30 31 6. Unit weight of lightweight concrete. 31 32 a. Determined for each strength test sample. 32 33 b. Sample taken at point of discharge of fresh concrete. 33 34 34 35 C. Evaluation of Tests: 35 36 1. Strength test results: Average of 28 -day strength of two cylinders 36 37 from each sample. 37 38 a. If one cylinder manifests evidence of improper sampling, molding, 38 39 handling, curing or testings, strength of remaining cylinder will 39 40 be test result. 40 41 b. If both cylinders show any of above defects, test will be 41 42 discarded. 42 43 43 44 D. Acceptance of Concrete: 44 45 1: Strength level of each type of concrete shall be considered 45 46 satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met: 46 47 a. Average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equals or 47 48 exceeds the required specified 28 -day compressive strength. 48 49 b. No individual strength test falls below the required specified 49 50 28 -day compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 50 51 51 52 3.05 SCHEDULES 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 03002 -15 03002 -16 1 01 A. Form Types: 01 1 02 1. Surfaces exposed to view: 02 03 a. Prefabricated plywood panel forms, job -built plywood forms, or 03 ' 04 forms lined with plywood or fiberboard. 04 05 b. Laid out in a regular and uniform pattern with long dimensions 05 06 vertical and joints aligned. 06 07 c. Produce finished surfaces free from offsets, ridges, waves, and 07 08 concave or convex areas. 08 II 09 d. Construct forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. 09 10 2. Surfaces normally submerged or not normally exposed to view: 10 ' 11 a. Wood or steel forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of 11 12 mortar. 12 13 3. Other types of forms may be used: 13 II 14 a. For surfaces not restricted to plywood or lined forms. 14 15 b. As backing for form lining. 15 16 16 17 B. Grout: 17 18 1. Nonshrinking nonmetallic grout: General use. 18 II 19 2. Epoxy grout: 19 20 a. Grouting of dowels and anchor bolts into existing concrete. 20 II 21 b. Other uses indicated on Drawings. 21 22 3. Sand cement grout: Keyways of precast members. 22 23 23 24 C. Concrete: 24 , 25 1. Lean concrete: Duct banks, backfill, thrust blocking and where 25 26 indicated on Drawings. 26 27 2. Normal weight concrete: All other locations. 27 II 28 28 29 D. Concrete Finishes: 29 30 1. Grout cleaned finish: Formed surfaces exposed to view. 30 II 31 2. Slab finishes: 31 32 a. Use following finishes as applicable, unless otherwise indicated: 32 33 1) Floated finish: Surfaces intended to receive roofing, 33 34 concrete topping, lean concrete, concrete fill and 34 II waterproofing. 35 36 2) Troweled finish: Interior floor slabs, exposed roof slabs 36 37 and base slabs of structures, equipment bases, and column 37 II 38 bases. 38 39 3) Broom finish: Sidewalks, curbs, and slabs exposed to 39 40 weather. 40 41 41 II 42 END OF SECTION 42 1 1 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 DIVISION 5 METALS 01 90E04 SECTION 05120 01 02 02 03 STRUCTURAL STEEL 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Structural steel. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 17 3. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 17 18 18 19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 20 20 21 A. Referenced Standards: 21 22 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 22 23 a. Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of 23 24 Structural Steel for Buildings (referred to herein as AISC 24 25 Specification). 25 26 b. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges 26 27 (referred to herein as AISC Code of Standard Practice). Section 27 28 4, Paragraph 4.2.1 is specifically excluded from these 28 29 Specifications. 29 30 c. Quality Certification Program. 30 31 d. Manual of Steel Construction, Eighth Edition. 31 32 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 32 33 a. B18.22.1, Plain Washers. 33 34 b. B18.23.1, Bevelled Washers. 34 35 3. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 35 36 a. A36, Structural Steel. 36 37 b. A53, Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. 37 38 c. A108, Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold - Finished, Standard Quality. 38 39 d. Al23, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) 39 40 Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 40 41 e. A307, Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 41 42 f. A325, High- Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 42 43 g. A496, Deformed Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. 43 44 h. A500, Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural 44 45 Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 45 46 i. A501, Hot - Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural 46 47 Tubing. 47 48 4. Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts as 48 49 approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural 49 50 Joints (referred to herein as Specification for Structural Joints). 50 51 5. American Welding Society (AWS): 51 52 a. A5.1, Specification for Mild Steel Covered Arc Welding 52 53 Electrodes. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 05120 -1 05120 -2 01 b. A5.5, Specification for Low -Alloy Steel Covered Arc Welding 01 02 Electrodes. 02 03 c. A5.17, Specification for Bare Mild Steel Electrodes and Fluxes 03 04 for Submerged -Arc Welding. 04 05 d. A5.18, Specification for Mild Steel Electrodes for Gas Metal -Arc 05 06 Welding. ' 06 07 e. A5.20, Specification for Mild Steel Electrodes for Flux -Cored Arc 07 08 Welding. 08 09 f. A5.23, Specification for Bare Low -Alloy Steel Electrodes and 09 10 Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding. 10 11 g. D1.1, Structural Welding Code (referred herein as AWS Code. 11 12 h. Steel stud connectors and their installation to comply with 12 13 requirements of AWS Code. 13 14 14 15 B. Qualifications: 15 16 1. Steel fabricator: Minimum of 10 years of experience in fabrication 16 17 of structural steel and be certified under AISC Quality Certification 17 18 Program, Category II. 18 19 2. Steel erector: Minimum of 10 years of experience in erection of 19 20 structural steel. 20 21 21 22 1.03 SUBMITTALS 22 23 23 24 A. Shop Drawings: 24 25 1. See Section 01340. 25 26 2. Fabrication and /or layout drawings: 26 27 a. Steel erection plans and complete details for all structural 27 28 steel including details of all connections. Structural steel 28 29 shop drawings shall be sealed by a professional Engineer 29 30 registered in the State of Texas, retained by Contractor to 30 31 design connections, prior to submittal. Show all cuts, copes, 31 32 holes, and welds. Indicate all shop and field welds using AWS 32 33 symbols. 33 34 b. Prepare structural steel shop drawings under National Institute 34 35 of Steel`Detailing Quality Procedures Program certification. 35 36 c. Coordinate with Engineer, before starting work on the shop 36 37 drawings, to discuss the details of design, fabrication and 37 38 erection so as to avoid any misunderstanding of the intent of 38 39 Contract Drawings and Specifications. 39 40 d. Complete shop drawings for all of the work showing clearly all 40 41 pieces, details, connections and paint. Contractor not permitted 41 42 to reproduce Engineer's framing plans for this purpose. Prepare 42 43 independent complete erection Drawings showing the marks of all 43 44 pieces. 44 45 e. All shop drawings checked and signed approved by the checker 45 46 before submittal. 46 47 f. Copies of up -to -date erection Drawings, containing marks of all 47 48 pieces submitted for review shall accompany the shop drawings. 48 49 Use match marks on the structural steel erection drawings to 49 50 indicate the sheet number on which each particular member is 50 51 detailed. 51 52 g. Interpret Engineer's approval of shop drawings only as review of 52 53 the general design of details; however, this neither relieves 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 05120 -3 01 Contractor of the necessity for correcting such details on the 01 02 drawings, and completed work as may thereafter be found deficient 02 03 in strength or otherwise faulty, nor does it relieve Contractor 03 04 of the responsibility for figured dimensions on the shop 04 05 drawings. 05 06 h. Correct any incorrect or unacceptable material or fabrication due 06 07 to incorrect detailing, shop work, or erection, without 07 08 additional charge. 08 09 3. Product technical data including: 09 10 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 10 11 standards referenced. 11 12 b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 12 13 4. Certifications: 13 14 a. Certificates of compliance with standards specified for all major 14 15 components and fasteners incorporated into work. 15 16 b. Copies of welding certificates for each person assigned to 16 17 perform field welding indicating compliance with testing 17 18 specified by AWS. 18 19 5. Test reports: 19 20 a. Certified copies of mill tests. 20 21 21 22 22 23 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 23 24 24 25 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 25 26 26 27 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 27 28 Manufacturers are acceptable: 28 29 1. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors: 29 30 a. Nelson Stud Welding Division, TRW, Inc. 30 31 b. KSM Division Omark Industries. 31 32 2. Stainless steel wedge type expansion bolts: 32 33 a. Kwik Bolts by Hilti, Inc. 33 34 b. Red Head by.Phillips Drill Co. 34 35 35 36 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 36 37 01640. 37 38 38 39 2.02 MATERIALS 39 40 40 41 A. Steel, Structural Shapes and Plate: ASTM A36, unless noted otherwise on 41 42 Drawings. 42 43 43 44 B. Bolts, Nuts and Washers, High Strength: ASTM A325. Provide washers for 44 45 all nuts. 45 46 ' 46 47 C. Pipe, Round: ASTM A53, Grade B. 47 48 48 49 D. Tubing, Structural: ASTM A500 or A501 (36 ksi, minimum yield point). 49 50 50 51 E. Bolts and Nuts, Unfinished: ASTM A307, Grade A. 51 52 52 53 F. Washers, Plain (Unfinished Bolts): ANSI B18.22.1, Type B. 53 05120 -4 01 01 , 02 G. Washers, Beveled (Uhfinished Bolts): ANSI B18.23.1. 02 03 03 II 04 H. Welding Electrodes: 04 05 1. Shielded metal -arc: AWS A5.1 or AWS A5.5, E70XX. 05 06 2. Submerged -arc: AWS A5.17 or A5.23, F7X -EXXX. 06 07 3. Gas metal -arc: 'AWS A5.18, E70S -X or E70U -1. 07 , 08 4. Flux cored -arc: AWS A5.20, E70T -X (except 2, 3, 10, GS). 08 09 09 10 I. Anchor Bolts: ASTM.A36 for non - headed bolts; ASTM A307, Grade A for 10 II headed bolts. 11 12 12 13 J. Headed Studs and Deformed Bar Anchors: 13 , 14 1. Studs: ASTM A108, complying with AWS Code 4.23. 14 15 a. Uniform diameter. 15 16 b. Heads: Concentric and normal to shaft. 16 II 17 c. Weld end: Chamfered and solid flux. 17 18 2. Deformed anchor bars: ASTM A496, cold drawn wire. 18 19 a. Straight, unless indicated otherwise. 19 20 b. Solid flux. 20 II 3. After welding, free from any substance which would interfere with 21 22 function, or prevent bonding to concrete. 22 23 23 ' 24 K. Nonshrink Grout: See Section 03002. 24 25 25 26 L. Stainless Steel Expansion Bolts: ASTM A582, Type 303. 26 27 27 II 2.03 FABRICATION 28 29 29 30 A. Comply with requirements of application building codes and AISC 30 II Specification with modifications and additional requirements specified 31 32 herein. 32 33 33 II 34 B. Minimize the amount of field welding. Shop assemble components into 34 35 largest size possible commensurate with transportation and handling 35 36 limitations. 36 37 1. Shop connections: Bolted with high- strength bolts or welded. 37 , 38 38 39 C. Connection Detail's: 39 40 1. Connections not fully detailed on Drawings shall be designed by a 40 II 41 Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas, 41 42 retained by Contractor, based on requirements of Contract Documents. 42 43 Responsibility for structural adequacy of such connections shall 43 II 44 remain with Contractor. 44 45 2. Each beam connection shall be designed to support one -half of total 45 46 uniform load capacity tabulated in AISC tables for "Uniform Load 46 4 Constants for Beams" for the given shape, span and steel specified. 47 , 49 D. Provide as a minimum, 3/4 IN DIA, ASTM A325 high- strength bolts for all 49 50 bolted connections. 50 II 51 52 E. Minimum of two bolts per bolted connection. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 F. Provide friction -type connections for all bolted connections. 01 02 02 03 G. One -sided or other types of eccentric connections not indicated will not 03 04 be permitted without prior approval. 04 05 05 06 H. Accurately mill bearing surfaces to true plane. 06 07 07 08 I. Fabricate and erect beams without specified camber in accordance with 08 09 'AISC Specification Section 1.19.3. 09 10 10 11 J. Cut, drill, or punch holes at right angles to surface of metal. 11 12 1. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. 12 13 2. Make holes clean cut, without torn or ragged edges. 13 14 3. Remove outside burrs resulting from drilling or reaming operations 14 15 with tool making 1/16 IN bevel. 15 16 4. Provide holes in members to permit connection of work of other trades 16 17 or contractors. 17 18 18 19 K. Make allowance for draw in all cross bracing to provide small amount of 19 20 initial tension in members. 20 21 21 22 L. Make splices only where indicated or where approved. 22 23 23 24 M. Field Connections: Provide bolts for all field connections except where 24 25 shown otherwise on the Drawings. 25 26 1. Use high- strength bolts (any one of three types of ASTM A325 bolts), 26 27 unless shown or specified otherwise. 27 28 2. Use of high- strength bolts: Conform to "Specifications for . 28 29 Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts," as approved by 29 30 Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the 30 31 Engineering Foundation, and published by AISC. 31 32 3. If structural 'steel details (field welds verses shop welds, etc.) 32 33 shown on design Drawings are not compatible with erection procedures, 33 34 submit proposed modifications for review. 34 35 4. Connections to structural steel provided by others (hoist rail): 35 36 Provide all connectors and coordinate location of bolt holes to match 36 37 connection holes in steel provided by others. 37 38 38 39 N. Wall Girts: Extend past columns and miter ends unless noted otherwise. 39 40 Connect girts at corners unless noted otherwise. 40 41 41 42 0. Headed Studs and Deformed Bar Anchors: 42 43 1. Automatically end welded in accordance with the AWS code and 43 44 manufacturer's recommendations. 44 45 2. Fillet welding of headed studs and deformed bar anchors is not 45 46 allowed. 46 47 47 48 P. Cope at 45 degrees, of stiffener plates at junction of member 48 49 flanges with webs. 49 50 , 50 51 Q. Flame cut bevels for field welds, provided such cutting is done 51 52 automatically. Leave free of burrs and slag. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 05120 -5 05120 -6 01 R. Grind smooth all rough welds and sharp steel edges shall be ground to 01 02 approximately 1/8 IN radius. 02 03 03 04 2.04 SHOP WELDING 04 05 05 06 A. Requirements of this Section apply to shop welding and field welding. 06 07 07 08 B. Comply with AWS Code, and other requirements indicated, for all welding, 08 09 techniques of welding employed, appearance and quality of welds, and 09 10 methods used to correct defective work. 10 11 11 12 C. Test and qualify welders, welding operators and tackers in compliance 12 13 with AWS Code for position and type of welding to which they will be 13 14 assigned. 14 15 15 16 D. Comply with AWS D1.1 for joint welding procedures. 16 17 17 18 E. Before Starting Welding: 18 19 1. Carefully plumb and align members in compliance with specified 19 20 requirements. 20 21 2. Preheat base metal to temperature stated in Table 4.2 of AWS Code. 21 22 a. When no preheat temperature is given in Table 4.2 and base metal 22 23 is below 50 DegF, preheat base metal to at least 70 DegF. 23 24 b. Maintain temperature during welding. 24 25 c. Preheat surface of all base metal within distance from point of 25 26 welding equal to thickness of thicker part being welded or 3 IN, 26 27 whichever is greater, to specified preheat temperature. 27 28 d. Maintain this temperature during welding. 28 29 3. Fully tighten bolts. 29 30 4. Comply with Section 3 of AWS Code for assembly and surface 30 31 preparation. 31 32 5. Each welder shall use identifying mark at welds where he has worked. 32 33 33 34 F. Where groove welds have back -up plates, make first three passes with 1/8 34 35 IN round electrodes. 35 36 36 37 G. Use backup plates in accordance with AWS Code, extending minimum of 1 IN 37 38 either side of joint. 38 39 39 40 H. Make flange welds before making web welds. 40 41 . ' 41 42 I. Grind flush web fillets at webs notched to receive backup plates for 42 43 flange groove welds. 43 44 44 45 J. Manual Shielded Metal -Arc Welding: Comply with Article 4.6 of AWS Code. 45 46 46 47 K. Low Hydrogen Electrodes: Dry and store electrodes in compliance with AWS 47 48 Code. 48 49 49 50 L. Do not perform welding when ambient temperature is lower than 0 DegF or 50 51 where surfaces are wet or exposed to rain, snow, or high wind, or when 51 52 welders are exposed to inclement conditions. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 05120 -7 II 01 2.05 SHOP COATING 01 02 02 II 03 A. Hot dip galvanize all structural components of the sulfur dioxide storage 03 04 structure after fabrication. 04 05 05 06 06 I 07 PART 3 - EXECUTION 07 08 08 09 3.01 GENERAL 09 1 10 10 11 A. Take into consideration that full structural capacity of many structural 11 12 members is not realized until structural assembly is complete; e.g., 12 II 13 until slabs, decks, and diagonal bracing are installed. 13 14 14 15 B. Plumb, align, and set structural steel members to specified tolerances. 15 16 Use temporary guys, braces, shoring, connections, etc., necessary to 16 II 17 maintain the structural- framing plumb and in proper alignment until 17 18 permanent connections are made, the succeeding work is in place, and 18 19 temporary work is no longer necessary. Use temporary guys, bracing, 19 II 20 shoring, and other work to prevent damage to adjacent work or 20 21 construction from stresses due to erection procedures and operation of 21 22 erection equipment; construction loads, and wind. Remove and dispose of 22 23 all temporary work and facilities off -site. - 23 I 24 24 25 C. Examine work -in -place on which specified work is in any way dependent to 25 26 ensure that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of the work. 26 I 27 Report defects in work -in -place which may influence satisfactory 27 28 completion of the work. Absence of such notification will be construed 28 29 as acceptance of,work -in- place. 29 ' 30 30 31 D. Field Measurement: 'Take field measurements as necessary to verify or 31 32 supplement dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Contractor responsible 32 33 for the accurate fit of the work. 33 II 34 34 35 E. Check the elevations of all finished footings or foundations and the 35 36 location and alignment of all anchor bolts before starting erection. Use 36 II 37 surveyor's level. Notify Engineer of any errors or deviations found by 37 38 such checking. 38 39 39 ' 40 3.02 ERECTION 40 41 41 42 A. Conform to provisions of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel 42 43 Buildings," Section 7 "Erection," except where shown or specified 43 I 44 otherwise in Contract Documents. Provisions in Contract Document shall 44 45 hold priority to provisions of "Code of Standard Practice for Steel 45 46 Buildings," where conflicts exist. 46 47 47 48 B. Framing member location tolerances after erection shall not exceed the 48 49 frame tolerances listed in Article 3.03. 49 50 50 ' 51 C. Erect plumb and level; introduce temporary bracing required to support 51 52 erection loads. 52 53 53 I ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 05120 -8 01 D. Use light drifting necessary to draw holes together. Drifting to match 01 02 unfair holes is not allowed. 02 03 03 04 E. Welding: Conform to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code" and requirements 04 05 of Article 2.04 specified herein before. When joining two sections of 05 06 steel of different ASTM designations, welding techniques shall be in 06 07 accordance with a qualified AWS D1.1 procedure. 07 08 08 09 F. Shore existing members when unbolting of common connections is required. 09 10 Use new bolts for rebolting connections. 10 11 11 12 G. Clean stored material of all foreign matter accumulated during erection 12 13 period. 13 14 14 15 H. Set base and bearing plates accurately, as indicated, and grout 15 16 immediately. 16 17 1. Use nonshrink grout. 17 18 2. Use metal wedges, shims or setting nuts as required. 18 19 3. Pack grout solidly between plate and bearing surface. 19 20 4. Fill sleeves around anchor bolts with nonshrink grout. 20 21 21 22 I. Clean bearing and contact surfaces before assembly. 22 23 - 23 24 J. Install ASTM A325 bolts with hardened washers. Install and tighten in 24 25 accordance with Section 8 of Specifications for Structural Joints. 25 26 1. Use turn -of -nut tightening to provide the bolt tension as specified 26 27 in AISC "Specification for Structural Joints" Using ASTM A325 or A490 27 28 bolts. 28 P9 29 30 K. Do not use gas cutting to correct fabrication errors. In case members do 30 31 not fit or holes do not match, ream out the holes and insert the next 31 32 larger size bolt.. If the connections require new holes, then drill new 32 33 holes. Make no such corrections without prior approval of the Engineer. 33 34 1. Burning of holes: Not permitted. 34 35 35 36 L. Provide beveled washers to give full bearing to bolt head or nut where 36 37 bolts are to be used on surfaces having slopes greater than 1 in 20 with 37 38 a plane normal to bolt axis. 38 39 39 40 M. After bolts are tightened, upset threads of A307 unfinished bolts to 40 41 prevent nuts from backing off. 41 42 42 43 N. After erection, grind smooth all sharp surface irregularities resulting 43 44 from field cutting or welding; power tool clean welds, bolts, washers and 44 45 abrasions to shop coat removing all rust and foreign matter. 45 46 46 47 0. Wedge -type expansion bolts to have a minimum embedment of 4 IN into 47 48 concrete or masonry unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 48 49 49 50 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 50 51 51 52 A. Tolerances (unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings): 52 53 1. Frame placement, after assembly and before welding or tightening: 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 05120 -9 01 a. Deviation from plumb, level and alignment: 1 in 500, maximum. 01 02 b. Displacement of centerlines of columns: 1/2 IN maximum, each 02 03 side of centerline location shown on Drawings. 03 04 c. Displacement of centerlines of exterior columns: 1/2 IN maximum, 04 05 each side of centerline location shown on Drawings. 05 06 06 07 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR OF SHOP PRIMER PAINT 07 08 08 09 A. After erection, clean all steel of mud or other foreign materials, and 09 10 repair any damage. Comply with Section 09905. 10 11 11 12 END OF SECTION 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 05313 -1 01 90L20 SECTION 05313 01 02 02 03 METAL DECK 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL - 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Metal roof deck. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. . 16 17 3. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 17 18 18 19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 20 20 21 A. Referenced Standards: 21 22 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 22 23 a. Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural 23 24 Members. 24 25 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 25 26 a. A36, Specification for Structural Steel. 26 27 b. A446, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by 27 28 the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality. 28 29 c. A525, Specifications for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, 29 30 Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. 30 31 d. A611, Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Structural Quality. 31 32 e. D746, Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and 32 33 Elastomers by Impact. 33 34 f. D1056, Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials Sponge or 34 35 Expanded Rubber. 35 36 3. American Welding Society (AWS): 36 37 a. D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 37 38 4. Steel Deck Institute (SDI): 38 39 a. Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks. 39 40 5. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.(UL): 40 41 41 42 B. Qualifications: 42 43 1. Manufacturer: Member of Steel Deck Institute. 43 44 44 45 1.03 SUBMITTALS 45 46 - 46 47 A. Shop Drawings: 47 48 1. See Section 01340. 48 49 2. Product technical data including: 49 50 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 50 51 standards referenced. 51 52 b. Metal deck manufacturer's specifications and installation 52 53 instructions. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 05313 -2 01 c. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for: 01 II 02 1) Galvanizing repair paint. 02 03 2) Screws. 03 ' 04 3) Joint sealing compound. 04 05 d. Manufacturer's load tables for deck to be furnished on this 05 06 project, including allowable gravity load for deck and composite 06 ' 07 slab and allowable diaphragm shear values for deck. 07 08 4. Certifications: 08 09 a. Manufacturer member of SDI. 09 10 b. Welders. 10 ' 11 5. Test reports. 11 12 12 13 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 13 II 14 15 A. Protect materials from rusting, denting or crushing. 15 16 • 1. Store metal deck on project site off the ground with one end elevated 16 , 17 to provide drainage and protected from the elements with a waterproof 17 18 covering, ventilated to avoid condensation. Prevent deterioration 18 19 and accumulation of foreign material. 19 20 20 21 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS 21 II 22 22 23 A. Do not overload supporting members. Until the entire assembly is 23 II complete, the structural elements may not be stable or capable of 24 25 supporting code or stated design loads. 25 26 26 11 27 27 28 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 29 29 30 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 30 II 31 32 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 32 33 Manufacturers are acceptable: 33 ' 34 1. 1 -1/2 IN deep metal roof deck: 34 35 a. Vulcraft, Type 1.5B. 35 36 b. United Steel Deck, Inc., Type B. 36 37 c. Wheeling Corrugating Co., Type BW. 37 ' 38 d. Epic Metals Corp., Type B. 38 39 e. Roll Form Products, Inc., Type B15RD. 39 40 f. Wolverine Deck Co., Type B. 40 , 41 g. Cyclops Corp., Bowman Metal Deck Division, Type FM2. 41 42 42 43 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 43 ' 44 01640. 44 45 45 46 2.02 STEEL DECK 46 47 47 48 A. The allowable superimposed live uniform loading per square foot for the 48 49 deck supplied for the spans indicated shall equal or exceed the allowable 49 50 superimposed live uniform load per square foot for the same spans as 50 ' 51 indicated in the Steel Deck Institute latest tables. 51 52 52 53 B. Minimum Deflection: Less than 1/240 of span under live load. 53 ' ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 05313 -3 01 01 02 C. Metal Roof Decking, 1 -1/2 IN Deep: Wide rib type, sheet steel, 22 GA, 02 03 minimum, galvanized. 03 04 1. Galvanized decking: ASTM A446 with ASTM A525 G90 zinc coating. 04 05 05 06 D. Fabrication: 06' 07 1. Form deck units in lengths to span fully across entire structure. 07 08 a. Provide deck units having interlocking male and female type side 08 09 laps or joints to provide positive vertical and lateral alignment 09 10 of adjacent deck units. 10 11 2. Use deck configurations complying with SDI "Basic Design 11 12 Specifications" and as indicated. 12 13 a. Wide rib deck: Depth 1 -1/2 IN, ribs spaced approximately 6 IN 13 14 OC; width of rib opening at top surface maximum 2 -1/2 IN; width 14 15 of bottom rib surface minimum 1 -3/4 IN. 15 16 16 17 E. Galvanized Repair Paint: For repair of damaged galvanized surfaces, 17 18 comply with Section 09905. 18 19 19 20 F. Screws: Self- drilling, self- tapping, #12 size minimum sheet metal 20 21 screws. 21 22 22 23 G. Sheet Metal Accessories: Same material and finish as deck members. 23 24 24 25 H. Joint Sealing Compound: Nonskinning, gun grade, bulk compound as 25 26 recommended by deck manufacturer. 26 27 27 28 28 29 PART 3 - EXECUTION 29 30 30 31 3.01 INSTALLATION 31 32 32 33 A. Install roof deck units and accessories as indicated in accordance with 33 34 manufacturer's recommendations, final approved shop drawings and as 34 35 specified herein. 35 36 36 37 B. Do not start placement of roof deck units until all supporting members 37 38 are installed complete. 38 39 1. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of structure. 39 40 40 41 C. Do not overload supporting members. Until the entire assembly is 41 42 complete, the structural elements may not be stable or capable of 42 43 supporting code or stated design loads. 43 44 44 45 D. Place each deck unit on supporting structural frame, adjust to final 45 46 position, accurately align with ends bearing on supporting members. 46 47 1. Do not stretch or contract side -lap interlocks. 47 48 2. Place deck units flat and square and secure to framing without warp 48 49 or excessive deflection. 49 50 3. Place units in accurate and close alignment for entire length of run 50 51 and with close registration of flutes of one unit with those of 51 52 abutting unit. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 05313 -4 01 E. Fastening of 1 -1/2 IN Deep Metal Roof Deck: 01 02 1. Secure deck units to supporting frame and side laps as follows: 02 03 a. At all interior supports and at ends of deck use: 03 04 1) For 24 IN wide deck: Three 5/8 IN round plug welds per deck 04 05 unit. 05 06 2) For 30 and 36 IN wide deck: Four 5/8 IN round plug welds per 06 07 deck unit. 07 08 3) Install 22 GA deck with welding washers at weld locations. 08 09 b. At perimeter supports, use 5/8 IN round plug welds at 12 IN OC. 09 10 c. At side laps, use #12 hexhead screws at 24 IN OC. 10 11 11 12 F. Remove and replace decking which is structurally weak or unsound or which 12 13 has burn holes due to improper welding or which Engineer declares 13 14 defective. 14 15 15 16 G. Joint Sealing: 16 17 1. Remove dust, dirt, and moisture from joint surfaces. 17 18 2. Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 18 19 19 20 H. Clean and Touch Up: 20 21 1. Remove all surplus materials and debris from surface of roof deck 21 22 after installation. 22 23 2. Wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on 23 24 top surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members in 24 25 compliance with Section 09905. 25 26 3. Touch -up damaged galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint 26 27 applied in compliance with Section 09905. 27 28 28 29 29 30 END OF SECTION 30 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 05505 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 91B25 SECTION 05505 01 02 02 03 METAL FABRICATIONS 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 - 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Custom fabricated metal items and certain manufactured units not 11 12 otherwise indicated to be supplied under work of other sections. 12 13 13 14 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 14 15 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 15 16 the Contract. 16 17 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 17 18 3. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. 18 19 4. Section 05522 - Aluminum Railings. 19 20 5. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 20 21 21 22 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 22 23 23 24 A. Referenced Standards: 24 25 1. Aluminum Association (AA): 25 26 a. 30 -86, Specifications for Aluminum Structures. 26 27 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 27 28 a. S326, Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of 28 29 Structural Steel for Buildings (referred to herein as AISC 29 30 specification). 30 31 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 31 32 a. A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel. 32 33 b. A47, Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 33 34 c. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 34 35 d. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and 35 36 Hot Dipped, Zinc - Coated Welded and Seamless. 36 37 e. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, 37 38 Cold - Finished, Standard Quality. 38 39 f. Al23, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) 39 40 Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 40 41 g. A197, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. 41 42 h. A307, Standard Specification Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 42 43 psi Tensile Strength. 43 44 i. A325, Standard Specification for High- Strength Bolts for 44 45 Structural Steel Joints. 45 46 j. A496, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for 46 47 Concrete Reinforcement. 47 48 k. A500, Standard Specification for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless 48 49 Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 49 50 1. A525, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel 50 51 Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. 51 52 m. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 52 53 n. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 05505 -2 ' 01 o. A582, Standard Specification for Free - Machining Stainless and 01 , 02 Heat - Resisting Steel Bars, Hot - Rolled or Cold- Finished. 02 03 p. A666, Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel, 03 II 04 Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 04 05 q. A668, Standard Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and 05 06 Alloy, for General Industrial Use. 06 07 r. A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged Hot - Dipped 07 , 08 Galvanized Coatings. 08 09 s. A786, Standard Specification for Rolled Steel Floor Plate. 09 10 t. B26, Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Sand Castings. 10 II u. B36, Standard Specification for Brass Plate, Sheet, Strip, and 11 12 Rolled Bar. 12 13 v. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy 13 , 14 Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 14 15 w. 8308, Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy 6061 -T6 Standard 15 16 Structural Shapes. 16 17 x. B632, Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Rolled Tread 17 , 18 Plate. 18 19 y. F467, Standard Specification for Non - Ferrous Nuts for General 19 20 Use. 20 , 21 z. F468, Standard Specification for Non - Ferrous Bolts, Hex Cap 21 22 Screws, and Studs for General Use. 22 23 aa. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap 23 ' 24 Screws, and Studs. 24 25 6. American Welding Society (AWS): 25 26 a. A5.1, Specification for Covered Carbon Steel Arc Welding 26 27 Electrodes. 27 II b. D1.1, Structural Welding Code Steel. 28 29 c. 01.2, Structural Welding Code Aluminum. 29 30 7. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 30 II 31 a. Metal Bar Grating Manual. 31 32 b. Metal Stairs Manual. 32 33 8. Research Council on Structural Joints: 33 34 a. Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. 34 ' 35 9. U.S.Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health 35 36 Administration (OSHA): 36 37 a. 29 CFR 1910, OSHA Safety and Health Standards for General 37 ' 38 Industry (referred to herein as OSHA standards). 38 39 10. Provide all fabricated items complying with OSHA Regulations. 39 40 40 ' 41 1.03 SUBMITTALS 41 42 42 43 A. Shop Drawings: 43 44 1. See Section 01340. 44 , 45 2. Fabrication and /or layout drawings: 45 46 a. Submit shop drawings for all fabrications and assemblies. 46 47 3. Product technical data including: 47 ' 48 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 48 49 standards referenced. 49 50 b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 50 51 c. For grating, include manufacturer's standard allowable load 51 ' 52 tables. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 05505 -3 II 01 01 02 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 02 ' 03 03 04 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 04 05 05 06 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 06 ' 07 Manufacturers are acceptable: 07 08 1. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors: 08 09 a. Nelson Stud Welding Div., TRW Inc. 09 I 10 b. KSM Division Omark Industries. 10 11 c. Eric /Jones Stud Welding Div. 11 12 2. Expansion anchors: 12 ' 13 a. Hilti Inc. 13 14 b. Phillips Drill Co., Inc. 14 15 c. Wej -it. 15 16 3. Adhesive anchors: 16 I 17 a. Hilti Inc. 17 18 b. Emhart Corp., Molly Div. 18 19 19 ' 20 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 20 21 01640. 21 22 22 23 2.02 MATERIALS 23 II 24 24 25 A. Steel: 25 26 1. Structural steel: ASTM A36. 26 ' 27 2. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, Types E or S, Grade B. 27 28 3. Structural tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. 28 29 4. Bolts, nuts and washers, high strength: ASTM A325. 29 30 a. Provide washers with all nuts. 30 II 31 5. Bolts and nuts unfinished: ASTM A307, Grade A. 31 32 a. Provide washers with all nuts. 32 33 6. Anchor bolts: ASTM A36. 33 I 34 7. Electrodes for welding steel: AWS A5.1, E70 Series. 34 35 8. Steel forgings: ASTM A668. 35 36 36 I 37 B. Iran: 37 38 1. Ductile iron: ASTM A536. 38 39 2. Gray cast iron: ASTM A48. 39 40 3. Malleable iron: ASTM A47, A197. 40 I 41 41 42 C. Stainless Steel: 42 43 1. Stainless steel: ASTM A666, Type (302) (304) (304L} (316), Grade A. 43 ' 44 45 2. Stainless steel bolts and nuts: ASTM F593, Type 303 or 304 with 44 minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi and minimum tensile strength of 45 46 70,000 psi. 46 47 47 II 48 D. Aluminum: 48 49 1. Rolled shapes and extrusions: ASTM B308 or 8221. 49 50 2. Castings: ASTM B26. 50 II 51 3. Alloys 6061 -T6 or 6063 -T6 unless specified otherwise in this Section. 51 52 4. Aluminum angles, beams, pipes, plates and channels: Alloy 6061 -T6. 52 53 5. Aluminum weir plates and baffles: Alloy 6061 -T6. 53 ' ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 05505 -4 1 01 6. Aluminum bolts: ASTM F468, alloy 2024 T4. 01 ' 02 7. Aluminum nuts: ASTM F467, alloy 2024 T4. 02 03 8. Electrodes for welding aluminum: AWS D1.2, filler alloy 4043 or 03 , 04 5356. 04 05 05 06 E. Washers: Same material and alloy as found in accompanying bolts and 06 07 nuts. 07 , 08 08 09 F. Galvanizing: ASTM Al23 or A525 with minimum coating of 1.5 OZ per square 09 10 foot. 10 ' 11 11 12 G. Expansion Anchors: 12 13 1. Kwik -Bolt by Hilti, Red Head by Phillips Drill Co., or approved 13 ' 14 equal. 14 15 15 16 H. Adhesive Anchors: 16 17 1. Parabond capsule anchors by Molly; HVA anchors by Hilti; or approved 17 ' 18 equal. 18 19 19 20 I. Headed Studs: ASTM A108 with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi and 20 II 21 a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi. 21 22 22 23 J. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A496 with a minimum tensile strength of 23 - 24 80,000 psi and a minimum yield strength of 70,000 psi. 24 , 25 25 26 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS 26 27 27 1 28 A. Bollards: 28 29 1. 6 IN DIA extra strength steel pipe. 29 30 2. Minimum 42 IN projection above ground. 30 31 3. Minimum 42 IN embedment in concrete. 31 , 32 4. Welded on steel headed stud anchors: 1/2 IN DIA as shown on the 32 33 Contract Documents. 33 34 - 34 ' 35 B. Steel Grating: Fabricate in accordance with NAAMM Metal Bar Grating 35 36 Manual. 36 37 1. Bearing bars: Rectangular 1 -1/4 x 3/16 IN unless shown otherwise on 37 ' 38 Drawings. 38 39 2. Cross bars: Welded, swagged or pressure locked to bearing bars. 39 40 3. Top edges of bars: Serrated. 40 41 4. Grating Sections: Not wider than 3 FT where shown on Drawings to be 41 42 removable. 42 II 43 5. Finish: Galvanized with a minimum 1.5 OZ zinc coating. 43 44 6. Ends and perimeter edges: Banded. 44 , 45 7. Openings through grating: Reinforced to provide required load 45 46 carrying capacity and banded with 4 IN high toe plate. 46 47 8. Provide joints at openings between individual grating sections. 47 ' 48 9. Clips and bolts: Stainless steel. 48 49 49 50 C. Manually Cleaned Bar Screen: 50 51 1. Fabricate by welding from 304 stainless steel in two pieces - bar 51 II screen and drain pan - joined with stainless steel hardware. 52 53 2. Installed unit must be rigid, capable of supporting 400 LBS without 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 noticeable deflection. 01 02 3. Bar screen: 02 03 a. Screen bars: 1 IN x 3/8 IN with 3/4 IN clear space between, 03 04 inclined 45 Deg from horizontal. 04 05 b. Lateral support bars: 1 -1/2 IN x 3/8 IN at top and bottom of 05 06 screen bars, angled to be flush with channel bottom and drain 06 07 pan. 07 08 4. Drain pan: 08 09 a. Fabricate from 10 gage (min) brake formed stainless steel sheet. 09 10 b. Dish top surface to drain to the center and provide a minimum of 10 11 eighty 1/4 IN diameter drain holes near the center of the pan. 11 12 c. Provide stiffener bars underneath drain pan as required. 12 13 5. Mounting: 13 14 a. Mount drain pan to channel walls with a minimum of six 1/2 IN 14 15 diameter x 3 IN expansion bolts at each channel. 15 16 b. Mount bar screen to channel bottom with a minimum of two 1/2 IN 16 17 - diameter x 3 IN expansion bolts. Attach bar screen to drain pan 17 18 with a minimum of two 1/2 IN diameter x 1 IN stainless steel 18 19 bolts, washers, and nuts. 19 20 20 21 2.04 FABRICATION 21 22 22 23 A. Verify field conditions and dimensions prior to fabrication. 23 24 24 25 B. Form materials to shapes indicated with straight lines, sharp angles, and 25 26 smooth curves. 26 27 27 28 C. Drill or punch holes with smooth edges. 28 29 29 30 D. Weld Permanent Shop Connections: 30 31 1. Welds to be continuous fillet type unless indicated otherwise. 31 32 2. Full penetration butt weld bends in stair stringers which are bent at 32 33 landings. 33 34 3. Weld structural steel in accordance with AWS D1.1 using Series E70 34 35 electrodes conforming to AWS A5.1. 35 36 4. Weld aluminum in accordance with AWS D1.2. 36 37 5. Grind smooth welds that will be exposed. 37 38 38 39 E. Conceal fastenings where practicable. 39 40 40 41 F. Punch or drill for field connections and for attachment of work by other 41 42 trades. 42 43 43 44 G. Fabricate work in shop in as large assemblies as is practicable. 44 45 45 46 H. Finishes: 46 47 1. Aluminum: Mill finished unless scheduled or otherwise specified or, 47 48 if approved, finished in manufacturer's standard. 48 49 a. Coat surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials. See Section 49 50 09905. 50 51 2. See Section 09905 for preparation and painting of ferrous metals and 51 52 other surfaces. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 05505 -5 05505 -6 II 01 01 II 02 PART 3 - EXECUTION 02 03 03 , 04 3.01 PREPARATION 04 05 05 06 A. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of substrate. 06 II 07 Installation of product constitutes installer's acceptance of substrate 07 08 condition for product compatibility. 08 09 09 10 B. Correct surface defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent 10 , 11 a satisfactory installation. 11 12 12 13 3.02 INSTALLATION 13 II 14 14 15 A. Set metal work level, true to line, plumb. 15 16 16 II 17 B. Shim and grout as necessary. 17 18 18 19 C. Bolt Field Connections: Where practicable, conceal fastenings. Grind 19 20 welds smooth where field welding is required. 20 ' 21 21 22 D. Unless noted or specified otherwise: 22 23 1. Connect steel members to steel members with 3/4 IN DIA high strength 23 II 24 bolts. 24 25 2. Connect aluminum to aluminum with 3/4 IN DIA aluminum bolts. 25 26 3. Connect aluminum to structural steel using 3/4 IN DIA stainless steel 26 27 bolts. Provide dissimilar metals protection. 27 ' 28 4. Connect aluminum and steel members to concrete and masonry using 3/4 28 29 IN DIA stainless steel expansion bolts unless shown otherwise. 29 30 Provide dissimilar materials protection. 30 ' 31 a. Expansion bolts to have a minimum embedment of 4 IN into concrete 31 32 and masonry unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 32 33 33 t 34 E. Tighten ASTM A325 high- strength bolts in accordance with Section 05120. 34 35 1. Provide hardened washers for all ASTM A325 bolts. Provide the 35 36 hardened washer under the element (nut or bolt head) turned in 36 37 tightening. 37 II 38 39 F. Do not field splice fabricated items unless said items exceed standard 39 40 shipping length or change of direction requires splicing. Provide full 40 ' 41 penetration welded splices where continuity is required. 41 42 42 43 G. Provide each fabricated item complete with attachment devices as 43 44 indicated or required to install. 44 ' 45 45 46 H. Anchor aluminum and metal work so that work will not be distorted nor 46 47 fasteners overstressed from expansion and contraction. 47 ' 48 48 49 I. Setting Beam and Column Base Plates: 49 50 1. Set beam and column base plates on nonshrink grout in accordance with 50 II 51 Division 3. 51 52 2. Construct top of bearing surface to an elevation that is lower than 52 53 elevation of bottom of base plate by dimension indicated. If not 53 II ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 05505 -7 01 indicated, provide minimum of 1 IN grout thickness under base plates. 01 02 3. Set and anchor each base plate to proper line and elevation. 02 03 a. Use metal wedges, shims, or setting nuts for leveling and 03 04 plumbing columns and beams. Wedges, shims and setting nuts to be 04 05 of same metal as base plate they support. 05 06 b. Fill space between bearing surface and bottom of base plate with 06 07 nonshrink grout. Fill space until voids are completely filled 07 08 and base plates are fully bedded on wedges, shims, and grout. 08 09 c. Do not remove wedges or shims. Where they protrude, cut off 09 10 flush with edge of base plate. 10 11 11 12 J. Tie anchor bolts in position to embedded reinforcing steel with wire. 12 13 Tack welding prohibited. Coat bolt threads and nuts with heavy coat of 13 14 clean grease. Anchor bolt location tolerance: 1/16 IN. Provide steel 14 15 templates for all column anchor bolts. 15 16 16 17 K. Install bollards in concrete as detailed. Fill with concrete and round 17 18 off at top of pipe. 18 19 19 20 L. Accurately locate and place frames for openings before casting into floor 20 21 slab so top of plate is flush with surface of finished floor. Keep screw 21 22 holes clean and ready to receive screws. 22 23 23 24 M. Attach grating to end and intermediate supports with grating saddle clips 24 25 and bolts. 25 26 1. Maximum spacing: 2 FT OC with minimum of two per side. 26 27 2. Attach individual units of aluminum grating together with clips or 27 28 attachments at 2 FT OC maximum with a minimum of two clips per side. 28 29 29 30 N. Paint ferrous metals in accordance with Section 09905. 30 31 31 32 0. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials in accordance 32 33 with Section 09905. 33 34 - 34 35 END OF SECTION 35 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 91825 SECTION 05522 01 02 02 03 ALUMINUM RAILINGS 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Aluminum railings. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. - 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 17 3. Section 05505 - Metal Fabrications. 17 18 4. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 18 19 19 20 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 20 21 21 22 A. Referenced Standards: 22 23 1. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA): 23 24 a. 605.2, Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic 24 25 Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. 25 26 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineer (ASME): 26 27 a. Section IX, Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing 27 28 Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators. 28 29 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 29 30 a. A36, Standard Specifications for Structural Steel. 30 31 b. A53, Standard Specifications for Pipe, Steel, Black and 31 32 Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated Welded and Seamless. 32 33 c. A320, Standard Specifications for Alloy -Steel Bolting Materials 33 34 for Low- Temperature Service. 34 35 d. A525, Standard Specifications for General Requirements for Steel 35 36 Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. 36 37 e. B108, Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Permanent Mold 37 38 Castings. 38 39 f. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy 39 40 Sheet and Plate. 40 41 g. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy 41 42 Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes. 42 43 h. B241, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy 43 44 Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube. 44 45 i. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap 45 46 Screws, and Studs. 46 47 4. American Welding Society (AWS): 47 48 a. C5.5, Recommended Practices for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding. 48 49 b. D1.2, Structural Welding Code Aluminum. 49 50 5. U.S.Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health 50 51 Administration (OSHA): 51 52 a. 29 CFR 1910, OSHA Safety and Health Standards for General 52 53 Industry (referred to herein as OSHA standards). 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 05522 -1 05522 -2 01 6. Provide rails complying with OSHA Regulations. 01 1 02 02 03 B. Qualifications: 03 ' 04 1. Qualify all welders and welding procedures in accordance with ASME 04 05 Section IX and AWS C5.5. 05 06 06 ' 07 1.03 SUBMITTALS 07 08 08 09 A. Shop Drawings: 09 10 1. See Section 01340. 10 11 2. Plan showing profile and location of each railing, and type of 11 12 anchorage. 12 13 3. Product technical data including: 13 ' 14 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 14 15 standards referenced. 15 16 b. Manufacturer's installation details. 16 ' 17 17 18 18 19 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 19 20 20 , 21 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 21 22 22 23 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 23 , 24 Manufacturers are acceptable: 24 25 1. Welded railing systems: 25 26 a. Tutle Aluminum and Bronze. 26 27 b. Architectural Art Mfg.Inc. 27 ' 28 c. Universal Products, Inc. 28 29 2. Non - welded pre- engineered railings: 29 30 a. Architectural Art Mfg. Inc. 30 ' 31 b. ENERCO Metal Products, Inc. 31 32 c. Reynolds Metals Co., Architectural and Building Products 32 33 Division. 33 ' 34 d. Alumaguard. 34 35 e. Moultrie Manufacturing Co. 35 36 f. Hollaender Structural Fittings. 36 37 g. J.G.Braun Company. 37 ' 38 h. Universal Products, Inc. 38 39 3. Non - shrink setting cements: 39 40 a. Hallemite -Lehn and Fink Industrial Products Division. 40 41 b. Master Builders Inc. 41 42 c. Sonneborn - Contech. 42 43 43 ' 44 B. Submit requests for substitutions in accordance with Specification 44 45 Section 01640. 45 46 46 47 2.02 MATERIALS 47 ' 48 48 49 A. Pipe: 6063 -T6 aluminum, ASTM B241, Schedule 40. 49 50 50 ' 51 B. Sheet and Plate: 6063 -T6 aluminum, ASTM B209. 51 52 52 53 C. Bars, Rods, Shapes and Tubes: 6063 -T6 aluminum, ASTM B221. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 01 02 D. Cast Fittings: Aluminum, ASTM B108. 02 03 03 04 E. Fasteners: Stainless steel, ASTM F593, Type 303, 304, or 305 with 04 05 minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi and minimum tensile strength of 05 06 70,000 psi. 06 07 07 08 F. Sleeves: Steel pipe, ASTM A53. 08 09 09 10 G. Non - Shrink Setting Cement: Non - corrosive, non - shrink, exterior grade 10 11 grout. 11 12 12 13 2.03 FABRICATION 13 14 14 15 A. General: 15 16 1. Fabricate smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, 16 17 seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. 17 18 2. Form exposed work with smooth, short radius bends, accurate angles 18 19 and straight sharp edges. 19 20 a. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 IN. 20 21 b. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without 21 22 causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 22 23 3. Form exposed connections with flush, smooth, hairline joints. 23 24 a. Use recessed stainless steel screws or flush stainless steel 24 25 blind rivets. 25 26 b. Top rail splices and expansion joints shall be located within 8 26 27 IN of post or other support. 27 28 4. Provide for anchorage of type indicated on Drawings or as required by 28 29 field conditions. 29 30 5. Design railing and anchorage to withstand a 200 LB force applied at 30 31 any point, in any direction, without failure or permanent set. 31 32 6. Custom fabricate pipe railings to dimensions and profiles indicated 32 33 on Drawings. 33 34 a. Fabricate railings of minimum 1 -1/2 IN ID aluminum pipe (tube). 34 35 b. Provide 1/2 IN thick x 4 IN high toeboards at elevated walkways 35 36 and platforms where indicated on Drawings and where required by 36 37 building code. 37 38 7. Fit exposed ends of handrails with solid terminations. 38 39 8. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible. 39 40 40 41 B. Welded Railing Fabrication: 41 42 1. All welding to be continuous in accordance with AWS C5.5 and 01.2. 42 43 2. All exposed welds to be ground and buffed smooth and flush to match 43 44 and blend with adjoining surfaces. 44 45 3. No ragged edges, surface defects, or undercutting of adjoining 45 46 surfaces will be accepted. 46 47 47 48 C. Non- Welded Railing Fabrication: 48 49 1. All railings to be pre- fabricated or component formed, marked and 49 50 sized for on -site installation. 50 51 2. Top railing to be single unspliced length attached to a minimum of 51 52 three posts where possible. 52 53 3. Posts and intermediate railings shall be single unspliced lengths of 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 05522 -3 05522 -4 1 01 pipe. 01 1 02 02 03 D. Finish: AAMA 605.2 mill finish. 03 II 04 05 E. Sleeves: 05 06 1. 6 IN steel pipe with ASTM A36 steel plate welded to bottom. 06 ' 07 2. Galvanized per ASTM A525. 07 08 08 09 F. Expansion Joints: 09 10 1. Allow thermal expansion and contraction of railing while still 10 ' 11 meeting design loading requirements. 11 12 12 13 G. Weep Holes: 13 ' 14 1. Fabricate 1/4 IN DIA weep holes in railing 1 IN above walkway 14 15 surface. 15 16 2. Provide in all exterior vertical posts set in concrete or otherwise 16 17 closed at bottom. 17 ' 18 3. Provide at all other low spots in railing system. 18 19 19 20 20 II PART 3 - EXECUTION 21 22 22 23 3.01 INSTALLATION 23 ' 24 24 25 A. Set work accurately in location and elevation. 25 26 26. 27 B. Align railings prior to securing in place to assure proper matching at 27 ' 28 butting and expansion joints and correct alignment throughout their 28 29 length. 29 30 1. Space posts not more than 6 FT on centers. 30 ' 31 31 32 C. Install proper sized expansion joints based on temperature at time of 32 33 installation and differential coefficient of expansion of materials in 33 II 34 all railings as recommended by manufacturer. 34 35 35 36 D. Provide anchorage for posts in the following manner: 36 37 1. Top of concrete walls, slabs, walkways, stairs and removable railing 37 ' 38 sections: 38 39 a. Sleeves set into concrete 6 IN to centerline from edge or 39 40 centered. ° 40 ' 41 b. Top of sleeve 1/4 IN below top of surface. 41 42 2. Provide 1/2 x 2 -1/2 x 6 x 0 FT -6 IN "L" shaped floor flange at 42 43 corners and termination posts with predrilled holes in each leg of 43 1 44 the "L." 44 45 45 46 E. Provide removable railing sections where indicated on Drawings. 46 47 47 ' 48 END OF SECTION 48 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 DIVISION 9 FINISHES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 91E28 SECTION 09905 01 02 02 03 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Painting and protective coatings. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. • 16 17 17 18 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 18 19 19 20 A. Referenced Standards: 20 21 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 21 22 a. A224.1, Test Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted 22 23 Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 23 24 b. Z53.1, Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards. 24 25 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 25 26 a. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of 26 27 Building Materials. 27 28 3. National Bureau of Standards (NBS): 28 29 a. Certified Coating Thickness Calibration Standards. 29 30 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 30 31 a. 101, Life Safety Code. 31 32 5. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 32 33 a. SP -1, Solvent Cleaning. 33 34 b. SP -2, Hand Tool Cleaning. 34 35 c. SP -3, Power Tool Cleaning. 35 36 d. SP -6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. 36 37 e. SP -10, Near -White Blast Cleaning. 37 38 38 39 B. Qualifications: 39 40 1. Applicator approved in writing by coating manufacturer or authorized 40 41 coating manufacturer's representative. 41 42 2. Applicator shall have minimum of 5 years experience in application of 42 43 similar products. Provide references for minimum of three different 43 44 projects completed in last 5 years. Include name and address of 44 45 project, size of project in value (painting) and contact person. 45 46 46 47 C. Miscellaneous: 47 48 1. Furnish paint through one manufacturer when possible. 48 49 2. Coating used in all corridors and stairways shall meet requirements 49 50 of NFPA 101 and ASTM E84. 50 51 51 52 1.03 DEFINITIONS 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 09905 -1 09905 -2 01 A. Applicator: Individual actually performing work on site. 01 02 02 03 B. Approved Factory Finish: Finish on a product in compliance with the 03 04 finish specified in the section where the product is specified or in 04 05 Section 11005, Equipment: General Requirements. 05 06 06 07 C. Corrosive Environment: Immersion in, or not more than 6 IN above, or 07 08 subject to frequent spillage or splash of a corrosive material such as: 08 09 Water, wastewater, or chemical solution; or chronic exposure to 09 10 corrosive, caustic or acidic agent, chemicals, chemical fumes, chemical 10 11 mixture, or solution. 11 12 12 13 D. Exposed Exterior Surface: Surface which is exposed to weather but not 13 14 necessarily exposed to view as well as surface exposed to view. 14 15 15 16 E. Finished Room or Space: One that has finish called for on Room Finish 16 17 Schedule or is indicated, on Drawings, to be painted. 17 18 18 19 F. Painting Coverage Rate: Coverage expressed in SF /GAL /coat are 19 20 manufacturer's published theoretical coverage in square foot per gallon. 20 21 21 22 G. Paint includes fillers, primers, sealers, emulsions, oils, alkyds, latex, 22 23 enamels, thinners, stains, epoxies, vinyls, chlorinated rubbers, 23 24 urethanes, shellacs, varnishes, and any other applied coating specified 24 25 within this Section. 25 26 26 27 H. Surface Hidden from View: Surfaces such as those within pipe chases, and 27 28 between top side of ceilings (including drop -in tile ceilings) and 28 29 underside of floor or roof structure above. 29 30 30 31 I. Thinned (when used in regard to VOC contents): In accordance with 31 32 manufacturer's recommendations. 32 33 33 34 J. VOC: Volatile Organic Compounds. 34 35 35 36 1.04 SUBMITTALS 36 37 37 38 A. Manufacturer's approval of applicator. 38 39 39 40 B. Applicator experience qualifications. 40 41 41 42 C. Approval of application equipment. 42 43 43 44 D. Painter's weekly record. 44 45 45 46 E. Manufacturer's recommendation for universal barrier coat. 46 47 47 48 F. Shop Drawings: 48 49 1. See Section 01340. 49 50 2. Product technical data including: 50 51 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 51 52 standards referenced. 52 53 b. Manufacturer's application instructions. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 09905 -3 01 c. Manufacturer's surface preparation instructions. 01 02 d. If products being used are manufactured by Company other than 02 03 listed in Article 2.02, provide complete individual data sheet 03 04 comparison of proposed products with specified products including 04 05 application procedure, coverage rates and verification that 05 06 product is designed for intended use. 06 07 e. Manufacturer's factory- applied finish information. Refer to 07 08 paragraph 3.02 B. 08 09 f. Contractor's written plan of action for containing airborne 09 10 particles created by blasting operation and location of disposal 10 11 of spent, contaminated blasting media. 11 12 g. Coating manufacturer's recommendation on abrasive blasting. 12 13 3. Certification: 13 14 a. Coating manufacturer's written approval of Contractor's 14 15 application equipment. 15 16 16 17 G. Samples: 17 18 1. Manufacturer's full line of colors for Engineer's color selection. 18 19 2. After initial color selection by Engineer provide two 3 x 5 IN 19 20 samples of each color selected. 20 21 21 22 H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 22 23 1. See Section 01340. 23 24 24 25 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25 26 26 27 A. Deliver in original containers, labeled as follows: 27 28 1. Name or type number of material. 28 29 2. Manufacturer's name and item stock number. 29 30 3. Contents, by volume, of major constituents. 30 31 4. Warning labels. 31 32 5. VOC content. 32 • 33 33 34 34 35 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 35 36 36 37 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 37 38 38 39 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 39 40 Manufacturers are acceptable: 40 41 1. Tnemec. 41 42 2. Ameron Protective Coatings Div. 42 43 3. Glidden Coatings. 43 44 4. Valspar Corp. 44 45 5. Carboline Protective Coatings. 45 46 6. Porter Coatings. 46 47 7. PPG. 47 48 8. Sherwin Williams. 48 49 9. CON -LUX Coatings, Inc. 49 50 50 51 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 51 52 01640. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 09905 -4 01 2.02 MATERIALS 01 02 02 03 A. All materials used must contain not more than 3.5 LBS /GAL VOC as applied 03 04 (in thinned state) unless noted otherwise. 04 05 05 06 B. For unspecified materials such as turpentine or linseed oil, provide 06 07 manufacturer's recommended products. 0 7 08 08 09 C. Paint Systems - General: 09 10 1. P =prime coat. F1, F2 . Fn - first finish coat, second finish 10 11 coat . '. nth finish coat, color as selected by Engineer. 11 12 2. If two finish coats of same material are required, Contractor may, at 12 13 his option and by written approval from paint manufacturer, apply one 13 14 coat equal to mil thickness of two coats specified. 14 15 15 16 D. Products specified are manufactured by Tnemec. 16 17 17 18 E. Paint Systems: 18 19 19 20 1. System #1 - Epoxy - Polyamide Primer with Epoxy - Polyamide or Acrylic 20 21 Polyurethane Enamel Top Coats. 2 22 22 23 Tnemec 23 24 24 25 P1 -66 -1211 Epoxoline Primer (Epoxy - Polyamide) VOC-3.42 25 26 1 coat, 3 mils 26 27 299 SF /GAL /coat 27 28 F1= Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline (Epoxy - Polyamide) 28 29 1 coat, 3 mils 29 30 300 SF /GAL /coat 30 31 *F2= Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline (Epoxy - Polyamide) 31 32 1 coat, 3 mils 32 33 300 SF /GAL /coat 33 34 *F2E Series 73 Endura - Shield III (Acrylic VOC =3.50 34 35 Polyurethane Enamel) 35 36 1 coat, 2.5 mils 36 37 372 SF /GAL /coat 37 38 *Replace F2 with F2E for exterior environment. 38 39 39 40 2. System #2 - NOT USED 40 41 41 42 3. System #3 - Epoxy - Polyamide Primer with Epoxy - Polyamide or Acrylic 42 43 Polyurethane Enamel Top Coats. 43 44 44 45 Tnemec 45 46 46 47 P1 =Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline VOC =3.42 47 48 (Epoxy - Polyamide) 48 49 1 coat, 2 mils 49 50 450 SF /GAL /coat 50 51 *F1 =Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline 51 52 (Epoxy - Polyamide) 52 53 1 coat, 2 mils 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 09905 -5 01 450 SF /GAL /coat 01 02 *F1E =Series 73 Endura - Shield III (Acrylic VOC =3.5 02 03 Polyurethane Enamel) 03 04 1 coat, 2.5 mils 04 05 372 SF /GAL /coat 05 06 *Replace FI with FIE for exterior environment 06 07 07 08 4. System #4 - Zinc -rich Urethane Primer with Epoxy - Polyamide or Acrylic 08 09 Polyurethane Enamel Top Coats. 09 10 10 11 Tnemec 11 12 12 13 P1 =90 -97 Tneme-Ziric (Zinc -Rich Urethane) VOC =3.10 13 14 1 coat, 2.5 mils 14 15 244 SF /GAL /coat 15 16 *F1 =Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline V0C =3.42 16 17 (Epoxy - Polyamide) 17 18 1 coat, 3 mils 18 19 300 SF /GAL /coat 19 20 *F1E =Series 73 Endura - Shield III (Acrylic VOC =3.50 20 21 Polyurethane Enamel) 21 22 1 coat, 2.5 mils 22 23 372 SF /GAL /coat 23 24 *Replace FI with FIE for exterior environment 24 25 25 26 5. System #5 - Moisture -Cured Urethane Primer with Epoxy - Polyamide or 26 27 Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel Top Coats. 27 28 28 29 Tnemec 29 30 30 31 P1 =50 -330 Poly -Ura -Prime (Moisture -Cured VOC =3.42 31 32 Urethane) 32 33 1 coat, 2.5 mils 33 34 327 SF /GAL /coat 34 35 *F1 =Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline VOC =3.42 35 36 (Epoxy - Polyamide) 36 37 1 coat, 4 mils 37 38 225 SF /GAL coat 38 39 *F1E =Series 73 Endura - Shield III (Acrylic VOC =3.50 39 40 Polyurethane Enamel) 40 41 1 coat, 4 mils 41 42 233 SF /GAL /coat 42 43 *Replace F1 with FIE for exterior environment. 43 44 44 45 6. System #6 - NOT USED 45 46 46 47 7. System #7 - Epoxy - Polyamide Primer with Epoxy - Polyamide or Acrylic 47 48 Polyurethane Enamel Top Coats. 48 49 49 50 Tnemec 50 51 51 52 P1 -Series 65 Proxiprime (Epoxy - Polyamide) VOC =3.46 52 53 1 coat, 2.5 mils 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 09905 -6 1 01 370 SF /GAL /coat 01 ' 02 *F1 =Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline VOC =3.42 02 03 (Epoxy - Polyamide) 03 II 04 1 coat, 5 mils 04 05 180 SF /GAL /coat 05 06 *F1E =Series 73 Endura - Shield III (Acrylic VOC =3.50 06 07 Polyurethane Enamel) 07 , 08 1 coat, 4 mils 08 09 233 SF /GAL /coat 09 10 *Replace F1 with F1E for exterior environment. 10 , 11 11 12 8. System #8 - NOT USED 12 13 13 II 14 9. System #9 - NOT USED 14 15 15 16 10. System #10 - NOT USED 16 17 17 ' 18 11. System #11 - Zinc -Rich Urethane Primer. 18 19 19 20 Tnemec 20 II 21 21 22 P1 =90 -97 Tneme -zinc (Zinc -Rich Urethane) V0C =3.10 22 23 1 coat, 3.5 mils 23 II 24 174 SF /GAL /coat 24 25 25 26 12. System #12 - NOT USED 26 27 27 II 28 29 PART 3 - EXECUTION 29 30 30 II 31 3.01 ITEMS TO BE PAINTED 31 32 32 33 A. Exposed Exterior Surfaces including: 33 ' 34 1. Columns, Beams, and Equipment Supports. 34 35 2. Piping, valves, fittings, hydrants, and appurtenances; except when 35 36 covered by lagging. - 36 37 3. Conduit and appurtenances. 37 , 38 4. Ferrous metals, except galvanized fabrications and roof deck. 38 39 39 40 B. New Equipment: 40 ' 41 1. Paint new equipment, except: 41 42 a. Where noted in Article 3.02. 42 43 b. Where specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 43 44 44 II 3.02 ITEMS NOT TO BE PAINTED 45 46 46 47 A. General: Do not paint items listed in Article 3.02 unless specifically 47 III noted in the Contract Documents to be painted. 48 49 49 50 B. Items with Approved Factory Finish: 50 ' 51 1. Do not field paint items with Approved Factory Finishes, as defined; 51 52 including the following: 52 53 a. Hoists. 53 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 b. Chlorine Scales. 01 02 02 03 C. Electrical Equipment: 03 04 1. Do not field paint certain items of electrical equipment as listed in 04 05 Section 11005; except where painting is specifically stated elsewhere 05 06 in these Contract Documents, or where the equipment is subject to a 06 07 corrosive environment. The list of equipment includes specific types 07 08 of equipment with Approved Factory Finishes. 08 09 09 10 D. Surfaces Hidden from View including: 10 11 1. Piping. 11 12 2. Conduit. 12 13 3. Structural steel and steel joist. 13 14 4. Miscellaneous steel. 14 15 15 16 E. Other Items: 16 17 1. Stainless steel surfaces. 17 18 2. Aluminum surfaces except: 18 19 a. Where specifically shown in the Contract Documents. 19 20 b. Where imbedded in concrete. 20 21 c. Where in contact with dissimilar metals. 21 22 3. Fiberglass surfaces except: 22 23 a. Fiberglass piping. 23 24 b. Piping appurtenances. 24 25 4. Interior of pipe, ductwork, and conduits. 25 26 5. Moving parts of mechanical and electrical units where painting would 26 27 interfere with the operation of the unit. 27 28 6. Code labels and equipment identification and rating plates. 28 29 7. Exterior concrete or precast concrete surfaces. 29 30 8. Face brick: Ceramic tile; quarry tile; plastic laminate. 30 31 9. Concrete. 31 32 10. Galvanized steel fabrications. 32 33 11. Steel deck. 33 34 12. Contact surfaces of friction -type connections. 34 35 35 36 3.03 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS TO BE PAINTED VERSUS PAINTING SYSTEMS 36 37 37 38 PAINTING 38 39 SYSTEM 39 40 NUMBER . 40 41 41 42 42 43 A. Structural Steel 7 43 44 44 45 B. Ferrous Metals 1 45 46 1. Except structural steel, galvanized steel, and 46 47 products with approved factory finishes. 47 48 2. Includes steel piping, pumps, and similar items. 48 49 49 50 C. Galvanized Metals 50 51 1. Field cut edge where top coat is required. 4 51 52 2. Assembled galvanized steel items. 3 52 53 3. Field touch -up of galvanized surfaces not 11 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 09905 -7 09905 -8 1 01 requiring a finish top coat. 01 , 02 02 03 D. Steel equipment with factory - applied prime or finish 5 03 , 04 including 04 05 1. Equipment specifically indicated in the Contract 05 06 Documents to be painted. Factory - applied coats to 06 07 remain. 07 , 08 08 09 E. Non - ferrous metals (except galvanized): Including 3 09 10 copper, brass, aluminum and aluminum flashing 10 t 11 specifically indicated on the Drawings to be painted. 11 12 12 13 F. Plastic Surfaces 13 II 14 1. PVC, FRP, and CPVC surfaces including tankage. 3 14 15 15 16 G. Electrical Conduit 16 17 1. Galvanized. 3 17 ' 18 2. PVC coated. 3 18 19 19 20 H. Pipe, Valves, and Fittings: 20 II 1. Steel and cast -iron. 1 21 22 2. Stainless. 1 22 23 3. Brass and bronze. 3 23 II 24 4. PVC, FRP, and CPVC. 3 24 25 25 26 I. Aluminum buried in concrete and between dissimilar 19 26 27 28 metals which are not below liquid level. 27 II 28 29 3.04 PREPARATION 29 30 30 ' 31 A. General: 31 32 1. Prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with coating 32 33 manufacturer's instructions and this Section. 33 II 34 2. Remove all dust, grease, oil, compounds, dirt and other foreign 34 35 matter which would prevent bonding of coating to surface. 35 36 36 37 B. Protection: 37 , 38 1. Protect surrounding surfaces not to be coated. 38 39 2. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, finished 39 40 work, and similar items; or provide ample in -place protection. 40 II 41 41 42 C. Prepare and Paint Before Assembly: Where equipment is subject to 42 43 corrosive environment, prepare and paint, before assembly, all surfaces 43 44 which may be subject to corrosive environment which are inaccessible 44 , 45 after assembly. 45 46 46 47 D. Ferrous Metal: 47 ' 48 1. Complete fabrication, welding or burning before beginning surface 48 49 preparation. 49 50 a. Chip or grind off flux, spatter, slag or other laminations left 50 II 51 from welding. 51 52 b. Remove mill scale. 52 53 c. Grind smooth rough welds and other sharp projections. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 2. Surfaces subject to corrosive environment: 01 02 a. Near -white blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP -10. 02 03 3. Interior and exterior surfaces not subject to corrosive environment 03 04 (including structural steel surfaces): 04 05 a. Commercial blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP -6. 05 06 b. Engineer reserves right to accept preparation of these surfaces 06 07 in accordance with SSPC SP -3 for areas not practical or possible 07 08 to abrasive blast to SSPC SP -6 requirements. 08 09 4. Surfaces subject to heat in excess of 600 DegF: 09 10 a. Near -white blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP -10. 10 11 5. Surfaces of steel joists: 11 12 a. Power tool or hand clean in accordance with SSPC SP -2 or SP3. 12 13 6. Bituminous coated ductile iron pipe: Commercial blast clean in 13 14 accordance with SSPC SP - 6. 14 15 15 16 E. Galvanized Metal: 16 17 1. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP -1. 17 18 18 19 F. Preparation by Abrasive Blasting: 19 20 1. Schedule the abrasive blasting operation so blasted surfaces will not 20 21 - be wet after blasting and before painting. 21 22 2. Reblast surfaces allowed to set overnight prior to priming or 22 23 surfaces that show rust bloom. 23 24 3. Profile depth of blasted surface: Not less than 1 mil or greater 24 25 than 2 mils unless noted otherwise by coating manufacturer. 25 26 4. Provide compressed air for blasting that is free of water and oil. 26 27 Provide accessible separators and traps. 27 28 5. Confine blast abrasives to area being blasted. 28 29 a. Provide shields of polyethylene sheeting or other such barriers 29 30 to confine blast material. 30 31 b. Plug pipes, holes, or openings before blasting and keep plugged 31 32 until blast operation is complete and residue is removed. 32 33 6. Protect nameplates, valve stems, rotating equipment, motors and other 33 34 items that may be damaged from blasting. 34 35 7. Reblast surfaces not meeting requirements of these Specifications. 35 36 8. Do not reuse abrasive blasting material. 36 37 9. Properly dispose of blasting material which has been contaminated 37 38 with debris from blasting operation. 38 39 39 40 3.05 APPLICATION 40 41 41 42 A. General: 42 43 1. Mix and apply coatings by brush, roller, or spray in accordance with 43 44 manufacturer's installation instructions.. 44 45 a. Application equipment must be inspected and approved in writing 45 46 by coating manufacturer. 46 47 2. Temperature and Weather Conditions: 47 48 a. Do not paint surfaces when surface temperature is below 50 DegF. 48 49 b. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sun. 49 50 c. Do not paint on damp surfaces. 50 51 3. Apply structural steel and steel joist prime coat (and finish coats) 51 52 in the factory (field) (and finish coats in the field). 52 53 4. Provide complete coverage to mil thickness specified. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 09905 -9 09905 -10 01 a. Thickness:specified is dry mill thickness. 01 02 b. All paint systems are to cover." In situations of discrepancy 02 03 between manufacturer's square footage coverage rates and mil 03 04 thickness, mil thickness requirements govern. 04 05 c. When color or undercoats show through, apply additional coats 05 06 until paint film is of uniform finish and color. 06 07 5. If so directed by Engineer, do not apply consecutive coats until 07 08 Engineer has had an opportunity to observe and approve previous 08 09 coats. 09 10 6. Apply materials under adequate illumination. 10 11 7. Evenly spread and flow on to provide full, smooth coverage. 11 12 8. Work each application of material into corners, crevices, joints, and 12 13 other difficult to work areas. 13 14 9. Avoid degradation and contamination of blasted surfaces and avoid 14 15 intercoat contamination. 15 16 a. Clean contaminated surfaces before applying next coat. 16 17 10. Smooth out runs or sags immediately, or remove and recoat entire 17 18 surface. 18 19 11. Allow preceding coats to dry before recoating. 19 20 a. Recoat within time limits specified by coating manufacturer. 20 21 12. Allow coated surfaces to cure prior to allowing traffic or other 21 22 work to proceed. 22 23 13. Coat all aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials. 23 24 24 25 B. Prime Coat Application: 25, 26 1. Prime all surfaces indicated to be painted. Touch up damaged primer 26 27 coats prior to finish coats. Restore primed surface equal to surface 27 28 before damage. 28 29 2. Ensure field - applied coatings are compatible with factory - applied 29 30 coatings. 30 31 a. Employ services of coating manufacturer's qualified technical 31 32 representative to determine if factory - applied coatings are 32 33 compatible with proposed field - applied coatings. If 33 34 factory - applied coating is found to be not compatible with 34 35 proposed field - applied coatings, require the coating 35 36 manufacturer's technical representative to recommend, in writing, 36 37 product to be used as barrier coat, thickness to be applied, 37 38 surface preparation, and method of application. 38 39 b. At Contractor's option, factory - applied coatings may be removed, 39 40 surface reprepared, and new coating applied using appropriate 40 41 paint system listed in paragraph 2.02 E. 41 42 3. Apply primer to abrasive blasted surface the same day the surface is 42 43 blasted and before rust bloom occurs. 43 44 4. Prime ferrous metals embedded in concrete to minimum of 1 IN below 44 45 exposed surfaces. 45 46 5. Apply zinc -rich primers while under continuous agitation. 46 47 6. Ensure abrasive blasting operation does not result in embedment of 47 48 abrasive particles in paint film. 48 49 7. Brush or spray bolts, welds, edges and difficult access areas with 49 50 primer prior to primer application over entire surface. 50 51 51 52 C. Finish Coat Application: 52 53 1. Apply finish coats in accordance with coating manufacturer's written 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 instructions and as written in this Section. 01 02 2. Touch up damaged finish coats using same application method and same 02 03 material specified for finish coat. Prepare damaged area in 03 04 accordance with Article 3.04. 04 05 05 06 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 06 07 07 08 A. Maintain daily record showing: 08 09 1. Start date and time of work in each area. 09 10 2. Date and time of application for each following coat. 10 11 3. Moisture content of substrate. 11 12 4. Provisions utilized to maintain temperature and humidity of work area 12 13 within manufacturer's recommended ranges. 13 14 14 15 B. Measure wet paint with wet film thickness gages. 15 16 16 17 C. Measure paint dry film thickness with Mikrotest gage calibrated against 17 18 National Bureau of Standards "Certified Coating Thickness Calibration 18 19 Standards." 19 20 1. Engineer may measure paint thickness at any time during project to 20 21 assure conformance with specifications. 21 22 22 23 D. Measure surface temperature of items to be painted with surface 23 24 temperature gage specifically designed for such. 24 25 25 26 E. Measure substrate humidity with humidity gage specifically designed for 26 27 such. 27 28 28 29 F. Provide wet paint signs. 29 30 30 31 3.08 CLEANING 31 32 32 33 A. Clean paint spattered surfaces. Use care not to damage finished 33 34 surfaces. 34 35 35 36 B. Upon completion of painting, replace hardware, accessories, plates, 36 37 fixtures, and similar items. 37 38 38 39 C. Remove surplus materials, scaffolding, and debris. Leave areas broom 39 40 clean. 40 41 41 42 END OF SECTION 42 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 09905 -11 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 90H16 SECTION 11005 01 02 02 03 EQUIPMENT: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Requirements of this Section apply to all equipment provided on the 11 12 Project including that found in Divisions 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16, 12 13 even if not specifically referenced in individual "Equipment" 13 14 articles of those Specifications. 14 15 15 16 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 16 17 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 17 18 the Contract. 18 19 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 19 20 3. Section 03002 - Concrete. 20 21 4. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 21 22 5. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: General Requirements. 22 23 6. Division 16 - Electrical. 23 24 24 25 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 25 26 26 27 A. Referenced Standards: 27 28 1. Anti - Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA). 28 29 2. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). 29 30 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 30 31 a. A307, Standard Specification Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 31 32 psi Tensile Strength. 32 33 b. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap 33 34 Screws, and Studs. 34 35 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 35 36 a. 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and 36 37 Generators. 37 38 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 38 39 a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 39 40 b. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control and System. 40 41 c. MG1, Motors and Generators. 41 42 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 42 43 a. 70, 1987 National Electrical Code (NEC). 43 44 44 45 B. Miscellaneous: 45 46 1. A single manufacturer of a "product" to be selected and utilized 46 47 uniformly throughout Project even though: 47 48 a. More than one manufacturer is listed for a given "product" in 48 49 Specifications. 49 50 b. No manufacturer is listed. 50 51 2. Equipment, electrical assemblies, related electrical wiring, 51 52 instrumentation, controls, and system components shall FULLY comply 52 53 with specific NEC area and NEMA 250 and ICS -6 designations (shown on 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11005 -1 11005 -2 01 Electrical Power Drawings) (and defined in Section 16010). 01 02 02 03 1.03 DEFINITIONS 03 04 04 05 A. Product: Manufactured materials and equipment. 05 06 06 07 B. Major Equipment Supports - Supports for Equipment: 07 08 1. Located on or suspended from elevated slabs with supported equipment 08 09 weighing 2000 LBS or greater, or: 09 10 2. Located on or suspended from roofs with supported equipment weighing 10 11 500 LBS or greater, or: 11 12 3. Located on slab -on -grade or earth supported with equipment weighing 12 13 5000 LBS or more. 13 14 14 15 C. Equipment: One or more assemblies capable of performing a complete 15 16 function. Mechanical, electrical, instrumentation or other devices 16 17 requiring an electrical, pneumatic, electronic or hydraulic connection. 17 18 Not limited to items listed under "Equipment" article within 18 19 specifications. 19 20 20 21 1.04 SUBMITTALS 21 22 22 23 A. Shop Drawings: 23 24 1. General for all equipment: 24 25 a. See Section 01340. 25 26 b. Acknowledgement that products submitted comply with the 26 27 requirements of the standards referenced. 27 28 c. Sample form letter for equipment field certification. 28 29 d. Certification that equipment has been installed properly, has 29 30 been initially started up, has been calibrated and /or adjusted as 30 31 required, and is ready for operation. 31 32 e. 'Manufacturer's delivery, storage, handling, and installation 32 33 instructions. 33 34 f. Equipment identification utilizing numbering system and name 34 35 utilized in Drawings. 35 36 g. Equipment installation details: 36 37 1) Location of anchorage. 37 38 2) Type, size, and materials of construction of anchorage. 38 39 3) Anchorage setting templates. 39 40 4) Manufacturer's installation instructions. 40 41 h. Equipment area classification rating. 41 42 i. Shipping and operating weight. 42 43 j. Equipment physical characteristics: 43 44 1) Dimensions (both horizontal and vertical). 44 45 2) Materials of construction and construction details. 45 46 k. Equipment factory primer and paint data. 46 47 1. Manufacturer's recommended spare parts list. 47 48 m. Equipment lining and coatings. 48 49 n. Certification for major equipment supports that equipment 49 50 foundation design loads shown on the Drawings or herein specified 50 51 have been compared to actual loads exhibited by equipment 51 52 provided for this Project and that said design loadings are equal 52 53 to or greater than the loads produced by the equipment provided. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 o. Equipment utility requirements include air, natural gas, 01 02 electricity, and water. 02 03 2. Mechanical and process equipment: 03 04 a. Operating characteristics: 04 05 1) Technical information including applicable performance curves 05 06 showing specified equipment capacity, rangeability, and 06 07 efficiencies. 07 08 2) Brake horsepower requirements. 08 09 3) Copies of equipment data plates. 09 10 b. Piping and duct connection size, type and location. 10 11 c. Equipment bearing life certification. 11 12 d. Field noise testing reports if such testing is specified in 12 13 narrow scope sections. 13 14 e. Equipment foundation data: 14 15 1) Equipment center of gravity. 15 16 2) Criteria for designing vibration, special or unbalanced 16 17 forces resulting from equipment operation. 17 18 f. Field vibration testing reports if vibration testing is specified 18 19 in narrow scope sections. 19 20 3. Electrical and control equipment: 20 21 a. Electric'motor information: 21 22 1) Nameplate data. 22 23 2) Service factor on motors 1/2 HP and above. 23 24 3) Motor enclosure type. 24 25 4) NEMA frame size, if applicable. 25 26 5) NEMA design code, if applicable. 26 27 6) Insulation type. 27 28 7) Locked rotor current on motors 10 HP and above. 28 29 8) Efficiency and power factor at full load, 3/4 load, 1/2 load 29 30 and 1/4 load. 30 31 9) Power factor correction data for motors 10 HP and larger. 31 32 Provide recommendation from motor manufacturer giving highest 32 33 capacitor size in KVAR that may be used with each motor, or 33 34 provide motor manufacturer's published curve based on factory 34 35 tests, showing plot of power factor versus load. 35 36 b. Certification from equipment manufacturer that all manufacturer 36 37 supplied control panels that interface in any way with other 37 38 , controls or panels have been submitted to and coordinated with 38 39 the supplier /installer of those interfacing systems. 39 40 c. Control panels: 40 41 1) Panel construction. 41 42 , 2) Point -to -point wiring diagrams. 42 43 3) Scaled panel face and subpanel layout. 43 44 4) Technical product data on panel components. 44 45 5) Panel and subpanel dimensions and weights. 45 46 6) Panel access openings. 46 47 7) Nameplate test. 47 48 8) Panel anchorage. 48 49 d. Motor test reports. 49 50 e. Certification prior to Project closeout that electrical panel 50 51 drawings for manufacturer - supplied control panels truly represent 51 52 panel wiring including any field -make modifications. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11005 -3 11005 -4 01 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 01 ' 02 1. See Section 01340. 02 03 03 1 04 04 05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 05 06 06 ' 07 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 07 08 08 09 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 09 10 11 Manufacturers are acceptable: 10 t 1. Motors: 11 12 a. Siemens Allis. 12 13 b. Westinghouse. 13 , 14 c. General Electric. 14 15 15 16 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 16 17 01640. 17 18 18 19 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS 19 20 20 1 21 A. Electric Motors: ' 21 22 1. Provide motors designed and applied in compliance with NEMA, IEEE, 22 23 and the NEC for specific duty imposed by driven equipment. 23 , 24 2. Where frequent starting applications are specified, design for 24 25 frequent starting duty equivalent to duty service required by driven 25 26 equipment. 26 27 3. Rate for continuous duty at 40 DegC ambient. Design in accordance 27 II 28 with the NEMA Standards for Class F insulation with Class B 28 29 temperature rise above 40 DegC ambient on continuous operation or 29 30 intermittent duty at nameplate horsepower. 30 31 4. Design for full voltage starting. 31 II 32 5. Design bearing life based upon actual operating load conditions 32 33 imposed by driven equipment. 33 , 34' 6. Size for altitude of Project. 34 35 7. Size so that, under maximum continuous load imposed by driven 35 36 equipment, motor nameplate horsepower for continuous operation is 36 37 minimum of 15 percent more than driven load. 37 ' 38 8. Provide encapsulated windings in wet /corrosive and for outdoor 38 39 applications. 39 40 a. Provide encapsulation using a silicone or epoxy seal after the 40 ' 41 windings have been dried to less than 1 percent moisture. 41 42 9. Furnish with clamp -type grounding terminals inside motor conduit 42 43 box. 43 , 44 10. Furnish with oversized external conduit boxes. 44 45 11. Furnish with stainless steel nameplates with information to include 45 46 all data as required by paragraph 430 -7 of the National Electric 46 47 Code, NFPA 70. 47 ' 48 12. Use of manufacturer's standard motor will be permitted on integrally 48 49 constructed motor driven equipment such as appliances and hand tools 49 50 specified by model number in which a redesign of complete unit would 50 ' 51 be required in order to provide a motor with other features as may be 51 52 specified herein. 52 53 13. Electric motors less than 1/3 HP. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 a. Single phase, 60 HZ, suitable for supply voltage shown on 01 02 Drawings. 02 03 b. Totally enclosed non - ventilated (TENV) or totally enclosed fan 03 04 cooled (TEFC). 04 05 c. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to AFBMA 05 06 Standards. 06 07 d. Built -in manual -reset thermal protector or furnished with 07 08 integrally mounted stainless steel enclosed manual motor overload 08 09 switch. 09 10 14. Electric motors 1/3 to 1 HP inclusive: 10 11 a. Single or 3 PH, 60 HZ, suitable for supply voltage and phase 11 12 shown on Drawings. 12 13 b. Totally enclosed non - ventilated (TENV) or totally enclosed fan 13 14 cooled (TEFC). 14 15 c. Specially insulated for use in damp locations below 20 DegC. 15 16 d. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to AFBMA 16 17 Standards. 17 18 15. Electric motors 1 -1/2 through 10 HP: 18 19 a. 230/460 V, 60 HZ, 3 PH voltage supply. 19 20 b. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). 20 21 c. Specially insulated for use in damp locations below 20 DegC. 21 22 d. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to AFBMA 22 23 Standards. 23 24 e. For vertical motors, provide 15 -year, average -life thrust 24 25 bearings conforming to AFBMA Standards. 25 26 16. Electrical motors greater than 10 HP. 26 27 a. 230/460 V, 60 HZ, 3 PH supply voltage. 27 28 b. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). 28 29 c. Specially insulated for use in damp locations below 20 DegC. 29 30 d. Oil or grease lubricated antifriction bearings conforming to 30 31 AFBMA Standards. Design bearing life for 90 percent survival 31 32 rating at '50,000 HRS of operation for motors up to and including 32 33 100 HP. 33 34 e. Thermal protection: 34 35 1) Provide resistance type winding temperature protection 35 36 included in each phase winding to detect "hot spots." 36 37 2) Remote mount controller in motor starter. Energize 37 38 controller from starter control power circuit. Rate 38 39 controller interrupting contacts at 120/240 V AC. 39 40 3) Where motors are located in hazardous classified areas 40 41 Divisions 1 and 2, provide box for potting compound to seal 41 42 connections in accordance with NEMA MG1- 12.52. 42 43 f. For vertical motors, provide 15 YR average life thrust bearings 43 44 conforming to AFBMA Standards. 44 45 18. Motors 15 HP and above having a locked rotor inrush KVA greater than 45 46 6.3 times motor horsepower are not acceptable. 46 47 19. Motor efficiencies: 47 48 a. Provide motor having following minimum efficiencies. 48 49 1) Vertical induction motors: 49 50 50 51 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200 RPM 900 RPM 51 52 52 53 DPFG DPFG DPFG DPFG 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11005 -5 1 11005 -6 01 HP TEFC WP -I TEFC WP -I TEFC WP -I TEFC WP -I 01 , 02 - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- -- -- 02 03 04 1.5 73.5 --- 77.0 78.5 72.0 68.0 72.0 68.0 1 75.5 - -- 75.5 78.5 72.0 74.0 68.0 68.0 03 ' 04 05 2 74.0 77.0 75.5 74.0 75.5 75.5 72.0 68.0 05 06 , 3 75.0 80.0 76.0 78.5 75.5 75.5 72.0 72.0 06 ' 07 5 79.0 78.5 81.0 78.5 78.5 78.5 77.0 77.0 07 08 08 09 2) Horizontal induction motors: 09 10 10 , 11 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200 RPM 900 RPM 11 12 12 13 DPFG/ DPFG/ DPFG/ DPFG/ 13 ' 14 HP TEFC WP -I TEFC WP -I TEFC WP -I TEFC WP -I 14 15 -- - - -- - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- - - -- - - -- 15 16 1 71.0 71.5 78.5 75.5 75.5 73.0 67.5 68.0 16 ' 17 1.5 80.0 78.5 81.5 81.5 81.5 81.5 69.5 68.0 17 18 2 81.5 80.0 81.5 80.0 84.0 82.5 72.0 68.0 18 19 3 84.0 80.0 86.5 84.0 86.5 82.5 72.0 72.0 19 20 5 85.5 82.5 86.5 85.5 86.5 84.0 78.5 78.5 20 , 21 7.5 86.5 84.0 88.5 88.5 87.5 87.5 81.5 81.5 21 22 10 87.5 85.5 88.5 88.5 88.5 87.5 81.5 81.5 22 23 15 88.5 87.5 90.2 91.0 89.5 91.0 84.0 84.0 23 t 24 20 89.5 89.5 90.2 91.0 89.5 89.5 86.5 85.5 24 25 25 89.5 90.2 91.0 91.8 90.2 89.5 87.5 86.5 25 26 30 89.5 90.2 91.7 92.4 91.0 91.0 88.5 84.0 26 , 27 27 28 20. Motors 20 HP and larger shall be corrected to 94 to 96 percent 28 29 lagging power factor with use of power factor correction capacitors. 29 30 21. Measure efficiencies by IEEE 112 - Method B. Vertical motors may 30 31 eliminate thrust bearing losses for efficiency measurements). 31 32 32 33 B. V -Belt Drive: 33 ' 34 1. Provide each V -belt drive with sliding base or other suitable tension 34 35 adjustment. Adjustment mechanism to be 304 stainless steel. 35 36 2. Provide V -belt drives with a service factor of at least 1.6 at 36 ' 37 maximum speed. 37 38 3. Provide staticproof belts. 38 39 39 40 2.03 COMPONENTS 40 41 41 42 A. Gear Drives and Drive Components: 42 43 1. Size drive equipment capable of supporting full load including losses 43 ' 44 in speed reducers and power transmission. 44 45 2. Provide nominal input horsepower rating of each gear or speed reducer 45 46 at least equal to nameplate horsepower of drive motor. 46 , 47 3. Design drive units for 24 HR continuous service, constructed so oil 47 48 leakage around shafts is precluded. 48 49 4. Utilize gears, gear lubrication systems; gear drives, speed reducers, 49 50 speed increasers and flexible couplings meeting applicable standards 50 , 51 of American Gear Manufacturers Association. 51 52 5. Gear reducers: 52 53 a. Provide gear reducer totally enclosed and oil lubricated. 53 ' ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11005 -7 01 b. Utilize antifriction bearings throughout. 01 02 c. Provide worm gear reducers having a service factor of at least 02 03 1.20. 03 04 d. Furnish other helical, spiral bevel, and combination 04 05 bevel - helical gear reducers with a service factor of at least 05 06 1.50. 06 07 07 08 2.04 ACCESSORIES 08 09 09 10 A. Guards: 10 11 1. Provide each piece of equipment having exposed moving parts with full 11 12 length, easily removable guards, meeting OSHA requirements. 12 13 2. Interior applications: 13 14 a. Construct from expanded galvanized steel rolled to conform to 14 15 shaft or coupling surface. 15 16 b. Utilize non - flattened type 16 GA galvanized steel with nominal 16 17 1/2 IN spacing. 17 18 c. Connect to equipment frame with hot -dip galvanized bolts and wing 18 19 nuts. 19 20 3. Exterior applications: 20 21 a. Construct from 16 GA stainless steel or aluminum. 21 22 b. Construct to preclude entrance of rain, snow, or moisture. 22 23 c. Roll to conform to shaft or coupling surface. 23 24 d. Connect to equipment frame with stainless steel bolts and wing 24 25 nuts. 25 26 26 27 B. Anchorage:. 27 28 1. Cast -in -place anchorage: 28 29 a. Provide ASTM F593, Type 316 stainless steel anchorage for exposed 29 30 equipment. 30 31 b. For continuously submerged anchorage, utilize ASTM A307 31 32 anchorage. For intermittently submerged applications, use 316 32 33 stainless steel. 33 34 c. Configuration and number of anchor bolts shall be per 34 35 manufacturer's recommendations. 35 36 d. Provide two nuts for each bolt. 36 37 2. Drilled anchorage: 37 38 a. Epoxy grout per Section 03002. 38 39 b. Threaded rods same as cast -in- place. 39 40 40 41 C. Data Plate: 41 42 1. Attach a stainless steel data plate to each piece of rotary or 42 43 reciprocating equipment. Permanently stamp information on data plate 43 44 including manufacturer's name, equipment operating parameters, serial 44 45 number and speed. 45 46 46 47 D. Gages: 47 48 1. Provide gages at locations shown or specified in accordance with 48 49 Section 15060. 49 50 - 50 51 2.05 FABRICATION 51 52 52 53 A. Design, fabricate, and assemble equipment in accordance with best modern 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 11005 -8 01 engineering and shop practices. 01 02 02 03 B. Manufacture individual parts to standard sizes and gages so that repair 03 , 04 parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in field. 04 05 05 06 C. Furnish like parts of duplicate units to be interchangeable. 06 , 07 07 08 D. Ensure that equipment has not been in service at any time prior to 08 09 delivery, except as required by tests. 09 10 10 11 E. Furnish equipment which require periodic internal inspection or 11 12 adjustment with access panels which will not require disassembly of 12 13 guards, dismantling of piping or equipment or similar major efforts. 13 ' 14 Quick opening but sound, securable access ports or windows shall be 14 15 provided for inspection of chains, belts, or similar items. 15 16 16 17 F. Provide common, lipped base plate mounting for equipment and equipment 17 , 18 motor where said mounting is a manufacturer's standard option. Provide 18 19 drain connection for 3/4 IN PVC tubing. 19 20 20 ' 21 G. Machine the mounting feet of rotating equipment. 21 22 22 23 2.06 SHOP OR FACTORY PAINT FINISHES 23 ' 24 24 25 A. Electrical Equipment: 2 26 1. The standard factory - applied paint coating system(s), of the listed 26 27 approved manufacturers, of motor control centers, panel boards, 27 ' 28 transformers, switchboards, and engine generator sets, are 28 29 acceptable. 29 30 2. As an alternate to the acceptable standard factory - applied paint 30 , 31 coating systems, a manufacturer may provide a paint coating system in 31 32 accordance with Section 09905. 32 33 33 ' 34 B. Other Equipment: In accordance with Section 09905. 34 35 35 36 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 36 37 37 ' 38 A. Motor Tests: 38 39 1. Test motors in accordance with NEMA and IEEE procedures. Include the 39 40 following: 40 ' 41 a. Running no -load amperes. 41 42 b. Locked rotor amperes. 42 43 c. Winding resistance, DC. 43 44 d. High - potential test at twice rated voltage plus 1000 V, with 44 45 a minimum +of 2200 V for 1 minute, winding to ground. 45 46 e. Vibration check. 46 47 f. Wound -rotor motor, secondary volts at collector rings. 47 11 48 2. The Owner reserves the right to, at any time, select and have tested 48 49 any motor included within the Project. If motor passes testing 49 50 requirements, Owner will be responsible for any shipping and testing 50 ' 51 costs incurred. Costs shall be determined by current freight rates 51 52 and manufacturer's published rates at the time of the test. If motor 52 53 fails test, Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 If two successive motors fail the test, the Owner has the right to 01 02 reject any or all motors from that manufacturer. The Owner also 02 03 reserves the right to witness any routine or complete tests at 03 04 Owner's expense. 04 05 05 06 06 07 PART 3 - EXECUTION 07 08 08 09 3.01 INSTALLATION 09 10 10 11 A. Install equipment as shown on Drawings and in accordance with 11 12 manufacturer's directions. 12 13 13 14 B. Utilize templates for anchorage placement for slab - mounted equipment. 14 15 15 16 C. For equipment having drainage requirements such as seal water, provide 16 17 3/4 IN PVC or clear plastic tubing from equipment base to nearest floor 17 18 or equipment drain. Route clear of major traffic areas and as approved 18 19 by Engineer. 19 20 20 21 D. DO NOT construct foundations until major equipment supports are approved. 21 22 22 23 E. Extend all non - accessible grease fittings using stainless steel tubing to 23 24 a location which allows easy access of fittings. 24 25 25 26 F. Construct subbases, either concrete, steel or cast iron, level in both 26 27 directions. Particular care shall be taken at hold -down bolt locations 27 28 so these areas are flat and level. 28 29 29 30 G. Machine Base: 30 31 1. Mount machine bases of rotating equipment on subbases in manner that 31 32 they are level in both directions according to machined surfaces on 32 33 base. Use machinist level for this procedure. 33 34 2. Level machine bases on subbases and align couplings between driver 34 35 and driven unit using steel blocks and shims. 35 36 a. Size blocks and shims to provide solid support at each anchor 36 37 bolt location. Area size of blocks and shims shall be 37 38 approximately 1 -1/2 times area support surface at each anchor 38 39 bolt point. 39 40 b. Provide blocks and shims at each anchor bolt. Blocks and shims 40 41 that are square shape with "U" cut out to allow blocks and shims 41 42 to be centered on anchor bolts. 42 43 c. After all leveling and alignment has been completed and before 43 44 grouting, tighten anchor bolts to proper torque value. 44 45 d. Do not use nuts below the machine base on anchor bolts for base 45 46 leveling. 46 47 47 48 H. Couplings: 48 49 1. Align in the annular and parallel positions. 49 50 a. For equipment rotating at 1200 rpm or less, align both annular 50 51 and parallel within 0.001 IN tolerance for couplings 4 IN size 51 52 and smaller. Couplings larger than 4 IN size: Increase 52 53 tolerance 0.0005 IN per inches of coupling diameter, i.e., allow 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11005 -9 1 11005 -10 01 6 IN coupling 0.002 IN tolerance, and allow a 10 IN coupling 01 , 02 0.004 IN tolerance. 02 03 b. For equipment rotating at speeds greater than 1200 rpm allow both 03 ' 04 annular and parallel positions within a tolerance rate of 0.00025 04 05 IN per inch coupling diameter. 05 06 2. If equipment is delivered as a mounted unit from factory, verify 06 , 07 factory alignment on site after installation and realigned if 07 08 necessary. 08 09 3. Check surfaces for runout before attempting to trim or align units. 09 10 10 , 11 I. Grouting: 1 . 11 12 1. After machine base has been shimmed, leveled, couplings aligned and 12 13 anchor bolts tightened to correct torque value, a dam or formwork 13 ' 14 shall be placed around base to contain grouting. Extend dam or 14 15 formwork at least 1/2 IN above the top of leveling shims and blocks. 15 16 2. Saturate top of roughened concrete subbase with water before 16 II 17 grouting. Add grout until entire space under machine base is filled 17 18 to the top of the base underside. Puddle grout by working a stiff 18 19 wire through the grout and vent holes to work grout in place and 19 20 release any entrained air in the grout or base cavity. 20 ' 21 3. When the grout has sufficiently hardened, remove dam or formwork and 21 22 finish the exposed grout surface to fine, smooth surface. Cover 22 23 exposed grout surfaces with wet burlap and keep covering sufficiently 23 ' 24 wet to prevent too rapid evaporation of water from the grout. When 24 25 the grout has fully hardened (after a minimum of 7 days) tighten all 25 26 anchor bolts and recheck driver - driven unit for proper alignment. 26 ' 27 27 28 3.02 FIELD PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 28 29 29 30 A. For required field painting and protective coatings, comply with Section 30 ' 31 09905. 31 32 32 33 3.03 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATION 33 II 34 35 A. Clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. 35 36 36 ' 37 B. Coat connection with oxidation eliminating compound for aluminum wire. 37 38 38 39 C. Terminate motor circuit conductors with copper lugs bolted to motor 39 40 leads. 40 , 41 41 42 D. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape, 150 42 43 percent of insulation value of conductor. 43 ' 44 44 45 E. Connections to carry full ampacity of conductors without temperature 45 46 rise. 46 47 47 ' 48 F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. 48 49 49 50 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 50 ' 51 51 52 A. Furnish equipment manufacturer services as specified in the individual 52 53 equipment specifications. 53 ' ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 01 01 02 B. Inspect wire and connections for physical damage and proper connection. 02 03 03 04 C. Check rotation of motor before connection to driven equipment, before 04 05 couplings are bolted or belts installed. Before motor is started to 05 06 check rotation, determine that motor is lubricated. 06 07 07 08 D. Subbase that supports the equipment base and that is made in the form of 08 09 a cast iron or steel structure that has supporting beams, legs and cross 09 10 member that are cast welded or bolted, shall be tested for a natural 10 11 frequency of vibration after equipment is mounted. Keep the ratio of the 11 12 natural frequency of the structure to the frequency of the disturbing 12 13 force out of the range from 0.5 to 1.5. 13 14 14 15 3.05 DEMONSTRATION 15 16 16 17 A. Demonstrate equipment in accordance with Section 01060. 17 18 18 19 END OF SECTION 19 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11005 -11 1 1 01 90H31 SECTION 11060 01 02 02 I 03 04 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 03 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 ' 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Pumping equipment. 11 12 12 ' 13 14 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 17 3. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 17 18 4. Section 11005 - Equipment: General Requirements. 18 19 19 II 20 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 20 21 21 22 A. Fully coordinate all mechanical seal systems specified to ensure pump and 22 II 23 seal compatibility. 23 24 24 25 B. For variable speed pumping applications, the pump manufacturer is 25 26 designated to have single source responsibility for coordination of the 26 I 27 pump and VFD drive system. 27 28 28 29 1.03 DEFINITIONS 29 I 30 30 31 A. NPSHR Net Positive Suction Head Required. 31 32 32 33 1.04 SUBMITTALS 33 I 34 34 35 A. Shop Drawings: 35 36 1. See Section 11005. 36 ' 37 2. Product technical data including: 37 38 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 38 39 standards referenced. 39 II 40 b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 40 41 c. Pump accessories data. 41 42 d. Pump bearing supports, brackets, shafting details and lubrication 42 43 provisions. 43 II 44 e. Solids passage information. 44 45 3. Certifications: Certified pump performance curves as described in 45 46 Article 2.02. 46 II 47 a. Statement relative to installation and startup as required in 47 48 paragraph 3.02 A.4. 48 49 4. Test reports: 49 II 50 a. 50 51 51 52 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 52 53 1. See Section 01340. 53 1 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11060 -1 11060 -2 1 01 01 1 02 02 03 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 03 ' 04 04 05 2.01 ACCESSORIES 05 06 06 07 A. See Section 11005. 07 , 08 08 09 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 09 10 10 II A. If specifically required in the individual pump specification sections, 11 12 provide factory tests: 12 13 1. Adjustable speed units: 13 ' 14 a. Head (FT) verses flow (gpm) pump curves: 14 15 1) Maximum, minimum and two equally spaced intermittent speeds. 15 16 2) Efficiencies along each curve. 16 17 3) Brake horsepowers along each curve. 17 ' 18 b. Hydrostatic test at 150 percent of shutoff head for a minimum of 18 19 5 minutes. 19 20 2. Constant speed units: 2D II a. Head (FT) versus flow (gpm) pump curves: 21 22 1) Efficiencies along curve. 22 23 2) Brake horsepower along each curve. 23 II 24 3. Certified results by a Registered Professional Engineer. 24 25 25 26 26 27 PART 3 - EXECUTION 27 II 28 29 3.01 INSTALLATION 29 30 30 ' 31 A. See Section 11005. 31 32 32 33 B. Floor or Pad - Mounted Units: 33 ' 34 1. Align vertically and horizontally level, wedge and plumb units to 34 35 match piping interfaces. 35 36 2. Assure no unnecessary stresses are transmitted to equipment flanges. 36 37 3. Tighten flange bolts at uniform rate and manufacturer's recommended 37 II torque for uniform gasket compression. 38 39 4. Support and match flange faces to uniform contact over entire face 39 40 area prior to bolting pipe flange and equipment. 40 II 41 5. Permit piping connecting to equipment to freely move in directions 41 42 parallel to longitudinal centerline when and while bolts in 42 43 connection flange are tightened. 43 44 6. Grout equipment into place prior to final bolting of piping but not 44 II 45 before initial fitting and alignment. 45 46 7. Assemble connecting piping with gaskets in place and minimum of four 46 47 bolts per joint installed and tightened. Test alignment by loosening 47 II flange bolts to see if there is any change in relationship of piping 48 49 flange with equipment connecting flange. Realign as necessary, 49 50 install flange bolts and make equipment connection. 50 II 51 8. Field paint units as defined in Section 09905. 51 52 9. Provide pressure gauge on discharge of all pumps and on suction of 52 53 all non - submersible units. 53 II ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01 01 02 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 02 03 03 04 A. Provide services of equipment manufacturer's field service 04 05 representative(s) to: 05 06 1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications. 06 07 2. Supervise pre -start adjustments and installation checks. 07 08 3. Conduct initial startup of equipment and perform operational checks. 08 09 4. Provide a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been 09 10 installed properly, started up and is ready for operation by Owner's 10 11 personnel. 11 12 5. Instruct Owner's personnel for the specified minimum number of hours 12 13 at jobsite per Section 01060 on operation and maintenance of each of 13 14 following pumping equipment: 14 15 15 16 END OF SECTION 16 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11060 -3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 89E1 SECTION 11061 01 02 02 03 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. End suction centrifugal pumps. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 17 3. Section 05505 - Metal Fabrications. 17 18 4. Section 11060 - Pumping Equipment: General Requirements. 18 19 19 20 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 20 21 21 22 A. Referenced Standards: 22 23 1. American Iran and Steel Institute (AISI): 23 24 a. Steel Products Manual. 24 25 2. American National Standard Institute (ANSI). 25 26 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 26 27 a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 27 28 b. A108, Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality. 28 29 c. A216, Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for 29 30 High Temperature Service. 30 31 d. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting 31 32 Steel Bars and Shapes. 32 33 e. A278, Gray Iron Castings for Pressure - Containing Parts for 33 34 Temperatures Up to 650 Degrees F. 34 35 f. A395, Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure - Retaining Castings for Use 35 36 at Elevated Temperatures. 36 37 g. A536, Ductile Iron Castings. 37 38 4. Hydraulic Institute Standards for Centrifugal,'Rotary and 38 39 Reciprocating Pumps (HI). 39 40 40 41 1.03 SUBMITTALS 41 42 42 43 A. Shop Drawings: 43 44 1. Requirements in Section 11060. 44 45 2. Source quality control test reports. 45 46 3. Certification statement of solids passage. 46 47 47 48 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 48 49 1. See Section 01340. 49 50 50 51 51 52 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11061 -1 1 11061 -2 01 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 01 1 02 02 03 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 03 , 04 Manufacturers are acceptable: 04 05 1. End suction centrifugal pumps: 05 06 a. Goulds. 06 , 07 b. Ingersoll Rand. 07 08 c. Or approved equal. 08 09 09 10 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 10 ' 11 01640. 11 12 12 13 2.02 MATERIALS 13 1 14 14 15 A. Plant water supply pumps: 15 16 1. Pump volute: 16 II 17 a. Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30 (minimum). 17 18 2. Impeller: 18 19 a. Bronze, ASTM B584 (836). 19 20 3. Shaft: - 20 1 21 a. Carbon steel, ASTM A108- C1141. 21 22 4. Impeller wear rings: Stainless steel, AISI 400. 22 23 5. Shaft sleeve: Stainless steel AISI 303. 23 II 24 6. Mechanical Seals: AISI 303 Stainless Steel, "Buna -N" elastomers, 24 25 "Ni- Resist" seat, and carbon washers. 25 26 7. Frame: Cast iron, ASTM A48. 26 27 8. Bearing housing: Cast iron, ASTM A48. 27 ' 28 9. Baseplate: Steel. 28 29 29 30 2.03 EQUIPMENT 30 II 31 32 A. Performance and Configuration Requirements. 32 33 1. Plant water supply pumps: 33 ' 34 a. Design condition: 180 gpm at 208 FT TDH with minimum pump 34 35 efficiency of 65 percent. 35 36 b. Secondary condition: 120 gpm at 231 FT TDH. 36 37 c. Shutoff condition: 0 gpm at 25(/ FT TDH (max). 37 , 38 d. Pump configuration: Horizontal. 38 39 e. Maximum pump speed: 3500 rpm. 39 40 f. Nameplate driver horsepower: 20 (min). 40 II g. Drive type: Constant speed. 41 42 h. Drive configuration: Flexible coupled. 42 43 43 ' 44 B. Assure increasing head characteristic from secondary design condition to 44 45 shutoff condition. 45 46 46 47 C. Provide pumps with net positive suction head requirements that are less 47 II 48 than the available net positive suction head at design condition 48 49 specified. 49 50 50 1 51 2.04 ACCESSORIES 51 52 52 53 A. See Section 11060. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 01 01 02 B. Skid -mount both pumps on a common steel base. Fabricate in conformance 02 I 03 04 with Section 05505. 03 04 05 2.05 FABRICATION 05 ' 06 07 A. Horizontal Units: 07 08 1. Furnish casing to withstand 150 percent of shutoff head. 06 08 09 2. Provide end suction side discharge type centrifugal pump. 09 10 3. Built- together (close - coupled) units are not acceptable. 10 II 11 4. Fabricate casing for impeller removal without disturbing piping. 11 12 5. Provide tapped and plugged openings for 1 /2 -IN IPS gage connections. 12 ' 13 13 14 B. Suction and Discharge: 14 15 1. Provide units with ANSI Class 125 LB rated flanged suction and 15 16 discharge nozzles of the following diameters: 16 I 17 17 18 SERVICE CATEGORY SUCTION, IN DISCHARGE, IN 18 19 19 II 20 20 21 Plant Water Supply 21 22 Pump (2) 2 -1/2 or 3 2 22 ' 23 23 24 D. Impeller: 24 25 1. Use two or three vane impeller with smooth water passages to 25 26 prevent clogging by stringy or fibrous materials. 26 I 27 2. Secure to keyed shaft by stainless steel connector. 27 28 3. Install replaceable type wear rings (or) (and) adjustable shims. 28 29 4. Statically and dynamically balance per Hydraulic Institute Standards. 29 ' 30 30 31 E. Impeller Adjustment: 31 32 1. At manufacturer's option provide the following: 32 33 a. Alternate A: 33 I 34 1) Replaceable case and impeller wear rings allowing a minimum 34 35 of 1/4 IN wearing surface. 35 36 2) Impeller wear ring with a Brinnell hardness of 190 - 220. 36 I 38 37 3) Fronthead /casing wear ring with Brinnell hardness of 300 -350. 37 b. Alternate B: 38 39 1) Externally adjustable shims or jackscrews with locking device 39 I 41 40 to take up impeller wear using split ring shims and to be 40 installed at (top bearing housing for vertical units) 41 42 (outboard bearing for horizontal units ). 42 43 43 II 44 F. Mechanical Seals: 44 45 1. Furnish with materials specified. 45 46 2. Assure ample space for replacement or conversion to stuffing box 46 ' 47 48 if desired. 47 48 49 G. Shaft and Sleeve: 49 ' 50 1. Size shaft to transmit full driver output. 50 51 2. Use accurately machined and constructed shaft. 51 52 3. Incorporate shaft sleeve in stuffing box area to protect shaft from 52 53 pumped liquid. 53 1 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11061 -3 11061 -4 01 4. Provide positive shaft seal between shaft sleeve and shaft for full 01 , 02 length of sleeve. 02 03 5. Fabricate shaft for maximum deflection of 0.002 IN measured at the 03 II 04 stuffing box. 04 05 05 06 H. Bearings, Bearing Support, and Frame: 06 07 1. Provide bearing housings complete with grease seals and provisions to 07 ' 08 preclude moisture and foreign matter from entering both ends of the 08 09 frame. 09 10 2. Tap 3/4 IN drain hole in frame to convey leakage from seal. 10 II 11 3. Supply bearings for a minimum B -10 life of 100,000 HRS at design 11 12 condition. 12 13 4`. Furnish radial inboard bearings of either ball or roller type 13 14 suitable to sustain all loads encountered in service conditions. 14 ' 15 5. Provide axial thrust outboard bearings of deep groove single or 15 16 triple row ball type or angular contact double row ball type suitable 16 17 for thrust loads in two planes. 17 ' 18 18 19 I. Pump Support: 19 20 1. Design base to support weight of shafting and pump. 20 11 21 2. Comply with Hydraulic Institute vibration limitations. 21 22 3. Mount horizontal pump, motor, and coupling on drip lip type 22 23 baseplate. 23 24 4. Attach coupling guards and accessories to baseplate. 24 ' 25 5. Support vertical pumps on single -piece pedestal base. 25 26 26 27 J. Rotation: 27 II 1. Pump rotation to conform with piping arrangement shown on Drawings. 28 P9 29 30 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 30 II 31 31 32 A. Factory test one pump of each service category. 32 33 33 34 2.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS 34 II 35 36 A. Extra Materials: 36 37 1. Furnish Owner the following extra parts for each pump service 37 , 38 category: 38 39 39 40 40 ' 41 PART 3 - EXECUTION 41 42 42 43 3.01 INSTALLATION 43 44 44 ' 45 A. See Section 11060. 45 46 46 47 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 47 48 48 II 49 A. See Section 11060. 49 50 50 51 END OF SECTION 51 ' ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 01 90H31 SECTION 11092 01 02 02 I 03 04 MECHANICALLY CLEANED BAR SCREENS: RADIAL RAKE -ARM TYPE 03 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 II 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 I 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Radial rake - arm type mechanically cleaned bar screen(s). 11 12 12 I 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 - 1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and General Terms and 14 15 Conditions of the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 I 17 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: General Requirements. 17 18 18 19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 ' 20 20 21 A. Referenced Standards: 21 22 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 22 I 23 a. Steel Products Manual. 23 24 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 24 25 a. A36, Specification for Structural Steel. 25 26 b. A606, Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel, 26 I 27 Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar for Structural Applications. 27 28 28 29 B. Qualifications: 29 I 30 1. Supplied by a single manufacturer or supplier. 30 31 2. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of three similar size and 31 32 configuration units in operation. 32 33 33 I 34 1.03 SUBMITTALS 34 35 35 36 A. Shop Drawings: 36 I 37 1. See requirements in Section 11005. 37 38 2. Scaled floor plan and sections showing dimensions, weights, 38 39 structural supports; embedments, clearances, and screen discharge 39 ' 40 interface. 3. 40 41 Minimum screenings lifting capacity. 41 42 4. Minimum gear reducer output torque. 42 43 5. Installation list. 43 II 44 6. Field lift test report. 44 45 45 46 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 46 ' 47 47 48 1.04 SITE CONDITIONS 48 49 49 II 50 A. Location: 50 51 1. Raw sewage screening facility. 51 52 2. Open exterior location. 52 53 53 II 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11092 -1 1 11092 -2 01 B. Exposures: 01 ' 02 1. Rainfall. 02 03 2. Wind (including dust and dirt). 03 ' 04 3. Direct sunlight. 04 05 4. Corrosive environment due to wastewater: 05 06 a. Partial submergence. 06 II 07 b. Splashing. 07 08 c. Hydrogen sulfide gases. 08 09 d. Hydrocarbon gases. 09 10 10 , 11 C. Area Weather Conditions: 11 12 1. Operating temperature range: 5 DegF to 110 DegF. 12 13 2. Relative humidity range: 15% to 100%. 13 , 14 14 15 15 16 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 16 ' 17 17 18 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 18 19 19 20 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 20 , 21 Manufacturers are acceptable: 21 22 1. Climber screens: 2 23 a. Infilco Degremont. 23 II b. Passavant. 24 25 c. Or approved'equal. 25 26 26 II 27 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 27 28 01640. 28 29 29 30 2.02 MATERIALS 30 II 31 32 A. Radial rake -arm type Screens: 32 33 1. Rake arm: 304 stainless steel. 33 ' 34 2. Discharge apron: 304 stainless steel. 34 35 3. Frame: 304 stainless steel. 35 36 4. Shaft: 304 stainless steel. 36 ' 37 5. Bar screen assembly: 304 stainless steel. 37 38 6. Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel. 38 39 39 40 2.03 EQUIPMENT 40 II 41 42 A. Performance and Configuration Requirements: 42 43 1. Radial rake -arm type screens: 43 ' 44 a. Flow: 44 45 1) Maximum flow rate: 12.1 MGD. 45 46 2) Minimum flow rate: 0.7 MGD. 46 , 47 3) Average flow rate: 3.0 MGD. 47 48 b. Channel width: 2 FT 6 IN. 48 49 c. Elevations (FT, MSL): 49 50 1) Channel bottom: 703.00. 50 ' 51 2) Operating floor: 707.00 51 52 d. Bar spacing: 3/4 IN clear. 52 53 e. Bar size: 3/8 IN x 2 IN. 53 , ROUND 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 f. Bar shape: Rectangular. 01 02 g. Discharge height: level with operating floor. 02 03 h. Motor: 1/2 HP (min) constant speed. 03 04 i. Minimum lifting capacity excluding weight of rake: 150 LBS. 04 05 05 06 2.04 ACCESSORIES 06 07 07 08 A. See Section 11005. 08 09 09 10 B. Controls: 10 11 1. End of travel (park position) limit switch. 11 12 2. Manual controlled reverse motion. 12 13 3. High torque (rake jam) switch. 13 14 4. High motor temperature switches. 14 15 5. Provide a local control station located at the equipment to provide 15 16 the following functions: 16 17 a. Control and indicators. 17 18 1) Run light. 18 19 2) High temperature light. 19 20 3) High torque (jam) light (amber). 20 21 6. Initiate screen operation on time clock or manually. 21 22 a. 24 HR period adjustable in 5- minute increments. 22 23 23 24 2.05 FABRICATION 24 25 25 26 A. General. 26 27 1. Provide assembly consisting of: 27 28 a. Curved bar rack. 28 29 b. Radial rake assembly. 29 30 c. Wiper arm. ' 30 31 d. Frame. 31 32 e. Drive unit: 32 33 f. Appurtenant equipment. 33 34 . 2. Design mechanism to automatically remove solids from the bar screen 34 35 and deposit them onto a perforated drain pan. 35 36 3. Design so that maintenance to the mechanism can be accomplished at 36 37 operating floor level. 37 38 4. Provide single front cleaning rake assembly operated upstream of bar 38 39 rack. 39 40 a. Removable in one piece without disassembly of frame. 40 41 5. Provide with positive overload protection against an object too large 41 42 to bypass: 42 43 a. Motor cutout on high torque. 43 44 6. Assure mechanism is capable of manually reverse operation for removal 44 45 of oversized objects. 45 46 7. Equipment designs which rely solely on shear pin failure and 46 47 replacement for overload protection, and designs requiring motor 47 48 reversal other than for emergency conditions, are explicitly excluded 48 49 by this Specification. 49 50 8. Factory assembly unit prior to shipment. 50 51 9. Bar rake and rake arm are only operating parts allowable to be 51 52 intermittently or permanently below water surface. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11092 -3 1 11092 -4 01 B. Bar Screen: 01 1 02 1. Fasten bars top and bottom. 02 03 2. Extend bar rackifrom channel bottom to top of channel. 03 ' 04 4. Provide 10 GA perforated screenings drain pan with a stop angle or 04 05 plate to prevent shovelling screenings back into the channel. 05 06 5. Easily removable without disassembly of frame. 06 , 07 07 08 C. Side Frame: 08 09 1. Utilize channel section, thickness and size as required to withstand 09 10 the maximum operating loads. 10 , 11 11 12 D. Rake Assembly: 12 13 1. Utilize single or dual arm rake assembly attached to the drive shaft. 13 ' 14 2. Design all components to withstand maximum drive output torque 14 15 without permanent deformation. 15 16 3. Mount shaft to frame with cast iron pillow blocks with bronze 16 , 17 bushings, grease lubricated. 17 18 18 19 E. Motor and Drive Assembly: 19 20 1. Furnish motor and gear reducer, direct - coupled to drive shaft. 20 II 2. Conform to Section 11005. 2 22 '' 22 23 2.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS 23 , 24 24 25 A. Extra Materials. 25 26 1. Furnish the Owner the following extra parts: 26 27 a. One torque switch and limit switch of each type on screen. 27 ' 28 b. Three wiper blades. 28 29 '1• • 29 30 30 , 31 PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 32 32 33 3.01 PREPARATION 33 ' 34 34 35 A. Field verify channel dimensions prior to fabrication. 35 36 B. Provide blockouts and anchorages as required by the manufacturer. 36 37 37 , 38 3.02 INSTALLATION 38 39 39 40 A. See Section 11005 40 , 41 41 42 B. Vertically and ho align, level and plumb units into position. 42 43 43 ' 44 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 44 45 45 46 A. Employ and pay for services of the equipment manufacturer's field service 46 47 48 representative to: 47 ' 1. Inspect equipment covered by this Specification. 48 49 2. Supervise pre- startup adjustments and installation checks. 49 50 3. Conduct initial start -up of equipment and perform operational checks. 50 , 51 4. Provide a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been 51 52 installed properly, started up and is ready for operation by Owner's 52 53 personnel. 53 ' ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 01 5. Instruct Owner's personnel for 4 HRS at jobsite on operation and 01 02 maintenance of the equipment. 02 03 03 04 B. Field Test: 04 05 1. Following installation, Contractor will conduct a performance test to 05 06 verify the lifting capacity of the bar screen. 06 07 a. Operate machine with an imposed load of 150 LBS minimum, at the 07 08 tip of the rake arm. 08 09 b. Lift load from the bottom of the channel to a point at the top of 09 10 the bar rack. 10 11 c. Repeat for 20 cycles, during which time the structural support 11 12 members will be checked for deflection or evidence of wear or 12 13 undue stress to the screen components. 13 14 2. If screen fails test: 14 15 a. Modify unit until passes test. 15 16 b. Replace unit with heavier duty model. 16 17 17 18 END OF SECTION 18 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11092 -5 I 11345 -1 1 01 SECTION 11345 01 02 CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT 02 I 03 03 04 04 05 PART 1 - GENERAL 05 06 06 I 07 1.01 SUMMARY 07 08 08 09 A. Section includes: 09 I 10 1. Chlorinators. 10 11 2. Chlorine Vacuum regulating valves. 11 12 3. Chlorine solution injectors. 12 I 13 4. Chlorinator enclosure. 13 14 14 15 B. Related sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 15 16 1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and General Conditions of the 16 I 17 Contract. 17 18 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 18 19 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: General Requirements. 19 ' 20 21 4. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings. 20 5. Division 16 - Electrical 21 22 22 23 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 23 I 24 24 25 A. Referenced standards: 25 26 1. Chlorine Institute, New York, New York: 26 ' 27 28 a. Chlorine Manual. 27 28 29 1.03 SUBMITTALS 29 30 30 II 31 A. Shop drawings: 31 32 1. Requirements in Section 11005. 32 33 2. Provide installation drawings showing the proposed equipment and 33 I 34 piping layout and elevations in the chlorinator enclosure. 34 35 B. Operation and maintenance manuals. 35 36 36 I 37 37 38 PART 2 PRODUCTS 38 39 39 40 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 40 II 41 41 42 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the fallowing 42 43 manufacturers are acceptable: 43 I 44 1. Capital Controls Company, Inc. (chlorinators & accessories). 44 45 2. Jacobs Manufacturing Co. (fiberglass enclosure). 45 46 46 ' 47 48 B. Submit requests for substitutions in accordance with Section 01640. 47 48 49 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 49 50 50 I 51 52 A. All products shall be specifically designed for use with chlorine gas or 51 aqueous chlorine solution, as appropriate, or else shall have a 52 53 documented history of use (5 years minimum) in such environments. 53 ' ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11345 -2 1 01 01 ' 02 2.03 CHLORINATORS 02 03 03 ' 04 A. Model: CCC Series 200 or approved equal. 04 05 05 06 B. Chlorine capacity: 500 pounds per day, each. 06 07 07 ' 08 C. Chlorinator features: ' 08 09 1. Manually actuated, flow regulating valve. 09 10 2. Rotameter flow indicator. 10 ' 11 3. Wall- mounted. 11 12 12 13 D. Automatic controller: 13 14 1. Flow proportional (linear), 4 -20 mA input signal. 14 ' 15 2. NEMA 12 enclosure. 15 16 3. Switch - selectable LED indicator showing percent of fully open valve 16 17 position. 17 ' 18 4. Manual override. 18 19 5. Fully- closed position alarm contacts. 19 20 6. Dosage control potentiometer. 20 ' 21 7. Wall- mounted. 21 22 22 23 2.04 SOLUTION INJECTORS 23 24 24 , 25 A. Description 25 26 1. Injectors use water flowing through a venturi to create a vacuum in a 26 27 port in the throat of the venturi through which chlorine gas is 27 ' 28 drawn. 28 29 2. Chlorine gas mixes with the water and forms an aqueous chlorine 29 30 solution which is transported to the point of application. 30 11 31 31 32 B. Design Operating Conditions: 32 33 1. Chlorine capacity: 500 pounds per day. 33 34 2. Inlet pressure: 40 psi. 34 ' 35 3. Discharge (Back) Pressure: 5 psi. 35 36 4. Discharge: 20 gpm. 36 37 37 1 38 C. Construction: 38 39 1. 1 -1/4 IN NPT Water inlet and solution outlet. 39 40 2. 5/8 IN NPT Gas inlet. 40 41 3. PVC construction. 41 ' 42 42 43 2.05 VACUUM REGULATING VALVES 43 44 44 , 45 A. Description: 45 46 1. Vacuum regulating valves reduce the pressure of the chlorine gas from 46 47 the container pressure to a gage vacuum. 47 111 48 48 49 B. Chlorine capacity: 500 pounds per day (each). 49 50 50 51 C. Features: 51 , 52 1. Manual gas shut -off. 52 53 2. Flow indicator. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 11345 -3 II 01 3. Pressure relief valve. 01 02 4. Ton - cylinder mounted. 02 II 03 03 04 2.06 FIBERGLASS ENCLOSURE 04 05 05 06 A. Furnish a fiberglass enclosure as follows: 06 II 07 1. One -piece construction, 6 FT x 6 FT x 7 FT tall. 07 08 2. Composite construction consisting of 1 IN rigid polyurethane foam 08 09 sandwiches between fiberglass reinforced plastic laminate surfacing. 09 I 10 3. Provide ultraviolet inhibiters in polyester resin and coat with 10 11 "Gel -Coat" protective coating. 11 12 4. Provide with one 100W, 1204 industrial grade light fixture with an 12 I 13 explosion -proof switch mounted inside the door. 13 14 5. Provide a ceiling level intake fan and a floor -level exhaust vent 14 15 capable of providing one complete air change in three minutes. 15 16 Install an explosion -proof switch inside the door. 16 I 17 6. Provide a thermostatically operated space heater to maintain an 17 18 interior temperature of at least 55 DegF. 18 19 19 ' 20 20 21 PART 3 - EXECUTION 21 22 22 23 3.01 GENERAL 23 II 24 24 25 A. Conform to the requirements of Section 11005. 25 26 26 ' 27 28 B. Install piping and valves, and make all connections, in accordance with 27 the recommendations of the Chlorine Manual and manufacturer's 28 29 recommendations. 29 ' 30 30 31 3.02 INSTALLATION 31 32 32 33 A. Install chlorinators and accessories inside the fiberglass enclosure and 33 I 34 mount securely to the walls. 34 35 1. Provide for removal and servicing. 35 36 2. Install all piping in straight runs with a minimum of bends and 36 I 37 fittings. 37 38 3. Arrange equipment neatly in a logical, organized manner. 38 39 4. Provide adequate pipe supports and brackets to prevent pipe and 39 40 equipment vibration or movement. 40 I 41 5. Secure the enclosure to the concrete slab using stainless steel 41 42 expansion bolts as recommended by the enclosure manufacturer. 42 43 43 I 44 B. Remove the existing vacuum regulating valves and install the new vacuum 44 45 regulating valves. 45 46 46 47 3.03 EXISTING EQUIPMENT 47 I 48 48 49 A. Maintain existing equipment in operation until new chlorinators and 49 50 associated piping and accessories are ready for service. 50 I 51 51 52 B. Remove the existing enclosure immediately before the new enclosure is 52 53 installed and the new equipment is placed in operation. 53 I ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11345 -4 01 01 02 C. Remove and deliver the existing chlorinators and solution injectors to 02 03 the Owner. Remove the existing enclosure and all other piping, valves, 03 04 and accessories from the site. 04 05 05 06 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 06 07 07 08 A. Employ and pay for the services of equipment manufacturer's field service 08 09 representative(s) to: 09 10 1. Inspect equipment covered by these specifications. 10 11 2. Supervise adjustments and installation checks. 11 12 3. Conduct initial start -up of equipment and perform operational checks. 12 13 4. Certify that manufacturer's of equipment has been installed properly, 13 14 started up, and is ready for operation. 14 15 5. Instruct Owner's personnel for 8 hours at jobsite on operation and 15 16 maintenance. 16 17 17 18 END OF SECTION 18 19 19 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11346 -1 01 SECTION 11346 01 02 SULFONATION EQUIPMENT 02 03 03 04 04 05 PART 1 - GENERAL 05 06 06 07 1.01 SUMMARY 07 08 08 09 A. Section includes: 09 10 1. Sulfonators. 10 11 2. Sulfur dioxide vacuum regulating valves. 11 12 3. Sulfur dioxide solution injectors. 12 13 4. Sulfur dioxide cylinder heating blankets. 13 14 5. Sulfur dioxide ton - cylinder scales and trunnions. 14 15 6. Sulfur dioxide connectors. 15 16 7. Fiberglass enclosure with lighting and ventilation. 16 17 8. Ton cylinder lifting bar. 17 18 18 19 B. Related sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 19 20 1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and General Conditions of the 20 21 Contract. 21 22 -2. Division 1 - General Requirements 22 23 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: General Requirements 23 24 4. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings. 24 25 5. Division 16 - Electrical 25 26 26 27 1.02 SUBMITTALS 27 28 28 29 A. Shop drawings: 29 30 1. Requirements inrSection 11005. 30 31 • 2. Enclosure drawings showing installation of chlorinators, piping, 31 32 valves, and accessories. 32 33 33 34 B. Operation and maintenance manuals. 34 35 35 36 36 37 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 37 38 38 39 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 39 40 40 41 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 41 42 manufacturers are acceptable: 42 43 1. Capital Controls Company, Inc. (sulfonators and accessories, and ton 43 44 cylinder lifting bar). 44 45 2. Force Flow Equipment (sulfur dioxide scales and trunnions). 45 46 3. Onolog, Inc. (Sulfur dioxide cylinder heater blankets). 46 47 4. Jacobs Manufacturing Corp. (Fiberglass enclosure). 47 48 48 49 B. Submit requests for substitutions in accordance with Section 01640. 49 50 50 51 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 51 52 52 53 A. All products shall be specifically designed for use with sulfur dioxide 53 11346 -2 01 gas or aqueous sulfur dioxide solution, as appropriate, or else shall 01 1 02 have a documented history of use (5 years minimum) in such environments. 02 03 03 ' 04 2.03 SULFONATORS 04 05 05 06 A. Model: CCC Series 200 or approved equal. 06 07 07 II B. Sulfur dioxide capacity: 475 pounds per day, each. 08 09 09 10 C. Sulfonator features: 10 ' 11 1. Mechanically actuated, variable -area orifice flow regulating device 11 12 with a pressure - differential regulating valve. 12 13 2. Rotameter flow indicator. 13 14 3. Wall mounted. 14 II 15 16 D. Automatic controller: 16 17 1. Flow proportional (linear), 4 -20 mA input signal. 17 t 18 2. NEMA 12 enclosure. 18 19 3. Switch - selectable LED indicator showing percent of fully open valve 19 20 position. 20 ' 21 4. Manual override. - 21 22 5. Fully-closed.position alarm contacts. 22 23 6. Dosage control potentiometer. 23 24 7. Wall- mounted. 24 ' 25 25 26 2.04 VACUUM REGULATING VALVES 26 27 27 II A. Description: 28 29 1. Vacuum regulating valves reduce the pressure of the sulfur dioxide 29 30 gas from the container pressure to a gage vacuum. 30 ' 31 32 B. Sulfur dioxide capacity: 475 pounds per day (each) 32 33 33 34 C. Features: 34 ' 35 1. Manual gas shut -off. - 35 36 2. Flow indicator. 36 37 3. Pressure relief valve. 37 II 4. Ton - cylinder mounted. 38 39 39 40 2.05 SOLUTION INJECTORS 40 ' 41 41 42 A. Description: ,, , 42 43 1. Injectors use potable water flowing through a venturi to create a 43 44 vacuum in a port in the throat of the venturi though which sulfur 44 , 45 dioxide gas is drawn. 45 46 2. Sulfur dioxide gas mixes with the water and forms an aqueous sulfur 46 47 48 dioxide solution which is transported to the point of application. 47 , 49 B. Design Operating Eonditions: 49 50 1. Sulfur dioxide capacity: 475 pounds per day 50 51 2. Inlet pressure: 40 PSI 51 ' 52 3. Discharge (Back) Pressure: 5 PSI 52 53 4. Discharge: 20 GPM 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 01 02 C. Construction: 02 03 1. Anti - siphon design. 03 04 2. 1 -1/4 IN. NPT water inlet and solution outlet. 04 05 3. 5/8 IN. NPT gas inlet. 05 06 4. PVC Construction. 06 07 07 08 2.06 SULFUR DIOXIDE CYLINDER HEATING BLANKETS 08 09 09 10 A. Furnish two one -ton sulfur dioxide heater blankets as follows: 10 11 1. Strap -on type using velcro closures. 11 12 2. UL Listed. 12 13 3. Suitable for use in outdoor areas with corrosive environments. 13 14 4. Temperature rise limited by a metallic element set to open below the 14 15 maximum permissible sulfur dioxide cylinder temperature. 15 16 16 17 2.07 SULFUR DIOXIDE TON CYLINDER SCALES AND TRUNNIONS 17 18 18 19 A. Scale Features: 19 20 1. Hydraulic cell type with temperature stable, rolling diaphragm 20 21 capable of tilting 4 DEG without affecting scale accuracy. 21 22 2. Each scale sized to accept 1 standard, one -ton sulfur dioxide 22 23 cylinder. 23 24 3. Provide 2 sets of roller trunnions per cylinder to allow cylinder 24 25 rotation. 25 26 4. Tilt -up, epoxy- finished frame. - 26 27 5. Plan dimensions of scale to be smaller than supported cylinder. 27 28 6. 6 IN temperature - stable dial with provision for tare adjustment. 28 29 29 30 B. Trunnions: 30 31 1. 2 sets of roller trunnions per cylinder, epoxy finish. 31 32 32 33 2.08 SULFUR DIOXIDE CYLINDER CONNECTORS 33 34 34 35 A. Flexible Cylinder Connectors: 35 36 1. Connections: Straight pipe thread, female, both ends. 36 37 2. Materials: soft -drawn seamless copper tubing. 37 38 38 39 2.09 FIBERGLASS ENCLOSURE 39 40 40 41 A. Furnish a fiberglass enclosure as follows: 41 42 1. One -piece construction, 6 FT x 6 FT x 7 FT tall. 42 43 2. Composite construction consisting of 1 IN. rigid polyurethane foam 43 44 sandwiched between fiberglass reinforced plastic laminate surfacing. 44 45 3. Provide ultraviolet inhibiters in polyester resin and coat with 45 46 "Gel -Coat" protective coating. 46 47 4. Provide with one 100W, 120V industrial grade light fixture with an 47 48 explosion -proof switch mounted inside the door. 48 49 5. Provide a ceiling level intake fan and a floor -level exhaust vent 49 50 capable of providing one complete air change in three minutes. 50 51 Install an explosion -proof switch inside the door. 51 52 6. Provide a thermostatically operated space heater to maintain an 52 53 interior temperature of at least 55 DegF. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 11346 -3 11346 -4 01 01 02 2.10 TON CYLINDER LIFTING BAR 02 03 03 04 A. Furnish a fabricated steel lifting bar suitable for lifting a standard 04 05 one -ton sulfur dioxide cylinder with a two -ton capacity hoist. 05 06 06 07 07 08 PART 3 - EXECUTION 08 09 09 10 3.01 GENERAL 10 11 11 12 A. Conform to the requirements of Section 11005. 12 13 13 14 B. Install piping and valves, and make all connections, in accordance with 14 15 the manufacturer's recommendations. 15 16 16 17 3.02 INSTALLATION 17 18 18 19 A. Install sulfonators and accessories inside the fiberglass enclosure and 19 20 mount securely to the walls.. 20 21 1. Provide for removal and servicing. 21 22 2. Install all piping in straight runs with a minimum of bends and 22 23 fittings. 23 24 3. Arrange equipment neatly in a logical, organized manner. 24 25 4. Provide adequate pipe supports and brackets to prevent pipe and 25 26 equipment vibration or movement. 26 27 27 28 B. Secure the enclosure to the concrete slab using stainless steel expansion 28 29 bolts as recommended by the enclosure manufacturer. 29 30 30 31 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 31 32 32 33 A. Employ and pay for the services of equipment manufacturer's field service 33 34 representative(s) to: 34 35 1. Inspect equipment covered by these specifications. 35 36 2. Supervise adjustments and installation checks. 36 37 3. Conduct initial start -up of equipment and perform operational checks. 37 38 4. Certify that manufacturer's equipment has been installed properly, 38 39 started up, and is ready for operation. 39 40 5. Instruct Owner's personnel for 8 hours at jobsite on operation and 40 41 maintenance. 41 42 42 43 END OF SECTION 43 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 SECTION 13219 01 02 HYDROPNEUMATIC TANK 02 03 03 04 04 05 PART 1 - GENERAL 05 06 06 07 1.01 SUMMARY 07 08 08 09 A. Section includes: 09 10 1. Hydropneumatic storage tank and accessories. 10 11 2. Hydropneumatic storage tank water level control valve. 11 12 B. Related sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 12 13 1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and General Conditions of the 13 14 Contract. 14 15 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 15 16 16 17 1.02 SUBMITTALS 17 18 18 19 A. See Section 01340. 1 20 20 21 B. Submit the following drawings: 21 22 1. For Hydropneumatic tank showing all taps, supports, and other 22 23 appurtenant devices. Show floor orientation and piping plan. 23 24 24 25 1.03 REFERENCES 25 26 26 27 A. Reference standards: 27 28 1. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 28 29 29 30 30 31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 31 32 32 33 2.01 EQUIPMENT 33 34 34 35 A. Hydropneumatic Tank: 35 36 1. Provide hydropneumatic tank complete with accessories at locations 36 37 shown on drawings or specified. Provide hydropneumatic tank as 37 38 follows: 38 39 a. Nominal Capacity: 1,500 gallons. 39 40 b. Dimensions : 5 FT diameter x 12 FT long. 40 41 2. Provide horizontal mounted carbon steel tank designed and constructed 41 42 in accordance with ASME Section VIII, Division 1 Codes and 42 43 Construction Regulations. Provide for a minimum working pressure of 43 44 125 psig. 44 45 a. Saddles: Provide steel saddles for horizontal tank support. 45 46 _ Maximum saddle spacings shall be one for each 8 FT of overall 46 47 tank length with a minimum 100 degree support radius. Provide 47 48 saddle construction, bracing and reinforcement as required to 48 49 support tank completely water filled with a minimum safety factor 49 50 of 2.0. 50 51 b. Linings /Coating. Provide an Epoxy polyamide paint lining on 51 52 inside surfaces of tank, nozzles, manhole and base ring 52 53 conforming to Section 09905. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 13219 -1 13219 -2 1 I 01 c. Nozzles /Manholes. ProMMide one 18 IN x 12 IN oval manhole. 01 02 Provide nozzle connections as shown on the drawings including the 02 03 following: t 03 04 1) 4 IN flanged inlet and drain valve connections in bottom of 04 05 tank. t 05 06 2) Pressure relief valive nozzle on top of tank. 06 07 3) Sight glass nozzles on end of tank. 07 08 4) Nozzles for level control valve on end of tank. 08 09 5) Two pressure switch taps and one gage tap. 09 10 6) 2 IN NPT drain. a 10 11 - I- 11 12 B. Tank Accessories: 12 13 1. Sight glass with isolation and drain valves. 13 14 2. Pressure gage (4 -1/2 IN diameter dial) 14 15 3. Pressure relief valve, adjustable 100 to 125 PSIG, sized per ASME 15 16 standards. 16 17 4. Drain valve. ! 17 18 18 19 C. Water Level Control Valve: 19 20 1. Manufacturer: ,Nu -Matic Company, Costa Mesa, CA. 20 21 2. Description: :'Control valve, is hydraulically operated to displace 21 22 excess water with air above! a preset maximum water level in the 22 23 hydropneumatic tank and hasi;no external (electrical) power supply. 23 24 3. Connections: m 24 25 a. Water inlet and drain:? 3/4 IN NPT. 25 26 b. Air: 1/4 IN NPT. 26 27 4. Materials: 27 28 a. Fiberglass body. Ii_ 28 29 b. Corrosion resistant internals. 29 30 5. Pressure rating: 125 PSIG. : 30 31 31 32 PART 3 - EXECUTION 32 33 33 34 3.01 INSTALLATION a. 34 35 w 35 36 A. Install hydropneumatic tank and'accessories in accordance with the 36 37 manufacturer's recommendations. 37 38,' 38 39 END OF SECTION 39 E ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 01 91F17 02 1 03 04 05 1 06 07 08 09 1 10 11 12 ' 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 ' 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 ' 30 31 32 33 ' 35 35 36 1 38 38 39 ' 40 41 42 43 1 45 45 46 1 48 48 49 50 1 51 52 53 1 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Flow components. 2. Pressure components. 3. Level components. B. Related Sections include 1. Division 0 - Bidding the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General 3. Section 15060 - Pipe 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. b. PTC 19.3, Instruments and Apparatus, Part 3 Temperature Measurement. c. MC96.1, Temperature Measurement Thermocouples. 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. Fluid Meters, Sixth Edition. 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. b. Al26, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. c. A182, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy - Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings and Valves and Parts for High Temperature Service. d. A240, Standard Specification for Heat Resisting Chromium and Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels. e. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. B. Miscellaneous: 1. Comply with electrical classifications and NEMA enclosure types shown on Drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01340. SECTION 13442 PRIMARY ELEMENTS AND TRANSMITTERS ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 13442 -1 but are not necessarily limited to: Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of Requirements. and Pipe Fittings: General Requirements. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 13442 -2 01 2. Product technical data including: 01 02 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 02 03 standards referenced. 03 04 b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 04 05 c. Materials of construction. 05 06 d. Minimum and maximum flow ranges. 06 07 e. Pressure loss curves. 07 08 f. Physical limits of components including temperature and pressure 08 09 limits. 09 10 g. Size and weight. 10 11 h. Electrical power requirements and wiring diagrams. 11 12 3. Certifications: 12 13 a. Electrical area classification certification. 13 14 14 15 B. Samples: ' 15 16 1. 16 17 17 18 C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 18 19 1. See Section 01340. 19 20 20 21 21 22 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 22 23 23 24 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 24 25 25 26 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the Manufacturers 26 27 listed in the articles describing the elements are acceptable. 27 28 28 29 B. Submit requests for substitutions in accordance with Specification 29 30 Section 01640. 30 31 31 32 2.02 FLOW COMPONENTS , 32 33 33 34 A. Parshall Flumes: 34 35 1. Acceptable manufacturers: 35 36 a. Plasti -Fab, Inc. 36 37 b. Free Flow, Inc. 37 38 2. Materials: 38 39 a. Flume: Fiberglass reinforced polyester. 39 40 b. Cross brace: Fiberglass. 40 41 3. Design and fabrication: 41 42 a. Molded one -piece construction. 42 43 b. Wall thickness: 1/4 IN. 43 44 c. Smooth gel -coat finish on wetted surfaces. 44 45 d. Integral reinforcing ribs. 45 46 e. Dimensions: 46 47 1) Per U.S.Department of the Interior Water Measurement Manual, 47 48 latest revision. 48 49 f. Minimum of four top cross braces: 4 x 4 x 1/4 IN angle. 49 50 g. Head gage: 50 51 1) Mount on sidewall at Ha position. (Inlet head measurement 51 52 point per U.S.Department of the Interior Water Measurement 52 53 Manual.) 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 2) Markings: 01 02 a) Inches, tenths of inches, and gpm. 02 03 b) 3/8 IN high characters. 03 04 3) Scale protected from fluid by smooth clear fiberglass 04 05 laminate. 05 06 4) Smooth and flush with sidewall. 06 07 5) Head gage for determining whether submerged flow conditions 07 08 exist shall be mounted at the Hb position in throat of flume 08 09 as specified in the Water Measurement Manual. 09 10 a) Same side as Ha gage. 10 11 b) Same elevation as Ha gage. 11 12 c) Elevation markings only. 12 13 h. Anchor clips: 13 14 1) Permanently attached to exterior sidewall, midway up side. 14 15 i. Removable block to prevent distortion during shipment and 15 16 installation. 16 17 j. Self- supporting. 17 18 k. Designed for grouted -in installation in channel with no 18 19 additional internal or external supports. 19 20 4. Schedule: 20 21 21 22 FLOW THROAT 22 23 - RANGE WIDTH MEASUREMENT 23 24 SERVICE (MGD) (IN) DEVICE 24 25 = ___ = =_ _____ _ __________= 25 26 26 27 Effluent 0.7 -12.1 18 Ultrasonic Level Sensor 27 28 28 29 2.03 PRESSURE COMPONENTS 29 30 30 31 A. Pressure Switches: 31 32 1. Acceptable manufacturers: 32. 33 a. Mercoid. 33 34 b. Automatic Switch Company. 34 35 c. United Electric. 35 36 2. Materials: 36 37 a. Bourdon tube: 316 stainless steel. 37 38 b. Diaphragm seal housing: 316 stainless steel. 38 39 c. Pulsation dampeners: 316 stainless steel. 39 40 d. Switch isolating ball valves: 316 stainless steel. 40 41 3. Accessories: 41 42 a. Provide ball valve to isolate pressure switch from source. 42 43 b. Provide pulsation dampeners on all pressure switch applications 43 44 which involve positive displacement equipment including: 44 45 1) Positive displacement plunger pump systems. 45 46 2) Positive displacement lobe pump systems. 46 47 3) Diaphragm pump systems. 47 48 4) Positive displacement blower systems. 48 49 c. Provide protector to separate process fluid from the pressure 49 50 element as required by the schedule. 50 51 d. System fill applications: 51 52 1) Diaphragm seal. 52 53 2) Sealed sleeve. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 13442 -3 13442 -4 01 e. System fill material: 01 02 1) Utilize halocarbon fill for process applications involving 02 03 strong oxidizing agents. Agents include but are not limited 03 II to: C12, KMN04, FeCI, NaOH, and Na0C1. 04 05 2) Utilize manufacturer's standard fill for other applications. 05 06 Ensure fill is suitable for application temperatures. 06 , 07 f. On applications where a pressure switch and a pressure gage are 07 08 used at the same location, it is permissible to utilize one 08 09 pulsation dampener and diaphragm seal to isolate both elements 09 10 from the process fluid. 10 II 4. Design and fabrication: 11 12 a. Utilize hermetically sealed mercury contact switches. 12 13 b. Two SPOT contacts rated: 13 II 14 1) 1 amp inductive at 125 V DC. 14 15 2) 5 A inductive at 120 V AC. 15 16 c. Switch set points: 16 17 1) Above 1,000 psi: 17 , 18 a) Between 30 and 35 percent of switch rated working range. 18 19 b) Operating pressure range not to exceed 35 percent of 19 20 switch rated working pressure. 20 II 2) Below 1,000 psi: 21 22 a) Set points between 30 and 70 percent if switch rated 22 23 - working range. 23 ' 24 b) Operating pressure not to exceed 75 percent of switch 24 25 rated working range. 25 26 d. Accuracy: Better than 1 percent of full scale. 26 27 e. Process connection: Minimum of 1/4 IN. 27 II 28 29 5. Schedule: 29 30 30 , 31 TAG CLOSE OPEN PROTECTOR 31 32 NUMBER SERVICE SETTING SETTING REQUIREMENTS 32 33 =__ =__ = s tea= _ _ __ ____________ 33 34 34 ' 35 PSI Plant Water 80 100 None 35 36 Supply Pump Control 36 37 37 II PS2 Plant Water 75 100 None 38 39 Supply Pump Control 39 40 40 II 41 B. Pressure Gage: See Section 15060. 41 42 42 43 2.04 LEVEL ELEMENTS 43 44 44 ' 45 A. Ultrasonic Level Sensor and Transmitter: 45 46 1. Acceptable manufacturers: 46 47 a. Endress and Hauser. 47 II b. Magnetrol. 48 49 2. Materials: 49 50 a. Sensor wetted parts: PVC, polypropylene, or PVDF. 50 II 51 3. Design and fabrication: 51 52 a. Sensor: 52 53 1) Emits ultrasonic sound. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 01 2) Detects return echo reflected from surface and converts it to 01 02 electrical energy proportional to level. 02 03 3) Temperature compensated. 03 04 4) Operating temperature: -4 to 140 DegF. 04 05 5) Humidity: 95 percent non - condensing. 05 06 b. Transmitter: 06 07 1) Capable of producing output signal proportional to level of 07 08 4 -20 mA DC into 500 ohm load. 08 09 2) Power supply: 120 V AC ( ±10 percent), 60 HZ. 09 10 3) Accuracy: 1 percent of full span. 10 11 4) Resolution: 0.1 percent of span. 11 12 5) Repeatability: +0.2 IN. 12 13 6) Display: Four -digit LED or LCD scaleable to engineering 13 14 units with selectable decimal point. 14 15 7) Temperature: -5 to 160 DegF. 15 16 8) Humidity: 95 percent noncondensing. 16 17 4. Schedule: 17 18 18 19 MAXIMUM DEPTH TO 19 20 SERVICE LIQUID SURFACE 20 21 = = =.sem =ma =a =emvem..sas 21 22 22 23 Effluent Flume Level 3.0 Ft 23 24 24 25 25 26 PART 3 - EXECUTION 26 27 27 28 3.01 INSTALLATION 28 29 29 30 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 30 31 31 32 END OF SECTION 32 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 13442 -5 DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS 1 1 01 90H31 SECTION 14301 01 02 02 II 03 04 HOISTS, TROLLEYS, AND MONORAILS 03 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 II 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 I 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Hoists, trolleys, and monorails. 11 12 12 II 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 ' 17 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: General Requirements. 17 18 18 19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 ' 20 20 21 A. Referenced Standards: 21 22 1. American Gear Manufacturer Association (AGMA). 22 23 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 23 I 24 a. 830.11, Safety Code for Underhung Cranes and Monorail Systems. 24 25 b. 830.16, Safety Code for Overhead Hoists. 25 26 c. C1, National Electric Code. 26 I 27 d. HST -4M -1985, Performance Standard for Overhead Electric Wire Rope 27 28 Hoists. 28 29 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 29 I 30 a. A36, Specification for Structural Steel. 30 31 4. National Electrical Code (NEC). 31 32 32 33 B. Comply with ANSI B30.11 and 630.16. 33 ' 34 34 35 1.03 DEFINITIONS 35 36 36 ' 37 A. Hook Height: The minimum acceptable distance in feet from bottom of hook 37 38 in full raised position to the nearest floor surface. 38 39 39 40 B. Lift Height: The distance in feet from the bottom of the hook in full 40 II 41 raised position to the surface of the lowest floor from which items may 41 42 be hoisted. 42 43 43 ' 44 C. Ultimate Load - Carrying Capacity: Live load, weights of all equipment and 44 45 an allowance for impact. 45 46 46 ' 47 D. Total Trolley Capacity: The ultimate load- carrying capacity of the 47 48 trolley based on the ultimate strength of the material used (with a 5:1 48 49 safety factory) and the bearing life. 49 50 50 I 51 1.04 SUBMITTALS 51 52 52 53 A. Shop Drawings: 53 1 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 14301 -1 14301 -2 01 1. See Section 11005. 01 02 2. Reports of tests verifying strength of inserts and rail. 02 03 3. Track layout including supports, splices, connections, switches, and 03 04 end trucks. '04 05 4. Load test results. 05 06 06 07 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 07 08 1. See Section 01340. 08 09 09 10 10 11 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 11 12 12 13 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 13 14 14 15 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 15 16 Manufacturers are acceptable: 16 17 1. Hoists: 17 18 a. Yale. 18 19 b. Acco. 19 20 c. Robbins and Myers. 20 21 d. Wright. 21 22 e. Or approved equal. 22 23 2. Trolleys: 23 24 a. Yale. 24 25 b. Acco. 25 26 c. Wright. 26 27 d. Or approved equal. 27 28 3. Monorails: 28 29 a. Spanmaster. 29 30 b. American Monorail. 30 31 c. Or approved equal. 31 32 32 33 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 33 34 01640. 34 35 35 36 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS 36 37 37 38 A. Trolleys: 38 39 1. Motor - driven. 39 40 2. Completely compatible with hoists, and monorails specified. 40 41 3. Meet NEC standards according to classifications shown on Drawings. 41 42 4. Capable of maneuvering curves without binding or scraping the track. 42 43 5. Minimum B -10 bearing life of 5000 HRS based on 75 percent of the 43 44 wheel load, excluding impact. 44 45 6. Motor Driven: 45 46 a. Operate at a single speed as scheduled. 46 47 b. Enclose internal gears in oiltight housing. 47 48 c. Design motors to operate with 460 V, 3 PH, 60 cycle power supply. 48 49 49 50 B. Hoists: 50 51 1. Electric Chain Hoists 51 52 a. Design load- carrying parts so that the calculated static stress 52 53 in the material, based on rated capacity, does not exceed 25 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 percent of the average ultimate strength of the material. 01 02 b. Provide lug -type mounting to trolley. 02 03 c. Load chain and wheels: 03 04 1) Close link coil or roller -type chain. 04 05 2) Links of uniform size and shape and free from scale. 05 06 3) Manufacture load chain wheels from steel, pearlitic malleable 06 07 iron or modular cat -iron. Form load and idler sheaves to fit 07 08 chain. 08 09 d. Bearings: 09 10 1) Antifriction type. 10 11 2) Minimum B -10 life of 1250 HRS for Class H1, 2500 HRS for 11 12 Class H2, and 5000 HRS for .Class H3, based on full rated 12 13 speed and mean effective load K of 0.65. 13 14 e. Mechanical load brake. 14 15 f. Lower limit switch to stop hoist when hook reaches its lower 15 16 limit. 16 17 g. Motor: 17 18 1) Motor brake. 18 19 a) Internal disc magnetic type. 19 20 b) Rated for 150 percent of motor torque. 20 21 2) TENV motors operable on 460 V, 3 PH, 60 cycle power. 21 22 3) Meet specified area classification. 22 23 4) Permanently lubricate and seal motor ball- bearings. 23 24 5) Provide an upper limit switch to stop the hoist motor and 24 25 apply the holding brake when the hook reaches its upper 25 26 limit. 26 27 h. Hooks: 27 28 1) Forged steel. 28 29 2) Bottom hook free to swivel in the loaded condition without 29 30 twisting the chain. 30 31 3) Gate or swing type latch hooks. 31 32 32 33 C. Monorails: 33 34 1. Straight track: ASTM A36 steel I beams. 34 35 2. Where track curves are required, supply straight track and curves 35 36 which are standard items of monorail manufacturer. 36 37 3. Design track to support hoist capacity plus 25 percent for impact 37 38 load plus the weight of hoist and accessories without exceeding 38 39 allowable working stress of track material with maximum deflection of 39 40 1/450 of span. 40 41 4. Brace track to prevent sideways movement under full load conditions. 41 42 5. Provide end stops at all track ends. 42 43 6. Assure that track splices have been designed by track supplier and 43 44 are located at support points. 44 45 45 46 2.03 ACCESSORIES 46 47 47 48 A. Trolley stops design to engage the trolley frame rather than trolley 48 49 wheels. 49 50 50 51 B. Furnish chain containers. 51 52 52 53 C. Electrification and Controls: 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 14301 -3 14301 -4 , 01 1. Provide electrical power to the motor - driven hoists and trolleys 01 1 02 using one of the following methods as scheduled: 02 03 a. Festoon tagline system: 03 II 04 1) Equip with plastic wheels in areas with an NEC classification 04 05 of Class I, Division 1 or 2, Group D. 05 06 2) Include all components needed for a complete and operable 06 07 system. 07 ' 08 b. Cable reel system: 08 09 1) 360 - degree swivel base. 09 10 2) Full working length of cable plus 25 percent. 10 ' 11 3) Include all components needed for a complete and operable 11 12 system. 12 13 2. Controls: 13 ' 14 a. Pendant pushbutton control stations with reversing type 14 15 contactors for electric hoists and /or trolleys. 15 16 b. Single station if hoist and trolley are both motor - driven. 16 17 c. Suspend control stations from trolleys. 17 ' 18 d. Clearly mark function of each button. 18 19 e. Suspend station in a manner that will protect the electrical 19 20 conductors against strain. 20 ' 21 f. Control station shall be operable from 115 V power supply. 21 22 g. Ground control station to hoist. 22 23 h. Provide control cable lengths of 1 FT less than distance to 23 24 nearest floor. 24 ' 25 3. Switches: 25 26 a. Manual switches. 26 27 b. Completely compatible with hoists, trolleys, and monorails 27 II specified. 28 29 c. Provide switch chain to within 6 FT of floor. 29 30 30 II 31 31 32 PART 3 - EXECUTION 32 33 33 34 3.01 INSTALLATION 34 II 35 36 A. Support track as shown on Drawings. 36 37 37 , 38 B. Arrange supports for easy removal of track for repair or replacement. 38 39 39 40 C. Align track true and level. 40 41 41 II D. Warning Signs: 42 43 1. Affix to the hoist or the lower load block or the controls in a 43 44 readable position a durable label or labels displaying the following 44 , 45 information concerning safe operating procedures: 45 46 a. The word WARNING or other legend designed to bring the label to 46 47 the attention of an operator. 47 ' 48 b. Cautionary language against: 48 49 1) Lifting more than rated load. 49 50 2) Operating hoist when hook is not centered under hoist. 50 51 3) Operating hoist with twisted, kinked or damaged rope or 51 ' 52 chain. 52 53 4) Operating damaged or malfunctioning hoist. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 5) Operating hoist with a rope that is not properly seated in 01 02 its groove (if applicable). 02 03 6) Lifting people or lifting loads over people. 03 04 7) Removing or obscuring warning label. 04 05 - 05 06 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 06 07 07 08 A. Test each hoist, trolley, and monorail using 110 percent rated load. 08 09 09 10 B. Employ and pay for services of equipment manufacturer's field service 10 11 representative(s) to: 11 12 1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications. 12 13 2. Supervise pre- startup adjustments and installation checks and all 13 14 field tests. 14 15 3. Conduct initial startup of equipment and perform operational checks. 15 16 4. Provide a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been 16 17 installed properly, started up and is ready for operation by Owner's 17 18 personnel. 18 19 5. Instruct Owner's personnel for 2 HRS at jobsite on operation and 19 20 maintenance of the hoist, trolley, monorail and crane equipment. 20 21 21 22 3.03 SCHEDULE 22 23 23 24 A. Hoist, trolley, and monorail systems include but are not necessarily 24 25 limited to the following: 25 26 26 27 HOOK LIFTING OPERATING 27 28 LOADING HEIGHT HEIGHT SPEED 28 29 LOCATION (TONS) HOIST TROLLEY (FT)* (FT)* HP FMP 29 30 - - -- 30 31 31 32 SO2 Storage 2 E,C E 10 10 2 14 32 33 CL2 Storage 2 N/A E ** N/A N/A N/A N/A 33 34 34 35 35 36 PT = Plain Trolley 36 37 C = Chain 37 38 E = Electric 38 39 HG = Hand Geared 39 40 WR = Wire Rope 40 41 NA = Not Applicable 41 42 42 43 * Distances listed are approximate as they will vary depending 43 44 on hoist and trolley selection 44 45 * *Furnish trolley (only) suitable for existing hook - mounted hoist. 45 46 Trolley to have separate controls from existing hoist. 46 47 47 48 END OF SECTION 48 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 14301 -5 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15060 -1 01 90L13 SECTION 15060 01 02 02 03 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Process piping systems. 11 12 2. Utility piping systems. 12 13 3. Plumbing piping systems. 13 14 14 15 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 15 16 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 16 17 the Contract. 17 18 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 18 19 3. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 19 20 4. Section 09905 —Painting and Protective Coatings. 20 21 5. Section 15090 - Pipe Support Systems. 21 22 22 23 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 23 24 24 25 A. Referenced Standards: 25 26 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 26 27 a. 816.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 27 28 b. B16.9, Factory -Made Wrought Steel Butt - Welding Fittings. 28 29 c. B40.1, Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element. 29 30 d. C110, Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3 IN through 48 IN for 30 31 Water and Other Liquids. 31 32 e. C115, Flanged Ductile Iran Pipe with Threaded 32 33 f. C151, Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast In Metal Molds or 33 34 Sand -Lined Molds for Water or Other Liquids. 34 35 g. C207, Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - 35 36 Sizes 4 IN through 144 IN. 36 37 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 37 38 a. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and 38 39 Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. 39 40 b. A197, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. 40 41 c. A234, Standard Specification for Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon 41 42 Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. 42 43 d. A269, Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless 43 44 Steel Tubing for General Service. 44 45 e. A774, Standard Specification for As- Welded Wrought Austenitic 45 46 Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and 46 47 Moderate Temperatures. 47 48 f. A778, Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic 48 49 Stainless Steel Tubular Products. 49 50 g. C76, Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe. 50 51 h. D1785, Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) 51 52 Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds. 52 53 i. D2466, Socket Type (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 53 1 15060 -2 01 j. D2467, Socket Type (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 01 02 4. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 02 03 a. C111, Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron 03 ' 04 Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 04 05 b. C207, Steel'Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 IN 05 06 through 144 IN. 06 , 07 c. C208, Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings. 07 08 08 09 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 09 10 10 11 A. Piping Systems Organization and Definition: 11 12 1. Piping services are grouped into designated systems according to the 12 13 chemical and physical properties of the fluid conveyed, system 13 ' 14 pressure, piping size and system materials of construction. 14 15 2. Table A below defines each service classification, and the designated 15 16 system classification of each service. 16 ' 17 17 18 TABLE A - PIPING SERVICES 18 19 19 20 SERVICE SYSTEM 20 ' 21 ' ' 21 22 22 23 Plant Effluent 1 23 ' 24 Plant Water System 2 24 25 Chlorine Gas (Vacuum) 2 25 26 Chlorine Solution 2 26 ' 27 Sulfur Dioxide Gas (Vacuum) 3 27 28 Sulfur Dioxide Solution 3 28 29 Potable Water 2 29 30 Drains 30 II 31 32 3. See PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULES in PART 3 for system descriptions. 32 33 33 t 34 1.04 SUBMITTALS 34 35 35 36 A. Shop Drawings: 36 II 37 1. See Section 01340. 37 38 2. Fabrication and /or layout drawings for pipe 24 IN and larger: 38 39 a. Exterior yard piping drawings (minimum scale 1 IN equals 10 FT) 39 40 with information including: 40 III 1) Dimensions of piping lengths. 41 42 2) Invert or centerline elevations of piping crossings. 42 43 3) Acknowledgement of bury depth requirements. 43 , 44 4) Details of fittings, tapping locations, thrust blocks, 44 45 restrained joint segments, harnessed joint segments, 45 46 hydrants, and related appurtenances. 46 47 5) Acknowledge designated valve or gate tag numbers, manhole 47 48 numbers; instrument tag numbers, pipe and line numbers. 48 49 6) Line slopes and vents. 49 50 b. Schedule of interconnections to existing piping. 50 II 3. Product technical data including: 51 52 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 52 53 standards referenced. 53 , ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 b. Copies of manufacturer's written directions regarding material 01 02 handling, delivery, storage and installation. 02 03 c. Master schedule showing piping appurtenances, pipe size, schedule 03 04 of pipe, type linings and coatings. 04 05 d. Technical product data on piping appurtenances. 05 06 4. Certifications: 06 07 a. Qualifications of lab performing disinfection analysis on water 07 08 systems. 08 09 5. Test reports: 09 10 a. Copies of pressure test results on all piping systems. 10 11 b. Reports defining results of dielectric testing and corrective 11 12 action taken. 12 13 c. Disinfection test report. 13 14 d. Notification of time and date of piping pressure tests. 14 15 15 16 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 16 17 1. See Section 01340. 17 18 18 19 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 19 20 20 21 A. Protect pipe coating during handling using methods recommended by 21 22 manufacturer. Use of bare cables, chains, hooks, metal bars or narrow 22 23 skids in contact with coated pipe is not permitted. 23 24 24 25 B. Prevent damage to pipe during transit. Repair abrasions, scars, and 25 26 blemishes. If repair of satisfactory quality cannot be achieved, replace 26 27 damaged material immediately. 27 28 28 29 29 30 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 30. 31 31 32 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 32 33 33 34 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 34 35 Manufacturers are acceptable: 35 36 1. Insulating unions: 36 37 a. "Dielectric" by Epco. 37 38 b. Or approved equal. 38 39 2. Dirt strainers (Y type): 39 40 a. Mueller (No.351). 40 41 b. Sarco. 41 42 c. Armstrong. 42 43 d. Or approved :equal. 43 44 3. Basket Strainers: 44 45 a. Bailey. 45 46 b. Kinney. 46 47 4. Gages: 47 48 a. Ashcroft. 48 49 b. Or approved equal. 49 50 50 51 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification 51 52 Section 01640. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15060 -3 1 15060 -4 01 2.02 PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULES 01 02 02 03 A. Piping system materials, fittings and appurtenances are subject to 03 ' 04 requirements of specific piping specification schedules located at the 04 05 end of PART 3 of this Specification; unless otherwise shown on Drawings 05 06 or Drawing Schedule, 06 II 07 07 08 2.03 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES 08 09 09 10 A. Insulating Components: 10 ' 11 1. Insulating flanges: 11 12 a. Flat faced 1/8 IN thick dielectric asbestos for temperatures up 12 13 to 700 DegF. 13 , 14 b. 1/32 IN wall thickness spiral wound mylar bolt sleeves. 14 15 c. 1/8 IN thick high strength phenolic insulating washers. 15 16 2. Dielectric unions: 16 ' 17 a. Screwed unions rated at 250 psi for pipe sizes 2 -1/2 IN and over. 17 18 b. Provide with dielectric gaskets suitable for continuous operation 18 19 at fluid temperatures to 240 DegF. 19 20 20 II B. Dirt Strainers: 21 22 1. Provide Y -type strainers to locations shown on Drawings or scheduled. 22 23 2. Furnish composition bronze strainers rated for working pressure and 23 24 temperature ofisystem in which they are installed. 24 25 3. Provide a 20'mesh monel screen. 25 26 4. Install a threaded bronze plug in the blowoff outlet. 26 ' 27 5. Furnish threaded NPT end connections. 27 28 28 29 C. Basket Strainers: 29 30 1. Provide flanged basket strainer with cast iron, cast steel, or 30 II epoxy coated fabricated steel body and 125 LB flanges on the same 31 32 centerline. ; 32 33 2. Stainless steel basket with 3/32 IN diameter perforations, maximum 33 ' 34 head loss of 0.2 PSI at 100 gpm when clean. 34 35 3. Basket chamber to be quick opening with a clamped cover. 35 36 t, 36 37 D. Protective Coating and Lining: • 37 , 38 1. Include pipe, fittings, and appurtenances, where coatings, linings, 38 39 paint, tests and other items are stated. 39 40 2. Field paint pipe in accordance with Section 09905. 40 ' 41 41 42 E. Pressure Gages: ' 42 43 1. Provide on piping systems as shown on Contract Drawings and 43 ' 44 specified. 44 45 2. Provide each gage with a 250 LB stainless steel needle valve at the 45 46 point of connection to equipment or piping. Provide a second valve 46 47 if the gage is panel mounted for use at a panel. 47 , 48 3. All components: Suitable for service at 200 prig and 250 DegF. 48 49 4. Pressure gages: Glycerine liquid filled. Provide glycerine filled 49 50 gage case. 50 ' 51 5. Material for case, ring, bourdon tube, socket, angle valve, and 51 52 connection tubing: Stainless steel. 52 53 6. Needle valves and connection tubing: 53 ' ROUND 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 a. 1/4 IN NPT on 2 -1/2 IN dial size. 01 02 b. 1/2 IN on 4 -1/2 IN dial size. 02 03 7. Calibrate gages at jobsite for pressure and temperature in accordance 03 04 with manufacturer's instructions. 04 05 8. Unless otherwise required by codes, provide stem - mounted or 05 06 flush- mounted units with dial diameter as follows: 06 07 07 08 PIPE SIZE DIAL SIZE 08 09 09 10 1 -1/2 IN or less 2 -1/2 IN 10 11 Larger than 1 -1/2 IN 4 -1/2 IN 11 12 12 13 9. Colors: 13 14 a. Faces: White. 14 15 b. Numerals: Black. 15 16 c. Pointers: Black. 16 17 10. Pressure range: 200 percent of normal operation. Furnish compound 17 18 type gages on equipment suction which show at least 10 psi vacuum. 18 19 11. Provide stainless steel pulsation dampeners on all gage applications 19 20 which involve positive displacement equipment. 20 21 12. Provide stainless steel protector to separate process fluid from the 21 22 pressure element on all gages except potable and recycle water, and 22 23 air systems. Furnish protector type listed below: 23 24 24 25 GAGE APPLICATION PROTECTOR PROTECTOR FLUID 25 26 26 27 27 28 C12, SO Ashcroft Type halocarbon 28 29 200 Diaphragm 29 30 seal or equal. 30 31 31 32 All compound gages Ashcroft Type silicone 32 33 (excluding those 200 Diaphragm 33 34 applications li seal or equal. 34 35 above) 35 36 36 37 All others Ashcroft Type glycerine 37 38 200 Diaphragm 38 39 seal or equal. 39 40 40 41 13. Provide diaphragm seal housing of stainless steel construction. 41 42 14. Provide 1/2 IN stainless steel antisiphon pigtail inlet connection 42 43 for hot water applications. 43 44 15. Gage accuracy: Within 1 percent. 44 45 45 46 46 47 PART 3 - EXECUTION 47 48 48 49 3.01 EXTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION 49 50 50 51 A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide a minimum of 3 FT and 51 52 earth cover over exterior buried piping systems and appurtenances 52 53 conveying water, fluids, or solutions subject to freezing. • 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15060 -5 15060 -6 01 01 , 02 B. Enter and exit through structure walls, floors, and ceilings by using 02 03 wall penetrations as shown on Drawings. 03 II 04 04 05 C. Install flexible joint within 2 FT of point where pipe enters or leaves 05 06 structure. Install second flexible joint not more than 6 FT nor less 06 07 than 4 FT from first joint. Provide balance of piping with standard 07 , 08 laying lengths. 08 09 09 10 D. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion and contraction 10 ' 11 movement. 11 12 12 13 E. Laying Pipe In Trench: 13 ' 14 1. Excavate and backfill trench in accordance with Section 02200. 14 15 2. Clean each pipe length thoroughly and inspect for compliance to 15 16 Specifications. 16 17 3. Grade trench bottom and excavate for pipe bell and lay pipe on trench 17 ' 18 bottom. 18 19 4. Install gasket or joint material according to manufacturer's 19 20 directions after joints have been thoroughly cleaned and examined. 20 II 21 5. Except for first two joints, before making final connections of 21 22 joints, install two full sections of pipe with earth tamped along 22 23 side of pipe or final with bedding material placed. 23 II 24 6. Lay pipe in only suitable weather with good trench conditions. Never 24 25 lay pipe in water except where approved by Engineer. 25 26 7. Seal open end of line with watertight plug if pipe laying stopped. 26 27 8. Remove water in trench before removal of plug. 27 II 28 29 F. Lining Up Push -On Joint Piping: 29 30 1. Lay piping on route lines shown on Drawings. 30 II 31 2. Deflect from straight alignments or grades by vertical or horizontal 31 32 curves or offsets. 32 33 3. Observe maximum deflection values stated in manufacturer's written 33 34 literature. 34 II 4. Provide special bends when specified or where required alignment 35 36 exceeds allowable deflections stipulated. 36 37 5. Install shorter lengths of pipe in such length and number that 37 ' 38 angular deflection of any joint, as represented by specified maximum 38 39 deflection, is not exceeded. 39 40 40 II 41 G. Anchorage and Blocking: 41 42 1. Provide reaction blocking, anchors, joint harnesses, or other 42 43 acceptable means for preventing movement of piping caused by forces 43 44 in or on buried piping tees, wye branches, plugs, or bends. 44 II 2. Place concrete blocking so that it extends from fitting into solid 45 46 undisturbed earth wall. Concrete blocks shall not cover pipe joints. 46 47 3. Provide bearing area of concrete in accordance with drawing detail. 47 II 48 49 H. Install insulating components where dissimilar metals are joined 49 50 together. 50 ' 51 51 52 3.02 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 A. Install piping in vertical and horizontal alignment as shown on Drawings. 01 02 02 03 B. Alignment of piping smaller than 4 IN may not be shown. However, install 03 04 according to Drawing intent and with ample clearance and allowance for: 04 05 1. Expansion and contraction. 05 06 2. Operation and access to equipment, doors, windows, hoists, moving 06 07 equipment. 07 08 3. Headroom and walking space for working areas and aisles. 08 09 4. System drainage and air removal. 09 10 10 11 C. Enter and exit through structure walls, floor and ceilings using wall 11 12 penetrations specified in Section 01800 and as shown on the Drawings. 12 13 13 14 D. Install vertical piping runs plumb and horizontal piping runs parallel 14 15 with structure walls. 15 16 16 17 E. Use methods of piping support as shown on Drawings and as required. Where 17 18 pipes run parallel and at same elevation or grade, they may be grouped 18 19 and supported from common trapeze -type hanger, provided hanger rods are 19 20 increased in size as specified for total supported weight. The pipe in 20 21 the group requiring the least maximum distance between supports shall set 21 22 the distance between trapeze hangers. 22 23 23 24 F. Locate and size sleeves required for piping system. Arrange for chases, 24 25 recesses, inserts or anchors at proper elevation and location. 25 26 26 27 G. Use reducing fittings throughout piping systems. Bushings will not be 27 28 allowed unless specifically approved. 28 29 29 30 H. Provide drain pans and piping from items of equipment where condensation 30 31 may occur. Run drain piping to nearest floor drain or rainwater 31 32 downspout. Provide stainless steel drain lines sized to match drainpan 32 33 tap but in no case smaller than 3/4 IN. 33 34 34 35 I. Unions: 35 36 1. Provide unions within 2 FT of each threaded end valve and at each 36 37 piece of equipment. 37 38 2. Install in position which will permit valve or equipment to be 38 39 removed without dismantling adjacent piping. 39 40 3. Mechanical type couplings may serve as unions. 40 41 4. Additional flange unions are not required at flanged connections. 41 42 42 43 J. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion /contraction 43 44 movement. 44 45 45 46 K. Provide easily accessible drainpoints for all utility piping to allow 46 47 complete drainage of system. 47 48 48 49 L. Hard pipe stuffing box leakage to nearest floor drain. 49 50 50 51 M. Install all interior drain, waste, vent and potable water concealed 51 52 unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15060 -7 15060 -8 01 N. Where piping systems having both raised and flat faced flanges interface, 01 02 provide full face gaskets. 02 03 03 04 0. Coordinate work to avoid piping over electrical components or provide 04 05 minimum 16 GA 316 stainless steel drain pans under piping to protect the 05 06 electric components. Slope and pipe these pans to drains. 06 07 07 08 P. Slope steam and condensate piping to drip pockets, traps, blowoff valves 08 09 and other points of drainage collection. 09 10 10 11 Q. Provide driplegs at; low points with ball valve. Route dripleg to nearest 11 12 wall or column and terminate no higher than 4 FT above finished floor. 12 13 13 14 R. Anchorage and Blocking: 14 15 1. Block, anchor, or harness exposed piping subjected to forces, in 15 16 which mechanical, push on, flexible, or similar joints are installed, 16 17 to prevent separation of joints and transmission of stress into 17 18 equipment or structural components not designed to resist those 18 19 stresses. 1 20 20 21 S. Equipment Pipe Connections: 21 22 1. Exercise car? in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint 22 23 on the opposite end of pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform 23 24 gasket pressure at connection or would cause unnecessary stresses to 24 25 be transmittdd to equipment flanges. 25 26 2. Where push -on joints are used in conjunction with flanged joints, 26 27 final positioning of push -on joints shall not be made until flange 27 28 joints have been tightened without strain. 28 29 3. Tighten flange bolts at uniform rate which will result in uniform 29 30 gasket compression over entire area of joint. Provide tightening 30 31 torque in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 31 32 4. Support and match flange faces to uniform contact over their entire 32 33 face area prior to installation of any bolt between the piping flange 33 34 and equipment connecting flange. 34 35 5. Permit piping connecting to equipment to freely move in directions 35 36 parallel to longitudinal centerline when and while bolts in 36 37 connection flange are tightened. 37 38 6. Align, level, and wedge equipment into place during fitting and 38 39 alignment of connecting piping. 39 40 7. Grout equipment into place prior to final bolting of piping but not 40 41 before initial fitting and alignment. 41 42 8. To provide maximum flexibility and ease of alignment, assemble 42 43 connecting piping with gaskets in place and minimum of four bolts per 43 44 joint installed and tightened. Test alignment by loosening flange 44 45 bolts to see if there is any change in relationship of piping flange 45 46 with equipment connecting flange. Realign as necessary, install 46 47 flange bolts and make equipment connection. 47 48 9. Provide utility, connections to equipment shown on Drawings, scheduled 48 49 or specified. 49 50 10. Make piping connections to plumbing and HVAC equipment, including 50 51 but not limited to installation of brass and fittings, strainers, 51 52 pressure reducing valves, flow control valves and relief valves 52 53 provided with or as integral part of equipment. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 11. Furnish and install sinks, brass, fittings, strainers, pressure 01 02 reducing valves, flow control valves, pressure relief valves, and 02 03 shock absorbers which are not specified to be provided with or as 03 04 integral part.of equipment. 04 05 12. For each potable or service water supply piping connection to 05 06 equipment, furnish and install union and gate or angle valve. 06 07 Provide wheel handle stop valve at each laboratory sink water supply. 07 08 Minimum size to be 1/2 IN. 08 09 13 Furnish and install "P" trap for each waste piping connection to 09 10 equipment if waste is connected directly to building sewer system. 10 11 Size trap as.required by Plumbing Code. 11 12 14 Stub piping for equipment, sinks, lavatories, supply and drain 12 13 fittings, key stops, "P" traps, miscellaneous traps and miscellaneous 13 14 brass through wall or floor and cap and protect until such time when 14 15 - later installation is performed. 15 16 16 17 T. Provide insulating components where dissimilar metals are joined 17 18 together. 18 19 19 20 3.03 CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING 20 21 21 22 A. Where connection' between new work and existing work is made, use suitable 22 23 and proper fittings to suit conditions encountered. 23 24 24 25 B. Perform connections with existing piping at time and under conditions 25 26 which will least interfere with service to customers affected by such 26 27 operation. 27 28 28 29 C. Undertake connections in fashion which will disturb system as little as 29 30 possible. 30 31 31 32 D. Provide suitable equipment and facilities to dewater, drain, and dispose 32 33 of liquid removed without damage to adjacent property. 33 34 - 34 35 E. Where connections to existing systems necessitate employment of past 35 36 installation methods not currently part of trade practice, utilize 36 37 necessary special piping components. 37 38 38 39 F. Once tie -in to each existing system is initiated, continue work 39 40 continuously until tie -in is made and tested. 40 41 41 42 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 42 43 43 44 A. General: 44 45 1. Test all piping systems upon completion of piping and prior to 45 46 covering concealed or buried piping. 46 47 2. Utilize pressures, media and pressure test durations as specified on 47 48 Piping Specification Schedules. 48 49 3. Isolate equipment which may be damaged by the specified pressure test 49 50 conditions. 50 51 4. Perform pressure test using calibrated pressure gages and calibrated 51 52 volumetric measuring equipment to determine leakage rates. Select 52 53 each gage so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15060 -9 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 15060 -10 half of the gage's range. Notify the Engineer 24 HRS prior to each test. 5. Completely assemble and test new piping systems prior to connection to existing pipe systems, unless otherwise specified. 6. Acknowledge satisfactory performance of tests and inspections in writing to Engineer prior to final acceptance. 7. Provide all necessary equipment and perform all work required in connection with the tests and inspections. 8. Bear the cost of all testing and inspecting, locating and remedying of leaks and any necessary retesting and re- examination. B. Pressure Testing Methods and Criteria: 1. Types of pressure testing and inspection to be employed include hydrostatic pressure testing, cylinder water pumped compressed air or cylinder nitrogen testing, low pressure air testing, and hydrostatic infiltration /exfiltration testing. 2. Gas and air systems: a. Unless otherwise specified in Piping Specification Schedule, utilize the following testing medium for gas and air systems. PIPE LINE SIZE 2 IN and smaller 2 IN and smaller Greater than'2 IN Greater than SPECIFIED TEST PRESSURE 75 psi or less Greater than 75 psi 3 psi or less Greater than 3 psi b. The allowable leakage rate for hazardous gas systems, systems receiving insulation, and systems tested with water is zero at the specified test pressure throughout the specified test period. Hazardous gas systems include digester gas, chlorine, and natural gas systems. c. The allowable leakage rate for systems tested with air shall be based on a maximum pressure drop of 5 percent of the specified test pressure for the duration of the period. Prior to starting a test interval using air, assure air is at ambient temperature and specified test pressure. 3. Liquid systems: a. The following liquid piping systems shall have zero leakages at the specified test pressure throughout the specified duration: 1) Exposed piping. 2) Buried insulated piping and buried or exposed pressure piping., b. Unless otherwise specified, leakage from gravity buried liquid piping systems shall be less than 25 GAL per day per inch -mile. 4. Hydrostatic pressure testing: a. All joints, including welds, are to be left exposed for examination during the test. Provide additional temporary supports for piping systems designed for vapor or gas to support the weight of the test water. b. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints for additional pressure load under test. Equipment in piping system with rated ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS TESTING MEDIUM Air or water Water Air or water Water 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 pressure lower than pipe test pressure shall be isolated by 01 02 valves or blind flanges. 02 03 c. Do not paint or insulate exposed piping until successful 03 04 performance of pressure test. 04 05 d. Test soil, waste, drain and vent piping at completion of 05 06 installation of each stack or section of piping by filling system 06 07 with water.to highest point and checking joints and fittings for 07 08 leaks. Leaks must be eliminated before proceeding with work or 08 09 concealing piping. Minimum test heights shall be 10 FT. 09 10 5. Low pressure air test: 10 11 a. Check pneumatic plugs for proper sealing. 11 12 b. Place plugs in line at each manhole and inflate to 25 psig. 12 13 c. Introduce low pressure air into sealed line segment until air 13 14 pressure reaches 4 psig greater than ground water that may be 14 15 over the'pipe. Use test gage conforming to ANSI 840.1 with 0 to 15 16 15 psi scale and accuracy of 1 percent of full range. 16 17 d. Allow 2 minutes for air pressure to stabilize. 17 18 e. After stabilization period (3.5 psig minimum pressure in pipe) 18 19 discontinue air supply to line segment. 19 20 1) Acceptable time for loss of 1 psig of air pressure shall be: 20 21 21 22 PIPE SIZE TIME, MINUTES /100 FT 22 23 23 24 6 0.7 24 25 - 8 1.2 25 26 10 1.5 26 27 12 1.8 27 28 15 2.1 28 29 18 2.4 29 30 21 and larger 3.0 30 31 31 32 C. Dielectric Testing Methods and Criteria: 32 33 1. Provide electrical check between metallic non - ferrous pipe or 33 34 appurtenances and ferrous elements of construction to assure 34 35 discontinuity has been maintained. 35 36 2. Wherever electrical contact is demonstrated by such test, locate the 36 37 point or points of continuity and correct the condition. 37 38 38 39 3.05 CLEANING 39 40 40 41 A. Cleaning: 41 42 1. Clean interior of piping systems thoroughly before installing. 42 43 2. Maintain pipe in clean condition during installation. 43 44 3. Before jointing piping, thoroughly clean and wipe joint contact 44 45 surfaces and then properly dress and make joint. 45 46 4. Immediately prior to pressure testing, clean and remove grease, metal 46 47 cuttings, dirt, or other foreign materials which may have entered the 47 48 system. 48 49 5. At completion of work and prior to Final Acceptance, thoroughly clean 49 50 work installed under these Specifications. Clean equipment, 50 51 fixtures, pipe, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and 51 52 sludge which may have accumulated by operation of system, from 52 53 testing, or from other causes. Repair any stoppage or discoloration 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15060 -11 15060 -12 01 or other damage to parts of building, its finish, or furnishings, due 01 02 to failure to properly clean piping system, without cost to Owner. 02 03 6. Clean chlorine and sulfur dioxide piping by pulling a cloth saturated 03 04 with a suitable solvent through each length of pipe. Disassemble 04 05 valves and clean with suitable solvent. All surfaces which may come 05 06 in contact with chlorine or sulfur dioxide gas shall be thoroughly 06 07 dry, and free of oil or grease before placing in service. 07 08 j 08 09 3.06 LOCATION OF BURIED.OBSTACLES 09 10 10 11 A. Furnish exact location and description of buried utilities and thrust 11 12 blocks encountered. 12 13 13 14 B. Reference items to definitive reference point locations such as found 14 15 property corners, entrances to buildings, existing structure lines, fire 15 16 hydrants and related fixed structures. 16 17 17 18 C. Include such information as location, elevation, coverage, supports and 18 19 additional pertinent information which will be required by future 19 20 contractors for replacement servicing, or adjacent construction around 20 21 any buried facility. 21 22 22 23 D. Incorporate information on "As- Recorded" Drawings. 23 24 24 25 3.07 SCHEDULES 25 26 26 27 A PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 1 27 28 1. General: 28 29 a. Piping service: 29 30 1) Plant effluent. 30 31 b. Test requirements: 31 32 1) Test medium: Water. 32 33 2) Pressure: 25 psig. 33 34 3) Duration: 2 HRS. 34 35 c. Gasket requirements: 35 36 1) Flange: Rubber, AWWA C111. 36 37 2) Mechanical Joint: Rubber, AWWA C111. 37 38 2. System components: 38 39 a. Pipe size: 4 through 48 IN. 39 40 1) Exposed service: 40 41 a) Material: Ductile iron Grade 60- 42 -10, Class 50. 41 42 b) References: ANSI C115. 42 43 c) Lining: Cement. 43 44 d) Coating: Paint. 44 45 e) Fittings and joints: Ductile iron fittings complying 45 46 with ANSI C110, iron Grade 70 -50 -05 with 250 psi rating 46 47 for larger than 12 IN and 350 psi rating for 12 IN and 47 48 less. Alternate gray cast fittings complying with ANSI 48 49 C110 with 150 psi rating for larger than 12 IN and 250 49 50 psi rating for 12 IN and less. ANSI C115 flanged joints 50 51 with flanges at valves and structure penetrations. 51 52 2) Buried service: 52 53 a) Materials: Ductile iron Grade 60- 42 -10, Class 50. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 b) Reference: ANSI C151. 01 02 c) Linings: Cement. 02 03 d) Coating: Polyethylene sleeve. 03 04 e) Fittings and joints: Ductile iron fittings complying 04 05 with ANSI C110, iron Grade 70 -50 -05 with 250 psi rating 05 06 for larger than 12 IN and 350 psi rating for 12 IN and 06 07 less. Alternate gray cast fittings complying with ANSI 07 08 C110 with 150 psi rating for larger than 12 IN and 250 08 09 psi rating for 12 IN and less. Mechanical (gland type) 09 10 joints. 10 11 11 12 B. PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 2 12 13 1. General: 13 14 a. Piping service: 14 15 1) Plant'water system, potable water, chlorine vacuum, and 15 16 chlorine solution. 16 17 b. Test requirements: 17 18 1) Test medium: Water. 18 19 2) Pressure: 125 psig. 19 20 3) Duration: 6 HRS. 20 21 c. Gasket requirements: 21 22 1) Flange: EPDM. 22 23 2) Unions:' Buna -N 0- rings. 23 24 2. System components: 24 25 a. Pipe size: Up to 4 IN. 25 26 1) Exposed; service (except plant water system at hydropnuematic 26 27 tank ° and plant water pumps): 27 28 a) Material: PVC, Type 1, Grade 1, Schedule 80. 28 29 b) Reference: ASTM D1785. 29 30 c) Lining: None. 30 31 d) Coating: Paint. 31 32 e) Fittings and joints: Solvent welded socket type fittings 32 33 complying with ASTM D2467 with unions at valves, 33 34 penetrations through structures and equipment connections 34 35 for pipe 2 IN and less and flanges at those locations for 35 36 pipe above 2 IN. 36 37 2) Exposed service for plant water system at hydropnuematic 37 38 tank, plant water pumps, and hose connection risers: 38 39 a) Material: Steel, Schedule 40, Grade B, galvanized. 39 40 b) Reference: ASTM A53. 40 41 c) Lining: Galvanized. 41 42 d) Coating: Paint 42 43 e) Fittings and joints: Malleable iron or steel meeting 43 44 ANSI 81613, ASTM A234; threaded joints with companion 44 45 flanges where required. 45 46 3) Buried 'service: 46 47 a) Material: PVC, Type 1, Grade 1, Schedule 80. 47 48 b) Reference: ASTM D1785. 48 49 c) Lining: None. 49 50 d) Coating: None. 50 51 e) Fittings and joints: Solvent welded socket type fittings 51 52 complying with ASTM D2467. 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15060 -13 15060 -14 01 C. PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 3 01 02 1. General: 02 03 a. Piping service: 03 04 1) Sulfur dioxide gas (vacuum) and solution. 04 05 b. Test requirements: 05 06 1) Test' medium: water. 06 07 2) Pressure: 125 psig. 07 08 3) Duration: 6 HRS. 08 09 c. Gasket requirements: 09 10 1) Flange: Teflon, or other material suitable for use with 10 11 sulfur dioxide. 11 12 2) Unions: Teflon, or other material suitable for use with 12 13 sulfur dioxide. 13 14 2. System components: 14 15 a. Pipe size: Up to 1 IN. 15 16 1) Exposed and buried service: 16 17 a) Materials: Stainless steel tubing, TP -316L. 17 18 b) Reference: ASTM A269. 18 19 c) Lining: None. 19 20 d) Coating: None. . 20 21 e) Fittings and joints: Stainless steel 316L fittings with 21 22 compression type tube fittings and coupling, unions at 22 23 equipment and valves. 23 24 24 25 END OF SECTION 25 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 90H6 SECTION 15100 01 02 02 03 VALVES: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Valving, operators, and valving appurtenances. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 17 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: General Requirements. 17 18 4. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: General Requirements. 18 19 5. Section 15101 - Gate Valves. 19 20 6. Section 15104 - Ball Valves. 20 21 7. Section 15106,- Check Valves. 21 22 8. Section 15114 - Miscellaneous Valves. 22 23 23 24 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 24 25 25 26 A. Referenced Standards: 26 27 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 27 28 a. 81.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose. 28 29 b. 816.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 29 30 c. 816.18, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 30 31 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 31 32 a. C111, Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron 32 33 Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 33 34 b. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 IN 34 • 35 through 144 IN. • 35 36 c. C500, Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems. 36 37 d. C504, Rubber - Seated Butterfly Valves. 37 38 e. C509, Resilient- Seated Gate Valves 3 through 12 NPS, for Water 38 39 and Sewage Systems. 39 40 3. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings 40 41 Industry, Inc.(MSS). 41 42 42 43 1.03 DEFINITIONS 43 44 44 45 A. The following are definitions of abbreviations used in the referenced 45 46 Sections cited in Paragraph 1.01 B. 46 47 1. WOG: Water, oil, gas working pressure. 47 48 2. WWP: Water working pressure. 48 49 3. CWP: Cold water working pressure. 49 50 50 51 1.04 SUBMITTALS 51 52 52 53 A. Shop Drawings: 53 • ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15100 -1 15100 -2 01 1. See Section 01340. 01 02 2. Product technical data including: 02 03 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 03 04 standards referenced. 04 05 b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 05 06 c. Valve pressure /temperature rating. 06 07 d. Valve material of construction. 07 08 e. Special linings. 08 09 f. Valve dimensions and weight. 09 10 g. Valve flow coefficient. 10 11 11 12 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 12 13 1. See Section 01340. 13 14 14 15 15 16 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 16 17 17 18 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 18 19 19 20 A. Refer to individual" valve specification sections. 20 21 21 22 2.02 MATERIALS 22 23 23 24 A. Refer to individual valve specification sections. 24 25 25 26 2.03 ACCESSORIES 26 27 27 28 A. Valve Operators - General: 28 29 1. Provide operators as shown on Drawings or specified. 29 30 2. Counter clockwise opening as viewed from the top. 30 31 3. Direction of,opening and the word OPEN to be cast in handwheel or 31 32 valve bonnet.'' 32 33 4. Size operator to produce required torque with a maximum pull of 80 LB 33 '34 and withstand without damage a pull of 200 LB. 34 35 35 36 B. Buried Valve Operators: 36 37 1. Provide screw or slide type adjustable cast iron box, 5 IN minimum 37 38 diameter, and identifying cover. 38 39 2. Box base to enclose buried valve gear box or bonnet. 39 40 3. Provide 2 IN AWWA standard valve operation nut. 40 41 a. Stands or operator to include thrust bearings for valve operation 41 42 and weight of accessories. 42 43 43 44 C. Manual Operators: 44 45 1. Provide for all exposed valves not having electric or cylinder 45 46 operators. 46 47 2. Provide handwheels for gate valves 4 IN and less. 47 48 a. Size handwheels for gate valves in accordance with AWWA C500. 48 49 3. Provide lever 'operators for ball valves 4 IN DIA and smaller. 49 50 4. Gear operators 'required for ball valves 6 IN DIA and larger. 50 51 51 52 2.04 FABRICATION 52 53 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01 A. Valves: 01 02 1. End connections: 02 03 a. Provide end connections for valves as required in the Piping 03 04 Schedules presented in Section 15060. 04 05 b. Assure end connections meet the following standards: 05 06 1) Threaded: ANSI 81.20.1. 06 07 2) Flanged: ANSI 816.1 Class 125 unless otherwise, noted or AWWA 07 08 C207. 08 09 3) Bell and spigot or mechanical (gland) type: AWWA C111. 09 10 4) Soldered: ANSI 816.18. 10 11 2. Refer to individual sections for specifications of each type of valve 11 12 on Project. 12 13 13 14 14 15 PART 3 - EXECUTION 15 16 16 17 3.01 INSTALLATION 17 18 18 19 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 19 20 20 21 B. Protect all bolts with corrosion- resistant paint or polyethylene 21 22 wrapping. 22 23 1. Refer to Sectidh 09905 for painting and protective coatings. 23 24 24 25 C. Setting Outside Vlves: 25 26 1. Locate valves installed in trenches where indicated on Drawings. 26 27 2. Set valves and valve boxes plumb. 27 28 3. Place valve boxes directly over valves with top of box being brought 28 29 to surface of finished grade. 29 30 4. After installation, fill in earth for distance of 4 FT on each side 30 31 of box. 31 32 32 33 D. Support exposed piping adjacent to valves to eliminate pipe loads being 33 34 transferred to valve. 34 35 35 36 E. Install electric or cylinder operator above or horizontally adjacent to 36 37 valve and gear box. 37 38 38 39 F. For threaded valves, provide union on one side to allow valve removal. 39 40 40 41 3.02 ADJUSTING 41 42 42 43 A. Make all adjustments to valves, operators and appurtenant equipment prior 43 44 to Project acceptance. Operate valve, open, close at system pressures. 44 45 45 46 END OF SECTION 46 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15100 -3 01 89E10 SECTION 15101 01 02 02 03 GATE VALVES 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Gate valves. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 17 3. Section 15100 - Valves: General Requirements. 17 18 18 19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 20 20 21 A. Referenced Standards: 21 22 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 22 23 a. C500, Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems. 23 24 b. C509, Resilient Seated Gate Valves, 3 through 12 NPS, for Water 24 25 and Sewerage Systems. 25 26 2. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings 26 27 Industry, Inc (MSS): 27 28 a. SP -9, Spot Facing for Bronze, Iron and Steel Flanges. 28 29 b. SP -70, Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 29 30 c. SP -80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 30 31 31 32 1.03 DEFINITIONS 32 33 33 34 A. OS &Y: Outside Screw and Yoke. 34 35 35 36 B. NRS: Nonrising Stem. 36 37 37 38 C. RS: Rising Stem. 38 39 39 40 D. WOG: Nonshock Cold Water, Oil or Gas. 40 41 41 42 1.04 SUBMITTALS 42 43 43 44 A. Shop Drawings: 44 45 1. See Section 15100. 45 46 46 47 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 47 48 1. See Section 01340. 48 49 49 50 50 51 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 51 52 52 53 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15101 -1 15101 -2 ' 01 01 ' 02 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the Manufacturers 02 03 listed under the specific valve types are approved. 03 II 04 04 05 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS 05 06 06 07 A. Water, Effluent, 2 -1/2 IN and Smaller: 07 II 1. Class 125 bronze gate valve: 08 09 a. 125 psi steam, 200 psi nonshock WOG. 09 10 b. Conform to MSS SP -80. 10 11 c. Screw in bonnet, nonrising stem, solid wedge. 11 12 d. Body, bonnet, wedge: Bronze. 12 13 e. Stem: Silicon bronze. 13 II 14 f. Packing: Teflon or TFE impregnated fibre. 14 15 g. Manufacturer: 15 16 1) Nibco 113. 16 17 2) Stockham 8103, B104. 17 111 18 18 19 B. Water, Raw Wastewater, Effluent, 3 to 12 IN DIA: 19 20 1. Resilient seat gate valves. 20 II 21 a. 200 psi working pressure. 21 22 b. Conform to AWWA C509. 22 23 c. Buried - NRS 0 -ring stem seal. 23 24 d. Exposed - OS &Y, stuffing box stem seal. 24 ' 25 2. Manufacturers: 25 26 a. Clow. 26 27 b. Mueller. 27 II 28 c. American Darling. 28 29 d. M & H. 29 30 30 31 E. Raw Wastewater 31 , 32 1. Knife gate valve, 2 to 36 IN, only where shown on the plans. 32 33 a. Working pressure (CWP non - shock). 33 34 1) 2 to 24 IN: 150 psi. 34 II b. Body construction: 35 36 1) Cast Iron. 36 37 c. Wetted parts: Stainless steel Type 304. 37 II 38 d. Packing: Flax, 150 DegF max. 38 39 e. Stem: Stainless steel, double pitch thread. 39 40 f. Manufacturer: 40 41 1) Kennedy. 41 ' 42 42 43 2.03 ACCESSORIES 43 44 44 II A. Refer to Drawings and valve schedule for type of operators. Furnish 45 46 operator integral with valve. 46 47 47 II 48 B. Refer to Section 15100 for operator requirements. 48 49 49 50 2.04 FABRICATION 50 51 51 II A. General: 52 53 1. Provide valves with clear waterways the full diameter of the valve. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 01 2. Fabricate to meet AWWA or MSS standard referenced. 01 02 02 03 B. Gear Operators: 03 04 1. Provide with accurately formed, smooth running bevel gears, with 04 05 pinion shaft operating in permanently sealed antifriction bearings. 05 06 2. Provide valves with grease cases for bevel gearing. 06 07 07 08 C. Spot valves in accordance with MSS SP -9. 08 09 09 10 10 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION 11 12 12 13 3.01 INSTALLATION 13 14 14 15 A. See Section 15100. 15 16 16 17 B. Install buried valves in the closed position. Place valve on firm 17 18 footing in trench to prevent settling and excessive strain on the 18 19 connection to the pipe. 19 20 20 21 C. Larger buried valves utilizing smaller bypass valves shall have a second 21 22 valve box installed over the bypass valve operating nut. ,,- 22 23 23 24 D. Do not install gate valves inverted or with the stems sloped more than 45 24 25 degrees from the upright unless the valve was ordered and manufactured 25 26 specifically for this orientation. 26 27 27 28 END OF SECTION 28 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15101 -3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15104 -1 01 89E10 SECTION 15104 01 02 02 03 BALL VALVES 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Ball valves. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 17 3. Section 15100 - Valves: General Requirements. 17 18 18 19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 20 20 21 A. Referenced Standards: 21 22 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 22 23 a. A48, Gray Iron Castings (Class 35 Minimum). 23 24 b. Al26, Gray Iron Castings for Valves Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 24 25 c. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) 25 26 (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) 26 27 Compounds. 27 28 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 28 29 a. B16.1, Cast -Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 29 30 125, 250, and 800. 30 31 31 32 1.03 SUBMITTALS 32 33 33 34 A. Shop Drawings: 34 35 1. See Section 15100. 35 36 2. Test results for AWWA valves. 36 37 37 38 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 38 39 1. See Section 01340. 39 40 40 41 41 42 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 42 43 43 44 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 44 45 45 46 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 46 47 Manufacturers are acceptable: 47 48 1. Metallic ball valves 1/4 to 3 IN DIA: 48 49 a. Apollo. 49 50 b. Jamesbury. 50 51 c. Watts. 51 52 d. Stockham. 52 53 e. Or approved equal. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 15104 -2 01 2. Plastic ball valves 1/2 to 4 IN DIA: 01 I 02 a. Chemtrol. 02 03 b. ASAHI /America. 03 1 04 c. Or approved equal. 04 05 05 06 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 06 , 07 01640. 07 08 08 09 2.02 MATERIALS 09 10 10 1 11 A. Metallic Ball Valves, Chlorine gas (vacuum) and water /effluent service, 11 12 1/4 to 3 IN DIA: 12 13 1. Body: Bronze. 13 II 2. Stem, stem gland nut: Brass. 14 15 3. Ball: Brass, chrome plated. 15 16 4. Seats, stuffing box ring, and thrust washer: Reinforced Teflon. 16 ' 17 5. Handle: Vinyl coated or zinc- or cadmium - plated steel. 17 18 18 19 B. Metallic Ball Valves, Sulfur dioxide (wet and dry) service, 1/4 IN to 3 19 20 IN DIA. 20 , 21 1. Body: Type 316 stainless steel. 21 22 2. Stem, Stem gland nut: Type 316 stainless steel. 22 23 3. Ball: Type 316 stainless steel. 23 ' 24 4. Seats, stuffing box ring, and thrust washer: Teflon. 24 25 5. Handle: Vinyl covered type 304 stainless steel. 25 26 26 II 27 C. Plastic Ball Valves 1/2 to 4 IN DIA: 27 28 1. Body, stem, ball, handle, end connectors: 28 29 2. PVC ASTM D1784- 12454B. 29 30 31 3. Seat: Teflon. 30 II 4. 0- rings: Viton. 31 32 32 33 2.03 ACCESSORIES 33 II 34 34 35 A. Furnish ball valves with lever -type operators. 35 36 36 II 37 2.04 FABRICATION 37 38 38 39 A. Metallic Valves 1/4 to 3 IN DIA: 39 40 1. Rated for 600 psi /250 DegF, WOG for threaded end applications. 40 1 41 2. Handles showing direction of opening. 41 42 3. Stuffing boxes capable of being repacked under pressure and 42 43 adjustable for wear. 43 II 44 4. Stem with reinforced teflon stuffing box ring and blowout -proof 44 45 design. 45 46 5. Renewable reinforced teflon seats. 46 47 6. Ball design which does not allow media contact with stem. 47 II 48 7. Stem extensions for piping systems with insulation. 48 49 8. Balancing stop for all applications. 49 50 9. Bodies with mounting pad for applications requiring actuators. 50 1 51 10. Provide valves in pneumatic piping systems meeting OSHA requirements 51 52 for automatic drains. 52 53 11. Body with 3/4 IN hose connection for blow down and hose bibb 53 ' ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 15104 -3 01 application. 01 02 ' 02 03 B. Plastic Valves 1/2 to 4 IN DIA: 03 04 1. Rated at 150 psi at 75 DegF. 04 05 2. Double or true union design. 05 06 3. Blocks both directions, upstream and downstream. 06 07 4. External adjustment for seat wear. 07 08 5. Stem extensions for insulated piping. 08 09 6. Body with mounting pad for actuators where required. 09 10 10 11 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 11 12 12 13 A. Shop test AWWA C507 ball valves in accordance with AWWA standards. 13 14 14 15 B. Furnish record of 'test. 15 16 16 17 _ 17 18 PART 3 - EXECUTION 18 19 19 20 3.01 INSTALLATION . 20 21 21 22 A. See Section 15100. 22 23 23 24 END OF SECTION 24 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01 89D4 SECTION 15106 01 02 02 03 CHECK VALVES 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Check valves. 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. - 16 17 3. Section 15100 - Valves: General Requirements. 17 18 18 19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 20 20 21 A. Referenced Standards: 21 22 1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI). 22 23 a. B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges & Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 23 24 250, and 800. 24 25 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 25 26 a. C508, Swing Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 through 24 IN 26 27 NPS. 27 28 3. Manufacturer's Standardization, Society of the Valve and Fittings 28 29 Industry, Inc (MSS): 29 30 a. SP -9, Spot Facing for Bronze, Iron and Steel Flanges. 30 31 b. SP -71, Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 31 32 c. SP -80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. • 32 33 33 34 1.03 SUBMITTALS 34 35 35 36 A. Shop Drawings: 36 37 1. See Section 15100. 37 38 38 39 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 39 40 1. See Section 01340. 40 41 41 42 42 43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 43 44 44 45 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 45 46 46 47 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, Manufacturers listed 47 48 under the valve with types are approved. 48 49 49 50 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 50 51 01640. 51 52 52 53 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15106 -1 15106 -2 01 01 02 A. Cushioned Swing Check Valve (2 to 36 IN): 02 03 1. Class 125: 03 04 a. Body, cover, disc, levers: Cast iron or cast steel. 04 05 b. Seat: Bronze or stainless steel. 05 06 c. Seat ring: Replaceable bronze or rubber (Buna -N). 06 07 d. Hinge: Stainless steel, extending out both sides with lever and 07 08 weight. 08 09 e. Cushion cylinder: Metallic, corrosion - resistant. 09 10 f. Cushion:, oil type with adjustable speed control. 10 11 g. Manufacturer: 11 12 1) Golden Anderson Figure. 25 -DXH. 12 13 2) Or approved equal. 13 14 14 15 15 16 PART 3 - EXECUTION 16 17 17 18 3.01 INSTALLATION 18 19 19 20 A. See Section 15100. 20 21 21 22 B. Support valve body and adjacent piping as necessary to avoid stressing 22 23 valve body. 23 24 24 25 END OF SECTION 25 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15114 -1 01 90H31 SECTION 15114 01 02 02 03 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Pressure - reducing valves (2 IN and smaller). 11 12 12 13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13 14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14 15 the Contract. 15 16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16 17 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: General Requirements. 17 18 4. Section 15100 - Valves: General Requirements. 18 19 19 20 1.02 SUBMITTALS 20 21 21 22 A. Shop Drawings: 22 23 1. See Section 15100. 23 24 24 25 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 25 26 1. See Section 01340. 26 27 27 28 28 29 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 29 30 30 31 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 31 32 32 33 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the Manufacturers 33 34 listed under the specific valve types are approved. 34 35 35 36 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 36 37 01640. 37 38 38 39 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS 39 40 40 41 A. Pressure - Reducing Valves (2 IN and Smaller): 41 42 1. Water pressure regulators: 42 43 a. Self - contained diaphragm operated. 43 44 1) Spring loaded. 44 45 2) Field adjustable. 45 46 b. Materials: 46 47 1) Body: Bronze. 47 48 2) Strainer body: Bronze. 48 49 3) Strainer screen: Stainless steel. 49 50 c. Strainer: Y -type on supply. 50 51 d. Size as shown in schedule or equal to connecting line size with 51 52 40 psi outlet pressure. 52 53 e. Manufacturers: 53 15114 -2 01 1) Fisher, Type 75A. 01 02 2) Mueller, Model H9300. 02 03 3) Or approved equal. 03 04 04 05 2.03 ACCESSORIES 05 06 06 07 A. Furnish any accessories required to provide a completely operable valve. 07 08 08 09 2.04 FABRICATION 09 10 10 11 A. Completely shop assemble unit including any interconnecting piping, speed 11 12 control valves, control isolation valves and electrical components. 12 13 13 14 B. Provide internal epoxy coating suitable for potable water for all iron 14 15 body valves. 15 16 16 17 17 18 PART 3 - EXECUTION 18 19 19 20 3.01 PREPARATION 20 21 21 22 A. Clean, inspect, and operate valve to ensure all parts are operable and 22 23 valve seats properly. 23 24 24 25 3.02 INSTALLATION 25 26 26 27 A. General: 27 28 1. See Section 11005. 28 29 2. See Section 15100. 29 30 30 31 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 31 32 32 33 A. Check and adjust valves and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's 33 34 instructions and place into operation. 34 35 35 36 END OF SECTION 36 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS ' 15183 -1 1 01 90F5 SECTION 15183 01 02 02 I 03 PIPE INSULATION 03 04 04 05 05 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06 I 07 07 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08 09 09 10 A. Section Includes: 10 11 1. Insulation: 11 12 a. Piping insulation. 12 13 b. Valve and fitting insulation. 13 14 14 15 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 15 16 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 16 II 17 the Contract. 17 18 2. Division 1 General Requirements. 18 19 3. Section 15060 - Pipe & Pipe Fittings. 19 ' 20 20 21 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 21 22 22 23 A. Referenced Standards: - 23 ' 24 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 24 25 a. 396, Water Vapor Transmission of Materials in Sheet Form. 25 26 b. C177, Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by means of 26 I 27 Guarded Hot Plate. 27 28 c. C355, Water Vapor Transmission of Thick Materials. 28 29 d. C518, Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by means of 29 30 the Heat Flow Meter. 30 II 31 e. C534, Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation 31 32 in Sheet and Tubular Form. 32 33 f. C548, Dimensional Stability of Low Temperature Thermal Block and 33 ' 34 Pipe Insulation. 34 35 g. C680, Heat Gain or Loss, and Surface Temperatures of Insulated 35 36 Pipe and Equipment Systems by the use of a Computer Program. 36 I 37 h. D1056, Flexible Cellular Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 37 38 i. E84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 38 39 2. Armstrong Cork Company: 39 40 a. Bulletin 10/77 15P Mechanical Systems Insulation, Section 3. 40 I 41 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 41 42 a. 255, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 42 43 b. 90A, Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 43 I 44 c. 90B, Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. 44 45 4: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL): 45 46 a. 723, Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building 46 II 47 Materials. 47 48 48 49 1.03 SUBMITTALS 49 50 50 I 51 A. Shop Drawings: 51 52 1. See Section 01340. 52 53 2. Product technical data including: 53 I ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 15183 -2 1 01 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 01 ' 02 standards referenced. 02 03 b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 03 ' 04 c. Submit complete specification of insulation materials, adhesives, 04 05 cement, together with manufacturer's recommended methods of 05 06 application and coverage for coatings and adhesives. 06 07 3. Submit itemized schedule by building of proposed insulation systems 07 ' 08 showing density, thermal conductivity, thickness, adhesive, jackets 08 09 and vapor barriers. 09 10 4. Certifications: 10 II 11 a. Products will meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 11 12 12 13 13 II 14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 14 15 15 16 2.01 ELASTOMERIC INSULATION 16 17 17 18 A. Pipe and Fitting Insulation: 18 II 19 1. Flexible elastomeric closed cell pipe insulation. Average thermal 19 20 conductivity not to exceed 0.27 (Btu -IN) per square foot -DegF -hour at 20 II 21 mean temperature of 75 DegF, temperature range -40 to 220 DegF; 21 22 permeability 0.17 by ASTM C355; water absorption 3 percent by ASTM 22 23 D1056 and ozone resistance. 23 24 2. Minimum insulation thickness: Conform to the following schedule or 24 II as shown on the Drawings: 25 26 26 27 APPLICATION PIPE SIZE THICKNESS 27 II 28 28 29 29 30 Water (effluent) 3 IN and less 1/2 IN 30 31 Over 3 IN 3/4 IN 31 II 32 32 33 B. Pipe Jackets: 33 34 1. Factory preformed 0.028 IN thick PVC jackets fabricated from B F 34 II Goodrich PVC sheeting V -66 with proven resistance to ultraviolet 35 36 degradation. 36 37 2. Piping jacket not required on concealed piping. 37 ' 38 38 39 2.03 EQUIPMENT INSULATION 39 40 40 41 A. Insulation for Equipment: Conform to the following Schedules, or as 41 , 42 shown on Drawings. 42 43 43 44 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEM 44 II 45 46 46 47 Hydropnuematic Tank Level 1 IN flexible elastomeric 47 48 Control Valve closed cell sheet 48 II 49 49 50 50 51 PART 3 - EXECUTION 51 , 52 52 53 3.01 INSTALLATION 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 01 02 A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 02 03 03 04 B. General: 04 05 1. Piping below ground covered with earth will not be insulated. 05 06 2. Consider piping and equipment as exposed, except as otherwise 06 07 indicated. 07 08 3. Consider piping and equipment in walls, partitions, floors, pipe 08 09 chases, pipe shafts and duct shafts as concealed. 09 10 4. Provide release for insulation application after installation and 10 11 testing is complete. Apply insulation on clean, dry surfaces after 11 12 inspection. 12 13 5. Provide insulation continuous through pipe hangers, supports and 13 14 sleeves. 14 15 6. Apply specified adhesives, mastics and coatings at the manufacturer' 15 16 recommended coverage per unit volume. 16 17 17 18 C. Pipe and Fittings: 18 19 1. Slip insulation on pipe prior to connection. Whenever the slip -on 19 20 technique is not possible provide insulation neatly slit and snapped 20 21 over the pipe. 21 22 2. Fabricate and install fitting cover insulation according to 22 23 manufacturer's recommendations. 23 24 3. Seal joints, slits, miter -cuts and other exposed edges of insulation 24 25 with adhesive, recommended by the insulation manufacturer, to ensure 25 26 complete vapor barrier. 26 27 27 28 D. Pipe Jackets: 28 29 1. Apply jacketing with a minimum of 1 IN overlap. Weld longitudinal 29 30 and circumferential seams with adhesives as recommended by 30 31 manufacturer. 31 32 2. Provide slip - joints every 30 FT and between fittings if distance 32 33 exceeds 8 FT. Construct slip - joints by overlapping jacket sections 6 33 34 to 10 IN. 34 35 3. Provide premolded PVC covers of same material and manufacturer as 35 36 jacket for fittings, valves, flanges, and related items in insulated 36 37 piping systems. 37 38 38 39 E. Equipment: 39 40 1. Install per manufacturer's instructions. 40 41 41 42 3.02 REPAIR 42 43 43 44 A. Whenever any factory applied insulation or job applied insulation is 44 45 removed or damaged, replace with the same quality of material and 45 46 workmanship. 46 47 47 48 - END OF SECTION 48 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15183 -3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 SECTION 15200 01 02 HOSES AND NOZZLES 02 03 03 04 04 05 PART 1 - GENERAL 05 06 06 07 1.01 SUMMARY 07 08 08 09 A. Section includes: 09 10 1. Hoses and nozzles. 10 11 11 12 B. Related sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 12 13 1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and General Terms and 13 14 Conditions of the Contract. 14 15 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 15 16 3. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings. 16 17 17 18 1.02 SUBMITTALS 18 19 19 20 A. Shop drawings: 20 21 1. Refer to Section 01340. 21 22 22 23 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 23 24 24 25 2.01 HOSE 25 26 26 27 A. Type: EPDM tube and cover with reinforced textile carcass, 4 spirals. 27 28 28 29 B. Size: 1 IN inside diameter, 1 7/16 IN outside diameter. 29 30 30 31 C. Working Pressure: 200 PSI. 31 32 32 33 D. Weight: 48.5 LBS /100 Ft. 33 34 34 35 E. Length: As shown on plans; splicing not permitted. 35 36 36 37 F. End connections: 37 38 1. Heavy duty brass with crimped -on ferrules as manufactured by Campbell 38 39 Fitting (Boyertown, PA). Hose clamps are prohibited. 39 40 2. One end to be 1 IN NPT male, opposite end to be 1 IN NPT female with 40 41 swivel. 41 42 42 43 2.02 NOZZLES 43 44 44 45 A. Material: Brass or bronze. 45 46 46 47 B. Connection: 1 IN NPT, female. 47 48 48 49 C. Orifice Size: 3/8 IN. 49 50 50 51 D. Discharge coefficient (C): 0.8 ( ±0.05). 51 52 52 53 E. Description: Conically tapered hose nozzle with a fixed orifice 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15200 -1 15200 -2 01 diameter. 01 02 02 03 03 04 PART 3 - EXECUTION 04 05 05 06 3.01 INSTALLATION 06 07 07 08 A. Furnish one hose and nozzle at each hose connection shown on the plans. 08 09 09 10 END OF SECTION 10 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 01 SECTION 15450 01 02 EMERGENCY EYE -WASH AND SHOWER 02 03 03 04 PART 1 - GENERAL 04 05 05 06 1.01 SUMMARY 06 07 07 08 A. Section includes: 08 09 1. Emergency eye -wash and shower stand. 09 10 10 11 B. Related sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 11 12 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 12 13 the Contract. 13 14 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 14 15 3. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings. 15 16 16 17 1.02 SUBMITTALS 17 18 18 19 A. Shop Drawings: 19 20 1. See Section 01340. 20 21 21 22 22 23 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 23 24 24 25 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 25 26 26 27 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 27 28 manufacturer is acceptable: 28 29 1. Haws Drinking Faucet Company. 29 30 2. Or approved equal. 30 31 31 32 2.02 EMERGENCY EYE -WASH AND SHOWER 32 33 33 34 A. Combination free standing eye -wash and shower stand. 34 35 35 36 B. Freeze - resistant construction with separate buried valves for eye -wash 36 37 and shower with push -down operating levers. 37 38 1. Water to drain from unit when flow is stopped. 38 39 2. 38 IN depth of bury. 39 40 40 41 C. Furnish Haws Model 8300 FP or approved equal. 41 42 42 43 PART 3 - EXECUTION 43 44 44 45 3.01 INSTALLATION 45 46 46 47 A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 47 48 48 49 B. Pipe eye -wash drain to the edge of the slab. 49 50 50 51 C. Embed valves in 5 cubic feet (minimum) of gravel. 51 52 52 53 END OF SECTION 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 15450 -1 DMSION 16 ELECTRICAL 16010 -1 SECTION 16010 1 2 ELECTRICAL GENERAL INFORMATION 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7 8 A. The work included under this Section consists of furnishing all 9 materials, labor, equipment and supplies; and performing all operations 10 necessary to complete the installation of an electrical system for 11 control, power and lighting as indicated on the Plans. 12 13 Include the following: 14 1. Replace existing electrical service to Plant No. 3. 15 2. Install new circuit breakers in existing motor control center at 16 Plant No. 3. 17 3. Install power, lighting, grounding and controls for the parshall 18 flume area, the sulfonator shelter, the sulfonator cylinder storage 19 shelter, and the hydrotank and pumps. 20 4. Connect the new chlorinators to the existing Plant 2 and Plant 3 21 flowmeter signals. Include switches to enable the operator to 22 select which flow will pace which chlorinator. 23 5. Install flowmeter at the parshall flume to measure effluent flow. 24 6. Connect the new sulfonators to the proposed effluent flow meter. 25 26 B. This Section shall apply to all sections covered in Division 16. 27 28 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 29 30 A. Division 1 31 32 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 33 34 A. Qualifications 35 1. All technical drawings submitted will bear the seal of a registered 36 Professional Engineer. The act of sealing each drawing shall be 37 taken to indicate that the sealing engineer has personally reviewed 38 the plans and specifications, and that it is his professional 39 opinion that the material covered in his submission meets or 40 exceeds the requirements of the Contract Drawings and 41 Specifications. 42 2. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality and all work shall be 43 done by workmen skilled in the trades involved. 44 3. The term "CONTRACTOR" as used herein, is intended to mean the 45 "Electrical Contractor," or his subcontractor. 46 47 B. Standards and Codes 48 1. All construction, installation, workmanship, equipment and 49 materials shall conform to all acts, laws, rules and regulations 50 having jurisdiction in the area where this project is to be 51 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16010 -2 located, and to the current edition of the following standards or 1 t codes: 2 3 National Electrical Code (NEC) (ANSI /NFPA 70) 4 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 5 National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI /IEEE C2) 6 II Standards of Installation, 1990 7 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 8 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 9 ' Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) 10 Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCA) 11 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 12 Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) 13 ' Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) 14 Anti - Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association (AFBMA) 15 City of Round Rock Electrical Code 16 17 II Codes and regulations are to be interpreted as minimum requirements 18 and shall in no way restrict the installation. 19 20 ' C. Regulatory Requirements 21 1. Conform to ANSI /NFPA 70 22 2. Conform to local buildings codes. • 23 II 3. Obtain electrical permits, and inspections from authority having 24 jurisdiction. 25 26 ' D. Allowable Tolerances 27 1. Scaling dimensions from drawings may be used only for approximate 28 locations. All dimensions shall be verified with existing 29 conditions on the job site. 30 II 2 . Equipment locations and conduit installation shall follow the 31 layouts shown on the drawings. These layouts, however, are 32 diagrammatic and shall be subject to such changes as may be 33 II necessary to complete the installation, to coordinate the work with 34 other trades, or to overcome obstacles encountered during 35 construction. 36 3. The CONTRACTOR shall apply for detailed information regarding the 37 ' position of equipment and outlets that are not dimensioned on the 38 drawings. The final or required locations must be coordinated on 39 the job site with other outlets or other trades. 40 ' 4. Where a major deviation from the drawings is indicated by practical 41 considerations, the CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings showing 42 all deviations in such detail so as to clearly indicate the 43 1 necessity or desirability for the change. 44 45 1.04 SUBMITTALS 46 47 , A. The drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the various 48 systems. If any departures from these drawings are deemed necessary by 49 the CONTRACTOR, detailed drawings and descriptions of these departures 50 II and a statement of the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the 51 ENGINEER for approval as soon as practicable. No departures from the 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 arrangements shown on the drawings shall be made without prior written 1 approval of the ENGINEER. 2 3 B. Shop drawings and required field drawings shall be submitted to the 4 ENGINEER for approval as required under Division 1 and any additional 5 requirements specified in these sections. 6 7 C. Consistent with Section 01340, all review material shall be identified 8 in order to identify the submittal as follows: 9 1. Lighting fixtures shall be identified in accordance with the 10 fixture schedule. 11 2. Sheets or drawings showing more than the particular item under 12 consideration shall have crossed out all but the pertinent 13 description of the item for which review is requested. 14 3. Schematics and connection diagrams for all electrical equipment 15 shall be submitted for review. A manufacturer's standard 16 connection diagram or schematic showing more than one scheme of 17 connection will NOT be accepted, unless it is clearly marked to 18 show the intended connections. 19 4. In addition to complete specifications and descriptive literature, 20 a sample of the largest and smallest size of each type of cable 21 shall be submitted for review before installation. Each sample 22 shall have full surface legible printing showing cable type, size 23 and manufacturer. 24 25 1.05 PRODUCT, DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 26 27 A. All materials and equipment furnished and /or installed under this 28 contract shall be received and adequately protected by the CONTRACTOR. 29 30 B. Use space heaters or lamps to prevent condensation in electrical 31 equipment. 32 33 C. Do not store equipment in direct contact with the ground. 34 35 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS 36 37 A. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to make a physical 38 survey of existing conditions pertaining to this project. 39 40 B. The drawings showing the extent and arrangement of the work of the 41 particular trade must be used together with the drawings showing the 42 extent and arrangement of the work of the other trades. The CONTRACTOR 43 shall lay out his work with due consideration for the other trades and 44 shall be responsible for calling to the attention of the ENGINEER any 45 interferences encountered; such interferences shall be investigated and 46 called to the attention of the ENGINEER before any equipment is 47 installed and before any material is fabricated. Relocation resulting 48 from interferences shall be made at no additional cost to the OWNER or 49 ENGINEER. 50 51 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16010 -3 1 16010 -4 1.07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1 ' 2 A. No separate or additional payment will be made for any items of work, 3 , materials, parts, equipment, supplies or related items required to 4 perform and complete the requirements of this Section. The costs for 5 all such items required shall be included in the lump sum bid for the 6 II Project. 7 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 9 II 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 11 12 A. Materials and Equipment: Acceptable to the authority having 13 II as suitable for the use intended. 14 15 B. Materials and equipment provided under these specifications must be new, 16 II standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of 17 such equipment. Provide the manufacturer's latest standard design for 18 the type equipment specified. 19 20 II C. Equipment shall be of domestic (U.S.A) manufacture and assembly where 21 the same is available. 22 23 ' D. Product must conform to regulations of the National Electrical Code. 24 Where Underwriter's Laboratories have set standards, listed product and 25 issued labels, products used must be listed and labeled by U.L. 26 27 ' E. Factory assembled equipment for electrical work must be delivered with 28 a hard surface, factory - applied finish so that no additional field 29 painting is required. 30 II 2.02 IDENTIFICATION 32 33 , A. All unit equipment shall contain individual unit nameplates. Nameplates 34 will also be provided on all instruments, load centers, individual dry 35 type transformers, individual panelboards, safety switches and 36 combination starters. The nameplate will describe the unit or equipment 37 ' which is served. Each nameplate will be of suitable height to get at 38 least three lines of 3/16 -inch high engraved laminated plastic white -on- 39 black- background letters, indicating the function and name of the 40 II equipment, as identified on the drawings. 41 42 B. All pilot lights will include laminated plastic nameplates with 3/16- 43 II inch engraved, white letters on black background indicating what has 44 operated or in what state the controlled load is in. 45 46 C. There shall be no abbreviations on nameplates. 47 II D. Label wiring with heat - shrunk PVC transparent shrunk -on sleeves, Brady 49 Type HSA or Brady Type HSB, applied over Brady Type B -700 vinyl film 50 ' wrap markers. Tag wires at both ends with the same notation. 51 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 16010 -5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 2 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3 4 A. The CONTRACTOR shall test the completed system wiring for faults, and 5 remove any defects prior to final inspection. 6 7 3.02 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK 8 9 A. The CONTRACTOR shall effectively protect his work, materials and 10 equipment from damage during the construction period. All openings into 11 any part of the conduit system, associated fixtures and equipment must 12 be securely covered or otherwise protected. Steel conduit and other 13 ferrous metal supplies shall be stored where they will not be exposed 14 to corrosion. 15 16 17 END OF SECTION 18 19 20 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16015 1 2 SUPPORTS 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 1.01 SCOPE 7 8 A. Furnish all foundations and supports required for the proper installation 9 of conduit and equipment. 10 11 B. Comply with the requirements of Section 16010 as applicable. 12 13 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 14 15 2.01 CONDUIT SUPPORTS 16 17 A. Support suspended single conduits by "Caddy" or "Minerallic" hangers and 18 adequately sized rods attached to the building structure. Use one hole 19 nest back conduit clamps to support conduits run on wall or ceiling 20 surfaces. Use Korns clamps to support single conduits from structural 21 steel members. 22 23 B. Use Unistrut or equal trapeze supports to support multiple runs of 24 conduits. Secure conduits to support channel with Unistrut "Uni- Clips ". 25 26 C. Use Unistrut supports also to support multiple runs of conduit routed on 27 the walls or ceilings. 28 29 D. Do not use perforated strap iron or wire to support conduits. 30 31 2.02 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 32 33 A. Provide supports for all control stations, disconnect switches, pull 34 boxes, panels, receptacles and other equipment as shown on the Plans and 35 as required otherwise. 36 37 B. Supports are to be constructed from structural steel members, or from 38 Unistrut, or equal, as shown on the Plans. Members shall be sized as 39 shown on the Plans. Where details are not shown, use minimum 3 inch by 40 1 -1/2 inch channel structural steel sections 1/4 inch thick. Weld all 41 structural steel members. All supports are to be corrosion resistant, 42 hot dipped, galvanized steel. 43 44 C. Use expansion shields to attach supports to floor slab or pad. 45 46 D. All fastenings are to be corrosion - resistant. 47 48 49 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16015 -1 16015 -2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, HANGERS, ANCHORS AND GUIDES A. Provide supports, hangers, anchors and guides as indicated on the Plans and, additionally, as required by the National Electrical Code. B. Review all drawings, including structural drawings, for details regarding supports, anchors, hangers and guides. C. All supports are to be of type and arrangement to prevent excessive deflection, to avoid excessive bending stresses between supports, and to eliminate transmission of vibration. D. All rod sizes indicated in this Specification are minimum sizes only. Contractor shall be responsible for structural integrity of all supports, anchors, guides, etc. All structural hanging materials are to have a safety factor of 5 built in. E. Locate anchor points as indicated on drawings or as required and construct to permit the conduit system to take up its expansion and contraction freely in opposite directions away from the anchored points. F. Locate guide points where required and at expansion joints, joint, to permit free axial movement only. G. Spacing of hangers to be adequate for the weight and rigidity of the conduits involved, and, in any case, no greater than 8'- 0" centers. 3.02 ATTACHMENTS A. Where conduits are supported under poured -in -place concrete construction, fit each hanger rod with a nut at its upper end, set into an Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., listed universal concrete insert placed in the form work before concrete is poured. Where inserts are placed in the bottom faces of concrete joists which are too narrow to provide adequate strength of concrete to hold the insert properly, or where a larger insert would require displacement of the bottom joist steel, suspend the hanger rod from the center of a horizontal angle iron, channel iron, I -beam, etc., spanning across two adjacent joists. Bolt the horizontal support to non - adjustable concrete inserts of the "spot" type, of physical size small enough to avoid the bottom joist steel. B. Where conduits are supported under bar joists, hanger rods may be run through the space between the bottom angles and secured with a washer and two nuts. Where larger lines are supported beneath bar joists, secure hanger rods to angle irons of adequate size; each angle to span across two or more joists as required to distribute the weight properly and to be welded to the joists or otherwise permanently fixed thereto. ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 , 3 4 1 5 6 8 1 9 10 II 12 13 14 1 15 16 1 ' 18 19 20 II 23 24 II 26 28 II 28 29 30 31 ' 32 33 34 1 35 36 3 II 38 39 40 41 II 43 44 1 45 46 4 , 48 49 1 C. Where pipes and loads are supported under steel beams; use approved type 1 beam clamps. 2 3 END OF SECTION 4 5 6 7 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16015 -3 SECTION 16111 1 2 CONDUIT SYSTEMS 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7 8 A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing all labor, 9 material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish, and 10 install all of the following conduit systems: 11 1. Heavy wall rigid galvanized steel conduit 12 2. Nonmetallic rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 13 3. Flexible conduit 14 15 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 16 17 A. Submittals: Section 01340 18 19 B. Electrical General Information: Section 16010 -20 21 C. Wire and Cable: Section 16120 22 23 D. Boxes and Fittings: Section 16130 24 25 E. Grounding: Section 16450 26 27 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 28 29 A. Governing Standards: 30 1. The National Electrical Code as adopted by the authority having 31 jurisdiction. 32 2. Nonmetallic rigid PVC NEMA Standard TC -2 33 3. Rigid galvanized steel conduit ANSI C80.1 -1971 34 35 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 36 37 A. Allied Tube and Conduit 38 39 B. Triangle 40 41 C. Wheatland 42 43 D. ENGINEER Approved Equal 44 45 1 05 SUBMITTALS 46 47 A. The submittal shall comply with the requirements of Section 01340. 48 49 B. The submittal shall include the following: 50 1. Conduit manufacturer's name as used on this project. 51 2. Conduit type and technical specifications. 52 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16111 -2 3. Couplings and fittings. 1 4. Complete technical description of conduit coatings where applicable. 2 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4 5 2.01 HEAVY WALL RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT 6 7 A. Heavy wall rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized 8 or electro- galvanized inside and outside. All couplings and fittings 9 will conform to this requirement. - 10 11 2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT 12 13 A. Nonmetallic rigid polyvinyl chloride shall be type EPC -40 -PVC where 14 installed underground. 15 16 2.03 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT 17 18 A. Flexible conduit shall be flexible steel with liquid tight jacket. 19 Appleton Type ST, or equal. 20 21 PART 3 - EXECUTION 22 23 3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 24 25 A. Storage and Handling at Job Site. The CONTRACTOR shall store and handle 26 all conduit at the job site, while such materials are awaiting 27 installation, in conformance with the following: 28 1. Store conduit and accessories in an area protected from weather, 29 moisture or possible damage. 30 2. Do not store materials directly on the ground. 31 3. If items are stored inside the proposed building, consideration 32 shall be given to weight of the items and the effect of concentrated 33 loads on the building slabs, foundation, and other structural 34 members. CONTRACTOR shall contact ENGINEER or OWNER for permission 35 to store materials with a load exceeding 200 pounds per square foot. 36 37 3.02 HEAVY WALL RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT 38 39 A. Heavy wall rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be used for all conduits 40 installed above ground unless otherwise noted. 41 42 B. No trade size shall be smaller than 3/4 -inch. 43 44 C. A conduit's ends shall be cut square with a saw and reamed. Threads 45 shall be cut to effect full thread joint engagement. No running threads 46 are permitted. • 47 48 D. Pull boxes shall be installed in appropriate intervals for long conduit 49 runs. 50 51 E. Exposed rigid conduit shall be installed parallel to structural members 52 and surfaces and multiple runs in the same direction shall be parallel 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS with symmetrical bends. Each run or group of runs shall be rigidly 1 supported with galvanized hardware and framing materials including nuts 2 and bolts. No wire ties shall be permitted. 3 4 F. Conduits crossing structural expansion joints shall have OZ type DX 5 bonded watertight expansion and deflection fittings. 6 7 G. All conduits shall be installed clear of structural openings. 8 9 H. Every necessary measure shall be taken to prevent the entry of dirt, 10 stones, trash or water in the conduit system. 11 12 I. Future conduits shall be capped with threaded cap if exposed, or 13 terminated in equipment or by galvanized couplings plugged flush with the 14 structural surfaces if concealed. Provide all future conduits with a 15 0.125 inch nylon fish cord pull string. 16 17 J. Where drawings indicate future equipment, the concealed portions of 18 conduits shall be provided unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 19 20 K. Minimum separation of twelve inches shall be maintained between hot pipes 21 and electrical conduits. 22 23 L. All conduits passing through inside masonry walls or floor slabs except 24 curbed or framed openings, shall be provided with galvanized pipe 25 sleeves, 1 pipe size larger than the conduit trade diameter and cut off 26 flush with the wall or slab. Open space between sleeves and conduits 27 shall be packed and sealed. 28 29 M. Conduits 1 -inch or less may be installed between reinforcing steel in 30 concrete walls and slabs and if there is only 1 layer of reinforcing 31 steel in slabs, the conduits shall be placed under the reinforcement, 32 unless otherwise directed by the structural Engineer. Provide 3 inch 33 spacing between adjacent conduits. 34 35 N. Structural members and reinforcing steel shall not be cut, burned or 36 damaged in any way. 37 38 0. Trapped runs and vertical loops in conduits shall be avoided, but where 39 necessary, shall be drained with proper fittings. 40 41 P. For above ground runs of conduits space supports not more than 5 feet 42 apart and install with the runs parallel or perpendicular to walls and 43 structural members. Use right angle turns and symmetrical bends. Do not 44 use diagonal runs except to avoid two 90 degree bends. Do not locate 45 conduit so as to reduce the strength of structural members. 46 47 Q. Support and secure groups of conduits on wall hangers using toggle bolts 48 in hollow masonry, expansion bolts in concrete or solid masonry, machine 49 screws on metal surfaces and wood screws on wood construction. Space 50 conduits from mounting surfaces using conduit clampbacks. Provide 51 plastic sleeves for conduits passing through masonry or concrete. Single 52 conduits shall be supported by one -hole malleable clamps. 53 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS ' 16111 -3 1 16111 -4 R. Where rigid conduits enter sheet metal boxes, secure with lock nuts and 1 bushings. 2 3 S. Enter outside electrical enclosures from the bottom, unless shown 4 otherwise on the Plans. Terminate conduit connections to exterior sheet 5 metal cabinets and enclosures with Myers Scru -Tite, or equal, threaded 6 , hubs. 7 8 3.03 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT 9 10 A. Schedule 40 PVC conduits shall be installed underground. All penetra- 11 tions out of ground shall be rigid steel. Rigid steel shall be PVC- 12 coated.`. 13 , 14 B. No PVC will be used in any location where it is exposed to direct 15 sunlight, extreme heat, or within the building. 16 17 3.04 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT 18 19 ' A. Use flexible conduit to connect to motors, solenoid valves, transformers 20 and any other equipment subject to vibration. 21 22 B. Maximum length not to exceed 18 inches. 23 24 3.05 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION 25 26 A. Bury underground conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade, unless 27 indicated otherwise. If underground conduit must be installed in solid 28 rock, follow NEC Article 300 -5. 29 30 B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for excavating, draining trenching, 31 backfilling and removing excess earth in connection with installation of 32 underground conduit. 33 34 C. Waterproof all underground conduit joints in accordance with the 35 manufacturer's recommendation. 36 37 D. Provide a 3" sand bedding under the conduit and a 3" sand cover over the 38 top of the conduits. Place 21" of compacted selected backfill over the 39 sand layer. The backfill shall be free of any rocks and debris larger 40 than 1/2" measured in any direction. 41 42 E. Backfilling shall be done in such a manner that voids will be minimized. 43 Excess soil shall be piled on top and shall be well tamped. All rock and 44 debris shall be removed from the site. Backfill shall be compacted to 45 98% density. 46 47 F. Install a warning tape the entire length of every conduit run. Locate 48 tape 12 inches below grade. Tape is to be 4 mil polyethylene 3 inches 49 wide, colored red, with the legend "CAUTION BURIED HIGH VOLTAGE LINE ". 50 Stranco #PUWT -309, or approved equal. 51 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 G. Provide a red colored concrete encasement for service conduits and for 1 all conduits installed under roadways and parking lots. Concrete to be 2 3000 psi /28 day strength per ASTM 039 -44. Add a red admixture "Sonabrite 3 Red" by L. Sonneborn Sons, Inc., or equal, to the concrete at a rate of 4 5 pounds per 94 pound sack of cement or 16 pounds per cubic yard of 5 concrete. 6 7 H. Make transition from PVC to rigid steel conduit where conduit leaves the 8 ground. Transitions shall consist of a PVC -to -steel adapter and a 90 9 degree PVC - coated steel bend. Continue coating for 6 inches above grade. 10 11 12 END OF SECTION 13 14 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16111 -5 SECTION 16120 1 2 WIRE AND CABLE 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7 8 A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing labor, 9 material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish, install 10 and place into operation all wire and cable systems. 11 12 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 13 14 A. Submittals: Section 01340 15 16 B. Electrical General Information: Section 16010 17 18 C. Conduits: Section 16111 19 20 D. Grounding: Section 16450 21 22 E. Mechanical: Division 15 23 24 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 25 26 A. UL 27 28 B. IPCA 29 30 C. IEEE 31 32 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 33 34 A. Building Wire - Okonite, Cablec, Rome Cable Corp., or Engineer Approved 35 Equal 36 37 B. Instrument Wire - Alpha, Belden, Dekoron, or Engineer Approved Equal 38 39 1.05 SUBMITTALS 40 41 A. The submittals shall be made in complete conformance with Section 01340, 42 and the following: 43 1. Furnish technical specifications and factory and field test reports. 44 45 1.06 DELIVERY 46 47 A. Deliver wire and cable in unbroken packages bearing UL and manufacturers' 48 labels and showing date of manufacture and maximum allowable voltage. 49 50 51 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16120 -1 16120 -2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2 2.01 600 VOLT INSULATION 3 , 4 A. Unless otherwise noted, power and /or control cable shall be single 5 conductor, soft drawn, annealed copper conductors, with type THWN 6 insulation, 90 °C in dry locations and 75 °C in wet locations; however, all 7 wiring shall be sized based on 75 °C rating. 8 9 B. Cable to connect the aerator motors shall be three - conductor round Type 10 G consisting of three 600 volt insulated copper phase conductors and one 11 insulated copper grounding conductor. Each phase conductor shall have , 12 Class H stranding and 600 volt EPR insulation. The conductors shall be 13 twisted together and enclosed by a two -layer reinforced neoprene jacket 14 extruded over the assembly. 15 16 2.02 INSTRUMENT WIRE 17 18 A. Twisted pair 16 AWG copper conductors (7 strand, Class B); 15 mil 105 19 deg. C PVC primary insulation; color coded; 1.25 mil aluminum Mylar tape 20 shield; 18 gauge, 7 strand tinned copper drain wire; 35 mil FR PVC 21 jacket. 22 23 PART 3 - EXECUTION 24 25 3.01 WIRE AND CABLE RATED 600 VOLTS AND BELOW 26 , 27 A. Color coded wire shall be used on 600 volts and below. Color coding 28 shall conform to current City of Round Rock electrical code requirements. 29 30 B. A wire run in conduit solely for grounding shall have an identifying 31 green covering. 32 33 C. A green 600 volt conductor used for grounding purposes with single 34 conductor cables of higher voltage requirements will be permitted. 35 36 D. Conductor terminations, No. 8 AWG and smaller, shall be made with 37 pressure connected lugs, Buchanan "Termend" or equal. Conductor 38 terminations, larger than No. 8 AWG, shall be made with solderless, 39 compression type copper terminals equivalent to Burndy type YA -L. 40 Compression shall be made with a die set that will make a circumferential 41 crimp. Wire strands shall be thoroughly cleaned before lug is applied. 42 43 E. Bolted connections for electrical conductors, without noncorrosive 44 surfaces, shall be thoroughly cleaned and tinned or covered with a light 45 film of commercial paste to prevent oxidation. 46 47 F. Where mechanical assistance is used for pulling conductors, a wire 48 pulling compound, Polywater J, or equal, having inert qualities that do 49 not harm the wire insulation or covering shall be applied to the 50 conductors before they are pulled into raceways. Interior of all 51 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 16120 -3 1 raceways shall be free from grease, filings or foreign matter before 1 II conductors are pulled. 2 3 G. No wire smaller than No. 12 shall be installed, except as furnished with 4 standard packaged equipment, or specified herein, for low voltage control 5 II systems, or fixture wiring. No. 14 may be used for control wiring where 6 adequately protected by properly sized fuses. 7 8 I H. All wiring, except in special cases, shall be run in conduits or 9 raceways. No wire shall be installed until the conduit system is 10 completed and the construction work has progressed beyond the stage where 11 the wire may be damaged. 12 I 13 I. Where the capacity of a single feeder is so great as to require parallel 14 conductors in more than 1 conduit, each conduit must contain the same 15 1 number and length of conductors in all phases (legs) of the feeder, 16 including any neutral conductors. 17 18 ' J. In circuits of 600 volts and below, control wiring may be pulled in the 19 same conduit with the power wiring if the control wiring is rated for the 20 same voltage as the power wiring and if the conduit size is adequate. 21 Generally, motors 30 HP and larger shall have separate conduit systems 22 1 for the motor leads and control wiring. 23 24 K. Keep splices to a minimum. Splice only in accessible junction boxes. 25 I Make splices to carry full capacity of conductors without perceptible 26 temperature rise. Do not pull splices into conduit. 27 28 L. Identify all wires in accordance with Section 16010. 29 1 30 M. Perform continuity tests on all power and control circuit conductors 31 using an ohmmeter and megohmeter. Verify proper phasing connections. 32 ' 3.02 INSTRUMENTATION WIRING 33 35 I A. Physically separate analog signals from control and power wiring. Use 36 separate conduit for each. 37 38 B. Run 24 and 48 Vdc in separate conduits from 115 VAC wiring. 39 ' 40 C. Neatly arrange wiring with terminations located directly opposite the 41 terminals. Leave wire loops not less than 6 inches long in each outlet 42 I box. Tape frayed terminals and exposed wire. 43 44 D. Ground shields at only one end of each cable run. Shields to be 45 continuous throughout the run. Provide jumpers at terminals blocks to 46 ensure continuity. 47 48 49 t END OF SECTION 50 51 52 1 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16130 -1 SECTION 16130 1 2 BOXES AND FITTINGS 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7 8 A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing all labor, 9 material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish, and 10 install all junction boxes, pull boxes, outlet boxes and ceiling boxes 11 installed outdoor or indoor. 12 13 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 14 15 A. Submittals: Section 01340 16 17 B. Electrical General Information: Section 16010 18 19 C. Conduits: Section 16111 20 21 D. Grounding: Section 16450 22 23 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 24 25 A. UL 26 27 B. NEC 28 29 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 30 31 A. Galvanized Boxes and Gutters 32 1. Circle AW 33 2. Universal 34 3. AMF 35 4. Hoffman 36 5. Engineer Approved Equal 37 38 B. Cast Iron Boxes and Fittings 39 1. 0 -Z /Gedney Company 40 2. • Appleton Electric 41 3. Crouse -Hinds 42 4. Engineer Approved Equal 43 44 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 45 46 2.01 MATERIALS 47 48 A. Pull and junction boxes shall be galvanized after fabrication furnished 49 with a cellular neoprene gasket and sized according to the requirements 50 of the National Electrical Code. 51 52 16130 -2 B. The CONTRACTOR shall size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with 1 the requirements of the National Electrical Code. 2 3 C. Use standard threaded type couplings and connectors, galvanized outside 4 and inside by hot dipping. Do not use set screw type connectors. 5 6 D. For rigid bushings 1.25 inch and larger, use the insulating type. Use 7 double locknuts and bushings on smaller conduits. Use 0.Z. Type BLG 8 grounding bushings at panel boards, motor control centers and control 9 panel entries for conduits 1.25 inch and larger. 10 11 E. Use galvanized malleable iron conduit clamps and supports appropriately 12 sized for each application. Use conduit clampbacks to provide air space 13 between the conduit and the surface to which it is mounted. 14 15 F. Use threaded malleable iron conduit fittings with gasketed cover for 16 rigid steel. Crouse Hinds Obround Series, or equal. 17 18 G. Device or utility boxes shall be of unit construction of a size required 19 for the number of switches or outlets required. No sectional device 20 boxes will be permitted. 21 22 H. All boxes in exposed conduit runs shall be Crouse Hinds Type FS or FD, 23 as applicable, or approved equal. 24 25 I. Use PVC - coated fittings on PVC - coated conduit. 26 27 PART 3 - EXECUTION 28 29 3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 30 31 A. Delivery. Prepare boxes, fittings, and accessories for shipment. 32 33 B. Storage and Handling at Job Site. The CONTRACTOR shall store and handle 34 all boxes and fittings at the job site, while such materials are awaiting 35 installation, in conformance with the following: 36 1. Store boxes, fittings, and accessories in an area protected from 37 weather, moisture or possible damage. 38 2. Do not store material directly on the ground. 39 3. If items are stored inside the proposed building, consideration 40 shall be given to weight of the items and the effect of concentrated 41 loads on the building slabs, foundation and other structural 42 members. CONTRACTOR shall contact ENGINEER or OWNER for permission 43 to store materials with a load exceeding 200 pounds per square foot. 44 45 3.02 INSTALLATION 46 47 A. All outlet boxes shall be mounted with suitable fasteners and they shall 48 contain the proper knockouts. On sheet metal boxes, all unused knockouts 49 shall remain closed. Outlet or utility boxes concealed in construction 50 shall be firmly secured in place, set true, square and flush with the 51 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS finished surface for the correct application of cover plates or other 1 devices. 2 3 B. Exposed outlet boxes shall not have knockouts. 4 5 6 END OF SECTION 7 8 9 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16130 -3 SECTION 16140 1 2 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7 8 A. This Section of the Specifications covers wiring devices, i.e., switches, 9 convenience outlets and special outlets; as well as device plates and 10 special outlet boxes. 11 12 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 13 14 A. Submittals: Section 01340 15 16 B. Boxes and Fittings: Section 16130 17 18 C. Grounding: Section 16450 19 20 1.03 REFERENCE'STANDARDS 21 22 A. NEMA 23 24 B. UL 25 26 C. NEC 27 28 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 29 30 A. Switches 31 1. Arrow Hart - 32 2. Hubbell 33 3. Bryant 34 4. General Electric 35 5. Pass and Seymour 36 6. Crouse -Hinds 37 7. Engineer Approved Equal 38 39 B. Receptacles 40 1. Arrow Hart 41 2. Hubbell 42 3. Bryant 43 4. General Electric 44 5. Pass and Seymour 45 6. Crouse -Hinds 46 7. Engineer Approved Equal 47 48 49 50 51 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16140 -1 16140 -2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2 2.01 DEVICES 3 4 A. Wall Switches shall be specification grade rated 20 amp, 125 volts of 5 appropriate color (ivory unless otherwise noted). 6 7 B. Convenience outlets shall be specification grade duplex, 3 wire, 8 grounding, 20 amp, 125 volts. Furnish G.F.I. type for installation 9 outdoors. 10 11 C. Use twist -lock receptacles for connection of cord connected equipment. 12 Rating to be as required by equipment. Furnish matching plug. 13 14 D. For manual starting of single phase motors below 1/2 HP, provide manual 15 start switches. Manual start switches to be Allen Bradley Bulletin 600 16 Series, Square D Class 2510 or 2512, or approved equal by General 17 Electric or Westinghouse. 18 19 2.02 DEVICE PLATE AND COVERS 20 21 A. Nylon or polycarbonate plates shall be used on surface and flush mounted 22 outlet boxes. 23 24 B. Plate mounting screws shall be the same finish as the plates and be 25 constructed of stainless steel or brass. 26 27 C. Weatherproof Stainless Steel device plates shall be lockable in the "on" 28 or "off" position. 29 30 D. Weatherproof outlet covers shall be spring door with hasp suitable for 31 pad locking in the closed door position. 32 33 PART 3 - EXECUTION 34 35 3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 36 37 A. Delivery. Prepare wiring devices and accessories for shipment in 38 weatherproof and crush resistant packaging. 39 40 B. Storage and Handling at Job Site. The CONTRACTOR shall store and handle 41 all wiring devices at the job site, while such materials are awaiting 42 installation, in conformity with the following: 43 1. Store wiring devices and accessories in an area protected from 44 weather, moisture or possible damage. 45 2. Do not store materials directly on the ground. 46 3. Handle items to prevent damage to interior or exterior surfaces. 47 48 3.02 INSTALLATION 49 50 A. Wall switches shall be mounted 4' -6" above floor or grade unless noted 51 otherwise. 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS B. Convenience outlets indoors will be mounted 30- inches above the floor 1 unless otherwise indicated. 2 3 C. Install twist -lock plugs on cord connected equipment. 4 5 6 END OF SECTION 7 8 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16140 -3 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16150 -1 SECTION 16150 1 2 COMBINATION STARTERS 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7 8 A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing all labor, 9 material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish install 10 and place into operation all combination starters whether installed in 11 separate enclosures or furnished as a part of other equipment. 12 13 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 14 15 A. Submittals: Section 01340 16 17 B. Grounding: Section 16450 18 19 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 20 21 A. NEMA 22 23 B. ANSI 24 25 C. NEC 26 27 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 28 29 A. Square D Company 30 31 B. Allen Bradley 32 33 C. General Electric 34 35 D. Westinghouse Electric Corporation 36 37 E. Engineer Approved Equal 38 39 1.05 SUBMITTALS 40 41 A. All submittals shall be made in complete conformance with Section 01340. 42 43 B. The submittal shall include the following: 44 1. Manufacturer's name and model no. 45 2. Schematic diagram showing all connections, extra interlock and lock- 46 out relays for the specific combination starter furnished. 47 3. Enclosure type. 48 4. Nameplate designations. 49 5. Combination starter technical data including size and rating. 50 51 52 16150 -2 1 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2 2.01 ENCLOSURES 3 1 4 A. NEMA Type 3R, rain - tight, where installed outdoors, or where subject to 5 weather. 6 ' 7 B. NEMA Type 1 where installed indoors. 8 9 1 C. Open type where installed as part of other equipment. 10 11 D. Enclosures shall be factory prime coated and painted with manufacturer's 12 standard ANSI gray color. 13 1 14 2.02 COMBINATION STARTER 15 16 1 A. All combination starters shall contain the following: 17 1. Magnetic only motor circuit protector sized for the motor furnished. 18 2. External, lockable operating handle clearly marked "ON" and "OFF ". 19 1 3. "HAND -OFF- AUTOMATIC" MA) switch, "ON -OFF" switch or "START -STOP" 20 pushbutton. Provide only where indicated. 21 4. Red, 120 volt, transformer type oil -tight pilot light marked "RUN ". 22 Provide only where indicated. 23 5. Green, 120 volt, transformer type, oil -tight pilot light marked 24 "OFF ". Provide only where indicated. 25 6. Electrically held full voltage non - reversing motor starter sized for 26 1 across - the -line starting of the motor it serves. 27 7. Contactor block with three (3) thermal units which are of one -piece 28 construction, interchangeable and resettable. 29 8. Nameplate indicating load served and voltage. 30 ' 9. 480/120 volt control power transformer sized for all associated 31 controls and motor space heater where provided. Provide only where 32 indicated. - 33 1 10. Fuse block and switch for motor space heaters where indicated. 34 11. Time delay relay with contacts which time closed on energization. 35 Adjustable from 0 to 300 secs. to provide for staggered restart on 36 ' restoration of power after an outage. Provide only where indicated. 37 12. Provide one additional N.O. and one additional N.C. contact over the 38 number of each required by the schematic. 39 40 ' B. NEMA type enclosure, size, and rating shall be as shown on the drawings. 41 42 C. All starters shall be full NEMA size starters. Size 1 minimum. IEC type 43 1 not acceptable. 44 45 2.03 SPARE PARTS 46 1 47 A. One (1) fuse for every fuse type used. 48 49 B. One (1) set of three (3) overload relay heater elements for each starter. 50 1 51 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 2 3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 3 4 A. Delivery. Prepare combination starters and accessories for shipment in 5 crush resistant enclosures. 6 7 B. Storage and Handling at Job Site. The CONTRACTOR shall store and handle 8 all combination starters at the job site, while such materials are 9 awaiting installation, in conformance with the following: 10 1. Store combination starters and accessories in an area protected from 11 weather, moisture or possible damage. 12 2. Do not store materials directly on the ground. 13 3. Handle items to prevent damage to interior or exterior surfaces. 14 15 3.02 INSTALLATION 16 17 A. Install overload heaters correlated with the actual nameplate full -load 18 current of motors installed. Select heaters which also provide 19 protection at locked rotor conditions. 20 21 B. Adjust magnetic trip setting of motor circuit protector or circuit 22 breaker in accordance with the NEC and exact motor furnished. 23 24 C. Mount all starters with fasteners specifically approved for the surface. 25 26 D. All starters shall have adequate operating space in front as dictated by 27 the NEC. 28 29 30 END OF SECTION 31 32 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16150 -3 SECTION 16170 1 2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7 8 A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing all labor, 9 material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish, 10 install, and place into operation all circuit breakers whether in their 11 own enclosures or in motor control centers. 12 13 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 14 15 A. Submittals: Section 01340 16 17 B. Electrical General Information: Section 16010 18 19 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 20 21 A. NEMA AB1 -1986 22 23 B. ANSI 24 25 C. NEC 26 27 D. OSHA 28 29 E. UL 489 30 31 F. Fed Spec. W -C -375 B 32 33 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 34 35 A. Cutler Hammer to match existing. 36 37 1.05 SUBMITTALS 38 39 A. Make submittals in conformance with Section 01340. 40 41 42 B. Include the following as a minimum: 43 1. Manufacturer's name and model number. 44 2. Voltage and current rating. 45 3. Enclosure type. 46 4. Nameplate designations. 47 5. Circuit breaker technical data including characteristic trip curve on 48 5 cycle log -log paper. 49 50 51 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16170 -1 16170 -2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2 2.01 MATERIALS 3 4 A. Type: Quick -make, quick -break molded case, thermal magnetic type. 5 6 B. Common trip: Two and three pole breakers to be common trip with no tie 7 handles. 8 9 C. Rating: Calibrated at 40 degrees C. to carry the current shown 10 continuously with no need for derating. 25,000 A.I.C. at 480 volts short 11 circuit interrupting rating. 12 13 14 PART 3 - EXECUTION 15 16 3.01 INSTALLATION 17 18 A. Install circuit breakers in the existing motor control center. 19 20 3.02 TESTING 21 22 A. Test for proper operation. 23 24 25 END OF SECTION 26 27 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16180 -1 SECTION 16180 1 2 SAFETY SWITCHES 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7 8 A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing all labor, 9 material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish and 10 install safety switches. 11 12 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 13 14 A. Submittals: Section 01340 15 16 B. Electrical General Information: Section 16010 17 18 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 19 20 A. NEMA KSI -1990 21 22 B. ANSI 23 24 C. NEC 25 26 D. OSHA 27 28 E. UL 29 30 F. Fed. Spec. WS -865c 31 32 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 33 34 A. Square D Company 35 36 B. General Electric Company 37 38 C. Westinghouse Electric Corporation 39 40 D. Engineer Approved Equal 41 42 1.05 SUBMITTALS 43 44 A. Make submittals in conformance with Section 01340. 45 46 B. Include the following: 47 1. Manufacturer's catalog number. 48 2. Voltage and current rating. 49 3. Enclosure type. 50 4. Nameplate designation. 51 5. Technical data including fuse curve plotted on 5 cycle log -log paper. 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16180 -2 1 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2 2.01 MATERIAL 3 , 4 A. Type: Heavy duty Type HD fused or non -fused as shown on the Plans. U.L. 5 labeled. 6 II 7 B. Construction: Quick -make, quick -break non- teasible operating handles 8 with provisions for padlocking in the "off" position. Handle interlocked 9 II with door to prevent unauthorized opening with the switch in the "on" 10 position. Provide with equipment ground lug. Furnish with line terminal 11 shields. 12 13 II C. Enclosure: NEMA 1 indoors. NEMA 3R surface mounted outdoors. 14 15 D. Ratings: Horsepower rated for 250 volts A.C. or 600 volts A.C. as 16 ' required for their service. 17 18 E. Fuses: Dual element type sized per N.E.C., Bussman, Chase Shawmut, or 19 ' equal. 20 21 F. Nameplate: Furnish each switch with a nameplate as specified in Section 22 16010. 23 ' 24 PART 3 - EXECUTION 25 26 II 3.01 INSTALLATION 27 28 A. Install at locations shown on the Plans. 29 30 ' B. Mounting height to be 4'- 6" above finished floor unless otherwise noted. 31 32 C. Provide channel iron or Unistrut supports for mounting. 33 ' 34 35 END OF SECTION 36 ' 37 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16402 1 2 ELECTRICAL SERVICE 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7 8 A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing all labor, 9 material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish and 10 install 480V service to the treatment plant and lift station. 11 12 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 13 14 A. Submittals: Section 01340 15 16 B. Electrical General Information: Section 16010 17 18 C. Grounding: Section 16450 19 20 D. Conduit Systems: Section 16111 21 22 E. Wire and Cable: Section 16120 23 24 F. Concrete: Division 3 25 26 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 27 28 A. NEC 29 30 B. OSHA 31 32 C. ANSI 33 34 D. IEEE 35 36 E. NEMA 37 38 1.04 COORDINATION 39 40 A. Costs for work required of the CONTRACTOR due to an electrical service 41 charge by the electric utility company shall be included in the 42 CONTRACTOR'S Bid Proposal for the Project. The CONTRACTOR is urged to 43 coordinate with the electric utility regarding electrical service prior 44 to submitting his bid. 45 46 B. Deviations from these drawings and specifications shall be noted on the 47 shop drawing submittal. 48 49 C. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule work with the electric utility company to 50 execute final connections and testing of equipment for a complete and 51 functional electric service. 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16402 -1 16402 -2 D. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate his work with the electric utility 1 company to arrange for and pay for all required permits, inspections, and 2 other required services. 3 4 1.05 SUBMITTALS 5 6 A. The submittals shall be in accordance with the complete requirements of 7 Section 01340. 8 9 B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER a schedule covering the time 10 required to establish the proposed service shown on the drawings. The 11 submittal shall include drawings and description of service routing 12 changes if different from that shown on the drawings. Approval of 13 routing shall be required by the ENGINEER prior to construction. 14 15 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 16 17 2.01 GENERAL 18 19 A. Service the site is 480 volt, 3 phase furnished by the TU Electric from 20 an existing transformer service pole. 21 22 B. There is an existing service drop from the transformer pole to the motor 23 control center. The Contractor shall furnish and install a new service 24 drop to replace the existing and then remove the existing. This new 25 service shall be routed through the metering current transformers which 26 are mounted on the pole. 27 28 PART 3 - EXECUTION 29 30 3.01 INSTALLATION . . 31 32 A. Coordinate the installation of the new electrical service with the TU 33 Electric. 34 35 B. This work will require a power outage. The duration of this outage shall 36 be kept to an absolute minimum. Schedule this outage with the Owner so 37 that it can be done when it will have least effect on the operation of 38 the plant. The outage shall be scheduled a minimum of one week in advance 39 of the time required. Request for the outage shall be in writing 40 addressed to the Owner. - 41 42 END OF SECTION 43 44 45 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16450 1 2 GROUNDING 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7 8 A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing all labor, 9 material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish and 10 install a radial electrical grounding system in conduits and connect to 11 the exilsting grounding system. 12 13 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 14 15 A. Submittals: Section 01340 16 17 B. Electrical General Information: Section 16010 18 19 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 20 21 A. NEC 22 23 B. IEEE Standard 142 -1972 (Recommended Grounding) 24 25 C. UL 26 27 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 28 29 2.01 MATERIAL 30 31 A. All wire and fittings shall be 98 percent conductivity copper. 32 33 PART 3 EXECUTION 34 35 3.01 SYSTEM GROUNDING 36 37 A. The secondary of all alternating current distribution systems which are 38 to be grounded shall have the common conductor connected directly to the 39 grounding conductor at the point of supply. 40 41 3.02 SAFETY GROUNDING OF EQUIPMENT 42 43 A. Safety grounding of equipment will be accomplished by providing an 44 equipment ground wire, as shown on the drawings which will be no less 45 than the size recommended in Article 250 of the National Electric Code. 46 This ground will extend throughout the system by means of insulated green 47 ground wires connected to ground buses in each switchgear, motor control 48 center, panelboard and terminal on each outlet box, light fixture housing 49 or grounding terminal of the motor. Install bonding jumpers from ground 50 lugs on conduit grounding bushings to ground buses. 51 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16450 -1 16450 -2 1 B. Connect ground wires entering outlet boxes in a manner which will allow 2 removal of the receptacle without interrupting the continuity of the 3 grounding circuit. A grounding screw attached to the box, and used for 4 no other purpose, will accomplish this. 5 6 C. Where the equipment has no facility to attach an equipment ground wire, 7 use a Burndy Quicklug or equal. Clean the metal surface under the lug 8 to bright metal so that good contact can be made. 9 10 D. Connect equipment grounds to motors using a grounding stud threaded into 11 the stationary frame of the motor and not the end bell. 12 13 E. Make ground connections to equipment by using ground lugs or ground bars 14 where they are provided. Do not make connections to equipment anchor 15 bolts. 16 17 F. General items to be grounded shall consist of enclosures and /or frames 18 for motor starters, circuit breakers, transformers, safety switches, 19 switchgear, panelboards, motors, capacitors and exposed metal parts of 20 similar equipment. These items shall have solidly grounded cable 21 connections to the grounding system. 22 23 G. Ground cable termination to enclosure and frames shall be similar to 24 Thomas and Betts 71000 Series. 25 26 H. Ground wires installed above grade to be insulated and in conduit for 27 protection. 28 29 I. Resistance to ground shall not exceed 25 Ohms. 30 31 32 END OF SECTION 33 34 35 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 16461 1 2 3 SELF CONTAINED UNIT POWER CENTERS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing all labor, 10 material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish, install 11 and place into operation self contained unit power centers. 12 13 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 14 15 A. Submittals: Section 01340 16 17 B. Grounding: Section 16450 18 19 C. Conduit Systems: 16111 20 21 D. Wire and-Cable: 16120 22 23 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 24 25 A. NEC 26 27 B. OSHA 28 29 C. ANSI 30 31 D. IEEE 32 33 E. NEMA 34 35 F. UL 36 37 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 38 39 A. Square D Company (Sorgel) 40 41 B. General Electric Co. 42 43 C. Westinghouse Electric Corporation 44 45 D. Engineer Approved Equal 46 47 1.04 SUBMITTALS 48 49 A. The submittal shall be in accordance with the requirements of Sect- 50 ion 01340. 51 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16460 -1 1 16460 -2 B. The submittal shall include but is not limited to the following: 1 1 1. Manufacturer's name and model number 2 2. Primary voltage rating 3 1 3. Secondary voltage rating 4 4. Number of phases 5 5. Frequency in Hertz 6 ' 6. KVA rating 7 7. Percent Impedance 8 8. Temperature rise in degrees Celsius 9 9. Number and percent of taps 10 1 10. Connection diagram 11 11. NEMA type enclosure 12 12. Sound rating in decibels 13 ' 13. Weight 14 14. Enclosure dimensions 15 15. Mounting requirements 16 , 16. Basic Impulse Level (BIL) rating if required 17 17. Rating and type of primary circuit breaker. 18 18. Rating and types of load center circuit breakers. 19 20 ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 22 2.01 GENERAL: 23 , 24 A. The power center shall consist of a primary circuit breaker, a dry 25 type transformer and a secondary panelboard all assembled in one 26 ' enclosure. All interconnecting wiring between the primary breaker 27 and the transformer and between the transformer and the secondary 28 panelboard shall be factory wired so that the only connections 29 necessary in the field will be to the line side of the main circuit 30 II and to the load side of the branch circuit breakers in the 31 secondary panelboard. 32 33 II B. The power center shall have the following ratings: 34 35 1. Primary Voltage - 480 volts, single phase. 36 ' 2. Secondary Voltage - 120/240 volts, single phase, three wire. 37 3. Transformer - 5 kVA. 38 4. Primary Breaker - 40 amps continuous with an interrupting 39 rating of 14,000 amps at 480 volts. 40 II 5. Main Secondary Breaker - 50 amps continuous with an 41 interrupting rating of 10,000 amps at 240 volts. 42 6. Branch Circuit Breakers - Continuous current rating as shown on 43 II the drawings with an interrupting rating equal to the main 44 secondary breaker. 45 46 C. Units shall be designed for continuous 24 hours a day operation, 365 47 1 days per year with normal life expectancy per ANSI C57.96. 48 49 2.02 TRANSFORMER 50 1 51 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. Transformer shall be manufacturers' standard self ventilated dry -type 1 suitable for outdoor installation. 2 3 B. Insulation shall be 185 C, flame retardant and will not support 4 combustion as defilned in ASTM Standard Test Method D635. 5 6 C. Core shall be high grade silicon steel with high magnetic permeability 7 and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Coils shall be continuouslly 8 wound electrical grade aluminum. Core and coil assembly shall be resin 9 encapsulated to provide an moistureproof shock resistant seal and to 10 minimize the sound level. 11 12 2.03 CIRCUIT BREAKERS 13 14 A. Main breaker shall be molded case thermal magnetic sized to provide short 15 circuit and overload protection for the transformer. 16 17 B. Secondary main circuit breaker shall be of the same type as the primary 18 circuit breaker and shall be sized to provide protection for the 19 panelboard. 20 21 C. The panelboard shall contain the number of circuit breakers indicated on 22 the panel schedule. Breakers shall be one -inch plug -in molded case, 23 thermal magnetic with the continuous current rating as indicated on the 24 schedule. 25 26 2.04 ENCLOSURE 27 28 A. Totally enclosed, non - ventilated made of heavy gauge steel painted ANSI 29 61 gray. 30 31 B. Equipped with a wiring compartment large enough to allow convenient 32 wiring. 33 34 C. Maximum temperature not to exceed 90 C. 35 36 D. Core grounded to the enclosure. 37 38 2.05 SOUND LEVELS 39 40 A. Sound levels shall not exceed the following ANSI and NEMA levels for the 41 self cooled ratings: 42 43 1. Up to 9 kVA - 40 dB 44 2. Above 9 kVA - 45 dB 45 46 PART 3 - EXECUTION 47 48 3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 49 50 A. Delivery. Prepare transformers and accessories for shipment to job site. 51 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16460 -3 16460 -4 B. Storage and Handling at Job Site. The CONTRACTOR shall store and handle 1 ' all transformers at the job site, while such materials are awaiting 2 ' installation, in conformance with the following: 3 1. Store transformers and accessories in an area protected from 4 weather, moisture or possible damage. 5 2. Do not store materials directly on the ground. 6 , 3. Handle items to prevent damage to interior or exterior surfaces. 7 8 3.02 LUGS 9 ' 10 A. Furnish one lug per cable. 11 12 B. Lugs shall be copper and suitable for the termination of 75 ° C rated 13 II conductors. 14 15 C. Furnish grounding lug as required. 16 ' 17 3.03 VOLTAGE TEST 18 19 II A. Measure the secondary voltage of each transformer.' Set taps on 20 transformer to obtain a voltage reading within 5 percent of rated voltage 21 output. 22 23 II INSTALLATION 24 25 A. Install power centers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 26 II 28 29 30 ' END OF SECTION 31 32 33 ' ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16530 1 2 SITE LIGHTING 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7 8 A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing all labor, 9 material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish, install 10 and place into operation exterior lighting fixtures, supports and 11 accessories. 12 13 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 14 15 A. Submittals: Section 01340 16 17 B. Electrical General Information: Section 16010 18 19 C. Conduit Systems: Section 16111 20 21 D. Wire and Cable: Section 16120 22 23 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 24 25 A. NEC _ 26 27 B. OSHA 28 29 C. ANSI 30 31 D. IEEE 32 33 E. NEMA 34 35 F. UL 36 37 1.04 SUBMITTALS 38 39 A. The submittal shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 01340. 41 42 B. Furnish submittal for luminaires indicating physical characteristics, 43 finish, pole, base, mounting, hardware including diagram of mounting and 44 photometric data. 45 46 C. The ballast and lamp shall be included with the fixture submittal where 47 applicable. 48 49 D. Submit all lighting fixtures in one brochure with sections labeled for 50 each fixture according to the letter designation shown on the Lighting 51 Fixture Schedule and include all pertinent information with the fixture. 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16530 -1 16530 -2 1 1 1.05 COORDINATION 1 2 II A. Locations of lighting fixtures shown on the drawings are approximate 3 only. the final location shall be dependent on physical conditions 4 encountered during construction. where lighting fixtures conflict with 5 work by other trades, and must be relocated, the CONTRACTOR shall have 6 , written approval from the ENGINEER prior to relocating the fixture(s). 7 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 9 ' 10 2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 11 12 , A. The lighting fixture type and manufacturer are specified in the Lighting 13 Fixture Schedule on the drawings. 14 15 B. Lighting fixtures with the same function and performance shall be 16 ' acceptable as substitutions in accordance with Section 16010. 17 18 C. Furnish all fixtures with a low temperature ballast. 19 ' 20 2.02 FINISH 21 22 A. Prime coat all metal surfaces prior to application of two coats of paint 23 ' finish. 24 25 2.03 WOOD POLES 26 ' 27 A. Poles shall be wooden, Class 2, 20 feet long, pressure treated with 28 creosote at 10 lbs. /ft. They shall be free from sap rot, cracks, bird 29 II holes, plugged holes, splits, shakes, hollow, decay, etc. 30 31 B. Poles shall conform to American National Standard 05.1. Pressure 32 treating shall be in accordance with AWPA Standard C4. Creosote shall 33 II to AWPA Standard P1. 34 35 C. Pole markings shall be located approximately 10 feet from the butt of the 36 , pole. Poles shall be turned smooth full length, and shall be roofed, 37 gained and bored prior to pressure treatment. 38 39 II D. Poles held in storage for more than two weeks after receipt on the job 40 site shall be stored in accordance with American National Standard 05.1. 41 The handling of poles shall be in accordance with Standard 05.1 except 42 that pointed tools capable of producing indentations of more than one 43 II in depth shall not be used. 44 45 PART 3 - EXECUTION 46 II 3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 48 49 1 A. Delivery. Prepare lighting fixtures and accessories for shipment to the 50 job site. 51 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 B. Storage and Handling at Job Site. The CONTRACTOR shall store and handle 1 all lighting fixtures at the job site, while such materials are awaiting 2 installation, in conformance with the following: 3 1. Store lighting fixtures accessories in an area protected from 4 weather, moisture or possible damage. 5 2. Do not store materials directly on the ground. 6 3. Handle items to prevent damage to interior or exterior surfaces. 7 4. If items are stored inside the proposed building, consideration shall 8 be given to weight of the items and the effect of concentrated loads 9 on the building slabs, foundation and other structural members. 10 CONTRACTOR shall contact ENGINEER or OWNER for permission to store 11 materials with a load exceeding 200 pounds per square foot. 12 13 3.02 INSTALLATION 14 15 A. Provide luminaires complete with gaskets forming weatherproof assembly. 16 17 B. Wood poles shall be set straight and firm. In normal firm ground, 18 minimum pole- setting depths shall be as listed below. 19 20 MINIMUM POLE- SETTING DEPTH 21 (Feet and Inches) 22 23 Length Overall (Feet) Setting Depth 24 25 20 5 -0 26 25 5 -6 27 30 5 -6 28 35 6 -0 29 40 6 -0 30 45 6 -6 31 50 7 -0 32 55 7 -6 33 60 8 -0 34 35 C. Where poles are set on hilly terrain, along edges of cuts or 36 embankments, or where soil may be washed out, special precautions shall 37 be taken to ensure durable pole foundations, and the setting depth 38 shall be measured from the lower side of the pole. 39 40 D. Holes shall be dug large enough to permit proper use of tamper to the 41 full depth of a hole. Earth shall be placed into a hole in 6 inch 42 maximum layers, then thoroughly tamped before the next layer is placed. 43 44 E. Surplus earth shall be placed around a pole in a conical shape and 45 packed tightly to drain water away from poles. 46 47 48 END OF SECTION 49 50 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16530 -3 SECTION 16900 1 2 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 3 4 PART 1: GENERAL 5 6 1.01 SCOPE 7 8 A. Furnish an instrumentation and controls system which will perform 9 the functions specified herein. The system is to be composed of 10 the components described in this Section and shown on the Plans. 11 12 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 13 14 A. Electrical General Information: Section 16010. 15 16 B. Submittals: Section 01340. 17 18 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 19 20 A. ANSI (American National Standards Institute) 21 22 B. AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) 23 24 C. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) 25 26 D. AWWA (American Waterworks Association) 27 28 E. JIC (Joint Industrial Council) 29 30 F. NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) 31 32 G. NEC (National Electrical Code) 33 34 H. ISA (Instrument Society of America) 35 36 I. SAMA (Scientific Apparatus Manufacturers Association) 37 38 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 39 40 A. Acceptable manufacturers for the various instrument and control 41 components are specified herein. 42 43 1.05 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 44 45 A. All components to be used in the instrument and control systems are 46 to be new (not used) and the current model produced by the 47 manufacturer. 48 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16900 -1 16900 -2 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 B. All equipment of a common type is to be the product of a single 1 ' manufacturer. 2 3 1.06 SYSTEM COORDINATION 4 ' 5 A. Design instrument system and subsystems in accordance with Plans 6 and Technical Specifications and all applicable codes and stan- 7 II dards. 8 9 B. Coordinate installation of instrumentation with mechanical and 10 II electrical systems. 11 12 C. Plans and Technical Specifications do not necessarily show or 13 specify all components, wiring, piping and accessories required for 14 ' a complete and workable system. CONTRACTOR responsible for all 15 materials, supplies, labor and supervision to ensure a completely 16 integrated and coordinated instrumentation system. 17 II D. Coordinate subsystems to provide a complete operational and 19 functional instrumentation system. 20 21 ' 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 22 23 A. Temperature: 0 to 120 F. 24 II B. Relative Humidity: 98 percent maximum. 26 27 ' C. Process Fluid Temperature: 32 to 150 F. 28 29 1.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 30 31 II A. Factory test each instrument over its full operating range. 32 33 1.09 WARRANTY 34 ' 35 A. Guarantee the additions to operate in the manner prescribed herein 36 for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. 37 ' 38 39 PART 2: PRODUCTS 40 41 ' 2.01 GENERAL 42 43 A. Each system shall operate in the manner described herein. 44 ' 45 46 1 1 1 2.02 CHLORINATOR CONTROL LOOP 1 2 A. Connect the chlorinators to the output of the flowmeters of Plants 3 2 and 3 so that the chlorinators will be paced in proportion to the 4 flow. 5 6 B. The flowmeters are existing Type WOM -4 manufactured by Montedoro 7 Whitney. Each is equipped with 4 -20 mAdc output capability. 8 9 C. Provide a selector switch for each chlorinator. Route the signal 10 from each flowmeter through the switch so that the operator can 11 choose which of the plant flows will pace the respective chlorina- 12 tor. Switches shall be two position, maintained contact type with 13 low resistance contacts suitable for switching 4 -20 mA, 24 Vdc 14 signals. Switches shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4X enclosure and 15 shall be located adjacent to the chlorinators. Each switch shall 16 have a nameplate engraved "PLANT NO. 1" in one position and "PLANT 17 NO. 2" in the other position. 18 19 D. Furnish a power supply for each loop. The power supply shall have 20 a 24 Vdc output. Input shall be 120 Vac. Both input and output 21 circuits shall be fused. The power supply shall have sufficient 22 power to drive the 4 -20 mA loop with all three chlorinators on that 23 loop in addition to the flowmeter. Power supplies shall be housed 24 in a NEMA 4X enclosure and shall be located adjacent to the 25 existing flowmeters. 26 27 2.03 SULFONATOR CONTROL LOOP 28 29 A. Connect the sulfonators to the 4 -20 mAdc output of the effluent 30 flowmeter located at the Parshall flume. 31 32 B. The flowmeter is specified in Section 13442, PRIMARY ELEMENTS. 33 34 PART 3: EXECUTION 35 36 3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 37 38 A. Delivery: Deliver materials and equipment to jobsite with 39 sufficient protection to ensure arrival in an undamaged condition. 40 41 B. Storage: All materials and equipment to be stored above the floor 42 of a trailer or other weather - protected structure. 43 44 C. Handling: Handle so as not to sustain damage of any kind to 45 equipment during unloading, storage or installation. 46 47 48 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16900 -3 16900 -4 3.02 INSTALLATION 1 2 A. General: Install all equipment in accordance with the Plans and 3 instructions furnished by the manufacturer. Inspect each new 4 instrument, control component, etc., before installation. Replace 5 deficient items. 6 7 3.03 FIELD CALIBRATION AND TESTING 8 9 A. Instrument Calibration: Calibrate instruments and prepare calibra- 10 tion reports. All calibration to be performed by a factory- trained 11 technical representative. 12 13 B. System Testing: Test each system. Perform the following tests 14 using simulated inputs: 15 16 1. Check the overall system and each subsystem to see that they 17 function as specified based on simulated inputs at each sensor 18 and at each set of field contact monitored. This check to 19 include the testing of all automatic functions, sounding of 20 alarms, etc. 21 22 C. If defects are found under simulated conditions, make corrections 23 and retest. 24 25 D. After start -up, test the complete system under actual conditions to 26 determine that all specified functions can be performed. 27 28 E. After completion of testing, submit a System Test Report to include 29 the following: 30 31 1. Certification that the system is operating correctly and within 32 tolerances. 33 34 3.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 35 36 A. No separate payment for work performed under this Item. Include 37 cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a 38 component part. 39 40 41 END OF SECTION 42 43 44 45 46 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 16950 1 2 CALIBRATION AND TESTING 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7 8 A. Provide all equipment and labor required for calibration, setting and 9 testing as described herein or otherwise required. All tests are to be 10 witnessed by the OWNER and ENGINEER. Give written notification of the 11 tests at least seven days prior. Repair or replace all defective 12 material, equipment or workmanship disclosed as a result of these tests 13 at no additional cost to the OWNER. 14 15 1.02 RECORDS 16 17 A. Provide the OWNER with a tabulation of all tests including the piece of 18 equipment tested, the date tested, weather conditions, and test values 19 results. 20 21 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 22 23 2.01 MATERIALS 24 25 A. Use meters, meggers and other test devices specifically approved for the 26 test. 27 28 B. Test devices to be provided with calibration certificate. 29 30 PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 32 3.01 MEGGER TESTS 33 34 A. Use a minimum 500 volt megohmmeter. 35 36 B. Take each reading for at least one minute. 37 38 C. Include the following tests: 39 1. 115 and 230 volt motors 5.0 Megohms 40 2. 460 volt motors 7.0 " 41 3. 600 volt transformer windings 100.0 " 42 4. 600 volt wiring up to 1000 ft 25.0 43 44 D. Test all transformer windings as follows: 45 1. Primary to ground 46 2. Secondary to ground 47 3. Primary to secondary 48 49 3.02 GROUND TESTING 50 51 A. Take ground resistance measurements in normally dry weather, not less 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 16950 -1 16950 -2 than 48 hours after rainfall, with the ground under test isolated from 1 ' other grounds. 2 3 ' B. Measure the resistance of each ground rod. Submit in writing to the 4 OWNER a record indicating the rod location, the resistance measured and 5 the soil condition at the time. 6 ' 7 C. Take ground resistance measurements on the building water service where 8 it is used as a ground also. - 9 t 10 D. Install additional grounding if the resistance to ground measures more 11 than 25 OHM's at any location. 12 13 II MOTOR TESTING 14 15 A. Megger test motors. 16 17 II B. Dry out any wet insulation by use of space heaters or other approved 18 methods. 19 II C. Check coupling alignment, shaft end play, lubrication and other 21 mechanical checks as required. Follow manufacturer's instructions. 22 23 , D. Check for proper rotation. 24 25 3.04 RECEPTACLES 26 27 A. Test all receptacles for proper connections and grounding. Use an 28 approved plug in tester. 29 30 ' 3.05 CONTROL CIRCUITS 31 32 A. Check all circuits for continuity, proper connection and proper 33 t operations. 34 35 B. Set all time delay relays and timers for the desired operation. Record 36 the settings, indicating the relay or timer, its location and the 37 setting used. Verify all settings with a stopwatch. 38 39 3.06 LIGHTING 40 , 41 A. Turn on all lights after lamping them with new lamps. 42 43 t B. Turn on all lights at each panelboard with lights on and submit 44 typewritten results to the OWNER. Results to include panelboard number 45 and location, branch circuit number and load served, and amperage 46 II reading. 47 48 C. Allow outdoor lights to remain on for 72 hours to check ballasts as well 49 as lamps. Replace any defective components. 50 ' 51 END OF SECTION 52 ROUND ROCK 1991 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS 1 1 1 WHEREAS, the City of Round Rock has duly advertised for bids for the West Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements, and WHEREAS, Psencik Construction Company has submitted the lowest and best bid, and WHEREAS, the City Council wishes to accept the bid of Psencik Construction Company, Now Therefore BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS, That the bid of Psencik Construction Company is hereby accepted as the lowest and best bid, and the Mayor is hereby authorized and directed to execute on behalf of the City a contract with Psencik Construction Company for the West Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements, a copy of said contract being attached hereto and incorporated herein for all purposes. RESOLVED this 23rd day of January, 1992. ATTEST: RS01232A LAND, City Secretary RESOLUTION NO. 11093 L/ /e./ MIKE ROBINSON, Mayor City of Round Rock, Texas CITY OF RCUNO ROCK 1991 WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS COMPILED BY NOR ENGINEERING, INC. BIDS RECEIVED JANUARY 14, 1992 PAGE 1 - •„ Psencik Construction Co. R.P. Constructors. Inc. SCS, INC. ' UNIT TOTAL UNIT - UNIT TOTAL BID /TEM — DESCRIPTION - QUANTITY UNITS PRICE . PRICE PRICE PRICE PRICE PRICE PROJECT 1 1 -- -- - Base Bid 4 ,- 1 LT 5340,000.00 8340,000.00 8395,000.00 8395,000.00 5440,991.00 5440,990.00 2 Trench Safety Protection 170 LF 85.00 S850.00 S3.00 8510.00 S58.00 $9,860.00 3 Mechanical Screen Alternate 1 LS $27,000.00 S27,000.00 826,000.00 826,000.00 124,080.00 S24,080.00 T0TAL BASE BID, PROJECT f q161:1, .."1( . ,-■ • -711 January 16, 1992 Dear Mr. Miller; - �. Duwain Whitis, Jr. P.E. lryn Engineering, Inc. I • t ' .� ,.. "it -Ni §, A Mr. Steven D. Miller, P.E. c/o Mr. Al Wille City of Round Rock > ,1 221 E. Main Street i Round Rock, Texas 78664 ' • 1 Refcrence: . 1991 West Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements i NINCIrEEN MIN TY 1wt); 75111C-412721 ersaryt ,r 1 We evaluated the bids for the West Wastewater Treatment Plant project. A copy of our bid tabulation is attached. Three bids were received with Psencik Construct on Co. leaving the West base and combined bids of $340,000.00 and $367,850.00, respective y. No math errors were found in any of the bids. A fourth contractor, Clark Purcell of H&S Utilities, called later in the day to ask who the apparent low bidder was and to apologize for not sdbmitting a bid due to a telephone malfunction. ,He said that his bid would have been apprdximately $420,000. Psencik Construction Co., Inc. has extensive experience with small and medium size wastewater treatment plants. They have successfully completed projects in the past for the city, including work at the West Wastewater Plant. They are currently ec nstructing another project designed by HDR Engineering, the Hamilton Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements valued at $1.16 million. Their work on that project has been quite satisfactory; although, there have been some weather - related difficultie=s with the project which Psencik is working to correct. ' A copy of their background igformatiorf which I requested after the bids were received is attached for your review. I 1 1 We recommend award of the construction contract to Psencik Construction Co., Inc. This recommendation is based on their past experience of working for the city, our current knowledge of their work in connection With the I Iamilton project, and their listed experience with wastewater treatment plants. The award should specifically authorize the work included in Bid Items 1 and 2 ($340,850), plus the work included in Iterr_ 3 ($27,000) if your budget allows for adding a Second mechanically cleaned bar screen. Sincerely, ; • Suite 400 3000 South IH 35 Austin. Texas 78704 -6536 Telephone 512 442-8501 I'Sl;l�r(IIi► CUNSTAIUCTIO1N CO INC., 1) 1) 110\ 3207 (817) 7734)464 TEMPLE, IF \AS 70805 January 20, 1992 h•Ir. Du)vain Whltis, P.E. 111JR Engineers 7000 S 11 35 Suite 400 Austin, Texas 78704 GENERAL Cr/ \T1t at.ltlitti Ire: Round Rock West IVastewater Treatment Plant Improvements i.)ear p1r. Whit's: As per your request the following is our cost breakdown for the above 1 e(erenced project: 1. Move - 1n & Bond 15,000.00 2. Fencing • 3,000.00 3. Parking Lot 28,000.00 4. Excavation 5,000.00 5. Concrete 24,0011.00 6. Misc. Steel 11,000.00 7. Arc Screen - 32,0(10.00 8. Plant Water System 20,000.00 9. Chlorination & Dechlortnatlon Equipment 57,01)0.00 10. Flowmetering 7,0011.00 11. Yard Piping 103,001100 12. Electrical 25,00000 13. Trench Safety _850.00 Base Bid 9310,850.00 Additive Alternate No. I Add One (1) Mechanical Bar Screen 27 000_00 Total Base Bld 5367,8 10.00 If you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact us. Respectfully Submitted, Don R. Schoch Ilil 21 '82 8:22 l P03 DATE: January 21, 1992 SUBJECT: City Council Meeting, January 23, 1992 11hM: 9A. Consider a resolution authorizing the Mayor to enter into an agreement for Wastewater Plant Improvements. STAFF RESOURCE PERSON: Jim Nuse STAFF RECOMMENDATION: Last month, a presentation was made regarding the improvements to the West Wastewater Treatment Plant. These improvements include: dechlorination, flow metering, plant water improvements, pavement, and mechanical bar screens. Three bids were received. Psencik Construction Inc. was the lowest and best bid at $367,850.00. Staff recommends approval of the agreement. Round Rock has contracted with Psencik several times in the past and found their work to be excellent. Enclosed please find a letter of recommendation by HDR, certified bid tab, and cost breakdown from Psencik.